f&TBJ F#TIHA1 
 SVMHtitt CVMi M5VBRBNTIA 
 
 D.DD. 
 
 C. SANDS. i:OX. 
 
 REG, SC. MED.BIRM ANAT ET CH1R 
 PR A ELECTOR 
 
.11 
 T 
 
THE LIBRARY 
 
 OF 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY 
 OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 PRESENTED BY 
 
 PROF. CHARLES A. KOFOID AND 
 MRS. PRUDENCE W. KOFOID 
 
SYNOPSIS 
 
 OP THE 
 
 BONES, LIGAMENTS, MUSCLES, 
 BLOOD-VESSELS, 
 
 AMD 
 
 NERVES 
 
 OF THE HUMAN BODY. 
 
 T 
 
 WILLIAM SANDS COX, 
 
 SURGEON TO THE DISPENSARY, AND LECTURER ON ANATOMY 
 
 AND SURGERY, AT THE SCHOOL OF MEDICINE, 
 
 IN BIRMINGHAM. 
 
 BIRMINGHAM: 
 J. C. BARLOW, BENNETT'S HILL; 
 
 AND LONGMAN, REES, ORME, BROWN & GREEN, LONDON. 
 
 1831. 
 
 \/ 
 

TO THE STUDENTS 
 
 OF THE 
 
 BIRMINGHAM SCHOOL OF MEDICINE. 
 
 GENTLEMEN, 
 
 In dedicating this little volume to you, I 
 offer it as a tribute of gratitude for the kindness and 
 partiality you have shewn towards me on all occasions as 
 your Teacher. Accept it, also, as a testimony of my 
 earnest zeal for the promotion of your studies, and more 
 particularly of your advancement in the difficult science 
 of Anatomy. 
 
 With most sincere wishes for your present 
 welfare, and future prosperity in the honourable practice 
 of your profession, beliene me ever to remain 
 
 Your obliged, and faithful friend, 
 
 WILLIAM SANDS Cox. 
 
 . 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 THE following pages having been hastily arranged 
 during my present course of Lectures, I fear many errors 
 will be found in the composition ; but as my sole object 
 has been to assist the student in retaining some of the 
 principal points connected with the subjects on which 
 they treat, I beg to claim every indulgence. I have 
 availed myself especially of the wqrks of Soemmering, 
 Mekel, Chaussier, Bichat, and the Lectures of Desault. 
 Convinced of the accuracy and importance of the division 
 and physiology of the nerves, discovered by Mr. Charles 
 Bell, I have followed his views, and endeavoured to 
 adopt a nomenclature in conformity with his system. 
 My best acknowledgements are due to him for the very 
 handsome and liberal manner in which he has allowed 
 me to avail myself of his plates ; and to my colleague 
 Dr. Eccles for many valuable suggestions, and for his 
 kindness in examining the sheets in their progress 
 through the press. 
 
 24, Templwow, 
 
 April, 22, 1831. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 OP the Bones ----- - * * 1 
 
 The Bones of the Skeleton 'J *. * . ' iv. * -2 
 
 The Os Frontis - - - , a ..**.. 4 
 
 Ossa Parietalia ... .-,*-. ; . *. - 5 
 
 Os Occipitis - - - - * - * * ft, 6 
 
 OssaTemporum - - - - - - 8 
 
 Os Sphenoideum - - - - *-. 10 
 
 Os Ethmoideum - - - - - -12 
 
 OssaNasi ...... 14 
 
 Ossa Lacrymalia - - - - - - 15 
 
 Ossa Maxillare superiora .... ib. 
 
 Ossa Turbinata inferiora - - - - - 17 
 
 Ossa Palatina - - # - / . .~ ib. 
 
 OssaMalarum - - ' >t:: ^ *. - 18 
 
 Vomer .... ^ . ; . 19 
 
 Os Maxillare inferius - H'*;* * *o--' - ib. 
 
 Base of the Skull - - - ^ - - *t 22 
 
 Of the Orbits - - - - - - 24 
 
 The Nostrils - - - . ^f. .;.>:. 25 
 
 Dentes ..... . *. . ib. 
 
 The Cavity of the Mouth - *'&$* - 26 
 
 Of the Cavity of the Fauces - - - - ib. 
 
 Of the Trunk - - - v %w. ib. 
 
 The Vertebrae of the Back - - - - 28 
 
 Characters of the Lumbar Vertebrae 29 
 
 Of the Bones of the Chest - - - - 31 
 
 Of the Sternum ----- ib. 
 
 Of the Ribs 33 
 
 Of the Upper Extremity - - - * 35 
 
 Of the Scapula - - - - - - 36 
 
 OftheHumerus .... -; MU< 38 
 
 Of the Fore-arm - - - - . . > - 40 
 
 Of the Ulna 41 
 
 Of the Bones of the Hand - - - - 43 
 
viii. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Of the Os Scaphoideum .... 43 
 
 Of the Os Lunare - - . , . ib. 
 
 Of the Os Cuneiforme ib. 
 
 Of the Os Pisiforme . . . . .44 
 
 f the Os Trapezium ib. 
 
 Of the Os Trapezoideum - - . . . ib. 
 
 Of the Os Magnum ----- ib. 
 
 Of the Os Unciforme -.. i. - - -45 
 
 Of the Metacarpus ..... ib. 
 
 Of the Fingers - - - - . - 46 
 
 Of the First, or Metacarpal Phalanges . . ib. 
 
 Of the Second, or Middle Phalanges - . . ib. 
 Of the Inferior Phaknges - - - .47 
 
 Of the Pelvis 48 
 
 Of the Ilium ..... 49 
 
 Of the Ischium - - - - . . .50 
 
 OftheOsPubis ib. 
 
 Of the Sacrum - - - - - .52 
 
 Of the Os Coxale, vel Ossa Coxala ,. - 54 
 
 Of the Pelvis in general - - - - . ib. 
 Of the Inferior Extremities - - -. .57 
 
 Of the Os Femoris - - - - . ib. 
 
 Of the Patella 60 
 
 Of the Tibia 61 
 
 Of the Fibula . . . . . Q% 
 
 Of the Bones of the Foot - - , . 64 
 
 SYNDESMOLOGY ----- 71 
 
 Of the Articulations - - - . - 74 
 
 Articulations of the Vertebral Column - . ib. 
 
 Articulation of the Lower Jaw - - - - 75 
 
 Articulation of the Clavicle to the Sternum . ib. 
 
 Articulation of the Clavicle with the Scapula - . ib. 
 
 Articulation of the Humerus with the Scapula - 76 
 
 Articulation of the Humerus with the Radius and Ulna ib. 
 
 Radio-ulnar Articulations .... 77 
 
 Articulation of the Carpus with the Metacarpus . - ib. 
 
 Articulation of the Bones of the Carpus - - ib. 
 Articulation of the Ribs with the Bones of the Dorsal 
 
 Vertebrae , . 73 
 
 Articulations of the Sternum - - - - 79 
 
 Articulations of the Pelvis - . - - ib. 
 
 Articulation of the Pubes - - - - - 80 
 
 Articulation of the Thigh Bone with the Bones of the Pelvis ib. 
 
 Articulation of the Knee - - - . ib. 
 
 Articulation of the Tibia with the Fibula - - - 81 
 Articulation of the Astragalus with the Tibia and Fibula 82 
 
 Articulation of the- Tarsus with the Metatarsus - - 83 
 
 MYOLOGY ...... 85 
 
 Occinito-frontalis - - - . . ib. 
 
 Attolens Aurem, or Superior Auris - - - ib. 
 
 Attrahens Aurem, or Anterior Auris -, ^ ;:,* '> - ib* 
 
ix. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Retrahens Aurem, or Posterior Aura 86 
 
 Muscles situated at the Base of the Orbit - - ib. 
 
 Muscles of the Nose 87 
 
 Muscles situated within the Orbit - - - 89 
 
 Muscles of the Lips - 91 
 Of the Muscles which surround the Temporo-maxillary 
 
 Articulation - ,, - - - - 94 
 
 Of the Muscles of the anterior part of the Neck - - 96 
 
 Of the Muscles of the Tongue - - - 102 
 
 Of the Muscles of the Pharynx - - 103 
 
 Muscles of the Soft Palate - ' f i; - - 105 
 
 Of the Muscles of the Larynx - - 107 
 
 Muscles situated deeply on the anterior part of the Neck 109 
 
 Of the Muscles on the side of the Neck - 1 10 
 Muscles situated at the posterior part of the Trunk 
 
 Muscles situated at the anterior part of the Chest - 121 
 Muscles situated on the lateral parts of the Chest, behind 
 
 the Sternum - - - - 123 
 
 Of the Muscles of the Superior Extremity - - 125 
 
 Muscles of the Arm - - - - 128 
 
 Muscles of the Fore Arm - - 130 
 Muscles on the Radial and Posterior Surface o the Fore- 
 arm ...... 134 
 
 Deep-seated Muscles of the posterior part of the Fore-arm 137 
 
 Of the Muscles of the Hand - - - - 139 
 
 Muscles of the Abdomen .... 143 
 
 Parts connected with the Abdominal Muscles - - 148 
 
 Lumbar Region - - - 150 
 
 Muscles situated on the lateral parts of the Trunk - ib. 
 
 Muscles of the Hip - 152 
 Muscles situated on the external and anterior part of the 
 
 Thigh ..... 155 
 
 Muscles situated on the inner and posterior part of the 
 
 Thigh 159 
 
 Muscles at the back part of the Thigh . - 161 
 
 Muscles of the fore part of the Leg - - 162 
 
 Muscles of the back part of the Leg - 165 
 
 Deep layer of Muscles at the posterior part of the Leg 167 
 
 Muscles of the Foot 169 
 
 Muscles on the Plantar Surface of the Foot - ib. 
 
 Muscles of the Perinseum . , _ - - 174 
 
 Diaphragm - .^ . 177 
 
 Physiological arrangement of the Muscles - - 179 
 
 Muscles of the Cranium .... ib. 
 
 Muscles of the Eye-brows - - - ib. 
 
 Muscles of the Eye-lids - - - ib. 
 
 Muscles of the Ball of the Eye - - - ib. 
 
 Muscles of the Ear - - . . ... - 180 
 
 Muscles of the Nose - - ,,-,*.-. - - ib. 
 
 Muscles of the Cheeks and Lips , - - 181 
 
 Muscles of the Lower Jaw > - - ib> 
 
PAGE 
 
 Muscles of the Os Hyoides * V." : ' ,%^ ! '; v ' 182 
 
 Muscles of the Tongue F*-' ^ ^'V* 1 . " 'V '' ib. 
 
 Muscles of the Pharynx - - ,'v^"' - ib. 
 Muscles of the Larynx - v- . .183 
 
 Muscles of the Rima Glottidis - '. . ib. 
 
 Muscles of the Head 'V" 1 . . " . \ - 184 
 
 Muscles of the Neck ... .' ib. 
 
 Muscles of the Back and Loins - - s i v ib. 
 
 Muscles of the Thorax - .' . . 185 
 
 Muscles of the Abdomen - - - . ib. 
 
 Muscles of the Thigh - - . . 186 
 
 Muscles of the Leg - - v%^ <*.- . j^. 
 
 Muscles of the Foot - '. \N -%;'; 187 
 
 Muscles of the Toes - - ~-%.. ' y >- ' fa 
 
 Muscles of the Superior Extremity rt ^- ; k "' v * ib. 
 
 Muscles of the Arm - - . . - 188 
 
 Muscles of the Fore-arm .... ib. 
 
 Muscles of the Wrist-joint - 189 
 
 Muscles that move the four Fingers " ' - ib. 
 
 Muscles that move the Fore-finger - . - ib. 
 
 Muscles that move the Little Finger - - ib. 
 
 Muscles that move the Thumb - - 190 
 
 ANGIOLOGY - - - - . 191 
 
 Of the Arterial System - - - - ib. 
 
 Aorta ...... 192 
 
 Arteria Innominata - - 1 - - 193 
 
 Arteriae Carotides Communes - - ib. 
 
 Arteria Carotis externa - - - 194 
 
 Arteria Carotis interna - - - - 199 
 
 Arteria Subclavia ..... 202 
 
 Arteria Axillaris ..... 207 
 
 Arteria Brachialis ..... 209 
 
 Arteria Radialis - - - - 210 
 
 Arteria Ulnaris ..... 212 
 
 Aorta Thoracica - - - - - 214 
 
 Aorta Abdftminalis - - - - -216 
 
 Arteriae Iliacae communes * '$ - - - 221 
 
 Arteria Iliaca interna - - - - - 222 
 
 Arteria Iliaca externa .... 226 
 
 Arteria Femoralis ..... 227 
 
 Arteria Poplitea ..... 231 
 
 Arteria Tibialis antica - - - 232 
 
 Arteria Tibialis postica - - . 234 
 
 Of the Pulmonary Artery - - "i . 235 
 
 Pulmonary Veins - - - 236 
 
 Of the Venous System - - . - ib. 
 
 Of the Veins in particular ... 238 
 
 Veins of the Brain .... * - ; ib. 
 
 Of the Veins which concur to form the Facial Veins 239 
 
 Veins which concur in forming the external jugular Vein ib. 
 
 Veins of the Upper Extremities - - '' 240 
 
PAGE 
 
 The Vena Azygos .... 241 
 
 Veins of the Lower Extremities - . - ib. 
 
 External Iliac Vein .... 242 
 
 Common Iliac Veins ..... 243 
 
 Vena Cava Inferior ... ib. 
 
 Vena Portae and its Branches - - - - ib. 
 
 Of the Circulation of the Blood ... ib. 
 
 NEUROLOGY ...... 247 
 
 The Nerves of the Human Body - - 251 
 Nervi Olfectorii *< . . -252 
 
 Nervi Optici ... * 253 
 
 Nervi motores Oculorum - * . 254 
 
 Nervi respiratorii oculorum - . . 255 
 
 Nervi Traaciales - ... . 256 
 
 Nervus Opthalmicus * ' . ib. 
 
 Lenticular Ganglion ..... 258 
 
 Nervus Maxillans superior - ib. 
 
 Nervus Maxillaris ..... 259 
 
 Nervi Oculorum Abducentes ... 260 
 
 Nervi Respiratorii Faciei .... 261 
 
 Nervi Auditorii ..... 262 
 
 Nervi Respiratorii Glosso-pharyngei ... 263 
 
 Nervi Respiratorii Pneumo-gastric ' , - 264 
 
 Nervi Respiratorii Trachelo-dorsales . 266 
 
 Nervi Motores Linguae .... ib. 
 
 Nervi Respiratorii Into-thoracici - '^ 267 
 
 Nervi Exto-thoracici Respiratorii - ' "- 268 
 
 Of the Spinal Nerves - . . . ib. 
 
 Of the Cervical Nerves - . . . 270 
 
 Cervical Plexus - - . . i. 273 
 
 Axillary Plexus and Branches - - 274 
 
 Of the Dorsal Nerves .... 280 
 
 Of the Lumbar Nerves .... 282 
 
 Plexus Lumbo Abdominalis * * 285 
 
 Of the Sacral Nerves .... 286 
 
 Plexus Sacralis ..... 287 
 
 Nervus Ischiadiacus - 289 
 
 Nervi Vitae Organicae - - . . 292 
 
 Opthalmic Ganglion * - , . . 294 
 
 Mekel's Ganglion .', - . ..^ - 295 
 
 Cervical Ganglia - - . . 297 
 
 Cardiac Nerves ' . . . . 299 
 
 Thoracic Ganglia - . . . 301 
 
 Lumbar Ganglia * . - . * 304 
 
 Sacral Ganglia * - -.; . ib. 
 
OP THE BONES. 
 
 ANATOMY is the science which teaches the fabric of 
 the human body by an artificial dissection of its parts. 
 Anatomy is divided into seven sections : 
 
 Osteo'ogy A description of the bones 
 
 Syndesmofagy of the ligaments 
 
 Myo/ogy of the muscles 
 
 Sp/anchnology of the viscera 
 
 Adenology of the glands 
 
 Angiology of the structure and course 
 
 of the blood-vessels 
 Neurology of the nerves. 
 
 The human body consists of solids and fluids. The 
 solids are of different consistence, and therefore have 
 been arranged under two heads, the hard and the soft. 
 The first class comprehends the bones and the cartilages ; 
 and the second the muscles, viscera, nerves, and all 
 other parts. The fluids form by far the largest pro- 
 portion, and are divided into three classes: 1. the hu- 
 mors of absorption, or those destined to form the blood ; 
 2, the blood itself; 3, the humors secreted. 
 
 The exact knowledge of the bones is the basis of the 
 science; because, without this we cannot accurately 
 understand the various connexions, situations, disposi- 
 tions, and uses of the other component parts. The 
 bones taken collectively bear the name of skeleton. 
 
2 
 THE BONES OF THE SKELETON. 
 
 The bones of the skeleton have been divided into those 
 of the trunk, those of the head, and those of the ex- 
 tremities, and are two hundred and sixty-six in number. 
 The bones of the head are sixty-eight in number, and 
 have been arranged into those proper to the cranium, 
 those of the face, and those common both to the cranium 
 and face. 
 
 The Bones of the Cranium are six in number: 
 
 I vel II Os Fronds II Ossa Temporum 
 
 II Ossa Parietalia I Os Occipitis 
 
 The Bones of the internal Ear are eight in number: 
 
 II MaUei II Stapedes 
 
 II Incudes II Ossa Orbicularia 
 
 The Bones common to the Cranium and Face are 
 
 I Os Ethmbideum I Os Sphenbideum 
 
 The Bones of the Face are fourteen in number: 
 
 II Ossa Nasi II Ossa Malarum 
 
 II Ossa Lacrymalia II OssaTurbinatainferiora 
 
 II OssaMaxillariasuperiora I Maxilla inferior 
 II Ossa Palatina I Vomer 
 
 XXXII Dentes 
 
 The Bones of the Tongue are five : 
 V Ossa Lingualia 
 
 The trunk consists of the spine, thorax and pelvis, 
 and is formed by fifty-eight bones. 
 
 The Bones of the Spine and Thorax are Jifty-one in 
 number: 
 
 VII Vertebrae Colli V Vertebrae Lumborum 
 
 XII Vertebrae Dorsi XXIV Costae 
 
 III Ossa Sterni 
 
 The Bones of the Pelvis are seven in number: 
 
 II Ossa Innominata I Sacrum 
 
 IV Ossa Coxalia 
 
The bones of the upper extremities have been divided 
 into those of the shoulders, upper arms, fore arms, and 
 hands, and are seventy-two in number. 
 
 The Shoulders are composed of four Bones : 
 II Claviculae II Scapulae 
 
 The Bones of the upper Arms are two in number: 
 
 II Humeri 
 
 The fore Arms are composed of four Bones: 
 II Radii II Ulnae 
 
 The bones of the hands are sixty-four in number, and 
 include the carpi, metacarpi, and phalanges. 
 
 The Carpi contain sixteen Bones: 
 
 II Ossa Navicularia II Ossa Trapezia 
 
 II Ossa Lunata II Ossa Trapezoidea 
 
 II Ossa Cuneiformia II Ossa Magna 
 
 II Ossa Pisiformia II Ossa Unciformia 
 
 The Bones of the Metacarpi are ten in number: 
 
 X Ossa Metacarpi. 
 The Fingers comprise thirty-six Bones : 
 
 X Phalanges anteriores X Phalanges posteriores 
 VIII Phalanges mediae VIII Ossa sessamb'idea 
 
 The bones of the inferior extremites have been sub- 
 divided into three classes, into the bones of the Thighs > 
 Legs, and Feet, and are sixty-eight in number. 
 
 The Thighs are composed of two Bones : 
 
 II Ossa Femorum. 
 
 The Bones of the Legs are six in number :. 
 II Fibulaa II Tibiae II Patell* 
 
 The bones of the Feet have been subdivided into 
 those of the Tarsi, Metatarsi, and Phalanges. 
 
Fourteen Bones form the Tarsi : 
 
 II Astragali II Ossa cuneiformia externa 
 
 II Ossa Calcis II Ossa cuneiformia media 
 
 11 Ossa Navicularia II Ossa cuneiformia interna 
 
 II Ossa cuboidea 
 
 The Bones of the Metatarsi are ten in number: 
 X Ossa Metatarsi 
 
 The Toes are formed by thirty-six Bones : 
 
 X Phalanges posteriores X Phalanges priores 
 VIII Phalanges mediae VIII Ossa sesamoidea 
 
 THE OS FRONTIS. 
 
 The Os Frontis is divided into three portions ; the 
 frontal,, (pars frontalis), the orbital,, (pars orbitalis), and 
 nasal portion,, (parsnasalis) ; into external and internal 
 surface, (superficies externa et interna). 
 
 The external surface is smooth and convex. The 
 frontal portion presents, in the middle line on either 
 side,, the frontal eminence, (tuber frontale) , and beneath, 
 an arched depression, (tuber super ciliare), laterally a 
 portion of the temporal fossa, (fossa temporalis). The 
 orbital portion offers the superciliary margin, (margo 
 super ciliaris), the process for the tendon of the trochle- 
 aris muscle, (spina trochfearis), the orbital process, 
 (processus orbitalis), the depression for lacrymal gland, 
 (fossa lacrymatis), the external and internal angular 
 processes, (processus angularis inter nus et externus), 
 and between the orbitar processes, the ethmoidal fissure, 
 (incisura ethmoidalis ) . The nasal portion offers, in the 
 centre, the nasal spine (spina nasalis), and above is 
 an eminence (glabella), indicating the situation of 
 the frontal sinuses ( sinus frontales ). The internal sur- 
 face is concave, and presents in the middle line the spine 
 ( spina frontalis ), and a groove corresponding with the 
 longitudinal sinus (sulcus longitudinalis ) , and on either 
 side, depressions (fossce) for the convolutions of the an- 
 terior lobes of the cerebrum. 
 
The Foramina observable are three on each side on 
 the external surface. 
 
 Foramen supra orbitale For the transmission of the 
 
 supra-orbital nerve and 
 artery. 
 
 * Foramen orbitale anterius For the passage of the nasal 
 
 twig of the first branch of 
 the fifth pair and the an- 
 terior ethmoidal artery. 
 
 * Foramen orbitale posterius For the transmission of the 
 
 posterior ethmoidal artery 
 and vein. 
 
 The internal foramen proper is the foramen coecum ; 
 in this a small process of the dura mater is lodged, and 
 also a small vein passing into the superior longitudinal 
 sinus. 
 
 Foramen coecum. 
 
 Connexions. It articulates with twelve bones : above 
 with the parietal bones, laterally with the sphenoid, be- 
 low with the nasal, lacrymal, superior maxillary and 
 malar bones. 
 
 Muscles arising from the O& Frontis. 
 
 Temporales Orbiculares palpebrarum 
 
 Corrugatores superciliorum 
 
 Muscles inserted into the Os 
 Occipito-frontalis. 
 
 OSSA PARIETALIA. 
 
 We may distinguish on each Os Parietale the follow-, 
 ing parts: an external and internal surface (superficies 
 externa et internd) four borders (quatuor margines) and 
 four angles (quatuor anguli.) 
 
 The external surface is convex, and presents in the 
 
 * These Foramina are sometimes common to the frontal and ethmoid bones. 
 
6 
 
 centre the parietal prominence (ttiber parietale), and be- 
 neath an arched surface with radiated lines converging 
 towards the inferior edge (planum semicircular e.) The 
 four irargins are, anteriorly,, the frontal (mar go fronta- 
 lis), posteriorly, the occipital (margo occipitalis), superi- 
 orly, the sagittal (margo sagittate), and inferiorly, the 
 squamous (margo squamosus). The angles formed by 
 the four borders may be thus enumerated,, superiorly and 
 anteriorly, the frontal angle (angulus frontalis,) superi- 
 orly and posteriorly the occipital (angulus occipitalis) in- 
 feriorly and anteriorly the sphenoidal (angulus sphenoi- 
 daiis) and inferiorly and posteriorly the mastoid (angu- 
 lus mastoideus.) 
 
 The sphenoidal angle presents internally numerous 
 deep furrows for the middle meningeal artery (arteria 
 meningea media), the mastoid angle internally, the de- 
 pression for the lateral sinus (su/cus sinus lateralis), the 
 occipital angle, externally the foramen parietale for the 
 passage of a vein to the superior longitudinal sinus, also 
 sometimes a small artery. 
 
 The internal surface is concave, and marked by the 
 convolutions of the brain, and beneath the sagittal mar- 
 gin internally is observed the groove for the longitudinal 
 sinus (sulcus sinus longitudinalis). Connexions, the 
 parietal bones are connected to six bones, anteriorly with 
 the frontal, anteriorly and inferiorly, with the sphenoid, 
 belon, with the temporal, above, with each other, and 
 posteriorly, with the occipital bones. 
 
 Muscles arising from the Ossa Parietalia. 
 Temporales. 
 
 OS OCCIPITIS. 
 
 The Os Occipitis may be divided into three portions, 
 the occipital (pars occipitalis}, the condyloid (paries 
 condyloidece}, and the basilar (pars basilaris) The 
 occipital portion is of triangular shape, externally it 
 presents the two transverse ridges (spina transversa, su- 
 perior et inferior), the perpendicular spine and tube- 
 
rosity (tuber et spina occipitalis): the internal surface is 
 divided into four compartments (fossce) by the crucial 
 ridges (spince cruciatce) in the two superior fossae are 
 lodged the posterior lobes of the cerebrum, in the two 
 inferior, the posterior portions of the cerebellum, these 
 ridges form grooves for the lateral and superior longitu- 
 dinal sinuses (sulci laterales et sulcus longitudinalis.) 
 
 The lateral or condyloid portions are symmetrical, in- 
 feriorly, each portion offers the condyloid process (pro- 
 cessus condyloideus ) , the anterior and posterior condy- 
 loid foramen (foramen condyl lideum anterius et posie- 
 rius), laterally, the jugular cavity (foramen jugulare ), 
 beyond this is a square eminence covered with cartilage, 
 which is articulated to the temporal bone, and is named 
 the jugular process (processusjugularis), and internally 
 it assists in forming the foramen magnum. 
 
 The basilar portion is of wedge like shape, anteriorly, 
 it joins the sphenoid, posteriorly, it assists in forming the 
 foramen magnum, laterally, it offers irregular edges, 
 and superiorly, it presents a concave surface (fossa me- 
 duke oblongatae). 
 
 The foramina consist of two pairs, a single one pro- 
 per, and one pair common to it and the temporal bone. 
 
 The pairs are, 
 
 Foramina condylo- For the transmission of the ninth 
 
 idea ant^riora pair of nerves. 
 
 Foramina condylo- For the passage of small veins and 
 
 idea posterior a arteries 
 
 The single one proper, 
 
 Foramen magnum It gives passage to the medulla spi- 
 nalis, with its membranes and 
 vessels, the vertebral arteries, and 
 accessory nerves. 
 
 The common Foramina are. 
 
 Foramina lacera For the internal jugular veins, the 
 basis cranii pneumo-gastric and glosso-pha- 
 
 ryngeal nerves. 
 
 Connexions. It is connected to six bones, above, with 
 
8 
 
 the parietal, anteriorly, with the sphenoid, laterally, 
 with the temporal bones, inferiority, with the atlas. 
 
 Muscles arising from the Os Occipitis. 
 
 Occipito-frontalis Constrictor pharyngis su- 
 
 Trapezii perior 
 
 Mtiscles inserted into the Os Occipitis* 
 
 Sterno-cleido-mastoidei Transversales capitis 
 
 Splenii capitis Recti capitis antici majores 
 
 Complexi Recti capitis antici minores 
 
 Recti capitis postici majo- Obliqui capitis superiores 
 
 res Constrictor pharyngis me- 
 Recti capitis postici mino- dius 
 
 res 
 
 OSSA TEMPORUM. 
 
 Each Temporal Bone may be divided into petrous 
 squamous, andmastoid portion, (pars petrosa, squamosa, 
 et mastb'idea.) 
 
 Each Bone presents Jive Processes: 
 
 Processus auditivus Surrounding the meatus auditivus 
 
 externus 
 
 Processus mastoi- Gives attachment to the sterno-cle- 
 deus ido mastoideus, splenius and trach- 
 
 elo mastoideus 
 
 Processus styloide- Gives attachment to the stylo-hyoi- 
 
 us deus, pharyngeus, and glossus 
 
 muscles and stylo-hybid ligament 
 
 Processus zygoma- Gives attachment to the temporal 
 
 ticus fascia and masseter 
 
 Processus vagina- Forms an articulating surface for 
 Us the inferior maxilla 
 
 Five Fossae are observable. 
 
 Fossa digastrica Receives the digastric muscle 
 Fossa parotidea Receives a portion of the parotid 
 gland 
 
Fossa jugularis Receives the commencement of the 
 
 internal jugular vein 
 
 Fossa temporalis Receives the temporal muscle 
 Fossa condyloidea Receives the condyloid process of 
 the lower maxilla. 
 
 The proper Foramina consist of five pairs placed ex- 
 ternally, five pairs internally. 
 
 The common Foramina consist of three pairs. 
 
 The proper external Foramina are, 
 
 Foramina auditiva The openings from the external ears 
 externa into the cavity of the tympanum 
 
 Foramina stylo Transmit the portio dura of the 
 mastoidea seventh pair of nerves, and small 
 
 branch of occipital artery. 
 
 Fissures glasseri Transmit the chordae tympani 
 Foramina carotica Transmit the carotid arteries and 
 externa inferiora branches of communication be- 
 tween the great sympathetic 
 nerves and the fifth and sixth 
 pairs of cerebral nerves. 
 Foramina eustachii Transmit the eustachian tubes 
 
 The proper internal foramina are 
 
 Foramina audito- Transmit the portio mollis and portio 
 
 ria interna dura of the seventh pair of nerves 
 
 and small artery 
 Foramina innomi- Transmit the nervi innominati or 
 
 nata, or reflected branch from second di- 
 
 Hiatus Fallopii vision of the fifth. 
 
 Aquceductus cock- Terminations of canals communicat- 
 
 learum ing with the internal ear. 
 
 Aquceductus vesti- 
 
 bulorum 
 Foramina carotica Terminations of the carotid canals 
 
 anterior a supe- 
 
 riora 
 
 The common Foramina are 
 
 Foramina lacera Transmit the vidian nerves and small 
 bams craniiante- arteries to the dura mater. 
 riora 
 
10 
 
 Foramina lacera Transmit the internal jugular veins., 
 basis cranii pos- pneumo gastric, glosso-pharyngeal 
 teriora and accessory nerves. 
 
 Foramina mastoi- Small veins to lateral sinuses. 
 dea 
 
 Connexions. The .Temporal Bones are connected, 
 above to the parietal bones, anteriorly to the sphenoid 
 and malar, posteriorly to the occipital bones and to the 
 inferior maxilla. 
 
 Muscles arising from the Ossa Temporum. 
 
 Occipito-frontalis Levatores palati 
 
 Masseteres Tensores tympani 
 
 Temporales Levatores tympani 
 
 Digastrici Stapedei 
 
 Stylo-hydidei Retrahentes aures 
 
 Stylo-pharyngei Anteriores aurium 
 Stylo-glossi 
 
 Muscles inserted into the Ossa Temporum .- 
 
 Sterno cleido-mastb'idei Trachelo-mastoidei 
 Splenii capitis 
 
 OS SPHENOIDEUM. 
 
 The Sphenoid Bone is composed of the body (corpus}, 
 and processes (apophyses). 
 
 The body presents six surfaces, and is occupied by 
 the sphenoidal sinuses. 
 
 The superior sur. Forms the Turkish saddle (sella 
 face Turcica), bounded by the ante- 
 
 rior and posterior clinoid processes 
 and the olivary process (processus 
 clinoidei anteriores et posteriores, 
 processus olivaris). 
 
 The inferior sur. Offers the azygos process and tri- 
 'foet angular bones on the sides ( ros- 
 
 trum sphenoidale vel processus 
 azygos et ossa triangularia). 
 
11 
 
 The anterior sur- Joins the ethmoid bone, 
 
 face 
 The posterior sur- Joins the sphenoid bone 
 
 face 
 
 The lateral borders Presents sulci for the internal caro- 
 tid arteries 
 
 The apophyses are divided into the larger and smaller 
 wings (alee major es et minores), and pterygoid processes 
 (processus pterygoidei). 
 
 The alee majores Processus temporales, orbitales, ma- 
 
 are formed by ten lares, spinosi et hamati. 
 
 processes. 
 The aloe minor -es are Processus clinb'idei anteriores and 
 
 composed of processus spinosi. 
 
 The pterygoid pro- The Laminae pterygoideae internae 
 
 cesses are proper and externae and the unci ptery- 
 
 to the external goidei. 
 
 surface, and are 
 
 composed of 
 
 Six pairs of Foramina are proper to the Bone. 
 
 Foramina optica Give passage to the optic nerves and 
 opthalmic arteries. 
 
 Fissurce sphenoi- Give passage to the third, fourth, 
 dales first division of the fifth, and 
 
 sixth pair of nerves and opthal- 
 mic veins. 
 
 Foramina rotunda Give passage to the second division 
 of the fifth pair of nerves. 
 
 Foramina ovalia Give passage to the third division of 
 the fifth pair of nerves. 
 
 Foramina spinosa Give passage to the middle menin- 
 geal arteries. 
 
 Foramina ptery- Give passage to the vidian nerves. 
 goidea 
 
 Four pairs are common to it and other Bones. 
 
 Between sphenoid and temporal Bones. 
 
 Foramina lacera basis era- For the passage of the vi. 
 nii anteriora dian nerves. 
 
Between the sphenoid, maxillary, and palate Bones. 
 
 Foramina pterygo-palatina Transmit the palato-maxiU 
 
 lary nerves and branches 
 of internal maxillary ar- 
 teries. 
 
 Between the sphenoid and super maxillary Bones. 
 Foramina lacera orbitalia in- Transmit the infra orbitar 
 feriora nerves and infra orbitar 
 
 vessels. 
 
 Between the sphenoid and palate Bones. 
 Foramina spheno-palatina Transmit the lateral nasal 
 
 branches of the second 
 division of the fifth. 
 
 Connexion. The sphenoid is connected to thirteen 
 bones, wjth the palate bones,, frontal, parietal,, malar, 
 superior maxillary, temporal and occipital bones, also 
 with the vomer. 
 
 Muscles arising from the Os Sphenoideum. 
 
 Levatores palpebrarum Pterygoidei interni 
 
 Depressores oculorum Pterygoidei externi 
 
 Adductores Buccinatores 
 
 Abductores Constrictor pharnygis supe- 
 Obliqui superiores rior 
 
 Levatores Tensores palati 
 
 Temporales Externi mallei 
 
 Tensores tympani 
 
 OS ETHMOIDEUM. 
 
 The ethmoid bone presents, superiorly, the cribriform 
 plate (lamina cribrosa), with the cocks crest (crista 
 galli), inferiorly, the nasal lamella (lamella nasalis), 
 laterally, the ethmoidal cells (cellulcc ethmoidales anteri- 
 ores and posteriores ) , the superior spongy bone and the 
 orbital bones (ossa turbinata superiora et ossa plana) 
 anteriorly, it joins with the fiontal, posteriorly, with the 
 
13 
 
 sphenoid. The foramina are, foramina cribrosa for the 
 transmission of the olfactory nerves, and a nasal branch 
 from the fifth pair of nerves. 
 
 Connexions. The ethmoid is connected with the 
 frontal, sphenoid superior maxillary and lacrymal bones, 
 with the vomer, the palate, and nasal bones. 
 
 No muscles attached. 
 
 The bones of the cranium are connected together by- 
 peculiar joinings, termed sutures. 
 
 The principal sutures may be thus enumerated: 
 
 Sutura coronalis Sutura squamosa 
 
 Sutura sagittalis Sutura ethmoidalis 
 
 Sutura lambdoidea Sutura sphenoidalis 
 
 By some Anatomists are described the 
 
 Additamentum suturae squamosae. 
 Additamentum suturae lambdoidalis. 
 
 The coronal suture connects the frontal with the pa- 
 rietal bones : it commences about an inch behind the 
 orbit, and passes upwards and backwards to the summit 
 of the head, then descends and terminates at the same 
 point on the opposite side. 
 
 The sagittal connects the two parietal bones together, 
 extending from the centre of the coronal suture before, 
 to the lambdoidal behind. 
 
 The lambdoidal connects the occipital bone with the 
 parietal bones; it passes downwards, on either side, 
 from the termination of the sagittal suture ; its course 
 is frequently rendered irregular by numerous detached 
 portions of bone (ossa triangularia, or ossa Wormiana). 
 This suture may be traced forwards at the base of the 
 skull, constituting the addamentum suturae lambdoidalis. 
 
 The squamous sutures commence at the root of the 
 mastoid process, arch forwards, over-laping the parietal 
 bones; they then descend beneath the zygoma, and 
 terminate at the base of the cranium. They connect 
 the temporal with the parietal bones. A continuation 
 of this suture joins the sphenoid with the temporal 
 (additamentum sutures squamosce). 
 
14 
 
 The ethmoidal and sphenoidal sutures surround the 
 bones of these names, and in some places form part of 
 other sutures. 
 
 THE BONES OF THE FACE, 
 
 The bones of the face have been divided into those of 
 the upper and lower maxillae or jaws. The bones of 
 the face are considerably larger in the adult in propor- 
 tion to those of the cranium, than in the infant, which 
 are short, owing to the want of teeth and maxillary 
 sinuses. 
 
 The Bones of the Face are fourteen in number: 
 
 II. Ossa nasi II. Ossa palatina 
 
 II. Ossa lacrymalia II. Ossa malarum 
 
 II. Ossa maxillaria superi- I. Vomer 
 
 ora I. Inferior maxilla. 
 
 II. Ossa tarbinata inferiora 
 
 OSSA NASI. 
 
 The nasal bones present an external surface, an inter- 
 nal surface, and four borders (superficies externa et in- 
 terna, quartuor margines}. The external surface is 
 smooth and convex from side to side, and assists in form- 
 ing the dorsum of the nose, the internal surface con- 
 cave, and marked by a groove for the passage of a 
 branch of the nasal nerve. 
 
 The superior border Is serrated, and joins the os frontis. 
 The inferior border Is expanded, and gives attachment 
 
 to the cartilages of the nose. 
 The internalborder Unites the bone to its fellow. 
 Theexternalborder Is grooved, and receives the nasal 
 
 process of superior maxillary 
 
 bone. 
 Internally at their union the bones form a sharp spine. 
 
 Muscles attached to the Ossa Nasi. 
 Compressores narium Pyramidales nasi 
 
15 
 OSSA LACRYMALIA. 
 
 The lacrymal bones present an orbital and nasal sur- 
 face, four borders, (superficies orbitalia, superficies na- 
 salis, et quatuor margines.) 
 
 The orbital surf ace Is divided into two portions, a pos- 
 terior, plane, which assists in 
 forming the orbit ; and an ante- 
 rior, hoUowed, for receiving the 
 lacrymal sac. 
 
 The nasal surface Is concave, and assists in forming 
 the ethmoidal cells and middle 
 meatus narium. 
 
 Superior margin Joins the os frontis. 
 
 Inferior margin Joins the orbital process of the su- 
 perior maxillary bone. 
 
 External margin Joins the nasal process of the same 
 bone 
 
 Internal margin Joins the ethmoid 
 
 No Muscles attached. 
 
 OSSA MAXILLARIA SUPERIORA. 
 
 Each maxillary bone is divided into the body and pro- 
 cesses. The body forms the central portion of the bone, 
 and is hollowed out, constituting the antrum Highmo- 
 rianum. The processes are processus nasales, zygoma, 
 tici, orbitales, alveolares, et palatini. 
 
 Nasal process, on Passes upwards from the inner bor- 
 either side der of the body, reaches as far as 
 
 the os frontis, and forms the late- 
 ral parts of the nose. The inter- 
 nal surface presents a sharp ridge 
 to support the inferior spongy 
 bone. 
 
 Zugotnatic process Joins the malar bone, and is placed 
 on the external border. 
 
16 
 
 Orbital process. Is placed superiorly of a triangular 
 shape, and forms the floor of the 
 orbit. 
 
 Alveolar process Constitutes the inferior margin of 
 the body, and offers eight alveoli, 
 in which the teeth are implanted. 
 The posterior part, where there 
 are no teeth, is called the max- 
 illary tuberosity. 
 
 Palatine process Projects inwards, concave both above 
 and below to enlarge the cavities 
 of the nose and mouth ; united 
 with its fellow internally, form- 
 ing above, at the point of junc- 
 tion, a sharp continued spine. 
 
 The proper Foramina are. 
 
 Foramina infra or- Give passage to the infra orbital 
 
 bitalia nerves and vessels. 
 
 Foramina inciswa Give passage to the naso palatine 
 nerves and arteries. 
 
 The common Foramina, 
 
 Fissures potato Admit the infra orbitar nerves and 
 maxillares arteries to pass to the infra orbi- 
 
 tal canals. 
 Ductus incisivi Canals for naso palatine nerves and 
 
 arteries. 
 
 Connexions. The superior maxillary bones are con- 
 nected to the malar, nasal, frontal, lacrymal, ethmoid, 
 palate and inferior spongy bones, also to the vomer. 
 
 Muscles attached. 
 
 Orbiculares palpebrarum Levatores labii superioris 
 Masseteres alceque nasi 
 
 Buccinatores Depressores 
 
 Compressores narium Obliqui oculorum inferiores 
 
 Levatores anguli oris 
 
^ 17 
 
 OSSA TURBINATA INFERIORA. 
 
 The inferior spongy bones ' present each an anterior 
 process (processus lacrymalis), which passes upwards to 
 the lacrymal plate of the os-lacrymale, a posterior process 
 (processus maxillaris), attached to the lower opening 
 of the maxillary antrum, and between the two the eth- 
 moidal processes are placed (processus ethmoidales). 
 
 Comiexions. The spongy bones are connected to the 
 nasal processes of the superior maxillary and palate 
 bones. 
 
 No muscles attached. 
 
 OSSA PALATINA. 
 
 The palate bones are of irregular shape, and may be 
 divided into palatine, nasal, and orbital portions (pars 
 pa latino, nasalis, et orbitalis). 
 
 The palatine portion is quadrangular in shape, and 
 presents two surfaces and four borders. 
 
 Superior surface Is concave, to enlarge the cavity of 
 
 the nares. 
 Inferior surface Is also concave, to form the posterior 
 
 part of the roof of the mouth. 
 Anterior border Is serrated, and joins the superior 
 
 maxillary bone. 
 Posterior border Is lunated, and looks towards the 
 
 back of the fauces, and presents 
 
 externally the processus pterygb'Uei 
 Internal border Is indented for union with each other, 
 
 their junction forming superiorly 
 
 the spina nasalis. 
 External border Joins the nasal portion. 
 
 The nasal portion passes perpendicularly upwards, is 
 concave internally, and presents a transverse ridge (pro, 
 cessus nasa 'is) ; to the anterior upper edge is attached, by 
 a narrow neck, a triangular process (pars orbitalis.) 
 
 This bone possesses no proper foramina. 
 c3 
 
18 
 
 Connexions. It is connected to its fellow, with the 
 superior maxillary, ethmoid, sphenoid, vomer, and infe, 
 rior spongy bones. 
 
 Muscles attached. 
 
 Azygos uvulae Pterygoidei externi 
 
 Tensores palati Constrictor pharyngis supe- 
 Buccinatores rior. 
 
 Pterygoidei interni 
 
 OSSA MALARUM. 
 
 Each malar bone is of a quadrilateral shape, and may 
 be divided into the facial, temporal, and orbital portions 
 (pars temporalis facialis et orbit a Us"). 
 
 The facial portion Is convex, pierced by small foramina, 
 and is placed anteriorly, the ante- 
 rior angle joins the superior max- 
 illary bone; the posterior forms 
 the processus zygomaticus 
 
 The temporal por- Is concave and smooth above, and 
 tion enters into the formation of the 
 
 temporal fossa. 
 
 The orbital portion Is lunated, and forms the anterior, 
 external, and lower part of the 
 orbit. 
 
 They present one pair of Foramina. 
 Foramina zygoma- For the passage of small branches 
 tica from the second division of the 
 
 fifth pair of nerves. 
 
 Connexions They are connected to the frontal, 
 sphenoid, superior maxillary and temporal bones. 
 
 Muscles attached. 
 
 Levatores labii superiores Masseteres 
 Zygomatici majores Orbiculares palpebrarum 
 
 Zygomatici minores 
 
19 
 VOMER. 
 
 The Vomer is flat and irregularly quadrilateral: it 
 presents two surfaces and four borders (quatuor margi- 
 nes.) 
 
 Superior border Receives the azygos process of the 
 sphenoid bone. 
 
 Inferior border Joins the spines of the palatine pro- 
 cesses of the superior maxillary 
 and palate bones. 
 
 Anterior border Is grooved and united to the nasal 
 lamella of the ethmoid bone. 
 
 Posterior border Is lunated and turned towards the 
 pharynx. This bone seldom di- 
 vides the nares into two equal 
 portions. 
 
 Connexions. It is connected with the sphenoid, 
 with the superior maxillary ethmoid and palate bones. 
 
 OS MAXILLARE INFERIUS. 
 
 The inferior maxillare may be divided into the hori- 
 zontal and ascending plate (ramus horizontalis et adscen- 
 dens.) 
 
 The horizontal The anterior and central portion is 
 plate termed the chin ; the middle line 
 
 joining the symetrical sides, the 
 symphisis, marked internally by a 
 perpendicular spine. The supe- 
 rior third of the internal spine 
 gives attachment to the fraenum 
 linguae ; the middle third, to the 
 genio-glossi ; the inferior third to 
 the genio-hyo-glossi. On either 
 side are two rough surfaces for 
 the digastrici. The superior mar- 
 gin is of considerable breadth, 
 and offers sixteen alveoli for the 
 
roots of the teeth; the lower 
 border is rounded and obtuse, 
 forming the base ; at the extre- 
 mities of the inferior margin, 
 where the plate passes upwards, 
 the angles are situated. The an- 
 terior surface is divided by an 
 oblique line into an anterior and 
 posterior portion, giving attach- 
 ment to muscles. The internal 
 surface is concave, and presents 
 an oblique ridge for the attach- 
 ment of the mylo-hyoidei muscles 
 and internal membrane of the 
 gums. About an inch on either 
 side from the symphisis in the 
 centre, the foramen maxillare 
 anterius is placed. 
 
 The ascending Passes upwards and backwards from 
 plate the angle, and terminates in two 
 
 processes ; anteriorly in the pro- 
 cessus coronb'ideus ; posteriorly in 
 the processus condylb'ideus. Be- 
 tween the two is placed a semilu- 
 nar notch (incisura semilunaris). 
 The condyle is supported by a 
 contracted portion, termed the 
 neck. On the inner surface, in 
 the centre, may be observed a large 
 irregular hole, the entrance into 
 the maxillary canal : below the 
 entrance, the bone is grooved for 
 the passage of a small twig of 
 the inferior maxillary nerves and 
 
 The Foramina are, 
 
 Foramina maxil- The entrances into the (canalesmcn-, 
 laria postoriora tales) mental canals transmitting 
 the inferior maxillary nerves and 
 vessels. 
 
 Foramina maxil- The terminations of the. mental 
 laria anteriora canals. 
 
21 
 
 Connexions. It is connected with the ossa temporum. 
 
 Muscles arising from the os maxillare inferius : 
 Triangulares oris Genio-glossi 
 
 Quadrati gense Genio-hyo-glossi 
 
 Levatores labii inferioris Constrictor pharyngis supe* 
 Buccinatores rior 
 
 Mylo-hyoidei 
 
 Muscles inserted into the os maxillare inferius : 
 Ternporales Pterygoidei interni 
 
 Masseteres Pterygordei externi 
 
 Digastrici Platysma myoides 
 
 The bones of the head are connected to those of the 
 face by the sutura transversalis et zygomatica. Between 
 the bones of the face fifteen sutures are found : 
 
 I Sutura nasalis ante- X Sutura mystachialis 
 
 rior XI Sutura palatina 
 II III Suturae nasales la- longitudinalis 
 
 terales XII Sutura palatina 
 I III IV Suturae lacrymales transversalis 
 
 VI VII Sutur* orbitales XIII XIV Sutura palato- 
 
 internae maxillares 
 
 VIII IX Suturae orbitales XV Sutura spinosa 
 
 externae 
 
 The anterior nasal i& placed longitudinal between the 
 ossa nasi. 
 
 The lateral nasal intervene between the nasal process 
 of the superior maxillary bones on either side and nasal 
 bones. 
 
 The internal orbitar pass from the apex of the orbit to 
 the fore part of the cheek. 
 
 The external orbitar are continued each from the end 
 of the internal orbiter to the under and fore part of 
 the cheek. 
 
 The mystachial passes from the septum narium to 
 between the two middle dentes inci sores. 
 
 The longitudinal palate runs through the middle of 
 the palate. 
 
 The transverse palate crosses between the palate bones 
 and palatine process of the superior maxillary bones. 
 
22 
 
 The potato maxillary are at the back part of each side 
 of the nostril. 
 
 The spinous is in the lower part of the middle of the 
 nares. 
 
 The transverse suture stretches across the face from 
 the external angular process of one orbit to that of the 
 other. In its course it traverses the orbit and root of 
 the nose. It connects the bones of the face with those 
 of the head. 
 
 The zygomatic suture connects the malar with the 
 temporal bones. 
 
 BASE OF THE SKULL. 
 
 The following principle parts appear internally : 
 
 The anterior region, 
 which isthehigh- 
 est, contains, 
 
 Middle region, 
 lower 
 
 Posterior region, 
 lowest 
 
 Crista galli and cribriform plate of 
 the ethmoid bone, spine and or- 
 bitral processes of the frontal 
 bone. 
 
 Sella turcica with the anterior and 
 posterior clinoid processes, pro- 
 cessus olivaris, the transverse 
 spines, the orbital, temporal, and 
 spinous processes, the superior 
 ridges of the petrous portion of 
 of the temporal bone. 
 
 Basilar process of the os occipitis, 
 fossae, and spinse cruciatae. 
 
 Foramina at the internal basis. 
 
 Foramen ccecum For the transmission of small vein to 
 superior longitudinal sinus, and it 
 also receives a process of the dura 
 mater. 
 
 Foramina cribrosa First pair of nerves and a nasal 
 
 twig from the nasal branch of the 
 
 first division of the fifth pair of 
 
 nerves. 
 
 Foramina optica Optic nerves, and opthalmic arteries. 
 
23 
 
 Fissures sphenoida- Third pair of nerves, fourth pair, 
 
 les first division of the fifth, sixth 
 
 pair of nerves, and the opthalmic 
 
 veins. 
 
 Foramina rotunda Second division of the fifth pair of 
 
 nerves 
 Foramina ovalia Third division of the fifth pair of 
 
 nerves. 
 
 Foramina spinosa Arteriae meningeae mediae. 
 Exitus canalium The carotid arteries, and hranches 
 caroticorum of connection hetween the cere- 
 
 bral nerves and great sympathe- 
 tic nerves. 
 
 Foramina lacera The vidian nerves, and also small 
 basis cranii ante- arteries to the dura mater. 
 riora 
 
 Foramina innomi- Branches of the vidian nerves. 
 nata, or hiatus 
 Follopii 
 
 Exitus aquceductu- To allow the fluid contained within 
 um vestibulorum. the cavities of the cochleae and 
 Exitus aquceductu- vestibules to recede. 
 
 um cochlearum 
 
 Meatus auditorii For the portio mollis and portio du- 
 interni ra of the seventh pair of nerves, 
 
 and small arteries 
 Foramina condylo- Ninth pair of nerves. 
 
 idea anteriora 
 
 Foramina lacera Internal jugular veins, glosso-pha- 
 basis crani pos- ryngeal, accessory and eight pair 
 teriora of nerves, and small arteries to 
 
 the dura mater 
 
 Foramen magnum Medulla spinalis with its membranes 
 and vessels, vertebral arteries, 
 accessory nerves, and sinus veno- 
 sus. 
 
 Base of the skull externally. 
 
 Nasal lamella, ossa turbinata., ethmbidales cellulse, 
 ossa plana. 
 
 Processus azygos, ossa triangularia, processus ptery- 
 goidei, orbitales, temporales, and processus spinosi. 
 
24 
 
 Basilaris processus, partes petrosse, processus stylb'idei, 
 vaginales, zygomatici, fossae glenoideae. 
 
 Foramen magnum, processus condyloidei, mastoidei, 
 fossae digastricae, processus jugulares. 
 
 Foramina of the external surface are asfolkw : 
 
 Foramina parieta- Small arteries and veins. 
 
 fat 
 Foramina supra Supra orbital nerves and arteries* 
 
 orbit alia 
 Foramina orbitalia Nasal twig of the first branch of 
 
 anteriora interna the fifth pair, and anterior 
 
 branches of ethmoidal arteries. 
 Foramina orbitaria Posterior branches of ethmoidal ar- 
 
 interna posterior a teries. 
 Foramina infra or- Infra orbital nerves and vessels. 
 
 bit alia 
 Foramina Ptery- Pterygoid nerves and small arteries. 
 
 didea 
 Meatus auditorii External opening of the apparatuses 
 
 externi of hearing. 
 
 Fissurce glasseri Chordae tympani, musculi tympani 
 
 laxatores 
 Foramina eustachii Terminations of the eustachian 
 
 tubes. 
 
 Foramina carotica Entrances into the carotid canals 
 Foramina stylo Portio dura of the seventh pair of 
 
 mastoidea nerves, stylo-mastoid arteries and 
 
 veins. 
 Foraminamastoidea Veins to the lateral sinuses. 
 
 OF THE ORBITS. 
 
 Each orbit is composed of seven bones, the roof is 
 formed by the frontal bone, the floor by the orbital pro- 
 cess of the superior maxillary bone, outer wall by the 
 malar bones and sphenoid bones, the inner wall by the 
 lacrymal bone and ethmoid bone, and the palate bone 
 completes the prsterior part. 
 
THE NOSTRILS. 
 
 Fourteen bones enter into the formation of the nares. 
 The arch of the nose is formed by the nasal, superior 
 maxillary, and lacrymal bones, the root by the ethmoid, 
 the floor by the palatine process of the superior maxillary, 
 and palate bones. The septum narium is formed by the 
 nasal lamella of the ethmoid, azygos process of the 
 sphenoid, the vomer, nasal spine, and palatine process 
 of the superior maxillary and palate bones. The cavity 
 is divided into three chambers : 
 
 Superior chamber. 
 
 Openings. 
 
 Occupies the ethmoid bone, From posterior ethmoidal 
 
 and sphenoidal sinuses. 
 
 Middle chamber. 
 
 Between superior and in- Frontal and anterior eth- 
 ferior spongy bones. moidal sinuses. 
 
 Inferior chamber. 
 
 Between inferior spongy Nasal ducts, 
 bones and palatine pro- 
 cesses of the palate and 
 superior maxillary bones. 
 
 DENTES. 
 
 The teeth are thirty-two in number and have been 
 divided into the incisors, canine, and molar (denies inci- 
 sores, cuspidati vel canini, et mo/ares). The incisors are 
 eight in number, the canine four in number, the molar 
 twenty in number. Each tooth consists of a body 
 (corona), and .of one or more roots (radices) ; and be- 
 tween these there is a contracted portion, which has 
 been called the neck (collum). The roots of the teeth 
 are implanted within the alveolar processes of the jaws 
 in the same manner as a nail is inserted into a piece of 
 wood ; this mode of connexion is termed gomphosis. 
 
26 
 
 Ossa tinguaUa vel os hyoideum. 
 
 The os hyoideum has been divided into five portions, 
 the body or middle portion, into four lateral portions, 
 (cornua superiora et inferiord). 
 
 Muscles arising from os hyoideum. 
 
 Hyo-glossi Constrictorpharyngismedius 
 
 Muscles inserted into os hyoides. 
 
 Mylo-hyoidei Sterno-hyoidei 
 
 Genio-hyoidei Omo-hyoidei 
 
 Oenio-hyoglossi Thyro-hyoidei 
 
 Stylo-hyoidei Digastrici 
 
 THE CAVITY OF THE MOUTH. 
 
 The cavity of the mouth is formed by five bones, viz : 
 *The two ossa maxillaria The os maxillare inferius 
 
 superiora Thirty-two teeth 
 
 The two ossa palatina 
 
 OF THE CAVITY OF THE FAUCES. 
 
 The cavity of the fauces consists of ten bones, viz : 
 superiorly, the cuneiform process of the os occipitis, 
 iiiferiorly, the os hyoideum, anteriorly, the pterygoid 
 processes of the sphenoid, and the ossa palatina, and os 
 vomer, posteriorly, the three superior cervical vertebrae, 
 laterally on each side the petrous portion of the tem- 
 poral bones. 
 
 OF THE TRUNK. 
 
 First of the Vertebras. 
 
 The vertebral column is situated at the posterior part 
 of the trunk, and is composed of two pyramids of un- 
 
27 
 
 qual length joined by a common basis, and of these, 
 the upper or longer is composed of twenty-four bones 
 (vertebrce verce), the lower or shorter is composed of 
 bones which are immoveable (vertebrce spurice). The 
 vertebral column does not describe a right line, but, 
 when examined in profile it appears undulated in its 
 course, in the neck (regio cervicalis) it advances for- 
 wards; in the back (regio thoracica) it inclines 
 backwards; in the loins (regio abdominalis ) it again 
 projects forwards ; lastly, at its lower extremity (regio 
 sacralis) it is turned forwards. The true vertebrae are 
 subdivided into three classes, the cervical containing 
 seven vertebrae, the dorsal twelve, the lumbar five. 
 
 Each vertebra is divided into its body (corpus) and 
 and processes (apophyses). The body forms the ante- 
 rior and most considerable part, the processes are seven 
 in number, two superior obliquely ascending, two infe- 
 rior obb'quely descending, (processus obliqui) two trans- 
 verse, (processus transversi) and one spinous (processus 
 spinosus). The foramina and cavities are the great 
 foramen which concurs to form the spinal canal contin- 
 ued through the whole spine, in which the medulla spi- 
 nalis with its membranes and vessels are lodged. Four 
 notches on either side (quatuor incisurce) one superior, 
 one inferior, the latter uniting with the superior, thus 
 forming the lateral foramina of the vertebra?, (foramina 
 intervertebralia) for the transmission of the spinal 
 nerves. 
 
 Characters of the Cervical vertebrce considered generally. 
 
 The vertebrae of the neck are seven in number, their 
 bodies are small and compact, of firm texture, flattened 
 before and behind ; the Superior surfaces are hollowed 
 transversely from side to side, their inferior surfaces 
 from behind forwards. The two superior articulating 
 processes are placed obliquely upwards and backwards, 
 the two inferior downwards and forwards ; the transverse 
 processes short, and bifurcated, pass outwards and are 
 perforated by foramina for the vertebral arteries. The 
 spinous processes short, and bifid, pass backwards. The 
 vertebral foramen is of triangular form. 
 
The Jirst, second and seventh cervical vertebrae offer 
 peculiarities. The Jirst, called the atlas, is merely a 
 bony ring without either body or spine, it is convex an- 
 teriorly and presents a small eminence ; concave in the 
 opposite direction, where a slight oval depression may be 
 observed, covered by cartilage receiving the processus 
 dentatus. The superior oblique processes are concave 
 and turned towards each other, and present, on their 
 inner borders, two small tubercles for the attachment of 
 the transverse ligament; behind, and winding backwards, 
 are two grooves for the vertebral arteries : the inferior 
 articulating processes are nearly horizontal; the trans- 
 verse processes are long and terminate in a more obtuse 
 point. 
 
 The second vertebra of the neck is called (axis, epis- 
 tropheus, et vertebra dentata). The body is of a tri- 
 angular shape, it exceeds in thickness and strength the 
 other cervical vertebrae ; from its upper surface arises 
 the odontoid process, (processus dentatus) which rests 
 in contact before with the articulating surface on the 
 anterior arch of the atlas, and is grooved behind 
 for the transverse ligament. The superior articulating 
 processes are nearly horizontal. The transverse pro~ 
 cesses are very short, oblique, and not bifurcated and 
 divided above by an acute eminence into two lateral 
 portions, and below, by a line, into two cavities. 
 
 Of the seventh cervical. The body is broader; its 
 inferior surface is almost flat; its spinous process is 
 elongated, and terminates in a tubercle. Sometimes 
 there are foramina in the transverse processes, which 
 are small, and transmit only veins ; sometimes they are 
 wanting. 
 
 THE VERTEBRAE OF THE BACK. 
 
 Next to the cervical, are placed the twelve dorsal 
 vertebrae : the four superior are the largest, and the 
 others below gradually become smaller. Their bodies 
 are of firm and compact structure externally, of spongy- 
 texture internally, convex before, and concave behind. 
 
Their superior and inferior surfaces are flattened. On 
 each side of the bodies, on the superior and inferior 
 margins,, near the transverse processes, their is a semi- 
 lunar concavity, lined with cartilage ; the inferior half 
 concavities, together with the superior, form articulating 
 depressions, into which the posterior extremities of the 
 ribs are received ; hence each rib articulates between 
 the bodies of two vertebrae. The oblique processes are 
 placed nearly perpendicular ; the two superior are di- 
 rected backwards; the two inferior forwards. The 
 transverse processes are long, and turned obliquely 
 backwards ; on the extremities there are articular cavi- 
 ties lined with cartilage for the reception of the tuber- 
 cles of the ribs. The spinous processes are long, and 
 slope downwards and backwards ; they terminate in a 
 tubercle. From their posterior surface arises a ridge, 
 which is received into a groove in the fore part of the 
 spinous process immediately above. The spinal foramen is 
 circular, and smaller than in any of the other vertebrae. 
 
 In the dorsal region, the following vertebrae present 
 peculiarities: > 
 
 First dorsal, The body is larger, and presents on 
 each side one whole and half of another articulating 
 depression for the heads of the ribs. The articular 
 processes are oblique. The spinous process is nearly ho- 
 rizontal in its direction. 
 
 The tenth dorsal, The body offers one half of an 
 articulating cavity. 
 
 The eleventh and twelfth dorsal, present one whole 
 articular cavity on either side of the body : no articular 
 surface on the transverse processes. 
 
 CHARACTERS OF THE LUMBAR VERTEBRA. 
 
 The five lumbar vertebrae, which are placed immedi- 
 ately after the dorsal, are the last and largest of the true 
 vertebrae. The bodies are of firm texture externally ; 
 of a spongy structure internally ; of an oval shape, the 
 longest diameter transversely; flattened above and be- 
 low ; concave from above downwards, on their forepart, 
 
30 
 
 The superior oblique processes are strong, concave, and 
 face inwards ; the inferior are convex and face outwards. 
 The transverse processes are long and slender, and pass 
 directly outwards. The spinous processes are broad and 
 expanded, and pass directly backwards, and are divided 
 by a prominent lineinto two labia. The foramen for the 
 spinal cord is rather larger than in the vertebrse of the 
 back, triangular in the superior, oval in the inferior 
 lumbar vertebrae. 
 
 The bones just described as a whole, present an ante- 
 rior surface, two lateral surfaces, a base and a summit. 
 The anterior surface is broad in the cervical, contracted 
 in the dorsal, expanded in the lumbar regions, and is 
 covered from above downwards, with the anterior ver- 
 tebral ligament (ligamentum commune anterius). The 
 posterior surface present in the medium line the spinous 
 processes and on either side the vertebral grooves. The 
 lateral surf aces are distinguished by the transverse proces- 
 ses the in vertebral foramina, and articulating depressions 
 for the heads of the ribs. The base joins the sacrum. 
 The summit articulates with the os occipitis. 
 
 Use of the Spinal Column. 
 
 It supports the head and chest, it lodges and protects 
 the spinal marrow with its membranes, it gives passage 
 to the spinal nerves and it is the source of all the mo- 
 tions of the trunk. 
 
 Muscles arising from the vertebrae cervicis : 
 
 Trapezii Recti capitis postici minores 
 
 Splenii Obliqui superiores 
 
 Complex! Obliqui inferiores 
 
 Recti capitis postici majores Recti capitis laterales 
 
 Recti capitis antici majores Serrati postici superiores 
 
 Recti capitis antici minores Trachelo-mastoidei 
 
 Sacro lumbales Cervicales descendentes 
 
 Longissimi dorsi Transversales colli 
 
 Rhomboidei Scalenii antici medii et 
 Levator anguli scapulae postici 
 
 Inter-spinales coltt Semispinales colli 
 
 Longi colli. later-transversales colli 
 
31 
 
 Muscles arising from the dorsal vertebrce. 
 
 Trapezii Diaphragma 
 
 Splenii Psose parvi 
 
 Rhomboidei magni 
 
 Latissimi dorsi Multifidae spinae 
 
 Sacro-lumbales Semispinales dorsi 
 
 Longissimi dorsi Inter-transversales 
 Serrati postici inferiores Inter-spinales 
 Musculi accessorii 
 
 Muscles arising from the lumbar vertebra?. 
 
 Transversales abdominis Musculi accessorii 
 
 Obliqui abdominis intemi Quadrate lumborum 
 
 Sacro lumbales Psose magni 
 
 Longissimi dorsi parvi 
 
 Latissimi dorsi Diaphragma 
 
 Serrati postici inferiores Spinalesetintertransversales 
 
 OF THE BONES OF THE CHEST. 
 
 The thorax, or chest, is a large cavity of a conoid shape, 
 narrow above, broad below, flat anteriorly, hollowed 
 posteriorly, convex laterally, placed in front of the dor- 
 sal region of the vertebral column and destined to contain 
 the proper organs of respiration and circulation. It is 
 composed of thirty-seven bones, the twelve dorsal ver- 
 tebrae posteriorly, the sternum anteriorly and the twenty- 
 four ribs laterally. 
 
 OSSA STERNI. 
 
 The sternum is placed longitudinally between the 
 cartilages of the true ribs, in a direction downwards and 
 forwards, it is divided into three parts, a superior, term- 
 ed the manubr'mm ; a middle, the body (corpus) ; and 
 an inferior, the ensiform process (processus xiphoides )* 
 
 The upper portion is of a cordiform shape, expanded 
 
32 
 
 above, contracted below : it may be divided into four 
 borders and two surfaces. 
 
 The anterior surface is covered by the integuments, 
 the aponeuroses of the sterno-cleido mastoid and great 
 pectoral muscles. The posterior surface is concave, and 
 corresponds with the arch of the aorta. The superior 
 border is the broadest and thickest, hollowed in the 
 middle for the trachea (incisura semilunaris ) ; on 
 either side it presents an articulating depression for the 
 clavicles (cavitas clavicularis). The inferior border 
 is narrow, thin, and connected to the second portion. 
 
 The lateral margins offer depressions for the cartilages 
 of the first ribs and half of the second. 
 
 The second portion is of an oblong shape, expanded 
 inferiorly. The anterior surface is convex and covered 
 by the integuments and aponeuroses of the pectoral and 
 sterno-cleido mastoid muscles. The posterior surface is 
 concave and corresponds with the anterior mediastinum, 
 triangularis sterni, and pericardium ; above, it is con- 
 nected with the first portion ; below, with the ensiform 
 cartilage. The lateral margins present depressions for 
 the cartilages of half the second, the whole of the 
 third, fourth, fifth, sixth, and half of the seventh ribs. 
 
 The third portion. The ensiform cartilage varies in 
 shape and is half an inch to an inch in length, some- 
 times it is round, sometimes acute, and not unfrequently 
 bifurcated, in young subjects it is always cartilaginous, 
 in adults it becomes ossified, and is connected above with 
 the second portion, below with the linea alba, abdominal 
 muscles and diaphragm ; laterally, it presents on either 
 side a depression for half of the seventh rib, and into its 
 anterior surface is inserted the costo-xiphoid ligament. 
 
 Use. The use of the sternum is to support the ribs, 
 to defend the heart and lungs ; it also forms a firm point 
 of attachment to the muscles of respiration. 
 
 Muscles arising from the Sternum. 
 
 Pectorales majores Triangulares sterni 
 
 Sterno-cleido mastbidei Diaphragma 
 
 Sterno-hybidei Intercostales interni 
 Sterno-thyrbidei 
 
33 
 
 Muscles inserted into the Sternum. 
 
 Recti abdominis Obliqui abdominis intern! 
 
 Obliqui abdominis externi Transversales 
 
 OF THE RIBS. 
 
 The ribs are long curved bones, placed at the side of 
 the chest, passing obliquely downwards and forwards ; 
 in number twenty-four twelve on each side of which 
 the seven superior unite by cartilage with the sternum, 
 and are called the true ribs (costce verce). The five 
 inferior are not implanted into the sternum, but are 
 connected by their cartilages to one another, hence 
 temed false ribs (costce spurice). The two last are 
 altogether unattached to the sternum. The ribs gradu- 
 ally encrease in length from the first to the seventh ; 
 from that to the twelfth they gradually diminish. Each 
 rib presents the following parts : the body, external and 
 internal surface, superior and inferior margins, anterior 
 and posterior extremity. 
 
 The body (corpus), occupies the middle part ; the 
 external surface is smooth and convex; the internal 
 surface concave, and invesl ed by the pleura ; the supe- 
 rior margin obtuse and rounded ; the inferior forms a 
 sharp border, internally marked by a deep groove ( sul- 
 cus costalis), for the intercostal vessels and nerves ; this 
 sulcus is not defined at either end of the ribs. The 
 posterior extremity offers a rounded head (capitulum 
 costce), divided by a middle ridge into two plane sur- 
 faces. The two planes are joined to the bodies of two 
 different vertebrae. About an inch from the head, a 
 small tubercle is placed (tuberculum costce), by which 
 the rib is connected with the transverse process of the 
 lowest of the two vertebrae. Between the head and 
 tubercle, the bone is contracted, forming the neck 
 (cervix) ; still farther out externally, is a second tuber- 
 cle for the attachment of ligaments. The part between 
 the tuberosity and middle of the body is termed it& 
 angle. 
 
34 
 
 The anterior extremity is broader and more flat, hol- 
 lowed by an oval surface receiving the costal cartilages 
 (cartilagines cost ales ). 
 
 The first, the eleventh, and twelfth ribs present pe- 
 culiar characters: the first rib is broader, shorter, and 
 nearly horizontal in its direction, it has only one arti- 
 culating surface on its head, no groove for intercostal 
 vessels, the superior surface is marked by depressions for 
 the subclavian artery and vein. The eleventh has no 
 groove on its inferior border, one articulating surface on 
 the head, no tubercle. The twelfth has the same cha- 
 racter, and is only shorter. 
 
 The costal cartilages complete the form of the chest. 
 The seven superior are connected with the sternum and 
 anterior extremities of the ribs; the cartilages of the 
 eighth, ninth, and tenth join the seventh ; the eleventh 
 and twelfth are loosely connected with the abdominal 
 muscles. These cartilages present neither cavities or 
 canals. 
 
 Motions of the ribs, The motions are upwards and 
 outwards, downwards and inwards. 
 
 Use. The ribs form the lateral parts of the chest, 
 and enlarge that cavity ; they defend the organs of 
 respiration and circulation, and also afford an extensive 
 surface for the attachment of muscles. 
 
 Connexions By ginglimus their heads are attached 
 to the vertebrae, and their tubercles by arthrodia to 
 the transverse processes. 
 
 Muscles arising from the Ribs. 
 
 $terno hyb'idei Obliqui abdominis externi 
 
 Sterno thyroidei Serrati magni 
 
 Subclavii Cevicales descendentes 
 
 Pectorales majores Latissimi dorsi 
 
 Pectorales minores Intercostales externi 
 
 Diaphragma Intercostales interni 
 
 Muscles inserted into the Ribs. 
 
 Scaleni antici Obliqui abdominis interni 
 
 Scaleni medii Transversales 
 
 Scaleni postici Recti abdominis 
 
 Intercostales externi Serrati postici superiores 
 
 Intercostales interni Serrati postici inferiores 
 
 Quadrati lumborum Longissimi dorsi 
 
35 
 OF THE UPPER EXTREMITY. 
 
 The upper extremity is composed of the shoulder, the 
 upper arm, fore arm, and hand. 
 
 OF THE BONES OF THE SHOULDER. 
 
 The shoulder is composed of two bones, the scapula 
 and the clavicle. The Clavicle (clavicula) is situated 
 at the superior and anterior part of the chest between 
 the Scapula and sternum, in figure it resembles the 
 italic S. 
 
 We may divide it into body, sternal, and scapular 
 extremities (pars sterna/is, corpus, et pars scapularis). 
 
 The sternal extremity is of triangular shape, hollowed 
 from behind to before, and receives an interarticular 
 cartilage. The apex is situated inferiorly and posteriorly 
 and gives attachment to the interclavicular ligament. 
 
 The body presents two surfaces, a superior and an 
 inferior, the former is smooth, slightly flattened ; the 
 latter rough and irregular for the attachment of muscles 
 and ligaments, about the middle inferiorly and somewhat 
 posteriorly a small foramen is observed for the trans- 
 mission of the nutritious artery of the bone. The 
 anterior margin is concave, the posterior convex. 
 
 The scapular extremity is flat and broad and joins 
 the acromion by a plain surface covered with cartilage, 
 superiorly it is marked for the attachment of muscles, 
 inferiorly it offers a prominent ridge for the insertion of 
 the coraco-claviculaj ligaments. 
 
 Use. To unite the scapula and arm to the chest, 
 to prevent the extremities rolling inwards across 
 the thorax, and to defend the subclavian vessels and 
 axillary plexus of nerves. 
 
 Connexions. It is connected to the sternum and 
 scapula by arthrodia. 
 
 Muscles arising from the clavicle. 
 
 From sternal half Sterno cle'ido mastb'ideus 
 Sterno-hyoideus 
 
 Sterno thyroideus 
 Pectoralis major 
 
From scapular portion Deltoides. 
 
 Muscles inserted into the Clavicle* 
 Subclavius Trapezius 
 
 OF THE SCAPULA. 
 
 The scapula is a large bone of triangular shape situ- 
 ated at the superior and posterior part of the chest, ex^- 
 tending from the second to the seventh rib. 
 
 1, It presents an anterior and posterior surface ; 2, 
 Three margins ; 3, Three angles ; 4, Three processes ; 5, 
 Three fossae ; 6, The glenoid cavity and neck 
 
 The posterior surface (superficies dorsalis), is divided 
 transversely into two unequal portions by the spin** ; 
 the anterior surface (superficies costalis), is concave, 
 and marked by prominent ridges, for the attachment of 
 the subscapularis muscle. 
 
 The margins are : the superior (costa superior) which 
 is the shortest, the posterior or base (costa posterior) 
 the longest and nearest to the vertebrae,, and lastly the 
 anterior or inferior (costa anterior), descends from the 
 neck of the bone obliquely backwards. 
 
 The angles are divided into a superior, which is situ- 
 ated between the superior and posterior margin; an 
 inferior between the anterior and posterior margin, and 
 an anterior angle occupying the superior and anterior 
 margin. The processes are the spine, the acromion, 
 and coracoid. 
 
 The spine (spina scapularis), commences from the 
 base above its middle, and passes upwards and outwards 
 and terminates in an expanded process, termed the acro- 
 mion. It divides the posterior surface of the scapula 
 into two portions. 
 
 The acromion process (acromion), overhangs the 
 glenoid cavity, is flattened, and joins the clavicle by a 
 plain surface, covered with cartilage. 
 
 The coracoid process (processus corocoideus ) , is^ situ- 
 ated at the superior part of the anterior margin, on the 
 inner side of the glenoid cavity, and in its direction 
 
37, 
 
 passes horizontally forwards. At the root of this pro- 
 cess a deep notch is observed (incisura semilunaris), 
 converted into a foramen by the transverse ligament, 
 for the transmission of the supra scapular nerve ; but, 
 above the ligament the scapular vessels usually pass. 
 
 The three fossce are fossa supra and infra spinata, 
 fossa subscapularis. The supra and infra spinal fossae 
 occupy the posterior surface above and below the spine ; 
 the subscapular occupies the internal surface and lies 
 over the ribs and presents a foramen for the nutritious 
 vessels. 
 
 The anterior costa is surmounted by an oval super- 
 ficial articulating cavity, larger below than above 
 (cavitas glenoidea); it offers at its upper part a small 
 tubercle for the attachment of the long head of the 
 biceps. It is supported by a contracted portion named 
 the neck (cervix scapulae). 
 
 Use. Its use is to defend the posterior part of the 
 chest as a shield j it also serves with the clavicle, as a 
 fulcrum for the upper extremity. 
 
 Connexions. It is connected by arthrodia with the 
 clavicle ; by enarthrosis with the humerus ; by sysar- 
 cossis with the head, os hyoides, sternum, ribs and 
 vertebrae. 
 
 Muscles arising from the scapula. 
 
 From superior costa Omo-hyoideus 
 
 From spine and acromioji Deltoides 
 
 From fossce spinatce Supra spinatus 
 
 Infra spinatus 
 
 From the base, inferior angle and Teres major 
 anterior costa Teres minor 
 
 Latissimus dorsi 
 
 Triceps 
 From coracoid process Biceps 
 
 Coraco-brachialis 
 From subscapular fossa Subscapularis 
 
 Muscles inserted into the scapula. 
 
 Into the base Khomboideus major 
 
 Rhomboideus minor 
 Serratus magnus 
 
38 
 
 Into the superior angle Levator ahguli sca- 
 
 pulae 
 Into the coracoid process Pectoralis minor 
 
 OF THE HUMERUS. 
 
 The Humerus is irregularly cylindrical,, it may be 
 divided into its superior and inferior extremities and body. 
 
 The superior extremity offers the following parts : the 
 head, the neck, two tubercles, and the bicipital groove. 
 The head (caput humeri) is hemispherical,, smooth, and 
 covered with cartilage; inclined inwards and backwards, 
 and is articulated with the glenoid cavity of the scapula. 
 The greater tubercle (tuberculum majus) is placed ex- 
 ternally, and offers three surfaces, for the attachment 
 of muscles : the smaller tubercle (tuber culum minus], 
 is placed internally, having only one surface. The bone 
 is contracted between the head and tubercles forming 
 the neck (cervix humeri). Between these tubercles 
 there is a deep groove directed downwards and inwards 
 (the fossa bicipitalis) ; in which is lodged the tendon of 
 the long head of the biceps ; the borders of this fossa 
 are rough and irregular for the attachment of muscles. 
 
 The inferior extremity is of triangular shape and 
 flattened, bounded on either side by two processes termed 
 thecondyles (condyli); the external is some what rounded 
 directed forwards; the internal the largest, inclines 
 backwards and is grooved posteriorly for the passage of 
 the ulnar nerve. Between the condyles are two arti- 
 cular eminences, one of which is double like a pulley, 
 (trochlea ossis humeri), forming a hinge joint with the 
 ulna ; and the other rounded like a small head 
 (eminentia capitata), and received into the articular 
 cavity on the upper extremity of the radius. Above 
 the articulating surfaces, anteriorly, is a depression, 
 which lodges the coronoid process of the ulna when the 
 fore-arm is bent ; posteriorly, a deeper depression, re^ 
 ceiving the olecranon when the fore-arm is completely 
 extended. The body of the bone may be divided into 
 
thirds ; the upper third, rounded ; the middle third,, 
 twisted ; and the inferior one, flattened. 
 
 The body is marked by three prominent lines; the first 
 external, passes from the greater tubercle to the outer 
 condyle ; the second internal, passes from the smaller 
 tubercle to the inner condyle j and the third, anterior, 
 passes from the bicipital groove as far as the external 
 condyle. At the back part of the middle third, the 
 foramen for the nutritious artery is placed, passing from 
 above downwards. 
 
 Use. To concur to form the arm. 
 
 Connexions. It is cQnnected above, by enarthrosis, 
 with the scapula ; inferiorly, with the radius and ulna 
 by ginglymus. 
 
 Muscles arising from the Humerus. 
 
 From the anterior surface Brachialis internus 
 From the posterior surface Triceps extensor cubiti 
 From ridge above the outer Supinator radii longus 
 condyle, and outer con- Extensor carpi radiali* 
 dyle itself, and outer bor- longior 
 der Extensor carpi radialis, 
 
 brevior 
 
 Supinator radii brevis 
 Anconeus 
 
 Extensor carpi ulnaris 
 Extensor digitorum corn-v 
 
 munis 
 
 From the inner condyle and Pronator radii teres 
 inner border Flexor carpi radialis 
 
 Palmaris longus 
 Flexor carpi ulnaris 
 Flexor digitorum sublimis 
 
 Muscles inserted into the Humerus. 
 
 Into middle third externally Deltoides 
 
 internally Coraco-brachialis 
 
 Into greater tubercle Supra-spinatus 
 
 Infra-spinatus 
 Teres minor 
 
 Into lesser tubercle Subscapularis 
 
 Into outer edge of bicipital groove Pectorales major 
 
40 
 
 Into inner edge ofbicipital groove Teres major 
 
 Latissimus dorsi. 
 
 OF THE FORE-ARM. 
 
 The Fore-arm is composed of two bones, the radius 
 and the ulna. 
 
 The radius is placed on the external side of the fore- 
 arm, is continued on a line with the humerus ; it is 
 shorter than the ulna, and extends between the hume- 
 rus and carpus. It may be divided into its superior, 
 body, and inferior extremity. 
 
 The superior extremity (caput radii) is circular; the 
 upper surface excavated and invested by cartilage, re- 
 ceives the small head of the humerus ; the inner half 
 of the circumference is also covered by cartilage, and 
 articulates with the lesser sigmoid cavity of the ulna. 
 About three quarters of an inch below the head, inter- 
 nally and posteriorly, a strongly marked process is placed 
 (tuber radii) for the insertion of the biceps, between 
 the head and tubercle the bone is contracted, forming 
 the neck (cervix radii). The inferior extremity is broad 
 and expanded, and of quadrilateral form ; anteriorly it 
 advances forward to support the annular ligament ; pos- 
 teriorly it is grooved by the extensor tendons ; exter- 
 nally it is lengthened by a pyramidal process, the styloid 
 process (processus styloideus) ; internally it presents a 
 semilunar cavity (incisura semilunaris), receiving the 
 lower end of the ulna ; lastly, inferiorly it offers two 
 depressed articular surfaces covered by cartilage for 
 connexion with the os scaphoides and os lunare. 
 
 The body of the bone is of triangular shape ; the an- 
 terior and posterior surfaces are flattened ; the external 
 rounded, rough superiorly for the insertion of the supi- 
 nator radii brevis ; rough also in its centre, for the in- 
 sertion of the pronator radii teres : internally it forms 
 a sharp spine, for the attachment of the inter-osseous 
 ligament. 
 
 The foramen for the nutritious artery of the bone 
 passes from below upwards, and is placed about one- 
 third down anteriorly. 
 
41 
 
 Use. It concurs in forming the fore-arm. 
 
 Connexions. It is connected above with the small 
 head of the humerus ; below by arthrodia with the car- 
 pus ; laterally, both above and below, with the ulna by 
 lateral ginglymus. 
 
 Muscles arising from the Radius. 
 
 From the anterior surface Flexor sublimis digitorum 
 
 Flexor longus pollicis 
 From the posterior surface Extensor primi inter-nodii 
 
 Muscles inserted into the Radius. 
 
 Into the tubercle Biceps 
 
 Into external border Pronator radii teres 
 
 Supinator radii brevis 
 
 Into styloid process Supinator radii longus 
 
 Into anterior surface infe- Pronator quadratus 
 riorly 
 
 OF THE ULNA. 
 
 The Ulna is placed on the inside of the fore-arm; is 
 longer than the radius, and of irregular triangular 
 shape. 
 
 It may be divided into its body and extremities. 
 
 The superior extremity presents two processes, the 
 larger of which, called the olecranon (olecranon), oc- 
 cupies the super and posterior part, behind it forms a 
 triangular surface, smooth, and merely covered by the 
 integuments; anteriorly it is concave, and invested 
 with cartilage. The smaller process is more acute, is 
 situated before and below the olecranon, and is termed 
 the coronoid process (processus coronoideus). Between 
 the two processes, the- great sigmoid cavity is placed 
 (cavitas setnilunaris major); it is lined by cartilage, 
 and divided into two unequal portions by a prominent 
 line j this cavity moves upon the pulley of the os hu- 
 meri. On the outside of the coronary process, and in- 
 vested with cartilage, is a semi-lunated cavity, the lesser 
 
 3 
 
42 
 
 sigmoid cavity receiving the head of the radius (cavitas 
 semilunaris minor). 
 
 The inferior extremity is small and rounded ; inter- 
 nally it is lengthened by a conical process, the styloid 
 process (processus stylddeus] ; externally, convex, cover- 
 ed with cartilage, and articulated with the sigmoid 
 cavity of the radius ; anteriorly., grooved for the ulnar 
 vessels and nerve ; posteriorly, a similar depression may 
 be remarked for the tendon of the extensor carpi ulnaris; 
 lastly, inferiorly, it is slightly concave, to receive the 
 inter-articular cartilage, 
 
 The body is triangular, anteriorly concave, posteriorly 
 rough and irregular, and divided by a raised line into 
 two parts; internally, convex; externally, sharp for the 
 attachment of the inter-osseous ligament. The fora- 
 men for the nutritious artery is placed anteriorly, about 
 one third down, and passes in a direction from below 
 upwards, 
 
 Use. It concurs in forming the fore-arm. 
 
 Connexions. It is connected above by angular gin- 
 glymus with the humerus; laterally, both above and 
 below, by lateral ginglymus with the radius. 
 
 Muscles arising from the Ulna. 
 
 From the olecronon, coronoid Pronator radii teres 
 process, and anterior sur- Flexor digitorum sublimis 
 face Flexor carpi ulnaris 
 
 Flexor digitorum profundus 
 Pronator quadratus 
 Flexor carpi radialis 
 
 From posterior surface Supinator radii brevis 
 
 Extensor carpi ulnaris 
 Extensor ossis metacarpi 
 
 pollicis 
 Extensor primi et secundi 
 
 internodii 
 Indicator 
 
 Muscles inserted into the Ulna. 
 
 Into the olecranon Triceps 
 
 Anconeus 
 Into the coronoid process Brachialis anticus* 
 
43 
 OF THE BONES OF THE HAND. 
 
 The carpus is situated between the fore-arm and 
 metacarpus ; it consist of eight small bones arranged in 
 two rows. 
 
 OF THE OS SCAPHOIDEUM. 
 
 The scaphoid bone bears some resemblance to a boat, 
 hence its name : it presents four surfaces a superior, 
 which is convex and joined to the inferior extremity of 
 the radius ; an inferior, convex, and joined to the tra- 
 pezium and trapezoides ; the internal surface has two 
 depressions, by which it is articulated with the magnum 
 und lunar ; the external surface, unconnected, is rough 
 for the insertion of ligaments. 
 
 OF THE OS LUNARE. 
 
 The lunar bone has received its name from its cre- 
 scentic form, is smaller, and less elongated than the 
 scaphoid. The superior surface is round and convex, 
 and received into the inferior depression of the radius ; 
 the inferior surface is concave, and articulates with the 
 magnum; the outer surface joins the scaphoid; and the 
 inner, nearly triangular, rests against the cuneiform. 
 
 OF THE OS CUNEIFORME. 
 
 The cuneiform bone has received its name from its 
 supposed resemblance to a wedge. Its superior surface 
 is convex, and united to the inter-articular cartilage of 
 the wrist joint ; inferior ly it rests against the unciform 
 bone ; externally it articulates with the lunar ; inter- 
 nally it gives attachment to ligament; lastly, on its 
 anterior surface, the pisiform bone is lodged. 
 
44 
 OF THE PISIFORME. 
 
 The pisiforme bone is the fourth bone of the first 
 series, is the smallest, and from its rounded figure it 
 acquires its name. It is placed in front of the cunei- 
 form bone. 
 
 OF THE OS TRAPEZIUM. 
 
 The trapezium is irregular in its form ; it has four 
 articular surfaces ; the superior, which is concave and 
 connected with the scaphoid ; the inferior, which is con- 
 vex from behind forwards, and concave transversely, 
 receives the first bone of the metacarpus ; the internal, 
 which is turned upwards, articulates with the trapezoid 
 and second bone of the metacarpus ; the external sur- 
 face is free from attachment. 
 
 OF THE OS TRAPEZOIDEUM. 
 
 The trapezoid is smaller than the trapezium. Its 
 superior articular surface is concave and connected with 
 the scaphoid; its inferior joins the metacarpal bone of 
 the index finger ; its external is connected with the tra- 
 pezium ; and internally it articulates with the magnum. 
 
 OF THE OS MAGNUM. 
 
 The magnum is the largest of the carpal bones. It 
 presents a small rounded head superiorly, which is co- 
 vered with cartilage, and enters the cavity formed by 
 the scaphoid and lunar ; inferiorly, unequally triangu- 
 lar, it is connected with the metacarpal bone of the mid- 
 dle finger. Its external surface is united with the tra- 
 pezoides ; it is attached internally to the surface of the 
 unciform. 
 
45 
 OF THE OS UNCIFORME. 
 
 The uiiciform is the fourth bone of the second row of 
 the carpus. Superiorly it is narrow and rounded, and 
 articulates with the lunar and cuneiform ; inferiorly 
 it is subdivided by a ridge into two surfaces, which re- 
 ceive the two last metacarpal bones ; externally it joins 
 the magnum ; intei nally it is also articulated with the 
 cuneiform. 
 
 The process from which it derives its name, extends 
 from the internal part of the bone, somewhat curved 
 upon itself outwards. 
 
 Use of these Bones. To facilitate the motions of the 
 hand. 
 
 Connexions. The carpus is connected with the bones 
 of the fore-arm by arthrodia ; by the same mode of 
 connexion with each other, and with the metacarpus. 
 
 OF THE METACARPUS. 
 
 The Metacarpus is placed between the carpus and fin- 
 gers, and is composed of five small cylindrical bones. 
 
 They present two surfaces, a body and two extremities. 
 Their external surfaces are convex, and form the dorsum 
 of the hand ; their internal, which are concave, form 
 the hollow or palm. Their bodies are narrow, and may 
 be divided into three surfaces by three angles. Their 
 posterior extremities join, by plain surfaces covered with 
 cartilage, the carpal bone ; their anterior extremities 
 are convex from before to behind, and form heads; 
 laterally flattened. 
 
 The first bone of the metacarpus is the shortest and 
 thickest, and joins the trapezium; the second is the 
 longest, and articulates with the trapezoides; the third 
 may be distinguished by a rough surface and tuberosity, 
 posteriorly, for the insertion of the extensor carpi radi- 
 alis brevior; it is connected with the magnum; the 
 body of the fourth is narrower and articulates with the 
 uncifonn ; ihejifth is smaller : the inner border offers 
 
46 
 
 a small tuberosity for the insertion of the extensor carpi 
 ulnaris ; it is connected with the unciform. 
 
 OF THE FINGERS. 
 
 The fingers constitute the last and anterior part of 
 the hand, and are composed of fourteen bones named 
 phalanges. 
 
 Each finger is composed of three phalanges, but the 
 thumb consists of only two. The phalanges are divided 
 into the first or posterior,, which are the largest and long- 
 est ; into the middle, and into the last or anterior, the 
 smallest. The body and two extremities may be noticed 
 of each of these as of all other cylindrical bones. 
 
 OF THE FIRST OR METACARPAL 
 PHALANGES. 
 
 These five bones differ but little from each other 
 excepting in size and length. 
 
 Their superior extremity presents an oval articular 
 cavity for connection with the metacarpal bones ; their 
 inferior extremity is formed like a pulley, and presents 
 two depressions and two eminences or condyles, to re- 
 ceive the posterior extremity of the middle phalanx. 
 The body is convex, posteriorly; its internal surface 
 concave. 
 
 OF THE SECOND OR MIDDLE PHALANGES. 
 
 In the thumb the middle phalanx is wanting. That 
 of the middle finger is the largest, that of the little 
 finger the shortest and most slender. 
 
 Their superior extremity presents a semilunar cavity, 
 divided by a ridge for articulation, with the trochlea of 
 the metacarpal phalanges. 
 
47 
 
 Their inferior extremity offers two small condyles and 
 two depressions. The body is concave before; poste- 
 riorly , convex. 
 
 OF THE INFERIOR PHALANGES. 
 
 The last phalanges resemble each other : that of the 
 thumb is the broadest ; that of the little finger the 
 smallest. Their superior extremity presents a semi- 
 lunar articular surface ; inferior ly and posteriorly they 
 are covered by the nails ; anterior ly, concave. 
 
 Connexion. The first phalanges are connected with 
 the metacarpal bones by arthrodia ; with each other by 
 angular ginglimius. 
 
 Muscles arising from the Bones of the Hand : 
 
 From os pisiforme Abductor minimi digiti 
 
 From os trapezium Flexor ossi metacarpi polli- 
 
 cis 
 
 Flexor brevis pollicis 
 Abductor pollicis 
 From the os magnum et tra- Flexor brevis pollicis 
 
 pezoideum 
 
 From the os unciforme Flexor brevis minimi digiti 
 Abductor minimi digiti 
 
 Muscles inserted into the Carpal Bones. 
 Into the os pissiforme Flexor carpi ulnaris 
 
 Into the os trapezium Extensor primi internodii 
 
 Muscles arising from the Metacarpal Bones. 
 
 From metacarpal bone of Interossii 
 ** thejingers. 
 
 From metacarpal bone of Adductor pollicis 
 middle Jinger 
 
 Muscles inserted into the Metacarpal Bones. 
 Into the Metacarpal bone Flexor carpi radialis 
 
 of the forefinger Extensor carpi radialis lon- 
 
 gior 
 
48 
 
 Into metacarpal lone of mid- Extensor carpi radialis bre- 
 
 dlejinger vior 
 
 Into metacarpal bone of lit- Adductor minimi digiti 
 
 tlejlnger Extensor carpi ulnaris 
 
 Muscles inserted into the Phalanges of the Thumb. 
 
 Flexor longus pollicis Extensor ossi metacarpi 
 Flexor ossi metacarpi polli- pollicis 
 
 cis Extensor primi internodii 
 
 Flexor brevis pollicis Extensor secundi internodii 
 
 Abductor pollicis Adductor pollicis 
 
 Muscles inserted into the Phalanges of the Fore-finger. 
 
 Flexor sublimis Lumbricalis 
 
 Flexor profundus Indicator 
 
 Extensor communis Abductor indicis 
 
 Muscles inserted into the Phalanges of the Middle and 
 Ring-finger. 
 
 Flexor sublimis Extensor commuiiis 
 
 Flexor profundus Lumbricalis 
 
 Muscles inserted into the Phalanges of the Little-finger. 
 
 Flexor sublimis Extensor communis 
 
 Flexor profundus Auricularis 
 
 Flexor brevis Abductor minimi digiti 
 
 Lumbricalis Adductor minimi digiti 
 
 OF THE PELVIS. 
 
 To connect tbe lower extremities with the trunk by a 
 sure and firm joining, the pelvis is interposed. It may 
 be defined as a large deep cavity, situated at the inferior 
 extremity of the vertebral column,, and destined to sup- 
 port and contain the urinary and genital organs, and 
 also numerous important blood-vessels,, nerves, and lym- 
 phatics. It is composed of four bones ; two ossa inno- 
 minata, os sacrum, and os coxale. 
 
 The os innominatum, in children, consists of three 
 pieces, united by cartilage : in the adult, these three 
 
49 
 
 portions are consolidated into one large irregular bone : 
 anatomists still, however, mark out the three different 
 portions, and distinguish them by different names, as if 
 they were three distinct bones. Of these three portions, 
 the largest is superior and lateral, called os ilium ; the 
 second, inferior, called os ischium ; and the third and 
 smallest, anterior, os pubis. 
 
 OF THE ILIUM. 
 
 The Ilium forms the superior and lateral part of the 
 pelvis ; in shape, irregular. We may observe in each 
 bone, an external surface and an internal surface, a su- 
 perior, anterior, and posterior margin. 
 
 The external, dorsal, or femoral surface is unequally 
 convex anteriorly, and posteriorly somewhat excavated. 
 It is also marked by several asperities, and by a semi- 
 circular ridge. The internal or femoral surface is con- 
 cave, and forms the fossa iliaca, bounded inferiorly by 
 a raised line (linea ilio-pectinea). The superior margin 
 passes in an arch direction backwards, and forms the 
 crest (crista ilii) y and is divided into an external and 
 internal lip (labium externum et internumj. The ante- 
 rior margin presents two processes, the anterior superior, 
 the anterior inferior spinous process, and between the 
 two a notch (incisura semi/unaris ) '. The posterior 
 margin is shorter and thicker than the anterior margin, 
 it terminates likewise in two processes, the posterior su- 
 perior, and posterior inferior spinous process. 
 
 The inferior and anterior portion of the bone is 
 thickest, and assists in forming the cotyloid cavity (ace- 
 tabulum). The posterior and internal portion offers a 
 triangular deeply indented surface, for connexion with 
 the sacrum, and below it assists in forming the superior 
 and posterior portion of the great sciatic notch (incisura 
 iliaca superior). 
 
 Foramina for nutritious vessels are placed both ex- 
 ternally and internally. 
 
 Connexions. It is connected with the sacrum by 
 synchondrosis ; with the ischium and pubis by synostosis. 
 p 
 
50 
 OF THE ISCHIUM. 
 
 The Ischium constitutes the lowest and lateral parts 
 of the pelvis, and is of very irregular figure : we may 
 divide it into its body and ramus. 
 
 The upper part of the body (corpus) forms the lower 
 and greatest part of the cotyloid cavity ; the inferior 
 portion is expanded and rounded, constituting the tube- 
 rosity (tuber ischii) ; between the two portions the 
 bone is contracted, forming the neck, and is grooved by 
 the obturator externus muscle. The posterior border is 
 divided into two parts by the spine ; the spine passes 
 backwards on a line with the acetabulum ; below the 
 spine the bone is hollowed for the passage of the obtu- 
 rator internus muscle; it also assists in forming the 
 lesser sciatic notch (incisura iliaca inferior). The in- 
 ternal surface on the lower margin of the tuberosity 
 offers a deep groove for the passage of the internal pudic 
 vessels and nerves 
 
 The ramus passes from the tuberosity obliquely up- 
 wards and forwards, and joins the descending ramus of 
 the pubis. The external and internal surface of the 
 ramus are flat; the anterior and inner margin enters into 
 the formation of the pubic arch ; the external and pos- 
 terior margin, the obturator opening. 
 
 Connexions. The ischium is joined to the ilium and 
 pubis by synostosis. 
 
 OF THE OS PUBIS. 
 
 The Pubis constitutes the anterior part of the pelvis; 
 it may be divided into an horizontal and descending 
 ramus. 
 
 The outer part of the horizontal plate forms the inner 
 fifth of the acetabulum ; the superior surface is flattened 
 and constitutes the superior boundary of the crural arch, 
 and is grooved by the femoral vessels; the posterior mar- 
 gin presents a sharp ridge, the linea ilio-pectinea; the 
 anterior margin forms the upper boundary of the obtu- 
 rator foramen, and inferior I y is obliquely notched for 
 
51 
 
 the obturator vessels. The internal and anterior part is 
 flat and compressed. The point of junction between 
 this portion and its fellow, is termed the symphisis ; the 
 superior margin (above the symphisis) about an inch in 
 extent, is termed the crest ; about three quarters of an 
 inch from the symphisis, somewhat anterior, a strongly 
 marked spine is placed, giving a point of attachment to 
 the lower pillar of the external abdominal ring. The 
 descending ramus is that portion of the bone which 
 passes downwards and outwards, and joins the ascending 
 ramus of the ischium. The internal surface is smooth 
 and flat ; the external surface rough and irregular for 
 the attachment of muscles. The internal margin con- 
 curs to form the pubic arch ; the external margin, thin 
 and flat, enters into the formation of the obturator open- 
 ing. 
 
 Connexions. The ossa pubis are connected with the 
 ossa ilii and ischii by synostosis, and with each other by 
 synchondro-symphisis. 
 
 Muscles arising from the Ossa Ilii. 
 
 From the cristce Obliqui interni abdomini* 
 
 Transversales abdominis 
 Quadrati lumborum 
 Latissimi dorsi 
 Sacro Lumbales 
 Longissimi dorsi 
 From the external surfaces Glutaei maximi, medii, et 
 
 minimi 
 
 From internal surfaces Iliaci interni 
 From anterior inferior spi- Recti femoris 
 
 nous processes 
 
 From superior spinous pro- Tensores vaginae femori* 
 cesses Sartorii 
 
 Inserted into the ossa ilii. 
 
 Into the linea ilio-pectinea Psoae parvi 
 
 Into the crests of the ilium Obliqui abdominis extern! 
 
 Muscles arising from tJie Ossa Ischii. 
 From the spines Levatores ani 
 
 Superior gemelli 
 
52 
 
 Coccygei 
 
 From the tuberosities Quadrat! femoris 
 
 Bicipites 
 Semitendinosi 
 Inferior gemelli 
 Semimembranosi 
 Transversi perinaei 
 
 From the tuberosities and Transversales perinsei alteri 
 rami ascendentes Erectores penis 
 
 Obturatores extern! 
 Graciles 
 Tricipites 
 Erectores clitoridis 
 Obturatores intern! 
 
 Muscles arising from the Ossa Pubis. 
 
 From the horizontal plates Pectinales 
 and obturator margins Recti abdominis 
 
 Pyramidales 
 
 Obturatores extern! 
 
 Obturatores intern! 
 
 IJevatores an! 
 From the rami Tricipites 
 
 Graciles 
 
 Muscles inserted into the Ossa Pubis. 
 
 Into symphisis, spines, and Obliqui abdominis interni et 
 crest extern! 
 
 Transversales abdominis 
 
 OF THE SACRUM. 
 
 The sacrum is situated at the posterior part of the 
 pelvis, between the ossa ilii, above the os coxale, and 
 beneath the vertebral column. It is sometimes considered 
 as the base of the spine, and from this cause some ana- 
 tomists have enumerated the os sacrum and os coxale 
 with the vertebrae, calling them false vertebrae. It is 
 of a triangular shape, expanded above, contracted below: 
 it may be divided into two surfaces, two borders, and 
 into its base and apex. 
 
53 
 
 The posterior or spinal surface is convex, and marked 
 in the centre by several small projecting processes, 
 termed the spines ; sometimes they form one continued 
 ridge : beneath them the sacral canal terminates in a 
 triangular space open behind, but depended by a strong 
 ligamentous expansion, the sacro-cocygeal ligaments, 
 and bounded on either side by a bifid process (cornua 
 sacralia) : under this process, on either side, a foramen 
 passes, for the passage of the posterior branches of the 
 last sacral nerves. On either side of the spines the 
 posterior sacral foramina are placed, five pairs in number, 
 filled up partly by ligament; these openings transmit 
 the posterior divisions of the sacral nerves. 
 
 The anterior surface is smooth and concave, and 
 marked by four transverse lines indicating the original 
 division of the bone into five parts. On the sides are 
 four pairs of foramina and a notch inferiorly completed 
 into a fifth foramen by ligament ; sometimes, it forms 
 an osseous foramen common to it and the os coxale. 
 Passing outwards from these foramina may be observed 
 some superficial grooves indicating the course of these 
 nerves, and between these grooves the pyrifonnes mus- 
 cles take their origin. 
 
 The lateral margins present two large, broad, indented, 
 triangular surfaces, invested with cartilage superiorly, 
 by which the bones are connected to the ossa ilii. 
 
 The base is expanded, of an oval shape transversly, 
 and corresponds with the body of the last lumbar ver- 
 tebrae : on either side are two processes forming the 
 transverse spines; posteriorly, two articular processes, 
 hollow, and facing towards each other, corresponding 
 with the inferior ones of the last lumbar vertebrae. 
 
 The apex is directed downwards and connected with 
 the os coxale. The sacrum where it joins the body of 
 the last lumbar vertebrae forms a projecting angle, termed 
 the promontory (promontorium). The sacral canal is 
 continued with the vertebral canal and is of triangular 
 shape. 
 
 Connexions. It is connected superiorly to the last 
 lumbar vertebra; inferiorly to the os coxale; and late-, 
 rally with the ossa innominata by means of cartilage 
 and ligaments. 
 
54 
 
 Use. It forms the base of the trunk, and also affords 
 a powerful defence for the pelvic contents 
 
 Muscles arising from the Sacrum. 
 
 Latissimi dorsi Longissimi dorsi 
 
 Obliqui abdominis intern! Sacro-lumbales 
 Glutaei maximi Pyriformes 
 
 OF THE OS COXALE, VEL OSSA COXALIA. 
 
 The Os Coxale is situated immediately below the sa- 
 crum : in shape it resembles an inverted pyramid. This 
 bone in the infant consists of three or four parts, which 
 in the adult is found generally united into one bone. 
 The anterior surface is smooth and concave ; the poste- 
 rior surface convex ; the base is united to the apex of 
 the sacrum ; the apex is free and inflected forwards and 
 inwards. 
 
 Use. To form the posterior and inferior portion of 
 the pelvis and to support the intestinum rectum. 
 
 Muscles arising from the Os Coxale. 
 Glutsei maximi. 
 
 Muscles inserted into the Os Coxale.. 
 Coccygei Sphincter ani 
 
 Levatores anni 
 
 OF THE PELVIS IN GENERAL. 
 
 The Ossa, Innominata Sacrum and Os Coccygis arti- 
 culated together form the cavity termed the Pelvis ; and 
 as a whole it may be divided into two circumferences 
 and four regions. 
 
 The anterior region presents, in the middle line, the 
 symphisis pubis, the pubic arch, laterally the rami of 
 the pubis, the rami and tuberosities of the ischia, the ob- 
 
55 
 
 turator openings, the horizontal branches of the pubes, 
 with the cotyloid cavities. 
 
 The posterior region presents the sacrum with its 
 spines, foramina, and sacral canal ; the os coxale with 
 its ligaments. 
 
 In the lateral regions, on either side, are placed the 
 dorsum ilii, and at the lower part, the great sciatic 
 notches. 
 
 Internally the pelvis has been divided into two parts 
 by the linea ileo-pectinea, into a superior or abdominal 
 cavity, and into an inferior or true pelvic cavity. 
 
 The abdominal cavity is bounded on either side by the 
 fossa iliaca and crest of the ilium ; posteriorly, by the 
 promontory of the sacrum ; and anteriorly by the ante- 
 rior spinous processes of the ilium, by the crural arch, 
 and abdominal muscles. 
 
 The true pelvic cavity is bounded in front by the ossa 
 pubis ; laterally by the ossa ischii ; posteriorly by the 
 sacrum and os coccygis, and ischiatic notches. 
 
 The pelvis offers two circumferences, an upper and 
 lower. 
 
 The upper circumference is inclined upwards and for- 
 wards, and is marked out by the crests of the ilium, 
 promontory of the sacrum, crest and tubercles of the 
 pubis. 
 
 The lower circumference, or aperture, is much more 
 contracted ; it extends between the sacrum, ossa coxalia, 
 and ossa ischia, and looks downwards and backwards. 
 
 Parts formed by the union of the Bones of the Pelvis. 
 
 The acetabula or cotyfoid cavities. They are of he*, 
 mispherical shape, of about two inches in diameter, 
 situated inferiorly, and on the external surface, where 
 the three bones unite, and are turned obliquely outwards. 
 Each cavity is formed in the following proportions by 
 the os innominatum, viz. : the ilium rather less than 
 two fifths, the ischium rather more than two fifths, the 
 pubis one fifth. The margin is very prominent, but it 
 does not form an entire circumference, but is gradually 
 depressed anteriorly and inferiorly ; opposite the obtu- 
 rator foramen it is altogether interrupted by a deep 
 notch for the passage of the vessels supplying the joint* 
 
56 
 
 The cavity is invested with cartilage,, but it is wanting 
 towards the notch on the inner and lower part, here 
 the ligamentum teres is directly implanted into the 
 bone. 
 
 The obturator foramen. The obturator foramen, on 
 either side is a large oval aperture, formed by the union 
 of the os ischium and os pubis. At its superior margin 
 it presents an oblique notch for the passage of the ob- 
 turator vessels and nerves. The two obturator muscles 
 and ligaments completely cover this aperture. 
 
 The ischiatic notches are two large irregular cavities, 
 situated posteriorly, bounded by the ilium above, by the 
 ischium in front and below, by the external border of 
 the sacrum and os coxale posteriorly, and are divided into 
 two portions by the sacro-sciatic ligaments. 
 
 The superior or greater sciatic notch on either side, 
 gives passage to the pyriformes muscle, the gluteal, 
 ischiatic and internal pudic vessels and nerves. 
 
 By the inferior or lesser sciatic notch, the obturator 
 internus muscle leaves the pelvis, and the internal pudic 
 vessels and nerves re-enter that cavity. 
 
 Differences between the Male and Female Pelvis. 
 
 The male pelvis is strong, with small cavities and 
 narrow openings: the female pelvis is shallower and 
 wider in all its dimensions, the bones are lighter and 
 more slender. The ossa ilii are spread out, and thus 
 the enlarged uterus is better supported. The brim of 
 the pelvis is more elliptical, approaching less to a circle 
 than in the male. The size of the notch in the ilium, 
 and also the obturator foramen are much larger in the 
 female ; from this circumstance the breadth of the pel- 
 vis is greatly increased ; the angle of the vertebrae re- 
 cedes also to a greater distance backwards ; the os coxale 
 is more loose, and hence during parturition it may be 
 pushed backwards, which considerably enlarges the in- 
 ferior aperture. The tuberosities of the ischia are 
 placed more outwardly, thus the inferior aperture is 
 rendered larger. The ossa pubis in the male form, by 
 their junction, an acute angle, but in the female the 
 angle is wider eor^iderably. In short, the cavities and 
 outlets of the pelvis are broader and wider in all their 
 dimensions. 
 
57 
 
 The capacity of the pelvis is measured by four diam- 
 eters : 1st. the sacro-pubic, from the sacrum to the 
 inner surface of the symphisis pubis ; 2nd. the iliac, 
 from one ilium to the other, transversly, intersecting 
 the preceeding at right angles ; Srdly. two oblique, mea- 
 sured from the cotyloid wall of one side, to the sacro- 
 iliac symphisis on the other. The dimensions are thus 
 given by Mekel : 
 
 Between the anterior superior spinous pro- 
 cesses of the ossa ilii, transversly 
 From the middle of one crista to the same 
 
 point on the opposite side 
 
 Iliac diameter of the inlet 
 
 Oblique diameter of the inlet 
 
 Sacro-pubic diameter of the inlet 
 
 Iliac diameter of the true cavity 
 Oblique diameter of the true cavity 
 Sacro-pubic diameter of the true cavity 
 Transverse diameter of the outlet 
 
 Oblique diameter of the outlet 
 
 Sacro-pubic diameter of the outlet 
 
 Male 
 Pelvis. 
 
 Female 
 Pelvis. 
 
 in. lines 
 
 in. lines 
 
 7 8 
 
 8 6 
 
 8 3 
 
 9 4 
 
 4 6 
 
 5 
 
 4 5 
 
 4 5 
 
 4 
 
 4 4 
 
 4 
 
 4 8 
 
 5 
 
 5 4 
 
 5 
 
 4 8 
 
 3 
 
 4 5 
 
 3 
 
 4 6 
 
 3 3 
 
 4 4 
 
 OF THE INFERIOR EXTREMITIES. 
 
 The inferior extremities have been commonly divided 
 into three parts, viz : the thigh, leg, and foot. 
 
 OF THE OS FEMORIS. 
 
 The Os Femoris is the longest bone of the body, it is 
 the most cylindrical and the strongest, it is situated 
 between the acetabulum and tibia, it is not placed per- 
 pendicularly but inclines obliquely inwards. It may be 
 divided into its two extremities and body. 
 
 The superior extremity presents the following parts : 
 the head (caput), the neck (cervix ossis femoris), 
 and the two trochanters (trochanteres). 
 
 The head 
 
 Forms a considerable segment of a. 
 sphere, is directed upwards and 
 
58 
 
 nwards, and closely articulated 
 with the acetabulum. It is smooth, 
 and invested with cartilage, ex- 
 cepting in the centre or the inner 
 part, here may be observed a small 
 depression into which the round 
 ligament is inserted. 
 
 The neck. The neck of the bone is placed im- 
 
 mediately under the head, smaller 
 above than below, and passes 
 downwards and outwards. The 
 direction is more or less oblique, 
 and the position of the head is 
 consequently various, as a more 
 or less obtuse angle is formed. 
 This angle varies at different pe- 
 riods of life, in the aged subject 
 the head frequently sinking below 
 the level of the trochanter major. 
 The neck is rough for the attach- 
 ment of the capsular ligament, 
 and perforated by numerous fora- 
 mina for the transmission of small 
 blood vessels. 
 
 Trochanter major Represents the direct end of the 
 bone, and is a large quadrilateral 
 process, and placed a little below 
 the level of the head. At the 
 base, internally, there is a deep 
 depression, (fovea trachanterica), 
 for the insertion of the small 
 rotator muscles. 
 
 Trochanter minor Is of pyramidal shape, and is placed 
 posteriorly at the base of the neck 
 below the level of the great tro- 
 chanter. Between the trochan- 
 ters posteriorly, there is an ob- 
 lique line (linea quadrata) at the 
 base of the neck. There is like- 
 wise a line anteriorly (tinea tro- 
 chanterica anterior). 
 
 The body Presents two surfaces, an anterior 
 
59 
 
 and posterior. The anterior sur- 
 face is smooth and convex ; the 
 posterior surface is concave, and 
 marked by a strong ridge, called 
 the linea aspera. This ridge com- 
 mences from the root of each 
 trochanter by a separate line ; the 
 two lines unite about the middle 
 third, and form one continued 
 ridge, which, at the lower third, 
 bifurcates to terminate at the two 
 condyles, bounding there a smooth 
 triangular surface of bone, the 
 popliteal space. At the upper 
 part of the middle third the fora- 
 men for the nutritious artery of 
 the bone is placed, with an up- 
 ward direction. 
 
 The inferior extre- Is expanded, forming two large pro- 
 mity cesses, the condyles ; the outer con- 
 
 dyle is the largest, the inner the 
 longest. The external is rough 
 for the attachment of the exter- 
 nal lateral ligament. The inter- 
 nal offers a tuberosity for the in- 
 sertion of the tendon of the ad- 
 ductor magnus. Between the 
 condyles, anteriorly, is a smooth 
 depressed surface, for the patella 
 (fovea intercondyloidea anterior); 
 posteriorly, a deep notch for the 
 popliteal vessels (fovea intercon- 
 dyl'oidea posterior). Above the 
 condyles, the bone is rough for 
 the attachment of the capsular 
 ligament. Inferiorly the condy- 
 les are covered with cartilage, 
 forming an articulating surface ; 
 this surface extends considerably 
 backwards. 
 Connexions It is connected above by enathrosis with 
 
 the os innominatum : below, by angular ginglymus with 
 
 the tibia and the patella. 
 
60 
 
 Muscles arising from the Os Femoris. 
 
 Fron the convex surface of Cruraeus 
 
 the body 
 
 From linea aspera Vastus internus 
 
 Vastus externus 
 Biceps flexor cruris 
 From external condyle Poplitseus 
 Plantaris 
 
 From external and internal Gastronomius externus 
 condyles 
 
 Muscles inserted into the Os Femoris. 
 Trochanter major Glutaeus medius 
 
 Glutseus minimus 
 Trochanter minor Psoas magnus 
 
 Iliacus internus 
 Root of trochanter major Pyriformis 
 
 GemelH 
 
 Obturator externus et inter- 
 nus 
 
 Linea quadrata Quadratus femoris 
 
 Outer border Glutseus maximus 
 
 Inner border Pectin alis 
 
 Triceps abductor femoris 
 
 The Leg is composed of three bones, the Patella, Tibia, 
 and Fibula. 
 
 OF THE PATELLA. 
 
 The Patella is placed between the condyles of the os 
 femoris of unequally triangular shape, it may be divi- 
 ded into its base, apex, anterior and posterior surface. 
 The anterior surface is convex and rough and gives at- 
 tachment to tendinous aponeuroses; the posterior surface 
 is smooth and invested by cartilage and the synovial 
 membrane, and is divided into two surfaces by an obli- 
 que ridge ; the external is the largest. The base is in- 
 clined upwards and gives attachment to the extensor 
 tendons, the apex downwards towards the tubercle of 
 
61 
 
 the tibia, to which it is connected by a remarkably 
 strong ligament. 
 
 Use, It defends the knee joint anteriorly, it also 
 serves as a pulley for the tendons of the extensors of 
 the leg. 
 
 Connexions. It is connected to the tibia by syneu- 
 rosis, to the femur and tibia by angular ginglymus. 
 
 Muscles inserted into the Patella : 
 
 Rectus femoris Vastus internus 
 
 Cruraus Vastus externus 
 
 OF THE TIBIA. 
 
 The Tibia is a long thick triangular bone, situated at 
 the inner and anterior part of the leg, continued in 
 almost a straight line with the femur. It is divided 
 into a body, superior and inferior extremities. 
 
 Superior extremity is expanded and transversely oval ; 
 it presents, on its upper surface, two articulating de- 
 pressions lined with cartilage; the internal oval, the 
 external circular (cavitates glenoidece), separated from 
 each other by a projecting process, termed the spine. 
 Anterior and posterior to the spine, are two depressions 
 uncovered by cartilage, for the attachment of the cru- 
 cial ligaments. The anterior surface is of triangular 
 shape, the base being above ; the apex below, where it 
 forms a projecting process termed the tuberosity (tuber. 
 ositas tibice) . The posterior surface is depressed, forming 
 the popliteal notch, and also rough for the attachment of 
 muscles. Externally, the bone offers a slightly convex 
 surface, receiving the head of the fibula ; internally, it 
 is marked for the attachment of the semimembranosus 
 muscle. The body is of triangular shape, it presents 
 three angles, three surfaces. An anterior angle acute 
 above, forming the spine, rounded inferiorly; a posterior 
 internal angle, rounded and extended downwards to the 
 inner maleolus ; a posterior external angle, sharp for 
 the attachment of the interosseous ligament. The 
 angles bound the three surfaces. The internal surface 
 is smooth and convex, merely covered by the integuments 
 

 and periosteum, and is placed between the anterior and 
 posterior internal angle. The external surface is concave 
 at the upper part, receiving the tibialis anticus, rounded 
 inferiorly, and is placed between the anterior and pos- 
 terior external angle. The posterior surface is broader, 
 and is placed between the two posterior angles, and is 
 rough for the attachment of muscles ; in about the upper 
 third of this surface the foramen directed downwards 
 and forwards for the nutritious vessels may be observed. 
 The inferior extremity is of a quadrilateral shape, ante- 
 riorly convex and advancing forwards to support the 
 capsular, and tibio-tarsal ligaments; posteriorly flat- 
 tened and grooved for the tendon of the flexor longus 
 pollicis ; internally lenghtened by a triangular process, 
 termed the internal malleolus ; externally notched and 
 invested by cartilage for connexion with the fibula; 
 lastly, the anterior surface is concave and invested by 
 cartilage, deeper on the inner than on its outer side, 
 and articulates with the head of the astragalus. 
 
 Connexions.' It is connected with four bones : above, 
 with the os femoris and patella, by angular ginglymus ; 
 with the fibula, by arthrodia and syneurosis ; inferiorly, 
 with the astragalus, by angular ginglymus. 
 
 Muscles inserted into the Tibia : 
 
 Internal and anterior sur- Semimembranosus 
 face superiorly Semitendinosus 
 
 Gracilis 
 
 Sartorius 
 Posteriorly and superiorly Poplitaeus 
 
 MuscJes arising from the Tibia : 
 
 From anterior surface Tibialis anticus 
 
 Extensor longus digitorum 
 
 From posterior surface Gastrocnemius internus 
 
 Tibialis posticus 
 Flexor digitorum profundus 
 
 OF THE FIBULA. 
 
 The Fibula is a long slender bone, placed on the outer 
 
63 
 
 side of the leg and somewhat posteriorly, almost oppo- 
 site the external and posterior angle of the tibia. In 
 shape, rounded superiorly ; triangular inferiorly. It 
 is divided into its body and two extremities. 
 
 The superior extremity is rounded and forms the 
 head (capitulum), invested with cartilage. The head 
 is slightly concave, directed inwards and forwards, and 
 joins the external margin of the tibia. The outer sur- 
 face is rough for the insertion of the biceps and external 
 lateral ligament. Below the head a neck is sometimes 
 described. 
 
 The body. The internal surface is divided by a lon- 
 gitudinal ridge, which gives attachment to the interos- 
 seous ligament ; and, by this ridge, into an anterior and 
 posterior portion. The external surface is grooved, and 
 looks forwards ; and below, backwards. 
 
 The posterior surface is directed a little outwards 
 above, at the lower part, inwards ; is marked by the at- 
 tachment of muscles, and presents in its middle part a 
 foramen, directed forwards und downwards, for the nu 
 tritious vessels. 
 
 The body presents three borders, an anterior, an in 
 ternal, and an external. 
 
 The inferior extremity is elongated, and terminates in 
 a pyramidal process, called the outer malleolus, which is 
 larger and descends lower than the internal. The mal- 
 leolus externally is rough for the attachment of liga- 
 ments ; internally it is invested with cartilage, smooth, 
 and rests against the astragalus ; above it presents a tri- 
 angular surface, by which it is connected with the tibia. 
 Posteriorly it is grooved for the tendons of the peroneus 
 longus and brevis ; anteriorly it is marked by the at- 
 tachment of ligaments. 
 
 Connexions. It is connected to the tibia by arthrodia 
 and syneurosis ; to the astragalus by arthrodia. 
 
 Muscles arising from the Fibula. 
 From the external border Gastrocnemius internus 
 and posterior surface Peroueus longus 
 Peroneus brevis 
 Flexor longus pollicis 
 
 From the anterior border Extensor longus pollicis 
 and anterior portion of Extensor digitorum longus 
 the anterior surface Peroneus tertius 
 
64 
 
 From the posterior surface Tibialis posticus 
 and posterior portion of 
 the anterior surface 
 
 Muscles inserted into the Fibula. 
 Biceps flexor cruris 
 
 OF THE BONES OF THE FOOT. 
 
 The Foot is composed of the Tarsus, Metatarsus, and 
 Toes. 
 
 OF THE TARSUS. 
 
 The Tarsus is placed between the tibia and metatar- 
 sus, and consists of seven bones, viz. the astragalus, 
 the os calcis, the os naviculare, the os cubb'ideum, and 
 the three ossa cuneiformia. 
 
 OF THE ASTRAGALUS. 
 
 The Astragalus is somewhat of a cubical form, and 
 occupies the superior part of the tarsus ; it presents six 
 surfaces. The superior surface in front is contracted 
 and rough for attachment of ligaments, posteriorly con- 
 vex, and covered with cartilage, and this portion is re- 
 ceived into the cavity formed by the lower end of the 
 tibia. The inferior surface is concave and offers two 
 separate articulating surfaces, for connexion with the 
 os calcis ; the posterior, the largest, is concave the an- 
 terior and internal is convex. The external surface 
 rests against the fibula ; the internal superiorly articu- 
 lates with the tibia; inferiorly, is rough without carti- 
 lage, and ^gives attachment to ligaments. The anterior 
 surface is convex, rounded, forms the head, and is re- 
 ceived into the concavity of the scaphoid. The posterior 
 surface is narrow and crossed by a groove, for the tendon 
 of the flexor longus pollicis. 
 
65 
 
 Connexions. Above, it is connected by angular gin- 
 glymus to the tibia and fibula ; below, by arthrodia, to 
 the os calcis; anteriorly, to the j-raplioid. 
 
 arising from the Asiragalu*. 
 Extensor brevis digitorum pedis. 
 
 OF THE OS CALCIS, 
 
 The Os Calcis is placed postcrioily, is the largest bone 
 of the tarsus, and forms its bu>is. The superior surface 
 is divided into two portions; the posterior, which is un- 
 equal, and the anterior, which is convex and covered by 
 cartilage, and articulated by two surfaces with the as- 
 tragalus. The inferior surface is narrow, and posteri- 
 orly presents two tubercles, of which the inner is the 
 largest. The internal lateral surface is a little excava- 
 ted, for the passage of blood V; s^cls, nerves and tendons. 
 The external lateral surface is covered only by liga- 
 ments and the common integuments, and is grooved for 
 the tendons of the peronei. The posterior surface is 
 convex, smooth above, rough and irregular below for 
 the attachment of the tendo Achilles. The anterior 
 surface is somewhat triangular, partly concave, and 
 comic ctcd to the os cubbides. 
 
 Connexions. It is connected with astragalus and os 
 cubuides. 
 
 Muscles arising from Os Calcis. 
 
 From the dorsum Extensor brevis digitorum 
 
 From the under surface Flexor brevis digitorum pe- 
 dis 
 
 Flexor brevis pollicis 
 Flexor accessorius 
 Adductor pollicis 
 
 From inner border Abductor pollicis 
 
 From outer border Abductor minimi digiti 
 
 Muscles inserted into the Os Calcis. 
 
 Gastrocnemius externus Plantaris 
 Gastrocneniius intcrnus 
 
OF THE OS NAVICULARE, OR OS 
 SCAPHOIDEUM. 
 
 The Os Naviculare occupies the middle and inner part 
 of the tarsus. The posterior surface is concave, covered 
 with cartilage, and receives the convex surface of the 
 astragalus. The anterior surface is convex,, and divided 
 into three smaller cartilaginous surfaces, for connexion 
 with the ossa cuneiformia. The inner border termi- 
 nates in an obtuse point ; the outer border joins the os 
 cuboides. 
 
 Connexions. It is connected to the astragalus,, three 
 cuneiform bones, and os cuboideum. 
 
 Muscles inserted into the os naviculare. 
 Tibialis posticus. 
 
 OF THE OS CUBOIDEUM. 
 
 The Os Cuboideum is placed at the external side of 
 the tarsus : it offers six surfaces. A superior surface, 
 flat and rough, and covered by the extensor brevis ; an 
 inferior surface, grooved for the passage of tendon of 
 the peroneus longus ; a posterior surface, which is car- 
 tilaginous, broad, partly convex, partly concave, receiv- 
 ing the os calcis ; an anterior surface, divided by a line, 
 receives the fourth and fifth bones of the metatarsus ; 
 an external surface, grooved for the tendon of the pero- 
 neus longus ; lastly an internal surface, which presents 
 articulating surfaces for connexion with the os scaphoi- 
 deum and cuneiforme externum. 
 
 Connexions. It is connected to the os calcis to the 
 fourth and fifth metatarsal bones, to the scaphoid, and 
 external cuneiform bones. 
 
 Muscles arising from Os Cuboideum. 
 
 Adductor pollicis pedis Flexor brevis pollicis pedis 
 
 Flexor brevis minimi digiti 
 
 Muscles inserted into the Os Cuboideum. 
 Peroneus brevis Peroneus tertius. 
 
67 
 OF THE THREE OSSA CUNEIFORMIA. 
 
 The three Cuneiform bones constitute the most ante- 
 rior part of the tarsus. We may divide each bone into 
 its base,, apex, and four surfaces. 
 
 The [first the cuneiforme internum is the largest ; 
 the base is convex and turned downwards ; the apex is 
 turned upwards towards the dorsum of the foot; the 
 posterior surface is concave, and united with the sca- 
 phoid ; the anterior surface., which is semilunar, sup- 
 ports the first bone of the metatarsus ; the internal late- 
 ral surface is unconnected ; the external lateral surface 
 is connected above to the second cuneiform bone, and be- 
 low to the second bone of the metatarsus. 
 
 The second the cuneiforme medium is the smallest : 
 the basis is turned upwards ; the apex downwards ; the 
 posterior surface is triangular, and connected to the 
 middle surface of the scaphoid ; the anterior surface 
 supports the second metatarsal bone ; the internal late- 
 ral surface joins the cuneiforme internum ; the external 
 lateral surface is connected with cuneiforme externum. 
 
 The third the cuneiforme externum : the basis is 
 turned upwards towards the dorsum of the foot ; the 
 apex downwards ; the posterior surface, which is trian- 
 gular, is joined to the external anterior surface of the 
 scaphoid ; the anterior surface, which is also triangular, 
 receives the third bone of the metatarsus ; the internal 
 lateral surface joins the cuneiforme medium ; the exter- 
 nal lateial surface is connected with the cubb'ides. 
 
 Muscles arising from the Ossa Cuneiformia. 
 Flexor brevis pollicis Adductor pollicis 
 
 Muscles inserted into the three Ossa Cuneiformia^ 
 Into internal cuneiform bone Tibialis anticus 
 
 Peroneus longus 
 Into internal and middle Tibialis posticus 
 
 cuneiform bone 
 
68 
 OF THE METATARSAL BONES. 
 
 The Metatarsus is the second division of the foot, and 
 consists of live bones: we may observe i;i them the 
 superior surface, which is convex and a^Lis in forming 
 the dorsum of tke footj an inferior surface concave, 
 forming an. arch; hvo lateral mt, I'giiis ; an anterior 
 margin, joining the phalanges; and a jjotterior margin, 
 united to the taibiis. 
 
 Each of these five bones is divided into its body, 
 posterior and anterior extremities. 
 
 The puslciior cxirvitrilicx are triangular, excavated, 
 covered by cartilage,, and joined to the bones of the 
 tarsus; the tmtetiur 'extremities are culled the heads, 
 are rounded, smooth, and convex, and are articulated 
 with the first phalanges. 
 
 The body has tLree surfaces and three angles ; a supe- 
 rior surface, convex; and two lateral surfaces. 
 
 The metacarpal bones diiFer greatly from one another. 
 
 The fir &l luetatarsal is the tliickest and shortest : on 
 the under surface of the head are two depressions re- 
 ceiving theossa sessumoidea. It is articulated with the 
 first phalanx of the great toe and os cuneiibrnie internum. 
 
 The second melt/tat'&al is the longest ; the posterior 
 extremity is triangular and wedged ia between the 
 cuneiform bones. 
 
 It articulates wil/i six bonea ; posteriorly with the os 
 cuueiformc medium ; laterally, with the os cune'i forme 
 externum and internum and with t'ic first and third 
 metatarsiil bones ; and anteriorly with the fii^t phalanx 
 of the second toe. 
 
 The ihird wcialarsal bo^e is smaller than the second,, 
 and the posterior extremity narrower. It articulates 
 with the os cuneiforme externum, with the metatarsal 
 bones of the second and fourth toes, and wiih the first 
 phalanx of the third toe. 
 
 The fourth metalarsal is broader and shorter than the 
 third ; posteriorly., it joins the os cuboidcum, the os cunei- 
 forme externum, the metatarsal bones of the third and 
 fifth toe ; with the first phalanx of the fourth it is con- 
 nected anteriorly. 
 
 The t fifth metatarsal may be at once distinguished, 
 ft is the shortest ; the posterior extremity is transversely 
 
broader and very oblique ; it terminates in a tuberosity 
 which projects beyond the plane of the tarsal bones. It 
 articulates with the os cuboideum and with the meta- 
 tarsal bone of the fourth toe ; anteriorly, it is connected 
 with the first phalanx of the outer toe. 
 
 The metatarsal bones are connected to the tarsus and 
 first phalanges by arthrodia. 
 
 OF THE TOES. 
 
 The Toes form the third division of the foot, and are 
 placed at the anterior margin of the metatarsus. They 
 are composed of fourteen bones; three phalanges to 
 each toe, excepting the great toe, which possesses only 
 two. The phalanges are classed into posterior, middle, 
 and anterior row. 
 
 The posterior are the longest, the anterior the shortest, 
 excepting that of the great toe, which is of considerable 
 size. Their figure and division in description presents 
 the same characters as that of the fingers. 
 
 They are connected by arthrodia to the metatarsus ; 
 with each other, by angular ginglymus. 
 
 The ossa sessamoidea are found at the base of the 
 great toe, they form a groove for the tendon of the 
 flexor longus pollicis. 
 
 Muscles attached to the bones of the Metatarsus : 
 
 Inserted into thejirst met a- Tibialis anticus 
 tarsal Peroneus longus 
 
 Adductor pollicis pedis 
 
 Transversalis 
 
 Into the middle metatarsal Tibialis posticus 
 Into thejlfth Peroneus brevis 
 
 Peroneus tertius 
 
 Flexor brevis minimi digit! 
 
 Abductor minimi digit! 
 
 Interossei 
 
 Muscles connected with the Phalanges. 
 
 With the great toe Flexor longus pollicis 
 
 Flexor brevis pollicis 
 
70 
 
 Extensor proprius pollicis 
 
 Adductor pollicis pedis 
 
 Abductor pollicis pedis 
 
 With the little toe Flexor brevis minimi digiti 
 
 pedis 
 
 Abductor minimi digiti pe- 
 dis 
 
 Adductor minimi pedis 
 
 With the phalanges of all Flexor longus digitorum 
 the toes pedis profundus 
 
 Flexor brevis digitorum pe- 
 dis sublimis 
 
 Lumbricales 
 
 Extensor longus digitorum 
 pedis 
 
 Extensor brevis digitorum 
 pedis 
 
 Interossei 
 
SYNDESMOLOGY. 
 
 THE bones of the skeleton are united to each other: 
 their mode of union varies : it is, however, expressed 
 by the general term articulation. The connecting media 
 are cartilage, nbro-cartilage, synovial apparatus, and 
 fibrous membranes variously arranged, termed ligaments. 
 Articulations are of three kinds moveable, immoveable, 
 and mixt. The articulation with sensible motion, is 
 termed diarthrosis (Aj, per ; afyov articulus), an arti- 
 culation separate, between contiguous surfaces. There 
 are three kinds of diarthrosis. 
 
 1. Enarthrosis (ev, in; affyov articulus) 
 
 2. Arthrodia (a$fyu$ia) 
 
 3. Ginglymus (Tiyyhvpoo- cardo) 
 
 Enarthrosis Or ball and socket joint, is that ar- 
 
 ticulation in which the great head 
 of one bone is received into the 
 cavity of another. 
 
 Arthrodia Differs from the preceding only in 
 
 the cavity being more superficial ; 
 or, according to Vesalius, " it is 
 that articulation of two bones 
 adapted for motion, where it is 
 not, at first sight obvious which of 
 the two has the head or cavity, or 
 where they are joined by plain 
 surfaces." 
 
72 
 
 Ginglymus Properly signifies a hinge, is that ar- 
 
 ticulation where the bones receive 
 and are received by each other, 
 and when their motion is recipro- 
 cal on each other, resembling a 
 hinge. 
 
 Ginglymus is again distinguished into angular, late- 
 ral, and trochoid. 
 
 Angular ginglymus When one bone in moving makes an 
 
 angle with another. 
 
 Lateral ginglymus When the motion is lateral 
 Trochoid When one bone turns upon another, 
 
 as a wheel does upon its axis 
 
 The immoveable articulations are termed synarthroses 
 , cum; afyov, articulus). Under- this class may 
 be included, 
 
 1. Suture (sutura, a seam} 
 
 2. Harmony (a% u adapto) 
 
 3. Schindylesis (2%tv&Ancn<7 calami fissura) 
 
 4. Gomphosis (Toppo? claviis) 
 
 Suture Is that articulation where bones are 
 
 indented into each other, putting 
 on the resemblance of a seam. 
 
 Harmony Differs from suture, in that the ine- 
 
 qualities are small; the union re- 
 presenting only a kind of line 
 
 Schindylesis Implies that a plate of bone is re- 
 
 ceived into a groove of another 
 bone 
 
 Gomphosis Is the fixing of one bone into ano- 
 
 ther, as a nail is fixed in a board 
 
 The third general kind of articulation partakes of 
 both the former two, the moveable and immoveable, and 
 hence it is termed amphiarthrosis (appi, utrinque; afyov, 
 articulus); the mixed articulation. 
 
 The aggregate of the means by which the connection 
 
73 
 
 of the bones is effected, is what is called symphysis* 
 (2vv<pv<ri<r o-uv cum <pvu eresco). Symphysis is either 
 with or without a medium. 
 
 The connexion or symphysis of bones, with a medium, 
 is of three kinds : 
 
 1 Syneurosis (*Luv, cum; vevgov, nervus); connexion 
 by ligament. 
 
 2 Synchondrosis (2t/v, cum; x, ov tyo<r, cartilago) ; 
 connexion by cartilage. 
 
 3 Syssarcosis (5>v, cum; tra^caro); connexion by 
 muscle. 
 
 By Bichat the motion of joints has been divided into 
 four kinds : opposition, circumduction, rotation, gliding. 
 
 Opposition Is the motion which is performed in 
 
 two opposite directions; for in- 
 stance; from flexion to extension; 
 from abduction to adduction. 
 This motion is general or limited. 
 
 Circumduction Is the motion by which the bone 
 describes a kind of cone, the sum- 
 mit of which is in the superior 
 articulation ; the basis in the in- 
 ferior. 
 
 Rotation Differs from the proceeding motion : 
 
 here the organ remains in the same 
 situation; it only turns on its axis. 
 
 Gliding Is that motion by which two surfaces 
 
 meet in a reverse direction, by 
 gliding as it were, one over the 
 other. 
 
 * Symphisis properly signifies the growing together of parts : when used to 
 rpress the articulation of bones, it does not seem to comprehend, under the 
 
 meaning generally given to it, any thing relating to form or motion of conjoined 
 bones ; and as the different modes of connection are expressed in cl 
 
 it might, with propriety, be discarded. 
 
 clearer terms, 
 
74 
 OP THE ARTICULATIONS. 
 
 ARTICULATIONS OF THE VERTEBRAL 
 COLUMN. 
 
 Articulation, Class, 
 
 and Division Ligaments. 
 
 Articulation of the An anterior and posterior vertebral 
 bodies of the ligament (ligamentum commune 
 vertebras. anterius et posterius vertebrarum) ; 
 
 cl.Amphiarthrosis. crucial ligaments (ligamentia cru- 
 cialia) ; the intervertebral liga- 
 ments or fibro cartilages (ligamenta 
 intervertebralia) 
 Arches of the ver- A peculiar ligament 
 
 bra. (Ligamenta subflava) 
 
 cl. Si/neurosis. 
 
 Articular processes. Cervical, inter-spinous inter-trans* 
 
 cl. Diarthrosis. verse ligaments synovial capsules. 
 
 cliv. Arthrodia. (Ligamenta inter-spinosa et inter- 
 
 transversalia, et membrane? syno- 
 
 viales) 
 
 Motion. Flexion,, extension, lateral motion, and 
 some degree of rotation. 
 
 Articulation of the An anterior and posterior annular 
 
 head with the and capsular ligament, synovial 
 
 atlas. membrane. (Ligamentum capsula- 
 
 cl. Diarthrosis. re, et annuli anterior is et posteriori^ 
 
 div. Arthrodia. atlantis, membrana synovialis) 
 
 Motion. Very sligbt 
 
 Vertebra dentata Two lateral and perpendicular liga- 
 and os occipitis. ments. (Ligamenta alarm et liga- 
 
 cl. Sy neurosis. mentum perpendiculare) 
 
 'Atlas with vertebra Transverse ligament and synovial 
 dentata. capsules. (Ligamentum transver. 
 
 >el. Diarthrosis. sale et membrana? synomales) 
 
 div. Trockoides. 
 Motion. Rotation. 
 
75 
 ARTICULATION OF THE LOWER JAW. 
 
 The inferior maxillary bone forms a double articulation 
 with the temporal bone, the condyloid processes of the 
 former being received into the condyloid fossae of the 
 latter. 
 
 Temporo-maxil- External and internal lateral and 
 lary. stylo-maxillary ligaments and 
 
 cl. Diarthrosis. inter-articular cartilage and syno- 
 
 div. Arthrodia. vial membrane. (Ligamentum la- 
 
 ( double) terale internum et externum, liga- 
 
 mentum stylo-maxillare; cartilago 
 inter-articularis et membrana sy- 
 nomalis) 
 
 Motion. Upwards and backwards, downwards and 
 forwards and lateral motion. 
 
 ARTICULATION OF THE CLAVICLE TO 
 THE STERNUM. 
 
 Sterno-clavicular. An anterior posterior and rhomboid 
 cl. Diarthrosis. ligament, aninter-clavicularliga- 
 
 div. Arthrodia. ment, inter-articular cartilage and 
 
 synovial membrane. (Ligamen- 
 tum anterius et posterius, ligamen- 
 tum costo-clavicufare, ligamentum 
 transversum, cartilago inter-arti- 
 cularis, membrana synoviatis) 
 
 Motion. Upwards and downwards, backwards and 
 forwards. 
 
 ARTICULATION OF THE CLAVICLE WITH 
 THE SCAPULA. 
 
 Scapulo-clavicular. Anterior and posterior ligament, in- 
 cl. Diarthrosis. ter- articular cartilage, synovial 
 
 div. Arthrodia. membrane 
 
76 
 
 (Ligamentum acromio - clavicular e 
 superius et inferius, cartilago inter - 
 articularis, membrana synovialis J 
 
 Motion. Slight degree of yielding. 
 
 Coraco-clavicular. Conoid and trapezoid ligaments 
 
 cl. Syneurosis. (Ligamentum conbideum et trapezd- 
 
 ideum) 
 
 Ligaments proper An anterior or triangular ligament. 
 to the scapula. Posterior or transverse ligament 
 of the neck (Sir A. Cooper). 
 (Ligamentum graco-acromiale, li- 
 gamentum coraco-costoideum, liga- 
 mentum cervicis scapulas) 
 
 ARTICULATION OF THE HUMERUS WITH 
 THE SCAPULA. 
 
 Scapulo-humeral. Fibrous capsule, synovial capsule., 
 
 cl. Diarthrosis. glenoid ligament. (Ligamentum 
 
 div. Enarthrosis. capsulare Jibrosum, ligamentum 
 
 glendideum, membrana synovialis) 
 
 Motion. Rotation and circumduction. 
 
 ARTICULATION OF THE HUMERUS WITH 
 THE RADIUS AND ULNA. 
 
 The elbow joint is formed by the condyles and the 
 humerus above, and by the superior extremities of the 
 radius and ulna below. 
 
 Humero-cubital. An anterior and posterior ligament. 
 cl. Diarthrosis. Two lateral and synovial capsules. 
 
 'div. Angular gin- (Ligamentum cubiti anterius et 
 glymus. posterius. Ligamentum cubiti la- 
 
 ter ale internum et externum mem- 
 brana synovialis) 
 Motion. Flexion and extension. 
 
77 
 RADIO-ULNAE ARTICULATIONS. 
 
 Radio-uhiar (su- The coronary ligament, synovial 
 
 periorly). capsule. (Ligamentum radii an- 
 
 cl. Diarthrosis. nulare, membrana synovialis} 
 div. Arthrodia. 
 
 Radio-ulnar (mid- Interosseous and oblique ligament. 
 
 die}. (Ligamentum antibrachii inter -os- 
 
 cl. Syneurosis. ' seum ligamentum obliquam) 
 
 Radio-ulnar (infe- Sacciform ligament and an inter- 
 
 riorly). articular cartilage. (Membrana 
 
 cl. Diarthrosis. capsularis sacciformis et cartilago 
 
 div. Later algingly- inter articularis) 
 
 mus. 
 
 Motion. Supination and Pronation. 
 
 ARTICULATION OF THE CARPUS WITH 
 THE METACARPUS. 
 
 The Wrist joint is formed by the radius above, by the 
 scaphoid and lunar bones below; the inter-articular 
 cartilage of the ulna is connected with the synovial cap-, 
 sule, and by this means only does the ulna enter into 
 the formation of the articulation. 
 
 Radio-carpal. An anterior, a posterior, two lateral 
 cl. Diarthrosis. ligaments, and a synovial capsule. 
 
 div. Arthrodia. (Ligamentum radio-carpaiis arti- 
 
 culi palmar e et dor sale, ligamen- 
 tum radiale et cubitale, membrana 
 synovialis) 
 
 -Moft'ow.--Flexion and extension, abduction, adduc- 
 tion, and slight rotatory motion. 
 
 ARTICULATION OF THE BONES OF THE 
 CARPUS. 
 
 Bones of the Car- Dorsal and palmar ligaments, exter. 
 pus* nal and internal ligaments, syno* 
 
 H 3 
 
78 
 
 cl Diarlhrosis. vial capsules. (Ligamenta ex- 
 
 div. Arthrodia. terna et internet, palmaria et dor- 
 
 salia membranes synomales) 
 
 Carpo-metacarpal. Synovial capsules, dorsal and pal- 
 mar ligaments. (Ligamenta dor- 
 salia et palmaria, capsules syno- 
 males) 
 No motionslight degree of yielding. 
 
 Metacarpal bone of A fibrous capsule and synovial mem- 
 the thumb with brane. (Ligamentum capsulare 
 the trapezium. jibrosum et membrana capsularis) 
 
 cl. Diarth'osis. 
 
 div. Arthrodia. 
 
 Motion. Flexion and extension, abduction, adduction. 
 
 Metacarpal bones Inter-osseous ligaments. (Liga- 
 
 rvith each other. menta interossea) 
 Syneurosis. 
 metacarpus with Anterior, posterior, lateral liga- 
 
 Phafanges. ments and synovial capsules. 
 
 cl. Diarthrosis. (Ligamenta anteriora, posteriora, 
 
 div. Arthiodia. et later alia, et membranes synovi- 
 
 ales) 
 
 Motion. Flexion, extension, adduction, abduction, 
 circumduction. 
 
 Articulation be- Anterior, posterior, lateral liga- 
 tween the pha- ments, synovial capsules. (Liga- 
 langes. menta anteriora, posteriora, et la- 
 
 ter alia, et membranes synomales). 
 
 Motion. Flexion and extension. 
 
 ARTICULATION OF THE RIBS WITH THE 
 BODIES OF THE DORSAL VERTEBRA 
 
 Costo-vertebral. An anterior ligament, an inter-arti- 
 cl. Diarthrosis. cular ligament and synovial cap- 
 
 div. Gingtymus. sule. (Ligamentum capitulorum 
 
79 
 
 costarum et inter-articular e, et 
 membrana synovia/is) 
 
 Tubercle of the rib External transverse ligament, syno- 
 rvith transverse vial capsule. (Ligamentum exter- 
 process of the num transversale, et membrana 
 vertebra. synovialis) 
 
 cl. Diarthrosis. 
 Arthrodia. 
 
 Neck of the rib An external and internal ligament. 
 with transverse (Ligamentum cervicis costarum in- 
 process of the ternum et externum} 
 vertebra and ar- 
 ticular surface. 
 
 cl. Syneurosis. 
 
 Sterno-costal. An anterior and posterior ligament, 
 
 c I. Diarthrosis. and synovial capsule. (Ligamen- 
 
 div. Arthrodia, ra- turn anterius et posterius 3 membra- 
 
 ther Synchondrosis. na synovialis) 
 
 Motion. Upwards and outwards, downwards and 
 inwards. 
 
 ARTICULATIONS OP THE STERNUM. 
 
 Bones of the Ster- An anterior and posterior ligament. 
 num. (Ligamentum anterius et posteri- 
 
 cl. Syneurosis. us). 
 
 Motion. Forwards and downwards. 
 
 ARTICULATIONS OF THE PELVIS. 
 
 Sacro-cocygeal. Anterior and posterior vertebral liga- 
 cl. Amphiarthrosis. ment. (Ligamentum commune an- 
 terius et posterius vertebrarum). 
 
 Sacro-iliac. Sacro-iliac ligaments, greater and 
 
 cl. Synchondrosis. smaller sacro-schiatic ligaments 
 and synovial capsules. (Liga- 
 mentum sacro-iliacum superius et 
 inferiuSj ligamentumposticum mag- 
 
80 
 
 num, vel tuberoso-sacrum, liga- 
 
 mentum posticum breve vel spinoso- 
 
 sacrum, et membrance synovialis.) 
 
 Motion. Very slight motion, if any : it may occur 
 
 from continued pressure during protracted parturition. 
 
 ARTICULATION OF THE PUBES. 
 
 Pubes. An anterior posterior ligament and 
 
 cl. Synchondrosis. and fibro cartilage. (Ligamentum 
 anterius et posterius, ligamentum 
 jibro-cartilagineum) 
 
 Motion. Scarely any motion except under the same 
 circumstances. 
 
 ARTICULATION OF THE THIGH BONE 
 WITH THE BONES OF THE PELVIS. 
 
 The head of the femur is received into the cotyloid 
 cavity of the os innominatum. 
 
 Ilio-femoral. Fibrous capsule, round ligament, 
 
 cl. Diarthrosis. cotyloid ligament, transverse liga- 
 
 div. Enarthrosis. ment and synovial capsule (/%- 
 mentum capsulare Jibrosum, liga- 
 mentum teres, ligamentum coty- 
 loideum Jibro-cartilagineum, liga- 
 mentum transversum et membrana 
 synovialis.) 
 
 Motion. Flexion and extension, abduction and ad. 
 duction, circumduction. 
 
 ARTICULATION OF THE KNEE. 
 
 The condyles of the femur, the head of the tibia and 
 patella enter into this articulation. 
 
81 
 
 Femoro-tibial External to the capsule an exter- 
 cl. Diarthrosis. nal and internal lateral, a poste- 
 
 div. Enarthrosis. rior or oblique, and an anterior ; 
 
 the ligamentum patella?. (Liga- 
 mentum laterale externum longum 
 et breve, et internum, ligamentum 
 obliquum, ligamentum patellce,} 
 Within the capsule the alar liga- 
 ments, the ligamentum mucosum, 
 the crucial ligaments, semilunar 
 cartilages, transverse ligaments, 
 and lastly, the synovial capsule. 
 (Ligamenta alaria, ligamentum 
 mucosum, ligamenta cruciatagenu, 
 cartilagines semi-lunares genu, 
 ligamentum Jibro-cartilagineum 
 transversum et membrana syno- 
 via /is ). 
 
 Motion. Flexion and extension, and when the knee 
 is bent, slight lateral motion. 
 
 ARTICULATION OF THE TIBIA WITH THE 
 FIBULA. 
 
 Fibulo-tibial (su- An anterior and posterior ligament 
 
 periorly). synovial capsule {Ligamentum ca- 
 
 cL Diarthrosis. pitulijibulce membrana synovialis) 
 
 div. Arthrodia. 
 Fibulo-tibial (mid- Interosseus ligament. {Ligamentum 
 
 die) . inter osseu in ) 
 
 cl. Syneurosis. 
 Fibulo-tibial (infe- An anterior superior, and a posterior 
 
 riorly). superior ligament, nbro-cartilage 
 
 cl. Diarthrosis. synovial capsule. {Ligamentum ti- 
 
 div. Arthrodia. bio^fibulare anterius et postering, 
 
 ligamentum Jibro-cartilagineum , 
 
 membrana synovialis) 
 
 Motion. No Motion. 
 
82 
 
 ARTICULATION OF THE ASTRAGALUS 
 WITH THE TIBIA AND FIBULA. 
 
 The ancle joint is formed by the astragalus being re~ 
 ceived into a cavity formed by the lower end of the tibia 
 and fibula. 
 
 Tibio-tarsal. An anterior inferior, a posterior 
 
 cl. Diarthrosis. inferior, an external and an iri- 
 
 div. Angular gin- ternal ligament, and the synovial 
 
 glymus. capsule (Ligamentum anterius, et 
 
 posterius ; ligamentum externum, 
 
 vel laterale jibu Ice perpendicular e; 
 
 ligamentum interum laterale deL 
 
 toideum, etmembrana capsularis.^ 
 
 Motion. Flexion and extension; lateral motion in 
 some degree when the foot is extended. 
 
 The astragalus is connected to the calcis by two sy- 
 novial capsules, one propsr, the other common, (capsula 
 propria astragalo-calcanea, capsula communis astragalo- 
 calcaneo-scaphoidea. Mekel). These are strengthened 
 by fibrous bands, described as three ligaments, (ligamen- 
 tum astragaio-calcaneum inter num posterius, et inter nmn 
 anteriuSj ligamentum astragalo calcaneum externum. 
 Mekel). 
 
 Ligaments between the posterior row and anterior row. 
 
 There are two capsules, one for the astragalus, the os 
 calcis, and scaphoid (capsula astragalo-calcaneo-scapho- 
 idea Mekel) ; the other for the os calcis, and cuboid 
 (capsula synovialis calcaneo-cubdidea MekeF). 
 
 The astragalus and the os calcis are united to the 
 scaphoid by fibrous ligaments (ligamenta calcaneo-sca- 
 phoidea superiora et inferiora MekeF). 
 
 The astragalus is connected to the scaphoid by the 
 ligamentum astragalo scaphoideum. Mekel. 
 
 The os calcis is united to the cuboid by superior, ex- 
 ternal, and inferior ligaments. (Ligamenta calcaneo- 
 cuboidea superiora, externa, et inferiora). 
 
 The scaphoid is connected to the cuboid by ligamen- 
 tum inter-osseum scaphoido-cubeideum, ligamentum sea-, 
 phoideo-cuboideum dorsale et plantare. Mekel. 
 
83 
 
 The ligaments which unite the scaphoid to the three 
 Cuneiform bones are synovial capsules, and dorsal, plan* 
 tar and internal ligaments. 
 
 The ligaments between the cuboid and three cuneit 
 form bones, are synovial capsules, a dorsal, and plantar 
 ligament. 
 
 The cuneiform bones are connected together by syno- 
 vial capsules, dorsal, plantar, and inter-osseous liga* 
 ments. 
 
 ARTICULATION OF THE TARSUS WITH 
 THE METATARSAS. 
 
 The three first bones of the tarsus are articulated with 
 the three cuneiform bones, and the two last, or outer 
 ones with the cuboid. The articulation comes under the 
 class diarthrosis, sub-division arthrodia. Their articu- 
 lar surfaces are invested with cartilage, lined by the sy- 
 novial membrane, and strengthened by dorsal and plan- 
 tar ligaments. The metatarsal bones are connected 
 together by transverse and inter-osseous ligaments. 
 
 The metatarsal bones are united to the first phalanges 
 by arthrodia; the ligaments are synovial capsules, 
 strengthened by anterior, posterior, and lateral fibrous 
 fasciculi. 
 
 The phalanges themselves present articulations ana- 
 logous to those of the finger. They are articulated with 
 each other by that joining termed ginglymus. Their 
 ligaments consist of synovial capsules, anterior and pos- 
 terior ligaments, internal and external lateral ligaments* 
 
MYOLOGY. 
 
 THE Muscles are composed of soft, flexible, parallel 
 fibres, more or less red, possessing the property of short- 
 ening or contracting; they are the active agents of 
 locomotion, and are also subservient to other various and 
 important offices in the animal economy. Every mus- 
 cle is divided into three parts the body or belly, the 
 head, and tail. The extremity which is connected to 
 the most fixed point, is termed the head or origin ; and 
 the other extremity, fixed to the more moveable point, 
 is termed the tail, or insertion. The fibres of which 
 muscles are composed, in their direction are longitudinal, 
 transverse, oblique, or semicircular, and from this cir- 
 cumstance they take their names; they also acquire 
 various names from their use, size, situation, and dis- 
 coverer. We shall adopt the nomenclature in common 
 use, and also, that of M. Chaussier and M. Dumas. 
 There have been two methods of classing muscles, the 
 physiological and topical arrangements ; by adopting the 
 latter plan, and afterwards arranging them in classes 
 according to their several uses, it appears to me, you will 
 better recall to mind the most important points connected 
 with the muscular system. 
 
 There is one Muscle proper to the Cranium. 
 OCCIPITO-FRONTALIS. 
 
 Arises From the transverse ridge of the os occipitis 
 
from the posterior part of the mastoid 
 process of the temporal bone, the fibres 
 terminate in a central aponeurosis which is 
 expanded over the superior and lateral 
 parts of the cranium. 
 
 Inserted By fleshy fibres into the integuments of the 
 forehead. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the integuments, 
 by branches from the temporal, posterior, 
 aural and occipital vessels, by branches 
 from the fifth, seventh, and occipital ner- 
 ves; inferiorly it lies upon the occipital, 
 parietal and frontal bones. 
 
 Use. To raise the eye-brows, and the integuments 
 
 of the forehead. 
 
 Muscles situated around the Ear are three in number : 
 ATTOLENS AUREM OR SUPERIOR AURIS. 
 
 ( Temporo-auricularis. Chauss. Temporo-conchmten. 
 
 Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the temporal aponeurosis 
 Inserted Into the fibro-cartilage of the ear, superiorly. 
 Situation Anteriorly it is covered by the integuments, 
 posteriorly it lies upon the fascia temporalis. 
 Use To raise the ear. 
 
 ATTRAHENS AUREM OR ANTERIOR AURIS. 
 
 (Zygomatico-auricularis. Chauss. Zygomato-conchmlen. 
 
 Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the base of the zygomatic process of 
 the temporal and malar bones. 
 
 Inserted Into the anterior part of the helix. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the integuments, 
 posteriorly it lies upon the temporal fascia 
 and temporal artery. 
 
 Use. To draw the ear forwards. 
 
RETRAHENS AUREM OR POSTERIOR AURIS. 
 
 (Mastoido-auricularis. Chauss. 
 
 Mastoido-conckinien- 
 Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the posterior part of the mastoid pro- 
 cess of the temporal bone 
 
 Inserted Into the posterior part of the fibre-cartilage. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the integuments, 
 posteriorly it covers the mastoid process of 
 the temporal bone and small branches of 
 the occipital artery. 
 
 Use. To draw the ear downwards and backwards. 
 
 There are five small muscles belonging to the cartilages 
 of the ear. 
 
 Tragicus 
 Antitragicus 
 
 Helicus major 
 Helicus mii;or 
 Transversus auriculae 
 
 The muscles of the internal ear are four in number. 
 
 Mallei externus 
 Laxator tympani 
 
 Tensor tympani 
 Stapedius 
 
 Muscles situated at the base of the orbit. 
 ORBICULARIS PALPEBRARUM. 
 
 (Naso-palpebralis. Chauss. Maxillo-palpebral. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the orbital process of the superior max- 
 illary bone, the fibres pass outwards, are 
 spread over the lower eye-lid and descend 
 someway upon the cheek, are loosely con- 
 nected to the external angular process of 
 the temporal bone, they then bend inwards, 
 covering the upper eye-lid and eye-brow. 
 
 Inserted By a rounded tendon into the nasal process 
 of the superior maxillary bone. 
 
87 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by cellular tissue re- 
 markably devoid of fat ; posteriorly it lies 
 upon the orbitar process of the superior 
 maxillary bone, upon the malar bone, tem- 
 poral, and nasal process of the superior 
 maxillary bone ; upon levator labii supe- 
 rioris alaeque nasi, zygomaticus major and 
 minor; upon the masseter, externally; 
 above; upon the occipito-frontalis and 
 pyramidalis nasi; internally, its tendon 
 covers the superior half of the lacrymal 
 sac ; it lies upon the frontal vessels and 
 nerves, upon the infra-orbital vessels and 
 nerves ; upon branches from the external 
 maxillary artery. 
 
 Use. To close the eye-lids, to diffuse the tears over 
 
 the globe of the eye and to determine them 
 towards the inner canthus. 
 
 CORRUGATOR SUPERCILIL 
 
 (Frmto-superciliaris. Chauss. Cutanes-sourcillier* 
 
 Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the internal angular process of the 
 frontal bone. 
 
 Inserted Into the middle of the eye-brow. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the orbicularis 
 palpebrarum and pyramidalis nasi ; poste- 
 riorly, it lies upon the superciliary ridge 
 and supra orbital nerve and vessels. 
 
 Use. To approximate the eye-brows. 
 
 Muscles of the Nose. 
 PYRAMIDALIS NASI. 
 
 (Fronto-nasalis. Chaussier and Dumas.) 
 
 A rises From the occipito-frontalis, passes downwards 
 over the dorsum of the nose and joins tbe 
 triangularis nasi. 
 
88 
 
 Use. To raise the integuments of the nose. 
 
 TRIANGULARIS NASI. 
 (Maxillo-nasaUs. Chauss. Maxillo-narinal. Dumas. ) 
 
 Arises From the nasal process of the superior max- 
 illary bone,, and from the alveoli of the 
 canine teeth. 
 
 Inserted Into the cartilage and dorsum of the nose, 
 and by a thin aponeurosis it is connected 
 with its fellow and the pyramidalis nasi. 
 
 Use. It is said to compress the alae of the nose, 
 
 but rather to dilate the nostrils. 
 
 LEVATOR LABII SUPERIORIS AL^QUE 
 
 NASI. 
 
 ( Super-maxillo-labialis major. Chauss Maxillo-labii 
 nasal. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the nasal process of the superior max- 
 illary bone, and from the orbital process 
 of the same bone above the infra orbital 
 foramen. 
 
 Inserted Into the alas of the nose and upper lip. 
 
 Situation. It is partly covered by the orbicularis palpe- 
 brarum ; between the two origins, the 
 angular vein, and artery pass ; it lies upon 
 the nasal process of the superior maxillary 
 bone, the cartilage of the nose ; upon the 
 levator anguli oris, triangularis nasi, 
 depressor labii superioris ; upon the infra 
 orbital vessels and nerve. 
 
 Use. To raise the upper lip, to expand the nostrils. 
 
 DEPRESSOR LABII SUPERIORIS AL^EQUE 
 NASI. 
 
 i- ( Maxillo-alveoli-nasal. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the alveoli of the canine teeth. 
 Inserted Jnto into the upper lip and alae of the nose. 
 
89 
 Ute. To depress the lip, and nasal cartilage 
 
 Muscles situated within the Orbit. 
 
 LEVATOR PALPEBRE SUPERIORIS. 
 
 (Orbito-palpebralis. Chauss. Orbito-sus-palpebral.) 
 
 Arises From the bottom of the orbit and edge of 
 the foramen opticum. 
 
 Inserted Into the tarsus of the superior palpebra 
 
 Situation. Superiorly it is in contact with the roof of 
 the orbit and frontal branch of the opthal- 
 mic nerve; inferiorly it lies upon the 
 rectus superior and conjuctiva oculi 
 
 Use. To raise the upper eyelid. 
 
 RECTUS SUPERIOR, OR, LEVATOR OCULI. 
 
 (Sus-optico-spheni-scleroticien. Dumas.) 
 
 Situation. Superiorly it is covered by the levator palpe, 
 brae ; inferiorly it lies upon the tendon of 
 the superior oblique muscle, the opthalmic 
 artery^ the nasal and optic nerves. 
 
 RECTUS INFERIOR, OR, DEPRESSOR OCULI. 
 
 (Sous optico-spheno-scleroticien. Dumas.) 
 
 Situation. Superiorly it covers the optic nerve, and 
 branches from the third pair of nerves ; 
 inferiorly it lies upon the floor of the or^it 
 and inferior oblique muscle. 
 
 RECTUS EXTERNUS, OR, ABDUCTOR OCULI. 
 
 Situation. Its external surface is in contact with the 
 external wall of the orbit and lachrymal 
 gland ; its internal surface is in opposition 
 
90 
 
 with the sixth nerve, and lenticular gang- 
 lion, with the optic nerve, and with the 
 inferior oblique muscle. 
 
 RECTUS INTERNUS, OR, ADDUCTOR OCULI. 
 
 ( Orbito-intus-scleroticien. Dumas.) 
 
 Situation. Its external surface is in opposition with the 
 internal wall of the orbit, with the obli- 
 quus superior, the lachrymal sac and ca- 
 runcula lacrymalis; the internal surface 
 lies in contact with the optic nerve. 
 The four muscles mentioned arise by small tendons 
 
 from the edge of the foramen opticum, and are inserted 
 
 by a tendinous aponeurosis into the sclerotic coat of the 
 
 eye beneath the conjunctiva. 
 
 Their use is manifest from their description 
 
 OBLIQUUS SUPERIOR. 
 
 ( Optico-trochlei-scleroticien. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the optic foramen, between the rectus 
 superior and internus , the muscle termi- 
 nates in a slender tendon, which passes 
 through the pulley formed by the spina 
 trochlearis of the frontal bone. 
 
 Inserted Into the sclerotic, between the rectus ex. 
 ternus and superior 
 
 Use. To draw the eye forwards and inwards. 
 
 OBLIQUUS INFERIOR. 
 
 (Maxillo-scleroticien. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the orbitar and nasal process of the 
 the superior maxillary bone: the fibres 
 pass outwards external to the inferior 
 rectus, 
 
 Inserted Into the sclerotic coat, between the rectus 
 inferior and externus. 
 
 Situation* Inferior mrface lies upon the floor of the 
 
91 
 
 orbit ; the superior is in apposition with 
 the rectus inferior. 
 Use. To draw the eye downwards and inwards. 
 
 Muscles of the Lips. 
 LEVATOR ANGULI ORIS. 
 
 (Super -maxillo-labialis-minor. Chaussier.) 
 (Orbito-maxilla-tabial. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the superior maxillary bone below the 
 infra orbital foramen. 
 
 Inserted Into the upper lip and angle of the mouth. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the orbicularis 
 palpebrarum, levator labii superioris and 
 by the angular vein ; posteriorly it covers 
 the infra-orbital nerves and vessels. 
 
 Use. To raise the upper lip and angle of the mouth. 
 
 ZYGOMATICUS MAJOR. 
 
 (Zygomato-labialis major. Chaussier.) 
 ygomato-labial. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the zygomatic process of the temporal 
 and malar bones. 
 
 Inserted Into the angle of the mouth. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the orbicularis 
 palpebrarum and integuments; posteriorly 
 it lies upon the masseter and buccinator. 
 
 Use. To raise the angles of the mouth. 
 
 ZYGOMATICUS MINOR. 
 
 (Zygomatico-labialis minor. Chaussier.) 
 (Petit zygomatico-labial. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises When present,, from the most prominent 
 
 point of the os malae 
 Inserted Into the upper lip nearer to the nose. 
 
92 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the integuments 
 and orbicularis palpebrarum; posterior ly, 
 it lies upon the angular vein and levator 
 anguli oris. 
 
 Use. To raise the upper lip. 
 
 LEVATOR LABII INFERIORIS. 
 
 f Petit sus-maxillo-labial. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises 
 Inserted 
 
 From the alveoli of the lower incisor teeth 
 Into the integuments of the chin and mucous 
 
 membrane of the lower lip. 
 Situation. It is covered by the mucous membrane of 
 
 the mouth. 
 Use. To raise the upper lip. 
 
 DEPRESSOR ANGULI ORIS, OR TRIANGU- 
 LARIS. 
 
 (Maxillo-labialis inferior. Chauss. 
 
 Sous-maxillio-labial. 
 Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the margin of the lower maxilla. 
 
 Inserted Into the angle of the mouth. 
 
 Situation. It is covered by the integuments and platysma 
 myoides ; it lies upon the quadratus genae, 
 and upon a portion of the buccinator. 
 
 Use. To depress the angle of the mouth. 
 
 DEPRESSOR LABII INFERIORIS, OR QUA- 
 DRATUS GEN^E. 
 
 C Mento-labialis. Chauss. Mentonnier labial. Dumas,). 
 
 Arises From the chin, 
 
 Inserted Into the under lip. 
 
 Situation. It is covered by the integuments, and trian- 
 gularis oris ; it lies upon the inferior max- 
 illary vessels and nerves and orbicularis 
 oris, and also upon the levator menti. 
 
 Use. To depress the lower lip. 
 
93 
 LEVATOR MENTL 
 
 (Sous maxilo-cutanc. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the fossa at the root of the alveoli of 
 the lower incisor teeth ; the fibres descend. 
 
 Inserted Into the integuments of the chin. 
 
 Situation. It is covered by the quadratus genae. 
 
 Use. To raise the chin and the under lip a little 
 
 upwards. 
 
 BUCCINATOR. 
 
 (Bucco-labialis. Chauss. Alveola maxillaire, Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the alveolar processes of the upper and 
 lower jaw, close to the two last molar teeth, 
 and from the pterygoid processes of the 
 sphenoid bone. 
 
 Inserted Into the angle of the mouth. 
 
 Situation. The external surface is covered by the masse- 
 ter, by the parotid duct, zygomaticus ma- 
 jor, triangularis oris, external maxillary 
 vessels, and platysma myoides ; internally 
 it is lined by the mucous membrane of the 
 mouth. 
 
 Use. To draw the angles of the mouth backwards, 
 
 and to compress the cheeks. 
 
 ORBICULARIS ORIS. 
 
 (Labialis. Chauss, & Dumas.) 
 
 This muscle may be described as a semicircular band 
 of muscular fibres, surrounding the superior and infe-, 
 rior lips, interlacing each other at the angles, and con- 
 nected with the neighbouring muscles. 
 
 Situation. The anterior surface is covered by the leva., 
 tors of the upper lip ; the posterior surface 
 is lined by the mucous membrane of the 
 mouth, and covers the labial glands and 
 coronary vessels. 
 
94 
 
 Use. To contract the mouth, and corrugate the 
 
 lips. 
 
 Of the Muscles which surround the Temporo-maxillary 
 Articulation. 
 
 TEMPORALLY 
 
 (Temporo-maxillaris. Chauss. 
 Arcadi-temporo-maxillaire. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the temporal ridge, temporal fossa, and 
 
 temporal fascia. 
 Inserted Into the coronoid process of the lower max- 
 
 ilia 
 Situation. It is covered by fascia, muscles of the ear, 
 
 orbicularis palpebrarum, temporal vessels 
 
 and nerves, by the zygomatic arch and the 
 
 masseter ; internally it lies upon the tern. 
 
 poral fossa, deep temporal vessels, and 
 
 buccinator. 
 Use. Powerfully to raise the lower jaw; and will 
 
 also draw it backwards and forwards. 
 
 MASSETER. 
 
 (Zygomato-maxillaris. Chauss & Dumas). 
 
 Arises From the zygoma, from the inferior part of 
 os rnalae. 
 
 Inserted Into the external surface of the angle of the 
 lower jaw. 
 
 Situation. It is covered behind by the parotid gland ; 
 above, by the orbicularis palpebrarum ; be- 
 low by the platysma myoides : it is crossed 
 by branches from the seventh pair of 
 nerves, by the transverse artery of the 
 face, and by the parotid duct : the internal 
 surface lies upon the ascending plate of 
 the lower maxilla, and anteriorly upon the 
 buccinator. 
 
95 
 
 Use. It concurs to raise the lower jaw, and will 
 
 also advance it backwards or forwards. 
 
 PTERYGOIDEUS EXTERNUS. 
 
 (Pterygo-maxillaris superior. Chauss.) 
 (Pterygo coili maxillaire. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the external pterygoid plate of the 
 sphenoid bone, from the tuberosity of the 
 superior maxilla. 
 
 Inserted Into the neck of the lower jaw, capsular 
 ligament, and margin of the inter-articu- 
 lar cartilage. 
 
 Situation. Externally it adheres to the temporal muscle 
 by a common aponeurosis; internally it 
 lies in contact with the ptergoideus inter- 
 nus, the inferior maxillary nerve, inter- 
 nal lateral ligament, and middle menin- 
 geal vessels. 
 
 Use. To raise the lower jaw, and draw it to one 
 
 side. 
 
 PTERYGOIDEUS INTERNUS. 
 
 (Pterygo-maxillaris inferior. Chauss.) 
 (Pterygo-anguli-maxiliaire. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the internal pterygoid plate of the 
 sphenoid bone, and from the pterygoid 
 fossa. 
 
 Inserted Into the inner border of the angle of the 
 jaw, opposite the insertion of the masseter. 
 
 Situation. Externally it is separated from the pterygoi- 
 deus externus by cellular tissue, afterwards 
 from the ascending plate of the lower jaw 
 by the inferior maxillary vessels, nerves, 
 and their branches: internally it lies against 
 the constrictor pharyngeus superior, and 
 sub-maxillary gland. 
 
 Use. It gives lateral motion to the jaw, and when 
 
 thrown into action with its fellow, the 
 the jaw will be raised. 
 
96 
 
 Of the Muscles situated at the anterior part of the Neck. 
 
 The following muscles belong to this region : the 
 platysma myoides, sterno-cleido-mastoideus, sterno-hy- 
 oideus, sterno-thyroideus, omo-hyoideus, crico-thyroi- 
 deus, thyro-hyoideus, digastricus, mylo-hyoideus, genio- 
 hyoideus, genio-hyo-glossus, lingualis ; the muscles of 
 the larynx, those of the pharynx and fauces ; the deep 
 muscles of the neck, namely, the rectus capitis anticus 
 major and minor, and the longus colli. 
 
 On removing the skin and cellular substance of the 
 fore part of the neck, a thin tendonous fascia presents 
 itself, which is a continuation of the same fascia which 
 covers the muscles of the abdomen and chest, the super- 
 ficial fascia of the neck. This fascia ascends upon the 
 face, is connected with the zygoma, the mastoid process 
 of the temporal bone and base of the lower jaw. From 
 the posterior surface of this fascia, the deep cervical fascia 
 is derived : this consists of two layers : one passes in front 
 of the sterno-cleido-mastoideus muscle, the other poste- 
 rior. This posterior layer presents some important connec- 
 tions. At the lower part it is strong, and adheres to the 
 inter-articular ligament and sternum : externally it ad- 
 heres to the sheath of the cervical vessels ; internally it is 
 prolonged in front of the trachea, and sends sheaths 
 around the sterno-hyoideus and sterno-thyroideus mus- 
 cles ; superiorly, it sinks behind the angle of the jaw to 
 which it adheres; also, to the styloid process of the 
 temporal bone and to the stylo-maxillary ligament. 
 This fascia binds down the muscles of the neck and 
 supports the vessels and glands in this region ; inferior ly, 
 it may be said to complete the upper boundary of the 
 thorax, and to bear off the pressure of the atmosphere 
 from the trachea in inspiration. 
 
 PLATYSMA MYOIDES. 
 
 ( Thoraco-facia Us. Chaussier. ) 
 ( Thoraco-maxilli-facial. Dumas.^ 
 
 The Platysma Myoides is a musculo membranous 
 layer, situated immediately beneath the integuments 
 
97 
 
 covering the upper part of the chest, the neck, and 
 lower part of the face. 
 
 Arises^ Inferiorly it is connected to the fascia cover- 
 ing the pectoralis major and deltoid. 
 
 Inserted Into the base of the lower jaw, the angle of 
 the mouth and fascia, covering the paro- 
 tid gland. 
 
 Situation. It is covered by the integuments, and supe- 
 riorly, by the triangular oris : it lies upon 
 the lower jaw and the clavicle; upon the 
 buccinator, masseter, digastricus, mylo- 
 hyoideus, sterno-cleido-mastoideus, omo- 
 hyoideus, sterno-hybideus, sterno-thyroi- 
 deus, pectoralis major, deltoid, and trape- 
 zius muscles ; upon the external maxillary, 
 lingual, and superior thyroideal and axil- 
 lary vessels ; upon the carotid sheath and 
 its contents; upon the external jugular 
 vein ; upon branches from the fifth and 
 seventh pair of nerves, superficial branches 
 of the cervical plexus, upon the axillary 
 plexus; lastly, upon the parotid, submax- 
 illary and lymphatic glands. 
 
 Use. To depress the mouth and the lower jaw, to 
 
 corrugate the integuments of the neck. 
 
 STERNO-CLEIDO-MASTOIDEUS. 
 
 Arises From the superior border of the sternum, 
 and sternal end of the clavicle. 
 
 Inserted Into the mastoid process of the temporal 
 bone, and adjoining portions of the os 
 occipitis. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the platysma my- 
 6'ides, by the external jugular vein, and 
 filaments of the first cervical plexus of 
 nerves : posteriorly it lies upon the supe- 
 rior border of the sternum, the sternal, 
 third of the clavicle, the sterno-clavicular 
 articulation, and the mastoid process of 
 the temporal bone : upon the digastricus, 
 splenius, levator anguli scapulae, the omo 
 
Use. 
 
 hyb'ideus, scalenus, antlcus, sterno hybi- 
 deus, sterno thyrbideus ; upon the carotid 
 sheath and its contents; upon the deep 
 branch of the first cervical plexus and 
 spinal accessory nerves. The posterior 
 margin, with the clavicle, trapezius, and 
 omo-hybideus forms a triangular space, in 
 which the subclavian vessels and axillary 
 plexus of nerves are lodged. 
 To turn the head to one side, and bend the 
 head forwards. 
 
 STERNO HYOIDEUS. 
 
 Arises From the inner surface of the superior bor- 
 der of the sternum, from the sternal end 
 of the clavicle from the first rib. 
 
 Inserted Into the inferior border of the os hyb'ides. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the sternum, the 
 clavicle, platysma myoides, sterno-clavicu- 
 lar articulation, and sterno-cleido mastoi- 
 deus : posteriorly it lies upon the thyro- 
 hybideus, sterno-thyrb'ideus, and thyrohy- 
 bid ligament ; upon the superior thyrbideal 
 vessels, and carotid sheath; upon the 
 thyroid gland. 
 
 Use. To draw down the os hybides, consequently 
 
 to depress the larynx and pharynx. 
 
 STERNO-THYROIDEUS. 
 
 Arises From the superior and internal margin of 
 the sternum, and from the first rib. 
 
 Inserted Into the rough line on the ala of the thyroid 
 cartilage. 
 
 Situation. It is covered by the sternum, platysma- 
 mybides, sterno-hybideus, sterno-cleido- 
 mastbideus, omo-hyoideus : it lies upon 
 the crico thyroideus : upon the carotid 
 sheath, superior and inferior thyroideal 
 vessels, the vena innominata : upon fila- 
 ments from the descendens noni: upon the 
 trachea and thyroid gland. 
 
99 
 Use. To draw the larynx downwards. 
 
 THYRO-HYOIDEUS. 
 
 Arises From the ala of the thyroid cartilage 
 
 Inserted Into the cornu of the os hyoides. 
 
 Situation. It is covered by the platysma myoides, sterno- 
 
 hyoideus, omo-hyoideus : it lies upon the 
 
 thyro-hyoid ligament, upon the thyroid. 
 
 cartilage, and branch from the superior 
 
 thyroideal artery. 
 Use. To draw the os hyoides downwards, or the 
 
 thyroid cartilage upwards. 
 
 CRICO THYROIDEUS. 
 
 Arises From the cricoid cartilage. 
 
 Inserted Into the ala of the thyroid and inferior cornu. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the sterno-hyoideus 
 and sterno thyroideus; posteriorly it lies 
 upon the thyroid and cricoid cartilages, 
 upon a small artery, and crico-thyroid 
 ligament. 
 
 Use. To depress the thyroid and elevate the cricoid 
 
 cartilage. 
 
 OMO-HYOIDEUS. 
 
 C Coraco-hyoidien. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the superior costa of the scapula and 
 transverse ligament. 
 
 Inserted Into the os hyoides at the junction of its body 
 with its cornua. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the clavicle, pla- 
 tysma myoides, the trapezius, and sterno- 
 cleido-mastoideus ; posteriorly it lies upon 
 the scalenii, sterno-hyoideus, sterno-thy- 
 roideus, the carotid sheath, and superior 
 thyroideal vessels, upon the cervical plexus, 
 phrenic, and great sympathetic nerves. 
 
100 
 
 Use. To draw downwards the os hyoides, and 
 
 somewhat laterally.* 
 
 DIGASTRICUS. 
 
 C Genio-mastoideus. Chauss.) 
 (Mastoido-hygenien. Dumas.J 
 
 Arises From the fossa digastrica 
 
 Inserted Into a rough depression on the side of the 
 internal spine of the lower maxilla. 
 
 Situation. It is covered by the mastoid process of the 
 temporal bone, by a portion of the sterno- 
 cleido-mastoideus, splenius, complexus, 
 stylo-hyoideus, by a portion of the parotid 
 and submaxillary glands : it lies upon the 
 stylo-hyoideus, pharyngeuset glossus, upon 
 the mylo-hyoideus, upon the external and 
 internal carotids, external maxillary and 
 lingual vessels j upon the internal jugular 
 vein ; upon the great sympathetic, eighth 
 and ninth pair or sublingual nerves. 
 
 * Angles of the JVecfc. We have first a large triangular space, situated on 
 the fore part of the neck ; the base is formed by the lower jaw ; the apex by 
 the sternum ,- the sides by the sterno cleido mastoidei. This is divided into two 
 lateral portions by the messial line. We have a second triangular space 
 between the steruo cleido mastoideus, trapezius and clavicle. Both these 
 triangular spaces are subdivided by the omo-hyoideus. These spaces can be 
 ascertained during life ; and from the parts contained therein, an accurate 
 knowledge is of the greatest importance. 
 
 The first subdivision of the anterior lateral triangle, may be called Onto 
 hyoidien: the base is formed by the os hyoides ; the outer bord-er by the 
 sterno-cleido mastoideus; the inner and inferior border by the omo-hyoideus: 
 it contains the common carotid artery and its two branches, the superior thy- 
 roideal, lingual, and facial arteries ; the internal jugular vein ; the eight pair, 
 superior laryngeal, and great sympathetic nerves ; the thyro-hyoideus ; a portion 
 of the middle and inferior constrictor muscles of the pharynx. 
 
 Second division Omo Trachelien: bounded above and on the outer side 
 by the omo-hyoideus and sterno-cleido-mastoideus ; on the inner side and 
 below by the trachea : it contains the common carotid, inferior thyroideal and 
 vertebral arteries ; the internal jugular vein ; the eight pair of nerves ; recur- 
 rent laryngeal and great sympathetic nerves ; sterno-hyoideus, and sterno-thy- 
 roideus muscles; the tracliea and sesophagus. 
 
 Subdivisions of the second The inferior Omo-clavicular is bounded 
 below by the clavicle ; above and to the outer side by the omo-hyoideus ; on 
 the inner side by the sterno-cleido-mastoideus : it contains subclavian, verte- 
 bral, inferior thyroideal, supra scapular, ascending and posterior cervical arte- 
 ries ; jugular veins ; phrenic and origin of the last cervical nerves. 
 
 Omo-trapezien is bounded below by the omo hyoideus; outer side by the 
 trapezius; inner side by the sterno cleido-mastoideus : it contains the trans- 
 verse cervical artery ; the origin of the fourth and fifth pair of cervical nerves ; 
 the splenius capitis et colli, levator anguli scapulas and the scalenus posticus 
 muscles. 
 
Use. To raise the os hyoides, to depress the lower 
 
 jaw. 
 
 STYLO-HYOIDEUS. 
 
 Arises From the styloid process of the temporal bone 
 Inserted Into the cornuof the os hyoides. 
 Situation. Externally, it is covered by the digastricus 
 and parotid gland ; posteriorly, it lies upon 
 the stylo-pharyngeus, stylo-glossus et hyo- 
 glossus, upon the external carotid, lingual, 
 and external maxillary arteries, upon the 
 internal jugular vein, upon the ninth pair 
 qf nerv.es. 
 
 MYLO-HYOIDEUS. 
 
 Arises 
 
 Use. 
 
 From the inner surface of the lower maxilla, 
 between the last dens molaris and the sym- 
 phisis. 
 
 Inserted Into the lower edge of the basis of tte QS 
 hyoides. 
 
 Situation. It is covered by the digastricus, platysma 
 myoides and submaxillary gland . poste- 
 riorly, it lies upon the genio-hyoideus, 
 genio-hyo-glossus and hyo-glossus; upon 
 the lingual branches of the inferior max- 
 illary nerve ; upon the sublingual gland, 
 and submaxillary duct. 
 To depress the lower jaw and raise the os 
 hyoides. 
 
 GENHXHYOIDEUS 
 
 Arises From the internal spine of the symphisis of 
 the lower maxilla. 
 
 Inserted Into the basis of the os hyoides. 
 
 Situation. It is covered by the mylo-hyoideus ; poste- 
 riorly, it lies upon the genio-hyo-glossus 
 and hyo-glossus. 
 
 Use. To raise the os hyoides, to depress the lower 
 
 jaw. 
 
 K3 
 
102 
 
 Of the Muscles of the Tongue. 
 
 GENIQ-HYO-GLOSSUS. 
 
 Arises From the oblique ridge on the inner surface 
 of the lower maxilla. 
 
 Inserted Into the whole length of the tongue from 
 the base to the apex. 
 
 Situation. Externally, it is covered by the hyo-glossus, 
 stylo-glossus, and lingualis ; by the sub- 
 lingual gland; superiorly, by the mucous 
 membrane of the mouth. 
 
 Use. To draw the tongue backwards ; to draw its 
 
 root forwards ; to render the dorsum con- 
 cave. 
 
 HYO.GLOSSUS. 
 
 (Hio-chondro-glosse. Dumas. J 
 
 Arises From the body and cornu of the os hyoides. 
 
 Inserted Into the side of the tongue. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly, it is covered by the digastricus, 
 mylo-hybideus, genio-hyb'ideus, stylo-hyo- 
 ideus, stylo-glossus, by the ninth pair of 
 nerves, by the sublingual gland,by the sub- 
 maxillaryduct: its internal surface lies upon 
 the constrictor pharyngis medius, the genio- 
 hyo glossus, lingualis, upon the gustatory 
 nerve and lingual artery. 
 
 Use. To pull the tongue downwards and inwards. 
 
 STYLO-GLOSSUS. 
 
 Arises From the styloid process of the temporal bone. 
 
 Inserted Into the side of the tongue. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly, it is covered by the digastricus, 
 the submaxillary gland, the gustatory 
 nerve, and mucous membrane of the mouth; 
 posteriorly, it lies upon the genio-hyo^ 
 glossus, lingualis, and constrictor pharyngis 
 superior. 
 
103 
 
 Use. To draw the tongue to one side, to draw it 
 
 upwards and backwards. 
 
 LINGUALIS. 
 
 Arises From the base of the tongue. 
 
 Inserted Into the apex. 
 
 Situation. It is placed between the genio-hyo-glossus 
 internally, and the hyo, and stylo glossus 
 externally ; below it is contact with the 
 mucous membrane of the mouth. 
 
 Of the Muscles of the Pharynx 
 CONSTRICTOR INFERIOR PHARYNGIS. 
 
 ( Crio-thyro-pkaryngien. Dumas. ) 
 
 Arises Crom the cricoid cartilage, from the inferior 
 corner of the thyroid cartilage. 
 
 Inserted Into the middle back and part of the pharynx. 
 
 Situation. The external surface, posteriorly, lies upon 
 the longus colli, the rectus capitis anticus 
 major ; anteriorly, upon the thyroid gland, 
 common carotid artery, and sterno-thyro- 
 ideus muscle ; internally, it lies upon the 
 constrictor medius, stylo, and palato- 
 pharyngeus, upon the mucous membrane 
 of the pharynx, upon the cricoid and 
 thyroid cartilages. The inferior laryngeal 
 nerve passes beneath its lower edge, the 
 superior laryngeal beneath its upper. 
 
 CONSTRICTOR PHARYNGIS MEDIUS. 
 
 Arises From the superior cornu of the thyroid car- 
 tilage, from the thyro-hyoid ligament, and 
 cornu of the os hybides. 
 
 Inserted Into the middle and back part of the pha- 
 rynx, into the cuneiform process of the os 
 occipitis. 
 
104 
 
 Situation. Externally, it lies upon the constrictor infe- 
 rior, the longus colli rectus capitis anticus 
 major ; anteriorly, it corresponds with the 
 hyo-glossus; internally, it is covered by 
 the mucous membrane of the pharynx, by 
 the superior constrictor: the inferior border 
 is separated from the constrictor inferior by 
 the superior laryngeal nerve ; the superior 
 border is separated from the superior con- 
 strictor by the stylo pharyngeus and glosso 
 pharyngeal nerve. 
 
 CONSTRICTOR PHARYNGIS SUPERIOR. 
 
 (Pterygo-syndesmo-staphili-pharyngien. Dumafe.J 
 
 Arises, From the cuneiform process of the os occipifcis, 
 from the pterygoid process of the sphenoid 
 bone, from the upper and lower jaw near 
 the roots of the last dentes molares, from 
 the root of the tongue, and from the palate. 
 
 Inserted Into the middle and back part of the pharynx. 
 
 Situation. Externally, it lies npon the middle constrictor, 
 the stylo pharyngeus and stylo glossus,, 
 upon the internal carotid artery and inter- 
 nal jugular vein; internally, it is covered 
 by the mucous membrane of the mouth ; 
 superiorly, beneath the basilar process a 
 small portion on either side of the mucous 
 membrane is uncovered by the fibres of 
 this muscle, forming a little pouch (the 
 sinus of Morgagni J : it is bounded by the 
 openings of the nares, eustachian tubes, 
 and the glottis. 
 
 Use^ The three constrictors contract the bag of the 
 
 pharynx, and force the alimentary mass 
 into the sesophagus. 
 
 STYLO-PHARYNGEUS. 
 
 Arises From the styloid process of the temporal 
 
 bone 
 Inserted Into the sides of the 
 
105 
 
 Situation. It is covered by the stylo-hyoideus, constric- 
 tor medius, and external carotid artery ; 
 internally it lies upon the internal carotid 
 artery and internal jugular vein, is sepa- 
 rated from the middle constrictor by the 
 glosso-pharyngeal nerve j upon the mucous 
 membrane of the pharynx, and palato 
 pharyngeus muscle. 
 
 Use. To raise the pharynx and dilate the pharynx 
 
 transversely. 
 
 Muscles of the soft Palate. 
 PALATO-PHARYNGEUS. 
 
 ( ' Pharyngo-staphylin. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the middle of the velum pendulum 
 
 palati. 
 
 Inserted Into the sides and back part of the pharynx. 
 Situation. It is situated within the folds of the mucous 
 
 membrane, constituting the posterior pillar 
 
 of the fauces. 
 Use. To raise the pharynx, to draw down the 
 
 velum to prevent the food passing into the 
 
 nares. 
 
 CONSTRICTOR ISTHMI FAUCIUM. 
 
 (Glosso-staphylinus. Chauss. Glosso-staphylin. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the middle of the velum, pendulum 
 
 palati, and roof of the uvula. 
 Inserted Into the side of the tongue. 
 Situation. It is situated within the folds of the mucous 
 
 membrane, constituting the anterior pillar 
 
 of the fauces. 
 Use. To draw down the velum, to raise the base 
 
 of the tongue, to close the opening between 
 
 the mouth and fauces. 
 
106 
 CIRCUMFLEXUS, VEL TENSOR PALATI. 
 
 (Pterygo-staphilinus. Chauss*) 
 ( Spheno-salpingo-staphy lin. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the root of the internal pterygoid 
 plate of the sphenoid bone and spinous 
 process, from the edge of the cartilaginous 
 extremity of the eustachian tube. 
 
 Inserted Into the velum pendulum palati. 
 
 Situation. It descends between the pterygoideus inter- 
 nus and internal pterygoid plate. 
 
 Use. To stretch the velum, to draw it downwards 
 
 and forwards,, to open the eustachian tube. 
 
 LEVATOR PALATI MOLLIS 
 
 (Petro-staphylinus. Chauss.) 
 (Petro-sa Ipingo-staphylin. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the petrous portion of the temporal 
 bone, and from the eustachian tube. 
 
 Inserted Into the velum. 
 
 Situation. Its outer surface corresponds with the tensor 
 palati ; its inner surface with the mucous 
 membrane of the pharynx: its superior 
 border is placed in front of the carotid 
 canal, behind the eustachian tube. 
 
 Use. To raise the velum upwards and backwards, 
 
 to prevent the food passing into the nares 
 and eustachian tube. 
 
 AZYGQS UVUL.E. 
 
 ( Palato-staphylinus. Chauss. & Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the transverse suture of the palate 
 
 bone. 
 
 Inserted Into the tip of the uvula. 
 Situation. It is covered by the mucous membrane of 
 
 the mouth. 
 Use. TQ raise the uvula upwards and forwards. 
 
107 
 
 Of the Muscles of the Larynx. 
 
 The sterno-thyroideus, crico-thyroideus, sterno-hyoi- 
 deus_, and thyro-hybideus have already been described. 
 
 CRICO-ARYTENOIDEUS POSTICUS. 
 
 Arises From the back part of the cricoid cartilage. 
 
 Inserted Into the posterior part of the base of the 
 arytenoid cartilage. 
 
 Situation. Its posterior surface is covered by the pha- 
 rynx ; the anterior surface lies upon the 
 cricoid and arytenoid cartilages and capsu- 
 lar ligament. 
 
 Use. To draw back the arytenoid cartilage, to 
 
 tighten the vocal ligaments. 
 
 CRICO ARYT^ENOIDEUS LATERALIS. 
 
 ( Crico-lateri-arithenoidien. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the side of the cricoid cartilage. 
 
 Inserted Into the side of the base of the arytenoid 
 cartilage. 
 
 Situation. Externally it is covered by the thyroid carti- 
 lage ; internally it corresponds with the 
 cavity of the larynx. 
 
 Use. To open the rima glottis, by separating the 
 
 vocal ligaments. 
 
 THYRCLARYTjENOIDEUS. 
 
 Arises From the back part of the pomum adami. 
 Inserted Into the anterior surface of the arytenoid 
 
 cartilage. 
 Situation. Externally it lies upon the thyroid cartilage ; 
 
 internally it is covered by the mucous 
 
 membrane. 
 Use To draw the arytenoid cartilage forwards, to 
 
 relax the vocal ligaments. 
 
108 
 
 ARYT^ENOIDEUS OBLIQUUS. 
 
 Arises From the base of one arytenoid cartilage. 
 
 Inserted Into the tip of the other arytenoid cartilage. 
 
 Situation. Posteriorly it is covered by the pharynx ; 
 anteriorly it lies upon the arytendideus 
 transversus and arytenoid cartilages. 
 
 Use. To approximate the cartilages, to close the 
 
 opening of the glotis. 
 
 ARYTENOIDEUS TRANSVERSUS. 
 
 Arises From the base of one cartilage. 
 Inserted Into the cartilage on the opposite side. 
 Use. To assist in closing the glottis. 
 
 Within the mucous membrane connecting the arytenoid 
 cartilages to the epiglottis, and the epiglottis to the thy- 
 roid cartilage, we have a few pale fibres viz. : 
 
 ARYTENO-EPIGLOTTIDEUS. 
 
 Arises From the side of one arytenoid cartilage. 
 Inserted Into the epiglottis. 
 
 Use. To draw down the epiglottis to close the 
 
 glottis. 
 
 THYRO-EPIGLOTTIDEUS. 
 
 Arises From the thyroid cartilage. 
 Inserted Into the epiglottis laterally. 
 Use. To draw the epiglottis downwards, and also, 
 
 when both act, to expand that cartilage. 
 
109 
 
 Muscles situated deeply on the anterior part of the neck. 
 LONGUS COLLI. 
 
 ( Prcedorso-atlb'ideus. Chauss.) 
 (Predorso-cervical. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the bodies of the three superior dorsal 
 vertebra from the transverse processes of 
 the third, fourth, fifth and sixth cervical 
 vertebrae. 
 
 Inserted Into the bodies of all the cervical vertebrae. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the rectus capitis 
 anticus major ; by the pharynx and aeso- 
 phagus; by the common carotid artery; 
 by the eight pair, and great sympathetic 
 nerves ; posteriorly it lies upon the liga- 
 mentum vertebrarum commune anterius. 
 
 Use. To bend the neck forwards and to one side. 
 
 RECTUS-CAPITIS ANTICUS MAJOR. 
 
 ( Trachelo-sub-occipitalis. Chauss. Grand trachelo-ba- 
 siliare. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the transverse processes of the third, 
 fourth, aud fifth cervical vertebrae. 
 
 Inserted Into the cuneiform process of the os occipitis. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly, it corresponds with the pharynx, 
 common carotid artery, internal jugular 
 vein, great sympathetic and eight pair of 
 nerves ; posteriorly it lies upon the rectus 
 capitis anticus minor, and longus colli. 
 
 Use. To bend the head forwards. 
 
 RECTUS CAPITIS ANTICUS MINOR. 
 
 (Trachelo sub-occi pi tails minor. Chauss.) 
 (Petit trachelo-basilaire. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises 
 Inserted 
 
 From the fore part of the atlas. 
 Into the cuneiform process of the os occipitis 
 near the root of the condyloid process. 
 
110 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the rectus capitis 
 anticus major, by the internal carotid ar- 
 tery, and eighth pair of nerves ; posteri- 
 orly it covers the capsular ligament of the 
 atlas. 
 
 Use. To nod the head forwards. 
 
 Of the muscles on the side of the Neck. 
 SCALENUS ANTICUS. 
 
 ( Trachelo-costalis. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the transverse process of the third., 
 fourth, fifth and sixth cervical vertebrae. 
 
 Inserted Into the first rib near to its cartilage. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the omo-hyoideus, 
 sterno-cleido-mastbideus ; transverse and 
 ascending cervical arteries, and subclavian 
 vein, and by the phrenic nerve ; posteri- 
 orly it lies upon the subclavian artery and 
 cervical plexus of nerves ; internally it is 
 in apposition with the vertebral artery and 
 vein. 
 
 SCALENUS MEDIUS. 
 
 Arises From the transverse process of all the cervi- 
 cal vertebrae. 
 
 Inserted Into the first rib, nearer to the spine. 
 
 Situation. The anterior margin corresponds with the 
 scalenus medius, from which it is separated 
 by some of the inferior branches of the 
 cervical nerves ; the posterior border cor- 
 responds with the transversalis colli, leva- 
 tor anguli scapulae and splenius colli. 
 
 SCALENUS POSTICUS. 
 
 Arises From the transverse processes of the three 
 
 inferior cervical vertebrae. 
 Inserted Into the second rib, between its tubercle and 
 
 angle. 
 
Ill 
 
 Situation. It is separated from the middle scalenus by 
 two or three branches of the cervical 
 nerves; posteriorly and externally are placed 
 the transversalis and splenius colli. 
 
 Use. The three scaleni bend the neck forwards or 
 
 to one side ; when the neck is fixed, they 
 elevate the ribs and dilate the chest, as- 
 sisting in the function of inspiration. 
 
 RECTUS CAPITIS LATERALIS. 
 
 CAtloido-sub-occipitalis. Chauss.) 
 ( Tracheli-atloido-basilaire. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the transverse process of the atlas. 
 
 Inserted Into the os occipitis, in front of the jugular 
 process. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the internal ju- 
 gular vein, posteriorly it corresponds to the 
 vertebral artery. 
 
 Use. To turn the head to one side. 
 
 INTER-TRANSVERSALES COLLI. 
 
 ( Inter-trackeliens. Dumas.) 
 
 They consist of two layers, an anterior and posterior. 
 
 Arise From the transverse process of the first cer- 
 vical. 
 
 Inserted Into the transverse process of the last. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly they are covered by the rectus ca- 
 pitis anticus major; posteriorly, they lie 
 upon the anterior branches of the cervi- 
 cal nerves. 
 
 Use. To approximate the transverse processes of 
 
 the cervical vertebrae, to turn the head a 
 little to one side. 
 
 Muscles situated at the posterior part of the Trunk. 
 
 On removing the integuments, you expose the Tra- 
 pezius, a portion of the Latissimus dorsi, a portion of 
 the rhomboideus major, and the fascia covering the 
 infra spinatus. 
 
112 
 TRAPEZIUS. 
 
 (Dorso-acromialis. Chauss.) 
 (Occipiti-dorso-sus acromien. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the transverse ridge of the os occipitis, 
 from the ligamentum nucha?, from the 
 spinous process of the last cervical, and 
 from the spinous processes of all the dorsal 
 vertebrae. 
 
 Inserted Into the external third of the clavicle, into 
 the acromion and the whole of the spine 
 of the scapula. 
 
 Situation. Posteriorly it is covered by the integuments, 
 anteriorly it lies upon the splenius, corn- 
 plexus, levator anguli scapulae, a portion 
 of the serratus posticus superior, supra 
 spinatus, rhomboidei, a portion of the infra 
 spinatus, latissimus dorsi. 
 
 Use. To move the shoulder upwards and back- 
 
 wards, downwards and backwards, or di- 
 rectly backwards. When the scapula is 
 fixed, it will extend the head or move it 
 laterally. 
 
 LATISSIMUS DORSI. 
 
 (Lumbo-humeralis. Chauss.) 
 (Dorsi-lumbo-sacro-humera /. Dumas. ) 
 
 Arises From the back part of the crista of the ilium, 
 and sacrum, from the spinous processes 
 of all the lumbar vertebrae, from the spi- 
 nous processes of the seven inferior dorsal, 
 and from the four inferior ribs. 
 
 Inserted Into the inner edge of the bicipital groove. 
 
 Situation. Posteriorly it is covered by the trapezius and 
 integuments ; anteriorly it covers the serra- 
 tus posticus inferior., the obliquus internus, 
 external intercostals, sacro-lumbalis, lon- 
 gissimus dorsi, rhombdideus major, infra 
 spinatus, serratus magnus, the inferior 
 ribs, and inferior angles of the scapula; 
 
ri3 
 
 the axillary vessels and nerves cross its 
 tendinous insertion. 
 
 Use. To carry the arm downwards and backwards, 
 
 to rotate the humerus, to raise the lower 
 ribs. 
 
 On removing the trapezius and latissimus dorsi, we 
 expose the rhomboideus major and minor, the levator 
 anguli scapulae. 
 
 RHOMBOIDEUS MAJOR AND MINOR. 
 
 (Dorso-scapularis. Chauss.) 
 (Cervici-dorso-scapulaire. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the spinous processes of the five supe- 
 rior dorsal vertebrae. 
 Inserted Into the base of the scapula below its spine. 
 
 Rhomboideus minor. 
 
 Arises From the spinous processes of the three 
 inferior cervical vertebrae. 
 
 Inserted Into the base of the scapula above its spine. 
 
 Situation. Posteriorly it is covered by the trapezius and 
 latissimus dorsi ; anteriorly it lies upon the 
 serratus posticus superior, the splenius 
 colli, sacro-lumbalis, longissimus dorsi, ex- 
 ternal intercostals and five superior ribs. 
 
 Use. To draw the scapulae upwards and backwards. 
 
 LEVATOR ANGULI SCAPULAE. 
 
 (Trachelo-scapularis. Chauss.) 
 {Trachelo-anguli soapulaire. Dumas). 
 
 Arises 
 
 From the transverse processes of the five su- 
 perior cervical vertebrae. 
 Inserted Into th& superior angle, and upper part of 
 
 the base. 
 
 Situation. Externally it is covered by the sterno-cleido- 
 mastoideus and trapezius; internally, it 
 lies upon the splenius colli, transversalis, 
 serratus posticus superior. 
 1*3 
 
114 
 
 On removing the rhombb'idei and levator anguli sca- 
 pulae, the serratus posticus superior is exposed; inferior ly 
 the serratus posticus inferior. 
 
 SERRATUS POSTICUS SUPERIOR, 
 
 (Dorso-costalis. Chauss. Cervici-dorso-costal. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the spinous processes of the three last 
 cervical vertebrae and two upper dorsal. 
 
 Inserted Into the second, third, fourth and fifth ribs 
 external, to their angles. 
 
 Situation. It is covered posteriorly by the trapezius, 
 rhombb'idei, levator anguli scapulae, serra- 
 tus magnus ; anteriorly it lies upon spleni- 
 us capitis et colli, transversalis, sacro-lum- 
 balis, longissimus dorsi, and four superior 
 ribs. 
 
 Use. To raise the ribs, to dilate the thorax. 
 
 SERRATUS POSTICUS INFERIOR. 
 
 ( Lumbo-,costalis* Chauss. Dorsi-lumbo^coslal. Dumas). 
 
 Arises From the spinous processes of the two infe- 
 rior dorsal, ond three superior lumbar ver- 
 tebrae. 
 
 Inserted Into the four inferior ribs near to their car- 
 
 Situation. Posteriorly it is covered by the latissimus 
 dorsi; anteriorly, it lies upon the sacro- 
 lumbalis, longissimus dorsi, and four infe-, 
 rior ribs. 
 
 Use. To depress the ribs, to diminish the capacity 
 
 of the chest. 
 
 On removing the serratus posticus superior and infe- 
 rior, will be exposed the splenius, sacro-lumbalis, Ion* 
 gissimus dorsi, spinalis dorsu 
 
115 
 SPLENIUS CAPITIS. 
 
 ( Cervico-mastoideus. Chauss. ) 
 ( Cervico-dorso-mastoiden. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the spinous processes of the four up- 
 per dorsal, and five inferior cervical ver- 
 tebrae. 
 
 Inserted Into the transverse processes of the five 
 superior cervical vertebrae, into the trans- 
 verse ridge of the os occipitis and mastoid 
 process of the temporal bone. That por- 
 tion inserted into the transverse processes 
 is frequently called splenius colli. 
 
 Situation. Posteriorly it is covered by the sterno-cleido- 
 mastoideus, levator anguli scapulae, trape- 
 zius, serratus posticus superior, and rhom- 
 boideus ; anteriorly it lies upon the corn- 
 plexus, transversalis, semi-spinalis colli, 
 semi-spinalis dorsi, spinalis dorsi. 
 
 Use. To bend the head directly backwards or late- 
 
 rally. 
 
 SACRO LUMBALIS. 
 
 ( Sacro-costalis. Chauss.) 
 (Lumbo-costo-trachelien. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the back part of the sacrum, from the 
 back part of the crista of the ilium, from 
 the transverse processes of all the lumbar 
 vertebrae. 
 
 Inserted Into the transverse processes of all the dorsal 
 vertebrae, and into all the ribs close to 
 their angles. 
 
 Situation. Posteriorly it is covered by the glutaeus 
 maximus, obliquus internus, transversalis 
 abdominis, serratus posticus inferior, latis- 
 simus dorsi, trapezius, rhomboidei, serratus 
 posticus superior ; anteriorly it lies upon 
 the sacrum, the transverse processes of the 
 lumbar vertebra?, external intercostals, 
 and costs. 
 
116 
 
 Wse. To extend the spine, to depress the ribs., when 
 
 the trunk has been bent to bring it back 
 to a state of extension. 
 
 LONGISSIMUS DORSI. 
 
 (Sacro spinalis. Chauss.) 
 (Lombo-dorso-trachelien. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the back part of the sacrum, from the 
 spinous and transverse processes of all the 
 lumbar vertebrae. 
 
 Inserted Into all the ribs between their tubercles and 
 angles, excepting the two last, and into 
 the transverse processes of all the dorsal 
 vertebrae. 
 
 Situation. Same as the preceding muscle ; it is placed 
 between the sacro-lumbalis, and spinalis 
 dorsi. 
 
 Use. To assist in preserving the erect position of 
 
 the trunk, to depress the ribs, and thus 
 diminish the capacity of the chest. 
 
 On separating these two muscles, you expose five or 
 six tendinous slips, arising from the superior edge of the 
 six lower ribs, and ascending, are inserted into the sacro- 
 lumbalis, these have been described as the musculi ac- 
 cessorii ad sacro-lumbales. 
 
 SPINALIS DORSI. 
 
 Arises From the spinous processes of the two supe- 
 rior lumbar vertebrae, and the three last 
 dorsal. 
 
 Inserted Into the spinous processes of the nine supe- 
 rior dorsal vertebrae, except the first. 
 
 Situation Same as the preceding muscle, it is placed 
 between the longissimus dorsi and spinous 
 processes of the vertebrae. 
 
 Use. To erect, fix, and raise the spine when bent. 
 
 On removing the splenius, sacro lumbalis, longissu. 
 mus dorsi, spinalis dorsi, you bring into view complexus, , 
 
117 
 
 trachelo-mastoideus, cervicalis ascendens, transversalis 
 colli. 
 
 COMPLEXUS MAJOR. 
 
 C Tracheto-osciptatis. Chauss. ) 
 (Dor si bracheh-occipital. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the transverse processes of the four 
 superior dorsal vertebrae,, from the trans- 
 verse processes of the cervical vertebrae. 
 
 Inserted Into the transverse ridge of the os occipitis, 
 and mastoid process of the temporal bone. 
 
 Situation. Posteriorly it is covered by the trapezius, 
 splenius capitis et colli., trachelo mastoi- 
 deus, transversalis colli, longissimus dorsi; 
 anteriorly it lies upon recti capitis postici 
 majores, et minores, et obliqui, semispina- 
 lis colli et dorsi, mutifidi spinae ; upon the 
 occipital artery, and posterior branches of 
 the cervical nerves. 
 
 Use. To draw the head backwards, or to one side. 
 
 TRACHELO MASTOIDEUS, OR COMPLEXUS 
 MINOR. 
 
 (Trachelo mastoidien. Dumas.J 
 
 Arises From the transverse processes of the three 
 
 superior dorsal vertebrae, and from the five 
 
 inferior cervical. 
 Inserted Into the mastoid process of the temporal 
 
 bone. 
 Situation. It is covered pesteriorly by the splenius 
 
 capitis, by the transversalis ; anteriorly it 
 
 lies upon the obliquus capitis, complexus 
 
 major, and occipital arteries. 
 Use. To assist in extending the head and to carry 
 
 it to one side. 
 
 CERVICALIS ASCENDENS. 
 
 This muscle forms a part of the sacro lumbalis. 
 
118 
 
 Arises From the six superior ribs. 
 
 Inserted Into the transverse processes of the fourth, 
 fifth, and sixth cervical vertebrae. 
 
 Situation. Between the splenius colli and levator sca- 
 pulae. 
 
 TRANSVERSALIS COLLI. 
 
 This muscle forms a part of the longissimus dorsi. 
 
 Arises From the transverse processes of the five or 
 six superior dorsal vertebrae. 
 
 Inserted Into the transverse processes of most of the 
 cervical. 
 
 Situation. It lies between the cervicalis ascendens and 
 trachelo-mastoideus. 
 
 Use Of these two muscles is to extend the neck, 
 
 and to turn it laterally, the former mus- 
 cles will assist in inspiration by drawing 
 upwards the ribs. 
 
 The last layer of muscles consists of the rectus capitis 
 posticus major and minor, obliquus capitis superior and 
 inferior, semispinales colli et dorsi, multifidi spinae, 
 interspinales-cervicis, dorsi et lumborum, intertransver- 
 salis cervicis, dorsi et lumborum. 
 
 RECTUS CAPITIS POSTICUS MAJOR. 
 
 (Axoido-occipitalis. Chauss.^ 
 (Spi?ii-axdidi-occipital. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the spinous process of the vertebra 
 dentata. 
 
 Inserted Into the inferior transverse ridge of the os 
 occipitis. 
 
 Situation. It is in apposition posteriorly with the supe- 
 rior oblique and complexus major, ante- 
 riorly it lies upon the occipital bone, the 
 posterior portion of the atlas, and upon 
 the rectus posticus minor. This muscle 
 with the obliqui forms a triangular space 
 in which is lodged the vertebral artery, 
 also the sub-occipital nerve. 
 
119 
 Use. To draw the head backwards. 
 
 RECTUS CAPITIS POSTICUS MINOR. 
 
 (Atloido-occipitalis. Chauss.) 
 C Tuber-atloido-occipital. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the tubercle of the atlas. 
 
 Inserted Into the lower transverse ridge of the os 
 
 occipitis. 
 
 Situation. It is covered posteriorly by the rectus major. 
 Use. To assist the former muscle in its action. 
 
 OBLIQUUS CAPITIS SUPERIOR. 
 
 ( ' Atloido-sub-mastoideus. Chauss.) 
 (Trachelo-atrdido-occipital. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the transverse process of the atlas. 
 
 Inserted Into the inferior transverse ridge of the os 
 occipitis and posterior part of the mastoid 
 process of the temporal bone. 
 
 Situation. Posteriorly it is covered by the complexus, 
 and splenius ; anteriorly it lies upon the 
 vertebral artery, occipital vessels, and rec- 
 tus posticus major. 
 
 Use. To draw the head obliquely backwards and 
 
 to one side. 
 
 OBLIQUUS CAPITIS INFERIOR. 
 
 ( Axoido-atloideus. Chauss.) 
 (Spini-axoido-tracheli-atldidien. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the spinous process of the vertebra 
 
 dentata. 
 
 Inserted Into the transverse process of the atlas. 
 Situation. Posteriorly it is covered by the complexus 
 
 major; anteriorly it lies upon the liga- 
 
 menta subflava and vertebral vessels. 
 Use. It assists in turning the head to one side and 
 
 in pulling it backwards. 
 
120 
 SEMI.SPINALIS COLLI. 
 
 f Transverso-spinalis-colli. Chauss. and Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the transverse processes of the seven 
 superior dorsal vertebrae. 
 
 Inserted Into the spinous processes of the second, 
 third, fourth, fifth, and sixth cervical ver- 
 tebrae. 
 
 Situation. Posteriorly it is covered by the complexus 
 major; anteriorly it lies upon the multi- 
 fidus spinae and semispinalis dorsi, and 
 deep cervical vessels. 
 
 Use. To extend the neck obliquely backwards. 
 
 SEMI.SPINALIS DORSI. 
 
 ( Transverso-spinalis-dorsi. Chauss.) 
 
 This muscle is placed nearer to the spine than the 
 
 lower part of the preceding muscle. 
 
 Arises From the transverse processes of the eighth,, 
 ninth, and tenth dorsal vertebrae. 
 
 Inserted Into the spinous processes of the dorsal ver- 
 tebrae, above the eight, and into the two 
 inferior cervical. 
 
 Situation. Posteriorly it is covered by the semispinalis 
 colli, complexus and transversalis ; ante- 
 riorly it lies upon the multifidus spinae. 
 
 Use. It serves to pull the spine obliquely back- 
 
 wards. 
 
 MULTIFIDUS SPINAE. 
 
 We have a series of muscular and tendinous fibres, 
 passing from the spinous processes of the lumbar, dor- 
 sal, and four inferior cervical vertebrae, inserted into 
 the spinous processes of the vertebrae, with the excep- 
 tion of the first. 
 
 Use. To draw the spine directly backwards. 
 
121 
 
 INTERSPINALES CERVICIS, DORSI, ET 
 LUMBORUM. 
 
 The spaces between the spinous processes of the dif- 
 ferent vertebra are filled up by muscular fibres. 
 
 Use. To approximate the spinous processes. 
 
 INTER-TRANSVERSALIS CERVICES, DORSI 
 ET LUMBORUM. 
 
 The spaces between the transverse processes are filled 
 up by muscular and tendinous fibres, these muscles are 
 covered posteriorly by the multifidi spinae, anteriorly they 
 lie upon the different processes of the vertebrae, the 
 ligamenta subflava and the various ligaments of the ribs. 
 
 Use. To approximate the transverse processes and 
 
 to turn the spine a little to one side. 
 
 Muscles situated at the anterior part of the chest. 
 PECTORALIS MAJOR. 
 
 (Sterno humeralis. Chauss.^ 
 f Sterno-costo-clavio-humeral. Dumas.^ 
 
 Arises By three orders of fibres, from the two an- 
 terior thirds of the clavicle, from the 
 whole length of the sternum, from the 
 cartilages of the fifth, sixth, and seventh 
 ribs. 
 
 Inserted Into the outer edge of the bicipital groove. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the playtisma 
 myoides; the superficial fascise, and mam- 
 mary gland, posteriorly it lies upon the cla- 
 vicle, sternum, and cartilages of the -ribs ; 
 upon the external intercostals, sub clavius, 
 pectoralis minor, coraco-brachialis, and 
 biceps ; upon the thoracic vessels and 
 nerves ; upon the axiliary vessels and bra- 
 
Use. 
 
 122 
 
 chial plexus of nerves : the superior border 
 is contiguous to the deltoid, to the cepha- 
 lic vein, and arteria thoracica acromialis : 
 the internal border is connected to the 
 opposite muscle ; the inferior border is 
 rounded and thick, externally forming the 
 anterior border of the axilla. 
 To carry the arm across the chest, to raise the 
 ribs, as in difficult inspiration ; the infe- 
 rior fibres will also assist in raising the 
 trunk. 
 
 PECTORALIS MINOR. 
 
 C Costo-coracoideus. Chauss. and Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the third, fourth and fifth ribs near 
 their cartilages. 
 
 Inserted } Into the coracoid process by a tendon which 
 is continuous with those of the coraco- 
 brachialis and biceps. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by fascia, by the 
 pectoralis major and by the thoracic vessels 
 and nerves ; posteriorly it lies upon the 
 ribs, the external intercostals, serratus 
 magnus; upon branches of the thoracic 
 vessels ; upon the axillary vessels and axil- 
 lary plexus of nerves. 
 
 Use. To bring the scapula downwards and for- 
 
 wards to elevate the ribs. 
 
 SUBCLAVIUS. 
 
 ( Costo-clavius. Chauss. and Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the cartilage of the first rib. 
 Inserted Into the under surface of the clavicle. 
 Situation. It is covered by fascia and the pectoralis 
 
 major, it lies upon the axillary vessels and 
 
 plexus of nerves. 
 Use. To draw down the clavicle, to raise the first 
 
123 
 
 rib, and to diminish the pressure the clavicle 
 must make on the vessels and nerves when 
 the arm is carried backwards. 
 
 Muscles situated on the lateral parts of the Chest, ami 
 behind the Sternum. 
 
 SERRATUS MAGNUS. 
 
 (Costo-scapularis. Chauss.) 
 (Costo-basi-scapulaire. Dumas.) 
 
 .Irises By nine slips from the nine superior ribs. 
 
 Inserted Into the base of the scapula internally. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the latissimus 
 dorsi, pectoralis major and minor, scaleni, 
 subscapularis, by the maxillary vessels and 
 nerves ; posteriorly it lies upon the ribs, 
 intercostals, aud behind upon the serratus 
 posticus superior. 
 
 To carry the shoulder forwards and down- 
 wards, to raise the ribs. 
 
 INTERCOSTALES EXTERNI. 
 
 ( I nter. later i costaux. Dumas.) 
 
 Use. 
 
 Arise From the transverse processes of the dorsal 
 vertebrae, and from the inferior acute edge 
 of each superior rib. 
 
 Inserted Into the superior border of each inferior rib 
 as far as its cartilage, 
 
 Situation. Externally they are covered posteriorly by 
 the sacro-lumbalis, longissimus dorsi, ser- 
 ratus posticus superior and inferior rhom- 
 bdideus, trapezius ; laterally by the serratus 
 magnus ; anteriorly by the pectoralis major 
 and minor, and obliquus abdominis exter- 
 nus. Their internal surfaces are in contact 
 with the pleura, between the tubercles and 
 angles of the ribs, separated by the inter- 
 
124 
 
 costal vessels and nerves : from the angles 
 to the cartilages of the ribs, they lie upon 
 the internal intercostal muscles and vessels. 
 
 INTERCOSTALES INTERNI. 
 
 (Les sous-costaux. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the sternum, from the lower edge of 
 the cartilages of the ribs, extending as far 
 as the angles. 
 
 Inserted Into the superior border of each inferior rib 
 and cartilage. 
 
 Situation. Externally they are covered by the intercos, 
 tales externi, as far as the cartilages of the 
 ribs, by the pectorals and abdominal mus^ 
 cles; internally they lie upon the pleura 
 triangularis sterni, and diaphragm. 
 
 Useqfboth To draw the ribs upwards and outwards, and 
 sets of to thus encrease the capacity of the chest. 
 muscles 
 
 Sometimes one, two, or more intercostcles externi 
 pass from the transverse processes of the vertebrae, over 
 one, two, or more ribs : these have been termed levatores 
 costarum longiores et breviores. A similar course is 
 sometimes described by the internal intercostals, and 
 these slips have been erroneously named depressores cos- 
 tarum proprii. These portions of both rows assist in 
 raising the ribs in the same manner as the rest of the 
 intercostals. 
 
 TRIANGULARIS STERNI. 
 
 ( Sterno-costalis. Chauss et Dumas.) 
 
 Ari&es From the cartilago ensiformis, and lower 
 third of the sternum, 
 
 Inserted Into the cartilages of the second, third, 
 fourth, and fifth ribs. 
 
 Situation. Posteriorly it is covered by the pleura ; ante- 
 riorly by the cartilages of the ribs, by the 
 sternum, internal intercostals, and by the 
 internal mammary vessels. 
 
125 
 
 Use. To depress and draw inwards the cartilages 
 
 of the ribs, and thus to diminish the capa- 
 city of the chest. 
 
 Of the Muscles of the Superior Extremity. 
 
 The muscles of the shoulder are the deltoid, supra- 
 spinatus, infra-spinatus, teres major, teres minor, and 
 subscapularis. 
 
 The muscles of the upper arm are covered by an apo- 
 neurosis, termed the brachial aponeurosis. Externally, 
 it is covered by the integuments, cutaneous veins and 
 nerves ; internally it covers the different muscles, vessels, 
 and nerves, and firmly adheres to the lateral borders of 
 the humerus, thus separating the muscles of the fore 
 part of the arm from those of the back part ; superiorly 
 it is strengthened by tendinous fibres, derived from the 
 deltoid, pectoralis major and latissimus dorsi ; it covers 
 the deltoid, and adheres to the acromion and spine of 
 the scapula ; internally it is lost in the cellular tissue of 
 the axilla; inferiorly, it is continuous with the anti- 
 brachial fascia. Use It binds down the muscles, thus 
 encreasing their power. This fascia is tightened by the 
 pectoral major. 
 
 DELTOIDES. 
 
 ( Sub-acromio-humeralis. Chauss*) 
 ( Sous-acromio-clavi-humeral. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the scapular third of the clavicle, from 
 the whole extent of the acromion and 
 spine of the scapula. 
 
 Inserted Into the middle and external border of the 
 os humeri. 
 
 Situation Externally it is covered by the brachial fascia 
 and a few of the fibres of the platysma 
 myoides : internally it lies upon the cora- 
 coid process, the external surface of the 
 humerus; upon the triangular ligament 
 and fibrous capsule; upon the infra spina- 
 
 M3 
 
126 
 
 tus, teres minor, biceps, coracb-brachialis, 
 pectorales major ; upon the external cir- 
 cumflex vessels and nerves. 
 
 Use. To raise the arm directly upwards, outwards, 
 
 or backwards ; if the arm be fixed, to de- 
 press the shoulder. 
 
 SUPRA SPINATUS. 
 
 (Super-scapulo-trockitereus parvus. Chauss.) 
 (Sus-spini scapulo-trochiterien. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the fossa supra spinata, from the spine 
 and superior costa. 
 
 Inserted Into the greater tubercle. 
 
 Situation) Posteriorly it is covered by fascia, triangular 
 ligament, trapezius and deltoid; anteriorly 
 it lies upon the scapula, supra scapular y 
 vessels and nerves, and upon the fibrous 
 capsule of the scapulo-humeral articulation. 
 
 Use. To assist in raising the arm. 
 
 INFRA SPINATUS. 
 
 ( ' Super-scapulo-trochitereus magnus. Chauss.) 
 
 Arises From the fossa infra spinata spine, and pos- 
 terior costa. 
 
 Inserted Into the greater tubercle 
 
 Situation. It is covered posteriorly by a strong fascia ; 
 by the deltoid atid latissimus dorsi ; inter- 
 nally it lies upon the scapula, the infra 
 scapular vessels and nerves, and upon the 
 fibrous capsule of the shoulder joint. 
 
 Use. To raise the arm* and rblTit outwards when 
 
 raised. 
 
127 
 TERES MINOR. 
 
 {Super scapulo trochitereus minimus. Chauss.) 
 (Margini suo scapulo-trochiterien. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the inferior costa, extending to the 
 'neck of the scapula. 
 
 Inserted Into the greater tubercle. 
 
 Situation. Posteriorly it is covered by the deltoid; 
 inferiorly it covers the infra scapular ves- 
 sels, the long head of the triceps, and the 
 fibrous capsule of the scapulo-humeral 
 articulation. 
 
 Use. To draw the humerus downwards and back- 
 
 wards, and to roll it outwards. 
 
 TERES MAJOR, 
 
 (Scapulo-humeralis. Chauss.) 
 ( An^uli-scaputo-humeral. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the inferior angle of the scapula. 
 
 Inserted Into the inner border of the bicipital groove. 
 
 Situation. Posteriorly it is covered by the latissimus dor- 
 si ; anteriorly it is in apposition with the 
 biceps, coraco-brachialis subscapularis, and 
 with the axillary vessels and nerves. 
 
 Use. To roll the humerus inwards, to draw it 
 
 downwards and backwards. 
 
 SUBSCAPULARIS. 
 
 ( Sub-scapulo-trocki?ieus. Chauss. & Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the fossa subscapularis, from the pos- 
 terior, superior, and anterior costae inter- 
 nally. 
 
 Inserted Into the smaller tubercle. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it lies against the serratusmagnus, 
 the coraco-brachialis, short head of the 
 biceps, axillary vessels and nerves ; exter- 
 nally it covers the bone, fibrous capsule of 
 
Use. 
 
 128 
 
 the joint and branches of the suhscapular 
 vessels. 
 
 To roll the humerus inwards and draw it to 
 the side. 
 
 Muscles of the Arm. 
 
 These Muscles are, anteriorly, the biceps and 
 brachialis anticus ; posteriorly, the triceps j internally^ 
 the coraco-brachialis. 
 
 BICEPS. 
 
 ( ScapuJo-radiaHs. Chauss.) 
 (Scapulo-coraco-radical. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises By two heads, the long head from the top of 
 the glenoid cavity ; short head from the 
 coracoid process. 
 
 Inserted Into the tubercle of the radius. 
 
 Situation. It is covered by fascia, deltoid, pectoralis 
 major, and capsule of the joint ; posteri- 
 orly it lies upon the humerus, coraco- 
 brachialis, brachialis anticus, and upon 
 the musculo-cutaneous nerve ; the inner 
 border corresponds with the coraco-brachi- 
 alis, brachial artery, basilic vein, and 
 median nerve. 
 
 Use. To bend the fore arm upon the upper arm, 
 
 to supine the hand, and to tighten the 
 antibrachial fascia. 
 
 CORACO-BRACHIALIS. 
 
 (Coraco humeralis. Chauss. and Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the coracoid process of the scapular. 
 
 Inserted Into the middle of the humerus internally. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the pectoralis 
 major aud deltoid; posteriorly it lies upon 
 the subscapularis, teres major, and latis- 
 simus dorsi ; upon the musculo cutaneous 
 nerve ; the outer border is partly concealed 
 
129 
 
 by the biceps ; the inner border is in 
 apposition with the brachial artery, and 
 basilic vein, and median nerve. 
 Use. To raise the arm upwards and inwards. 
 
 BRACHIALIS ANTICUS. 
 
 (Humero-ulnaris. Chauss. and Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the humerus on either side the inser- 
 tion of the deltoid. 
 
 Inserted Into the coronoid process of the ulna. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the biceps, prona- 
 tor radii teres ; by the brachial artery and 
 its branches ; by the basilic vein ; by the 
 median, ulnar, musculo cutaneous, and 
 internal cutaneous nerves, posteriorly it 
 lies upon the humerus, and humero-cubital 
 articulation. 
 To bend the arm. 
 
 Use. 
 
 TRICEPS. 
 
 ( Olecrano-scapularis. Chauss.^ 
 ( Tri-scapulo-humero-olecranien. Dumas.^ 
 
 Arises By three heads ; the long head from the edge 
 of the scapula near its neck, the second, 
 from the posterior surface of the humerus 
 below the head ; the third, from the mid- 
 dle of the humerus internally. 
 
 Inserted Into the olecranon process of the ulna. 
 
 Situation. Posteriorly it is covered by the deltoid and 
 teres minor ; anteriorly it lies against the 
 neck of the humerus, the body of the hu- 
 merus, the fibrous capsule of the scapulo- 
 humeral articulation, the synovial capsule 
 of the humero .cubital articulation against 
 the teres major, subscapularis, latissimus 
 dorsi ; against the profunda branches of 
 the brachial artery, and lastly upon the 
 spiral nerve. 
 
 Use. Powerfully to extend the fore arm. 
 
130 
 
 Muscles of the Fore Arm. 
 
 On removing the integuments we expose a strong 
 fascia the anti-brachial fascia it proceeds anteriorly 
 from the condyles of the humerus and triceps, posteri- 
 orly from the triceps. It dips down between the mus- 
 cles and forms the iiitermuscular ligaments. The ante- 
 rior surface is covered on the radial side by the vena 
 cephalica, on the ulnar side by the vena basilica; and 
 between them both anteriorly are placed the venae medi- 
 anae, posteriorly are numerous venous branches; it is 
 also covered by branches from the spiral, musculo-cuta- 
 neus, and cutaneus internus nerves ; posteriorly it covers 
 the superficial muscles to which it adheres at the upper 
 parts; superiorly it is continuous with the brachial 
 aponeurosis with the aponeurosis of the biceps and tri- 
 ceps, with the periosteum of the condyles of the humerus; 
 inferiorly it is continuous with the anterior and posterior 
 annular ligaments of the wrist joint and with the paL 
 mar fascia. 
 
 These may be divided into four layers, the first layer 
 consists of 
 
 1. PRONATOR RADII TERES. 
 
 (Epitrochlo radialis. Chauss. and Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the inner condyle and coronoid process 
 of the ulna, the two origins are separated 
 by the median nerve. 
 
 Inserted Into the middle of the humerus externally. 
 
 Situation Anteriorly it is covered by fascia by the radial 
 artery, and superficial branch of the spiral 
 nerve by the supinator radii longus ; poste- 
 riorly it lies upon the brachialis anticus, 
 flexor sublimis, ulnar artery, median nerve ; 
 internally it is in connection with the 
 flexor carpi radialis ; externally it forms 
 with the supinator radii longus a triangular 
 space in which is placed on the outer side 
 the tendon of the biceps, on the inner the 
 median nerve and between both the brachial 
 Artery, 
 
131 
 
 Use To roll the radius inwards to pronate the 
 
 hand. 
 
 2. FLEXOR CARPI RADIALIS. 
 
 ( Epitrochlo-metacarpus. Chauss. and Dumas.) 
 
 Arises from the inner condyle and coronoid process 
 of the ulna. 
 
 Inserted Into the metacarpal bone of the fore finger. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by fascia, by the 
 annular ligament, the abductor and oppo- 
 nens pollicis; posteriorly it lies upon the 
 flexor sublimis, flexor longus pollicis, 
 radio-carpal articulation ; superiorly, on 
 the outer side, it is in apposition with the 
 pronator radii teres; with the palmaris 
 longus on the inner : its tendon lies between 
 the supinator radii longus and palmaris 
 longus. 
 
 Use. To bend the wrist. 
 
 3. PALMARIS LONGUS. 
 
 (Epitrochlo-palmaris. Chauss.) 
 (Epitrochlo carpi-palmaire. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the inner condyle of the humerus. 
 
 Inserted Into the annular ligament and palmar fascia. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by fascia ; posteriorly 
 it lies upon the flexor sublimis; externally 
 it is in apposition with the flexor carpi 
 radialis ; internally with the flexor carpi 
 ulnaris. 
 
 Use. To tighten the palmar fascia, and to assist in 
 
 bending the wrist. 
 
 4. FLEXOR CARPI ULNARIS. 
 
 (Epitrochlo-carpalis : Chauss.J 
 ( Epitrochlo-cubito-carpien : Dumas.J 
 
 Arises From the inner condyle and the side of the 
 
132 
 
 olecranon the two origins are separated by 
 
 the ulnar nerve. 
 
 Inserted Into the os orbiculare. 
 Situation Anteriorly it is covered by fascia. Posteriorly 
 
 it lies upon the flexor sublimis, pronator 
 
 quadratus, ulnar vessels and nerve. 
 Use To assist in bending the wrist. 
 
 The second layer consists of 
 
 1. FLEXOR DIGITORUM SUBLIMIS PER- 
 FORATUS. 
 
 fEpitrochlo-phalangeus. Chauss.) 
 ( 'Epitrochio-coroni-phalanginien. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the inner condyle, from the coronoid 
 process of the ulna_, and from the middle of 
 the radius. 
 
 Inserted Into the anterior part of second phalanx, each 
 tendon is divided for the passage of a ten- 
 don of the flexor profundus. 
 
 Situation. The anterior surface is covered by the pre- 
 ceding muscles, by the annular ligament,, 
 the palmar fascia, the superficial palmar 
 arch of arteries, and the branches of the 
 median nerve ; the posterior surface lies 
 upon the flexor profundus, flexor longus 
 pollicis, lumbricales, upon the ulnar artery, 
 median and ulnar nerves. 
 
 Use. To bend the fingers and to assist in bending 
 
 the wrist. 
 
 The third layer consists of 
 
 1. FLEXOR DIGITORUM PROFUNDUS 
 PFRFORANS. 
 
 (Ulno sub unguinafis. Chauss.) 
 (Cubito-phalangetien commun. Dumas.) 
 
 Atises From the coronoid process of the ulna, from 
 the upper two-thirds of the ulna, and from 
 the interosseous ligament. 
 
133 
 
 Inserted Into the extreme phalanges. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the flexor sublimis, 
 flexor carpi ulnaris, ulnar vessels, median 
 and ulnar nerve ; posteriorly it lies upon 
 the ulna, the interosseous ligament, the 
 radio-carpal articulation, pronator quad 
 ratus, flexor brevis pollicis, adductor pol 
 licis, interrossei ; externally it is separated 
 from the flexor longus pollicis by the an- 
 terior interosseal artery. 
 
 Use. To bend the fingers, to assist in bending the 
 
 wrist. 
 
 2. FLEXOR LONGUS POLLICIS. 
 
 (Radio-sub unguialis. Chauss.) 
 ( Radio-phalangettien du pouce. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the radius between the tubercle and 
 insertion of the pronator radii teres, from 
 the interosseous ligament, from the internal 
 condyle. 
 
 Inserted Into the extreme phalanx of the thumb. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the flexor sublimis, 
 supinator radii longus, by the radial vessels 
 and superficial branch of the spiral nerve ; 
 posteriorly it lies upon the radius, inter- 
 osseous ligament, pronator quadratus, the 
 radio-carpal articulation; its tendon passes 
 between the two origins of the flexor 
 brevis. 
 
 Use. To bend the last phalanx of the thumb, to 
 
 assist in bending the wrist. 
 
 The fourth layer is formed by the 
 
 PRONATOR QUADRATUS. 
 
 ( Ulno-radialis. Chauss. Cubito radial. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the lower extremity of the ulna for 
 the extent of about two inches. 
 
 N 
 
134 
 
 Inserted Into the lower and anterior part of the 
 
 radius. 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the flexor profun- 
 
 dus, flexor longus pollicis ; by the radial 
 
 and ulnar vessels, by the ulnar nerve ; 
 
 posteriorly it lies upon the interosseous 
 
 ligament, the lower end of the radius, and 
 
 ulna. 
 Use. To roll the radius inwards, to pronate the 
 
 hand. 
 
 Muscles on the radial and posterior surface of the 
 Fore-arm. 
 
 SUPINATOR RADII LONGUS. 
 
 (Humero-super-radialis. Chauss. & Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the external border of the humerus, 
 immediately below the insertion of the 
 deltoid. 
 
 Inserted Into the styloid process of the radius. 
 
 Situation. At its origin the brachialis anticus is placed 
 in front, posteriorly the triceps, above the 
 deltoid, below the extensor carpi radialis 
 longior ; anteriorly it is covered by fascia ; 
 posteriorly it lies upon the extensor carpi 
 radialis longior supinator brevis, flexor 
 carpi radialis, flexor longus pollicis, above 
 the spiral nerve is placed to its inner side, 
 below the radial artery and superficial 
 branch of the spiral nerve are placed 
 between it and the flexor carpi radialis. 
 
 Use. To turn the radius outwards, to supine the 
 
 hand. 
 
135 
 
 EXTENSOR CARPI RADIALIS LONGIOR. 
 
 ( Humero-super car pens. Chauss. & Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From one external border of the humerus, 
 below the preceding muscle. 
 
 Inserted Into the metacarpal bone of the fore finger. 
 
 Situation. At its origin it has the brachialis anticus on 
 its inner side; posteriorly the triceps; 
 above the supinator radii longus, below 
 the extensor carpi radialis brevior: it is 
 covered, anteriorly, by the preceding mus,- 
 cle, by the extensor ossis-metacarpi pol- 
 licis, by the extensor primi internodii ; it 
 lies upon the supinator radii brevis, the 
 extensor carpi radialis brevior. 
 
 Use. To assist in extending the wrist. 
 
 EXTENSOR CARPI RADIALIS BREVIOR. 
 
 ( Epicondylo-super-metacarpeus. Chauss. & Dumas, 
 
 Arises From the outer condyle of the humerus and 
 ridge above that process. 
 
 Inserted Into the metacarpal bone of the second finger. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the extensor carpi 
 radialis longior, supinator radii longus, 
 extensor ossis metacarpi pollicis, extensor 
 primi et secundi internodii ; anteriorly it 
 lies upon the supinator radii brevis and 
 radio-carpal articulation; the inner and 
 posterior margin is in apposition with the 
 extensor communis digitorum. 
 
 Use. To assist in extending the wrist. 
 
 EXTENSOR DIGITORUM COMMUNIS. 
 ( Epicondylo-super-unguialis. Chauss. & Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the outer condyle of the humerus and 
 
 fascia. 
 
 Inserted Into the posterior surface of all the phalanges. 
 Situation. Posteriorly it is covered by fascia and by the 
 
136 
 
 posterior annular ligament; anteriorly it 
 lies upon the supinator brevis, extensores 
 pollicis extensor indicis, radio-carpal arti- 
 culation interossei. 
 Use. To extend the fingers. 
 
 EXTENSOR CARPI ULNARIS. 
 
 ( Ulno-super-metacarpeus. Chauss.) 
 (Epicondylo-cubito-sus-metacarpien. Dumas. ) 
 
 Arises From the outer condyle and intermuscular 
 ligaments. 
 
 Inserted Into the posterior part of the metacarpal 
 bone of the little finger. 
 
 Situation. It is covered posteriorly by fascia, by the 
 posterior annular ligament; anteriorly it 
 lies upon the supinator radii brevis, exten- 
 sores pollicis, extensor indicis. 
 
 Use. To assist in the extension of the wrist. 
 
 EXTENSOR MINIMI DIGITI. 
 
 ( Epicondylo-sus-phalangettien du petit doigt. Dumas.) 
 
 This is nothing more than an ulnar slip of the com- 
 mon extensor passing through a separate depression of 
 the radius, and through a separate sheath in the annu- 
 lar ligament. 
 
 Use. To extend the little finger. 
 
 ANCONEUS. 
 
 ( Epicondylo-ulnaris. Chauss.) 
 (Epicondyto-cubitaL Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the external condyle of the humerus. 
 
 Inserted Into the outer border of the olecranon. 
 
 Situation. Posteriorly it is covered by fascia ; anteriorly 
 it lies upon the synovial capsule of the 
 humero-radial articulation, external late- 
 ral ligament, coronary ligament of the 
 
Use. 
 
 137 
 
 radius ; and upon the supinator radii 
 brevis. 
 It assists in extending the fore-arm. 
 
 Deep-seated Muscles of the posterior part of the Fore-arm 
 SUPINATOR RADII BREVIS. 
 
 (Epicondylo-radialis. Chauss. & Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the external condyle of the humerus, 
 from the outer and upper part of the 
 ulnar. 
 
 Inserted Into the upper and fore part of the radius. 
 
 Situation. It is covered by the pronator radii teres, 
 radial artery and superficial branch of the 
 spiral nerve, supinator radii longus, exten- 
 sor communis et ulnaris anconeus ; anteri- 
 orly it lies upon a portion of the radius 
 and ulna, upon the synovial capsule of the 
 cubito humeral articulation, external late- 
 ral and annular ligament. 
 
 Use. To roll the radius outwards, to supine the 
 
 hand. 
 
 EXTENSOR OSSIS METACARPI POLLICIS. 
 
 (Ulno-super-metacarpeus pollicis. Chauss.) 
 (Cubito-radi-sus-metacarpien du pouce. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the middle and posterior nart of the 
 
 ulna. 
 Inserted Into the os trapezium and metacarpal bone 
 
 of the thumb. 
 Use. To extend the first phalanx of the thumb 
 
 obliquely outwards. 
 
EXTENSOR PRIM! INTERNODII POLLICIS. 
 
 C Ulno-super-phalangeus primus pollicis. Chauss.) 
 ( ' Cubito-sus-phalangien du pouce. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the posterior surface above its middle, 
 and from the interosseous ligament. 
 
 Inserted Into the posterior part of the first phalanx. 
 
 Use To extend the first phalanx obliquely out- 
 
 wards. 
 
 EXTENSOR SECUNDI INTERNODII 
 POLLICI. 
 
 (Ulno-super-phalangeus secundus pollicis. Chauss.) 
 
 Arises From the posterior part of the ulna and in- 
 terosseous ligament ; its belly partly con- 
 ceals the origin of the two other extensors. 
 
 Inserted Into the extreme phalanx of the thumb. 
 
 Use. To extend the last joint of the thumb ob- 
 
 liquely backwards. 
 
 Situation Of the extensors of the thumb. Their pos- 
 terior surfaces are covered by the supina- 
 tor radii brevisj, extensor digitorum com- 
 munis, extensor carpi ulnaris ; their ante- 
 rior surfaces cover the ulna., interosseous 
 ligament, posterior interosseal vessels, 
 radio-carpal articulation, radial artery, 
 branches of the spiral nerve, and tendons 
 of the radial extensors. 
 
 INDICATOR. 
 
 C Ulno-super-phalangeus primus indicis. 
 Chauss. & Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the middle and back part of the ulna, 
 and from the interosseous ligament. 
 
 Inserted Into the extreme phalanx of the fore finger. 
 
 Situation. It is covered by the extensor communis ; an- 
 teriorly it lies upon the extensor secundi 
 internodii. 
 
 Use To assist in extending the fore-finger. 
 
139 
 
 Of the Muscles of the Hand. 
 
 The ball of the thumb is formed by the abductor, 
 opponens, flexor brevis, and adductor pollicis : the ball 
 of the little finger is constituted by the abductor, flexor 
 brevis, and adductor minimi digiti : the muscles placed 
 in the palm of the hand are the lunibricales and inter- 
 ossei. 
 
 These Muscles are covered by the palmar aponeurosis. 
 
 THE PALMAR FASCIA 
 
 Extends from the annular ligament to the heads of 
 the metacarpal bones, is remarkably dense, of a trian- 
 gular shape ; the anterior surface is covered by the in- 
 teguments ; the posterior surface lies upon the superficial 
 palmar arch of arteries, upon the branches of the me- 
 dian and ulnar nerves, upon the superficial and deep 
 flexor tendons, upon the lumbricales ; its external mar- 
 gin sends off an expansion, covering the muscles of the 
 thumb ; its inner margin a similar one, investing the 
 muscles of the little finger ; above it is continuous with 
 the fibres of the annular ligament, and aponeurosis of 
 the palmaris longus ; inferior ly it divides into four slips,, 
 which are connected by transverse fibres, these slips 
 separate the tendons of the fingers, and adhere to the 
 heads of the metacarpal bones. 
 
 PALMARIS BREVIS. 
 
 (Palmaris cutaneus. Chauss. & Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the annular ligament, and inner bor- 
 der of the palmar fascia^ 
 
 Inserted Into the integument covering the little finger. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the integuments ; 
 posteriorly it lies upon the ulnar artery and 
 nerve, upon the adductor and flexor brevis, 
 minimi digiti. 
 
 Use^ To assist in contracting the palm of the 
 
 hand. 
 
140 
 ABDUCTOR POLLICIS. 
 
 ( Carpo-super phalangeus. Chauss) 
 ( Carpo-sus-phalangien du pouce. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the annular ligament, os scaphoideum^ 
 
 and os trapezium. 
 Inserted Into the root of the first phalanx of the 
 
 thumb. 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the expansion of 
 
 the palmar fascia, posteriorly it lies upon 
 
 the opponens pollicis. 
 Use. To abduce the thumb. 
 
 FLEXOR OSSIS METACARPI POLLICIS, OR 
 OPPONENS POLLICIS. 
 
 ( Car po-metacar polls. Chauss.) 
 ( Carpo-phalangien du pouce. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the annular ligament, and os trape- 
 zium 
 
 Inserted Into the under and fore part of the metacar- 
 pal bone of the thumb. 
 
 Situation. It is covered by the abductor pollicis and 
 fascia ; it lies upon the flexor brevis, and 
 carpo-metacarpal articulation of the thumb. 
 
 Use. To bring the thumb inwards, and make it 
 
 oppose the fingers. 
 
 FLEXOR BREVIS POLLICIS MANUS. 
 
 (Carpo phalangeus. Chauss. & Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the os trapezoideum, os magnum and 
 os unciforme. 
 
 Inserted Into the base of the first phalanx and ossa 
 sesamoidea. 
 
 Situation. It lies under the abductor pollicis.; it is di- 
 vided into two portions by the flexor lon- 
 gus ; it lies upon the tendon of the flexor 
 carpi radialis. 
 
 Use* It bends the first phalanx of the thumb.. 
 
141 
 ADDUCTOR POLLICIS MANUS. 
 
 ( Metacarpo-phalangeus pollicis. Chauss. et Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the metacarpal bone of the middle 
 
 finger, crosses the metacarpal bone of the 
 
 fore-finger. 
 Inserted Into the root of the first phalanx of the 
 
 thumb. 
 Situation. It lies under the tendons of the flexor pro- 
 
 fundus and lumbricales, upon the inter- 
 
 ossei. 
 Use. To bring the thumb inwards towards the 
 
 fingers. 
 
 ABDUCTOR MINIMI DIGITI. 
 
 (Carpo-metacarpeus minimi digiti. Chauss. et Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the os orbiculare and annual ligament. 
 
 Inserted Into the inner side of the first phalanx. 
 
 Situation. It is covered by the expansion from the pal- 
 mar fascia, it lies upon the flexor brevis. 
 
 Use. To draw the little finger from the other 
 
 fingers. 
 
 FLEXOR BREVIS MINIMI DIGITI. 
 
 (Carpo-phalangeus secundus. Dumas et Chauss.) 
 
 Arises From the os cuneiforme and annular ligament . 
 
 Inserted Into the base of the first phalanx of the 
 little finger. 
 
 Situation. It is placed on the same plane with the 
 abductor, and lies partly upon the adduc- 
 tor minimi digiti. 
 
 Use. To flex the first phalanx of the little finger. 
 
 ADDUCTOR MINIMI DIGITI. 
 
 (Carpo-metacarpeus minimi digiti.) 
 
 Arises From the os uncifonne, from the anuular 
 ligament. 
 
142 
 
 Inserted Into the whole length of the outer border of 
 the metacarpal bone of the little finger. 
 
 Situation. It is covered by the abductor and flexor bre- 
 vis minimi digiti. 
 
 Use. To adduce the little finger. 
 
 LUMBRICALES. 
 
 (Palmo-phafangei. Chauss.) 
 (Annuli-tendino-phalangiens. Dumas.) 
 
 Arise These four muscular slips are connected to 
 
 the tendons of the flexor sublimis digito- 
 
 rum. 
 Inserted Into the sides of the first phalanges of the 
 
 fingers, into the posterior surfaces of the 
 
 second phalanges. 
 Use. To bend the first phalanges, to extend the 
 
 second phalanges. 
 
 INTEROSSEI. 
 
 On removing the preceding muscle, we expose the 
 interossei ; there are two strata, an external and in- 
 ternal. These muscles take their origin from the sides 
 of the metacarpal bones, and are fixed by slender ten- 
 dons into the tendinous expansions of the extensor digi- 
 torum communis. By these muscles the fingers are 
 moved laterally, they also assist in bending or extending 
 the phalanges of the fingers. 
 
 There are four interossei interni in the palm of the 
 hand. 
 
 The first, called prior indicis is inserted into the 
 outer border of the first phalanx of the fore finger. 
 
 The second, called posterior indicis is inserted into the 
 inner border of the first phalanx of the fore finger. 
 
 The third, called prior annularis is inserted into the 
 outer side of the first phalanx of the ring finger. 
 
 The fourth called interosseous auricularis is inserted 
 into the outer border of the first phalanx of the little 
 finger. 
 
 All these muscles arise from the corresponding borders 
 of the metacarpal bones. 
 
143 
 
 There are only three interossei externi called bicipites ; 
 these are larger than the internal,, and are situated be- 
 tween the metacarpal bones on the back of the hand. 
 
 The first called the prior medii, is inserted into the 
 outer side of the middle finger. 
 
 The second called posterior medii, is inserted into the 
 inner border of the middle finger. 
 
 The third called posterior auricularis, is inserted into 
 the inner side of the ring finger. 
 
 These muscles also arise from corresponding borders 
 of the metacarpal bones, each by two heads. 
 
 Use. Each bends its finger backwards, or draws it 
 
 from the thumb, and bends it somewhat 
 inwards. 
 
 ABDUCTOR INDICIS. 
 
 Arises From the os trapezium, and from the meta- 
 carpal bone of the thumb. 
 
 Inserted Into the outer side of the root of the first 
 phalanx. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it lies against the adductor pollicis, 
 and radial artery ; posteriorly it is covered 
 by the integuments. 
 
 Use. To abduce the fore finger, to assist in ad- 
 
 ducing the thumb. 
 
 Muscles of the Abdomen. 
 
 On removing the integuments we expose the subcuta- 
 neous cellular tissue, formed of two layers ; the first 
 encloses adipose vesicles, always more numerous over 
 the inguinal, then over the umbilical region : the second 
 layer forms the superficial fascia. In this, as in other 
 parts of the body, the nature of the superficial ftiscia 
 varies ; it is formed of condensed cellular membrane, 
 and has the appearance of a true aponeurosis. In ad- 
 dition to covering the abdomen, superiorly it may be 
 traced continuous with the fascia covering the pecto- 
 ralis major, even up to the neck, where it is connected 
 
144 
 
 with the superficial cervical fascia. In front of the 
 abdomen, this membrane is white and transparent, it 
 covers the inguinal ring, passes into the scrotum ; it is 
 also spread over the thigh as far as the knee ; it also 
 affords a covering to the muscles of the perinaeum. The 
 subcutaneous vessels of this region ramify between its 
 layers. On removing this fascia, we observe that the 
 abdomen from the ensiform cartilage, to about two 
 inches below the umbilicus is covered in front by a 
 sheath of tendon, on the sides by muscular fibres ; below 
 the point mentioned the tendon expands, and covers 
 the whole extent of the lower part of the abdomen. 
 There are seen certain lines strongly marked on the 
 fore part and sides of the abdomen. The first termed 
 linea alba, commences at the ensiform cartilage, and 
 terminates at symphysis pubis j about two inches on 
 either side is a semilunar line, linea semilunaris. It 
 commences from the greatest convexity of the eighth 
 rib, and terminates at the symphysis pubis. We may 
 observe also, tendinous lines intersecting the recti 
 muscles, linece transverse, three above, half a one be- 
 low the umbilicus. In the broad tendon covering the 
 front and lower part of the abdomen, are three im- 
 portant openings: viz. the umbilical, situated in the 
 centre of the linea alba, for the transmission of the um- 
 bilical cord in the foetus, and the external abdominal 
 rings, one placed on either side between the tubercle 
 and symphysis pubis ; in the male giving passage to the 
 spermatic cord, in the female to the round ligament of 
 the uterus. We have also small openings in the central 
 tendon for the passage of twigs of nerves, and small 
 blood vessels. 
 
 The muscles of the abdomen are five pairs, three pairs 
 situated on the sides, two pairs in front. 
 
 OBLIQUUS ABDOMINIS EXTERNUS 
 DESCENDENS. 
 
 jBjf 
 
 (Costo-abdominalis. Chauss.) 
 (Ilio-pubi-costo-abdominal. Dumas) 
 
 Arises By eight distinct slips from the eight inferior 
 ribs near their cartilages: the five superior 
 
145 
 
 slips serrate with the serratus magnus, the 
 three inferior with the latissimus dorsi. 
 
 Inserted Into the two anterior thirds of the crista of 
 the ilium, from the anterior superior spi- 
 nous process, it sends off a broad tendon, 
 which is inserted into the linea-ilio-pecti- 
 nea, tubercle, and symphysis pubis, into the 
 whole extent of the linea alba and carti- 
 lage ensiformis. The inferior border of 
 the tendon is rounded, and termed Pou- 
 part's ligament, or crural arch, the portion 
 inserted into the linea-ilio-pectinea, is 
 called Gimbernat's ligament. 
 
 Situation. The external surface is covered by the latis- 
 simus dorsi posteriorly, by the superficial 
 fascia, it lies upon the internal oblique, 
 the rectus, cartilages of the ribs, and ex- 
 ternal intercostal muscles; the anterior 
 border looses itself in the linea alba. 
 
 Use. To draw down the ribs, having depressed 
 
 the ribs, if both muscles act to flex the 
 trunk, if one only, it bends the body to 
 the opposite side. They forcibly compress 
 the abdominal viscera, thus assisting in 
 the expulsion of the contents of the vis. 
 cera, and in the female the foetus : lastly, 
 if the ribs be raised and fixed, these mus- 
 cles will elevate the pelvis. 
 
 OBLIQUUS ABDOMINIS INTERNUS 
 ASCENDENS. 
 
 Arise* 
 
 Inserted 
 
 ( Ilio-abdominalls meduis. Chauss.) 
 (Ilio-lumbo-costi-abdominal. Dumas. ) 
 
 From the iliac half of Poupart's ligament, 
 from the whole of the crest of the ilium, 
 from the back part of the sacrum, from 
 the fascia lumborum. 
 
 Into the symphvsis pubis, into the whole ex- 
 tent of the linea alba, cartilago ensiformis, 
 and six inferior ribs. At the linea semi- 
 lunaris this muscle becomes entirely tendi- 
 
146 
 
 nous, the tendon at this point separates 
 into two layers, one layer passing in front 
 of the rectus with the tendon of the exter* 
 nal oblique, the other layer passing behind 
 the rectus with the tendon of the trans- 
 versalis, by this means the rectus is in- 
 closed in a tendinous sheath. At the 
 lower part of the abdomen the sheath is 
 defective, the tendons all pass in front of 
 the rectus. 
 
 Situation. It is covered by the external oblique, by the 
 latissimus dorsi, it lies upon the transver- 
 salis, longissimus dorsi. 
 
 Use. To assist the action of the obliquus externus, 
 
 if both muscles act they will bend the 
 body to the same side. 
 
 CREMASTER. 
 
 In the descent of the testicle from the loins in the 
 foetus it carries with it a few of the fibres of the inter- 
 oblique and transversalis ; these are spread over the 
 cord and are attached to the tunica vaginalis reflexa, and 
 thus constitute this muscle. It forms one of the co- 
 verings of oblique inguinal hernia and its fibres are in 
 these cases, sometimes remarkably thickened. 
 
 Use. To draw the testes upwards, towards the ex- 
 
 ternal ring. 
 
 TRANSVERSALIS ABDOMINIS. 
 
 (Isumbo-abdommalis. Chauss.) 
 ( Lumbo-ili-abdominaL Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the iliac half of Poupart's ligament, 
 from crest of the ilium, back part of the 
 sacrum from the four superior lumbar and 
 last dorsal vertebrae, and from the cartila- 
 ges of the seven inferior ribs. 
 
 Inserted Into the symphysis pubis, the whole extent of 
 the linea alba and ensiform cartilage. 
 
147 
 
 Situation. It is covered by the internal oblique and cir- 
 cumflex vessels ; it lies upon the fascia 
 transversalis. 
 
 Use. To support and compress the abdominal vis- 
 
 cera, to assist in expiration. 
 
 RECTUS ABDOMINIS. 
 
 (Sterno-pubalis. Chauss. Pubio-sternal. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises By two tendons from the symphysis pubis. 
 
 Inserted Into the cartilage ensiformis, and cartilages 
 of the three inferior true ribs, and often 
 intermixes with some fibres of the pecto- 
 ral muscle. 
 
 Situation. It is covered by the tendon of the external 
 oblique, by the aponeurosis of the pecto- 
 ralis major, by the pyramidalis: it lies 
 upon the cartilages of the three inferior 
 true ribs, cartilage ensifonns, upon the 
 tendon of the transversalis and posterior 
 half of the tendon of the internal oblique* 
 At the point where these tendons pass in 
 front of this muscle, it there lies upon the 
 fascia transversalis; lastly, upon the inter- 
 nal epigastric and internal mammary ves- 
 sels. 
 
 Use. To compress the fore-part of the abdomen, 
 
 to draw down the ribs, to bend the trunk 
 forwards, to raise the pelvis : by its ten- 
 dinous intersections, it is enabled to con- 
 tract at any of the intermediate spaces. 
 
 PYRAMIDALIS. 
 
 (Pubo-sub-umbilicalis. Chauss. ) 
 
 Arises By a broad base from the symphysis publs. 
 Inserted Into the linea by an acute termination, about 
 
 two inches above the pubis. 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the abdominal 
 
 aponeurosis : it lies upon the rectus. 
 Use. To assist the rectus in its action. 
 
148 
 
 Parts connected with ike Abdominal Muscles. 
 OF POUPART'S LIGAMENT. 
 
 The under part of the tendon of the external oblique, 
 stretched between the anterior superior spinous process 
 of the ilium and symphysis pubis, is thicker and some- 
 what rounded. It has been described under the name 
 of Poupart's ligament, Fallopius's ligament, and crural 
 arch. Under it passes the psoas magnus, the iliacus in- 
 ternus, anterior crural and cutaneous externus nerves, 
 femoral artery and vein, and also the absorbents of the 
 lower extremity. 
 
 OF GIMBERNAT'S LIGAMENT. 
 
 This ligament is nothing more than the third inser- 
 tion of Poupart's ligament; it is attached from the 
 tubercle of the pubis, to about half an inch of the com- 
 mencement of the linea-ilio-pectinea ; it looks upwards 
 and outwards, and forms a boundary to the inner side 
 of the femoral sheath. 
 
 OF THE EXTERNAL ABDOMINAL RING, 
 
 On tracing Poupart's ligament to its insertion into 
 the os pubis, its fibres will be found to separate into two 
 bands, one portion is inserted into the symphysis pubis 
 (upper column), the other into the tubercle of the 
 pubis (lower column) ; the intervening space which 
 results from their separation, is termed the external 
 abdominal ring. It is of triangular shape ; in the male 
 it gives passage to the spermatic cord j in the female, 
 to the round ligament of the Uterus. The opening is 
 indistinct, owing to cellular tissue connecting the cord 
 to the edges of the ring, the fascia spermatica. The 
 apex of the opening is rounded by some transverse 
 bands of tendinous fibres passing from Poupart's liga- 
 ment inwards,, the inter-columnal fascia. 
 
149 
 OF THE FASCIA TRANSVERSALIS. 
 
 On removing the abdominal muscles will be exposed 
 between the transversalis muscle and peritonaeum, a dis- 
 tinct fascia, the fascia transversalis; it arises by two 
 portions, the iliac or outer portion from Poupart's liga- 
 ment the pubic or inner portion from Gimbernat's ; the 
 two portions unite, leaving an opening, termed the in- 
 ternal abdominal ring; the fascia is spread over the 
 peritonaeum, and may be traced supe>io>ly as high as 
 the diaphragm, posteriorly as far back as the psoas mag- 
 nus ; dense and resisting at the lower part of the abdo- 
 men. 
 
 OF THE INTERNAL ABDOMINAL RING. 
 
 This opening is situated midway between the spine 
 of the ilium and symphysis pubis, about three quarters 
 of an inch above Poupart's ligament, about an inch and 
 a half on the iliac side of the pubis. It transmits the 
 spermatic cord in the male, and round ligament of the 
 uterus in the female. Although usually described as a 
 distinct opening, it is indistinct, as the fascia transversalis 
 is prolonged upon the cord, and lost in its cellular 
 coverings. 
 
 OF THE INGUINAL CANAL. 
 
 The space between the two rings is termed the ingui- 
 nal canal, and is occupied by the spermatic cord. The 
 canal is bounded anteriorly by the tendon of the exter- 
 nal oblique and the margins of the internal oblique and 
 transversalis, be'oiv by Poupart's ligament, posteriorly 
 by the fascia transversalis, and the pubic portion of the 
 conjoined tendons of the internal oblique and transver- 
 salis. 
 
 SITUATION OF THE EPIGASTRIC ARTERY. 
 
 The epigastric artery arises from the external iliac 
 artery, under Poupart's ligament ; it passes upwards be- 
 hind the spermatic cord towards the umbilicus, first 
 situated behind the fascia transversalis* It is placed on. 
 o3 
 
ISO 
 
 the outer side of the external ring, on the inner side of 
 the internal abdominal ring. 
 
 Lumbar Region. 
 QUADRATUS LUMBORUM. 
 
 (Ilio-costalis. Chauss. Ilis-lumbi-costal. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the posterior part of the crista of the 
 ilium. 
 
 Inserted Into the transverse processes of all the lum- 
 bar vertebrae into the body of the last dor- 
 sal vertebrae and last rib. 
 
 Situation. Posteriorly it is covered by the sacro-lumbalis 
 longissimus dorsi, and aponeurosis gof the 
 transversalis abdominis ; anteriorly it cor- 
 responds with the diaphragm, kidney, and 
 colon intestinum. 
 
 Use. To depress the last rib, to bend the loins to 
 
 one side ; and if both muscles, to bend 
 the loins directly forwards. 
 
 Muscles situated on the lateral parts of the Trunk. 
 
 PSOAS MAGNUS. 
 
 ( Pros- lumbo-trochanterus. Chauss. ) 
 ( Pre-lumbo-trochantien. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the bodies and transverse processes 
 of the last dorsal and all the lumbar ver- 
 tebra?. 
 
 Inserted Into the trochanter minor and linea aspera. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the diaphragm, 
 psoas parvus, Poupart's ligament ; by the 
 peritoneum; by the spermatic and external 
 iliac vessels ; by the kidney and ureter ; 
 posteriorly it lies upon the transverse pro- 
 
m ?. 
 
 cesses of the lumbar vertebrae ; upon the- 
 ilio-lumbar ligament, and fibrous capsule 
 of the ilio-femoral articulation ; upon the 
 quadratus lumborum ; upon the fascia of 
 the trans versalis ; upon the anterior 
 branches of the lumbar nerves; upon the 
 ilio-lumbar vessels. 
 
 Gfse. To bend the thigh upon the body, and to as- 
 
 sist in rotating the thigh outwards ; if the 
 thigh be fixed, to bend the trunk. 
 
 P6OAS PARVUS. 
 
 (Prehtmbo-pubalis. Chauss. and Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the body of the last dorsal and first 
 
 lumbar vertebra. 
 Inserted Into the brim of the pelvis, where the os 
 
 pubis and os ilium are united. 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the diaphragm and 
 
 peritonaeum ; by the renal, spermatic, and 
 
 external iliac vessels. 
 
 Use. To assist in bending the loins or raising the 
 
 pelvis. 
 
 ILIACUS INTERNUS. 
 
 (fllio-trockantinus. Chauss. Iliaco-trochantien. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the transverse process of the last lunu 
 bar vertebra, and from the fossa iliaca. 
 
 Inserted Into the trochanter minor and linea aspera. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the peritoneum, 
 by the psoas parvus, by Poupart's ligament 
 and sartorius, by the ilio lumbar vessels, 
 by the lumbar nerves, by the femoral 
 vessels and anterior crural nerve, by the 
 caecum on the right side and termination, 
 of the intestinum ilium, on the left by the 
 sigmoid flexure of the colon : posteriorly it 
 lies upon the ilium, pubis, and ilio,feznoral 
 articulation. 
 
 Use.. To bend the thigh upon the pelvis. 
 
152 
 
 Muscles of the Hip. 
 GLUTVflEUS MAXIMUS. 
 
 ( Sacro-femoralis. Chauss. Ilio-sacro-femoral. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the posterior part of the crest of the 
 ilium, from the back part of the sacrum, 
 and posterior sacro-sciatic ligament. 
 
 Inserted Into the linea aspera, below the trochanter 
 major. 
 
 Situation. Posteriorly it is covered by the fascia lata, it 
 lies upon the sacrum, posterior sacro-scia- 
 tic ligament, trochanter major ; upon glu- 
 taeus medius, pyriformis, gemelli, obturator 
 internus, quadratus femoris and origin of 
 the flexors of the leg, upon the great sci- 
 atic nerve. 
 To extend the thigh. 
 
 Use. 
 
 GLUT^US MEDIUS. 
 
 (Ilio trochanterus major. Chauss. and Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the anterior portion of the crest of the 
 ilium, not occupied by the maximus, from 
 the dorsum of the ilium between the crest 
 and linea semicircularis 
 
 Inserted Into the trochanter major. 
 
 Situatoin. Posteriorly it is covered by fascia and glu- 
 taeus maximus ; internally it lies upon 
 the glutseus minimus, gluteal vessels and 
 nerves; the posterior border is parallel with 
 the pyriformis. 
 
 Use. To draw the thigh outwards. 
 
 GLUT^US MINIMUS. 
 
 ( Ilie-trochanterus minor. Chauss. and Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the semicircular ridge on the anterior 
 and inferior part of the dorsum of the 
 ilium. 
 
153 
 
 Inserted Into the trochanter major. 
 
 Situation. It is covered by the glutaeus medius and py- 
 rifonnis ; it lies upon the dorsum of the 
 iUum, the ilio femoral articulation, and 
 deep branches of the gluteal artery. 
 
 Use. To assist in abducing the thigh. 
 
 PYRIFORMIS. 
 
 (Sacro trochanter us. Chauss.) 
 ( Sacro-ili-trochanterien. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From within the pelvis, from the second, 
 third, and fourth portions of the sacrum, 
 leaves the pelvis at the upper sciatic 
 opening. 
 
 Inserted Into the fovea of the trochanter major. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the rectum, sciatic 
 nerves, and internal iliac vessels ; posteri- 
 orly is covered by the sacrum and glutaeus 
 maximus; it is placed between the glu- 
 taeus medius and superior gemellus. 
 
 GEMELLI. 
 
 ( Ischio-trochanteri. Chauss.) 
 (Ischio-spi ni-trocha nterien . Dumas.) 
 
 GEMELLUS SUPERIOR, 
 
 Arises From the spine of the Ischium. 
 Situation. Between the pyriformis and obturator in- 
 ternus. 
 
 GEMELLUS INFERIOR. 
 
 Arises From the tuberosity of the ischium. 
 
 Situation. Between the obturator internus, and quad- 
 ratus femoris. The posterior surface of 
 the gemelli is covered by the glutaeus 
 maximus by the great sciatic nerve, and 
 ischiatic vessels. 
 
154 
 
 Inserted Both muscles are inserted into the fossa of 
 
 of the trochanter major. 
 Use. To rotate the thigh outwards. 
 
 OBTURATOR INTERNUS. 
 
 ( Sub-pubo-irochanterus externus. Chauss.) 
 ( Intra-pelvio-trocha nterien. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the inner border of the ohturator fo- 
 ramen and inner surface of the obturator 
 ligament. 
 
 Inserted Into the fossa of the trochanter major. 
 
 Situation. Within the pelvis it is placed between the 
 obturator ligament, and levator ani ; af- 
 terwards its tendon lies between the ge- 
 melli ; posteriorly it is covered by the 
 glutaeus maximus, and great sciatic nerve, 
 and ischiatic vessels. 
 
 Use. To rotate the thigh outwards. 
 
 OBTURATOR EXTERNUS 
 
 ( Sub-pubo-trochanterus externus. Chauss.) 
 (Extra-pelvio-pubi-trochanterien. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the outer margin of the obturator fo- 
 ramen and outer surface of the obturator 
 ligament, its tendon winds around the 
 neck of the femur, adhering to the capsu- 
 lar ligament. 
 
 Inserted Into the fossa of the trochanter major. 
 
 Situation. Its origin is covered by the pectinalis ; it lies 
 upon the obturator ligament ; posteriorly 
 it is covered by the quadratus femoris, 
 
 Uste. To rotate the thigh outwards, 
 
155 
 QUADRATUS FEMORIS. 
 
 (Ischio-trochanterus. Chauss.) 
 Tuber -ischio-trochanterien. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the tuberosity of the ischuim. 
 
 Inserted Into the linea quadrata. 
 
 Situation. It is coveted by the glutaeus maximus, semi- 
 membranosus, adductor magnus, great 
 sciatic nerve, and ischiatic vessels ; anteri- 
 orly it lies upon the obturator externus, 
 tendons of the psoas magnus, and iliacus 
 internus ; upon the capsule of the ilio fe- 
 moral articulation. 
 
 Muscles situated on the external and anterior part of 
 the Thigh. 
 
 The muscles of the thigh are covered by a strong, 
 dense fascia, the fascia lata.* It arises from the bones 
 
 *On examining the fascia lata it will be found to arise by two portions the 
 iliac or outer portion from Poupart's ligament, the pubic or inner portion from 
 Gimbernat's ligament The origin of the iliac portion presents the appearance 
 of a crescentic process ; this was first accurately described by Allan Burns, 
 and called by him the falciform process of the fascia lata ; the pubic portion 
 is thinner, covers the triceps, and pectinalis muscles, and dips down beneath 
 the femoral vessels, and is united with the iliac portion beneath the vena 
 saphena major, where that vein joins the femoral. The oval aperture between 
 the two portions is termed the saphenous opening, and is occupied by the 
 front of the femoral sheath : it is placed on the inner and fore-part of the thigh, 
 over the pectiueus muscle, below Poupart's ligament. Femoral sheath. The 
 fascia intervening between the peritoneum and transversalis abdominis (fascia 
 transversalis) passes underneath Poupart's ligament in front of the femoral 
 vessels and forms the front of the femoral sheath (fascia propria of some anato- 
 mists) ; the strong fascia covering the iliacus internus, passes over the os pubis 
 behind the femoral vessels, and forms the posterior part of the sheath ; these 
 two layers unite at the sides, and constitute the lateral portions. The sheath 
 thus formed is of a funnel shape, and contains on the outer side the femoral ar- 
 tery ; on the inner side the vein which is separated from the artery by a distinct 
 cellular septum. Between the vein and inner border of the sheath, we have a 
 triangular space, called the crural ring or crural aperture. The crural ring 
 is bounded above by Poupart's ligament, below by ihe os pubis, on the outer 
 side by {he femoral vein, on the inner by Gimbernat's ligament. This space is 
 closed by a cribriform membrane (fascia cribriformus), through which the 
 lymphatics of the inferior extremities enter the pelvis, by a small lymphatic 
 gland. According to Sir A. Cooper this fascia is a reflected portion of the 
 fascia transversalis. Femoral hernia enters this aperture, and continuing to 
 descend, carries before it, through the crescentic opening of the fascia lata, the 
 front of the femoral sheath (described under the name of fascia propria or 
 transversalis). The coverings are the common integuments, the superficial 
 fascia, the fascia propria, and, lastly, the peritoneum or hernial sac. 
 
156 
 
 of the pelvis, from Poupart's and Gimbernat's ligament, 
 is spread over the whole of the thigh ; strong and dense 
 on the outer part, more delicate on the anterior and 
 inner part. The anterior surface is covered by the su- 
 perficial fascia, saphena major vein, by small branches 
 from the lumbar and anterior crural nerves, by a num- 
 ber of lymphatic vessels, and superiorly by a chain of 
 lymphatic glands ; superiorly it gives a covering to the 
 glutaeus maximus, and meduis, adheres to the sacrum 
 and os coccygis; inferiorly it is continuous with the 
 fascia of the leg ; internally it dips down between the 
 triceps and vastus internus and firmly adheres to the 
 linea aspera ; externally between the vastus externus, 
 and glutseus maximus above, between the vastus ex- 
 ternus, and biceps below ; thus the muscles of the an- 
 terior region are separated from those of the posterior 
 region. 
 
 Use. To bend the muscles together, and to prevent 
 
 their starting during action, thus increas- 
 ing their power. 
 
 TENSOR VAGINA FEMORIS. 
 
 ( 1 lio-femoralis. Chauss.) 
 (Ilio-aponeurosi-femoral. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the anterior superior spinous process of 
 the ilium. 
 
 Inserted Into the fascia lata, below the trochanter 
 major. 
 
 Situation. Externally it is covered by the fascia lata ; 
 posteriorly it lies upon a portion of the 
 rectus and vastus externus ; anteriorly it 
 is connected with the sartorius at its 
 origin ; posteriorly with the glutaeus 
 medius. 
 
 Use. To tighten the fascia lata, to abduce the 
 
 thigh. 
 
157 
 SARTORIUS. 
 
 ( Ilio-prce-tibialis. Chauss. Ilio-creti-tibial. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the anterior superior spinous process 
 of the ilium. 
 
 Inserted Into the inner side of the tibia, near the in- 
 ferior part of its tubercle. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by fascia; it lies 
 upon the iliacus internus, psoas magnus, 
 rectus, vastus internus, gracilis; about 
 the middle of the thigh upon the femoral 
 artery, vein, and nervus saphenus ; upon 
 the internal lateral ligament. The inner 
 border forms, with the adductor longus, a 
 triangular space, in which is lodged the 
 femoral vessels. 
 
 Use. To bend the leg obliquely inwards, or to 
 
 bring one leg across the other. 
 
 RECTUS FEMORIS. 
 
 ( Ilio-roiularis. Chauss. and Dumas.) 
 
 Arise f By two heads from the anterior inferior 
 spinous process of the ilium and dorsum of 
 the bone above the acetabulum. 
 
 Inserted Into the superior border of the patella. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the sartorius, and 
 fascia lata; posteriorly it lies upon the 
 capsule of the ilio-femoral articulation; 
 upon the cruraeus ; upon the external cir- 
 cumflex vessels and descending branches ; 
 upon the muscular branches of the ante- 
 rior cural nerve. 
 
 Use. To extend the leg upon the thigh, thigh 
 
 upon the pelvis, or pelvis upon the thigh. 
 
158 
 CRURJEU& 
 
 ( Tri-femoro-retu far is. Chauss. ) 
 (Tri-femoro-tibi rotulien. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the fore-part of the os femoris between 
 the two trochanters, from the convex sur- 
 face of the body. 
 
 Inserted Into the superior border of the the patella, 
 below the rectus. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the iliacus inter- 
 nus, and rectus, from which it is separated 
 by the external circumflex vessels, and de- 
 scending branches ; posteriorly it lies upon 
 the os femoris, and synovial capsule of the 
 femoro-tibial articulation ; externally and 
 internally its fibres are intimately united 
 with those of the vasti. 
 
 Use. To assist in extending the leg. 
 
 VASTUS EXTERNUS. 
 
 (Tri-femoro rotularis. Chauss.) 
 C Tri-femoro-tibi-rotulien. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises 
 
 From the root of the trochanter major, from 
 the external border of the linea aspera, 
 and ridge leading to the outer condyle. 
 
 Inserted Into the outer border of the patella. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the tendon of the 
 glutaeus maximus, fascia lata, tensor va- 
 ginae femoris, by the short head of the 
 biceps; the inner border overlaps the 
 cruraeus. 
 
 Use. To assist in extending the leg. 
 
 VASTUS INTERNUS. 
 
 ( Tri-femoro-rolularis. Chauss.) 
 ( Tri-femoro-tibi-rotulien. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the root of the trochanter minor, from 
 the inner border of the linea aspera, and 
 ridge leading to the inner condyle. 
 
159 
 
 Inserted Into the inner border of the patella. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by fascia, sartorius, 
 and femoral vessels ; it lies upon the psoas 
 magnus, pectinalis and adductor magnus ; 
 the outer border overlaps the cruraeus. 
 
 Use. To assist in extending the leg. 
 
 Muscles situated on the inner and posterior part of the 
 thigh. 
 
 PECTINALIS. 
 
 (Pubo-femoralis. Chauss. and Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the body of the pubes. 
 
 Inserted Into the linea aspera, below the trochanter 
 minor. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the fascia lata, 
 deep inguinal glands, and femoral vessels ; 
 posteriorly it lies upon the os pubis cap- 
 sule of ilio-femoral articulation, upon the 
 obturator externus, adductor brevis ; upon 
 the obturator vessels and nerves. 
 
 Use. To raise the thigh upwards and inwards. 
 
 TRICEPS ADDUCTOR LONGUS. 
 
 ( Pubo-femoralis. Chauss. Spini-pubio-femoral. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the os pubis, between its tubercle and 
 symphysis. 
 
 Inserted Into the middle third of the linea aspera in- 
 ternally. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by fascia, by the sar- 
 torius and femoral vessels ; posteriorly it 
 lies upon the adductor brevis and magnus. 
 
 Use. To adduce the thigh, and carries it outwards 
 
 in rotation. 
 
160 
 ADDUCTOR BREVia 
 
 ( Sub-pubo-femoralis. Chauss.) 
 ( Sous-pubio-femoral. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the ramus of the os pubis. 
 
 Inserted Into the linea aspera below the trochanter 
 
 minor. 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the pectinalis, and 
 
 adductor lorigus ; posteriorly it lies upon 
 
 the adductor magnus. 
 Use. To assist the action of the preceding muscle. 
 
 ADDUCTOR MAGNUS. 
 
 (Ischio-femoralis. Chauss. Ischio-pubi-femoral. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the ramus of the os pubis and ischium, 
 also from its tuberosity. 
 
 Inserted Into the inner margin of the linea aspera, 
 into the ridge leading to the inner condyle, 
 and into the inner condyle itself by a 
 rounded tenden. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the pectinalis gra- 
 cialis, adductor longus and brevis, by the 
 sartorius and femoral vessels: posteriorly 
 it lies upon the biceps, semimembranosus, 
 semitendinosuSj glutaeus maximus, great 
 sciatic nerve: the external margin is at- 
 tached to the linea aspera; the internal 
 border is covered by the fascia lata. About 
 the upper part of the lower third of the 
 thigh,, there is a large tendinous opening 
 between the adductor magnus and vastus 
 internus, for the femoral vessels to pass 
 backwards into the popliteal space. 
 
 Use. To adduce the thigh, to rotate it outwards. 
 
GRACILIS. 
 
 (Pubo-prce-tibialis. Chauss.) 
 C Sous-pubis-creti-tibial. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the lower part of the symphysis pubis. 
 
 Inserted Into the tibia, below the sartorius. 
 
 Situation. Internally it is covered by the fascia lata; 
 infer tor ly by the sartorius j it lies upon 
 the adductors, semi-membranosus, internal 
 lateral, and capsular ligaments of the knee 
 joint. 
 
 Use. To assist in the flexion of the knee. 
 
 The last muscle situated internally, namely, the ob- 
 turator externus, has been already described. 
 
 Muscles at the back part of the Thigh. 
 
 BICEPS. 
 
 ( Ischio-femoro-peroneus. Chauss. & Dumas.) 
 
 Arises By two heads the long head from the tube- 
 rosity of the ischium in common with the 
 semi-tendinosus ; the short head from the 
 linea alba, below the insertion of the glu- 
 taeus maximus. 
 
 Inserted Into the back part of the head of the fibula. 
 
 Situation. Posteriorly it is covered by the glutaeus max- 
 imus and fascia lata; anteriorly it lies 
 against the semi-membranosus, great scia- 
 tic nerve, adductor magnus, external late- 
 ral ligament, external circumflex vessels, 
 external head of the gastrocnemius exter- 
 nus. 
 
 Use. To bend the knee. 
 
 p3 
 
162 
 SEMLTENDINOSUS 
 
 (Ischio-prce-tibialis. Chauss.) 
 (Ischio-creti-tibial. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the tuberosity of the ischium. 
 Inserted Into the anterior part of the tibia, below the 
 
 gracilis and sartorius. 
 Situation. Posteriorly it is covered by the fascia lata ; 
 
 anteriorly it lies upon the semi-membrano-, 
 
 sus. 
 Use To assist in bending the knee. 
 
 SEMI-MEMBRANOSUS. 
 
 (Ischio-sub-tibialis. Chauss. ) 
 (Ischio-popliti-tibial. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the tuberosity of the ischium. 
 
 Inserted Into the outer cendyk, forming the posterior- 
 or oblique ligament of the femoro-tibial 
 articulation, into the back part of the 
 tibia, and also into the head, anteriorly 
 and internally. 
 
 Situation. Posteriorly it is covered by the biceps, semi- 
 tendinosus, and fascia lata : anteriorly it 
 lies against the quadratus femoris, adduc- 
 tor magnus, inner head of gastrocnemius 
 externus, internal lateral ligament, and 
 capsule of the femoro-tibial articulation, 
 
 Use. To assist in. bending the knee., 
 
 Muscles of the fore-part of the Leg. 
 
 These muscles are covered by a strong fascia, precisely 
 similar to that covering the fore-arm. This fascia is in 
 a great measure derived from the tendons of the rectus, 
 vasti, and crura&us ; it adheres closely to the tibia and 
 fibula, and being strengthened by seme cross fibres to- 
 wards the ankle joint, it receive > the name of ligamentum 
 annulare. This band proceeds from the outer part 
 
163 
 
 of the external maleolus, across the instep, to the upper 
 part of the inner maleolus. This ligament seems de- 
 signed for the purpose of binding down the several 
 tendons of the muscles, extending the toes, and prevents 
 their starting. This fascia sends processes between the 
 muscles, forming the inter-muscular ligaments, and gives 
 origin to many muscular fibres. The outer surface is 
 covered by the integuments, venae saphenae and branches, 
 of absorbent vessels, and cutaneous nerves. On re- 
 moving the fascia, we expose three muscles at the upper 
 part, namely tibialis anticus, extensor digitorum lon- 
 gus, peroneus longus : at the middle third we expose, 
 tibialis anticus, extensor proprius pollicis, extensor lon- 
 gus, peroneus tertius, peroneus longus, peroneus brevis. 
 
 TIBIALIS ANTICUS. 
 
 (Tibio-supertarseus. Chauss.) 
 ( Tibio-sus-metatarsien. Dumas. ) 
 
 Arises From the superior two thirds of the tibia. 
 
 Inserted Into the cuneiforme internum, and metatar~ 
 sal bone of the great toe. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by fascia ; posteriorly 
 it lies upon the interosseous ligament ; the 
 external margin is in apposition with the 
 extensor digitorum longus above, and the 
 extensor proprius pollicis below, and with 
 the anterior tibial vessels and nerves. 
 
 Use. To bend the foot by drawing it upwards and 
 
 at the same time to turn the toes inwards. 
 
 EXTENSOR LONGUS DIGITORUM PEDIS. 
 
 ( Peroneo-super-unguialis. Chauss.) 
 ( Peroneo~tibi~sus-pha'angettien commun. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the outer part of the head of the tibia,, 
 from the head of the fibula, and from 
 about three fourths of this bone, and from 
 the interosseous ligament. 
 
 Inserted Into the root of the first phalanx of the four 
 outer toes, and into the upper surface of 
 the four last and outer phalanges 
 
164 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by fascia ; posteriorly 
 it lies upon the interosseous ligament and 
 fibula, upon the tibio-tarsal articulation, 
 upon the dorsum of the foot, and extensor 
 brevis : externally it is in apposition with 
 the peroneus longus, brevis, and tertius ; 
 internally with the tibialis anticus above, 
 and extensor proprius pollicis below. 
 
 Use. To extend the toes, to flex the ankle. 
 
 EXTENSOR PROPRIUS POLLICIS PEDIS. 
 
 ( Peroneo-super-un guia Us. Chauss.) 
 ( Peroneo-sus-phalanginien du pouce. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises Some way below the head and anterior part 
 of the fibula, and continues its origin as 
 far as the inner maleolus. 
 
 Inserted Into the base of the first and second pha- 
 langes of the great toe. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the fascia and ex- 
 tensor longus digitorum pedes ; posteriorly 
 it lies upon the fibula, the external sur- 
 face of the tibia, the anterior tibial vessels, 
 the tibio-tarsal articulation, the dorsum of 
 the foot ; internally it is in apposition with 
 the tibialis anticus, and anterior tibial 
 vessels and nerves, and it has the extensor 
 digitorum longus to its outer side, and on 
 the dorsum of the foot ; the anterior tibial 
 artery is placed to the outer side of its 
 tendon. 
 
 Use^ To extend the great toe and to assist in 
 
 flexing the ancle. 
 
 PERONEUSi TERTIUS. 
 
 (Peroneo-metatarseus parvus. Chauss. et Dumas.) 
 
 Is nothing more than a fibular slip of the extensor 
 tongus* 
 
 Inserted Into the metatarsal bone of the little toe. 
 
165 
 
 Use. To extend the little toe, to flex the ancle, 
 
 to abduct the foot. 
 
 PERONEUS LONGUS. 
 
 C Peroneo-tarseus. Chauss.) 
 ( Tili-perones-tarsien. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the upper part of the tibia, from the 
 head of the fibula, and from the upper 
 half of its external angle. 
 
 Inserted Into the cuneiforme internum and metatarsal 
 bone of the great tone. 
 
 Situation. Externally it is covered by the fascia; inter- 
 nally it lies upon the fibula and peroneus 
 brevis ; anteriorly it is in apposition with 
 the extensor longus digitorum pedis ; pos- 
 teriorly with the fibres of the soleus supe- 
 riorly, and flexor longus pollicis inferiorly. 
 
 Use. To turn the foot outwards, to extend the 
 
 foot. 
 
 PERONEUS BREVIS. 
 
 ( Peroneo-metatarseus magnus. Chauss. & Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the lower half of the fibula. 
 
 Inserted Into the os cuboideum and base of the meta- 
 tarsal bone of the little toe. 
 
 Situation. Externally it is covered by the peroneus 
 longus, and fascia ; internally it lies upon 
 the fibula. 
 
 Use. To assist in extending the ancle. 
 
 Muscles of the back part of the Leg. 
 
 The tibial aponeurosis is not so thick as on the ante- 
 rior region, it divides into two layers, a deep and su- 
 perficial. The superficial layer invests the posterior 
 surface of the gastrocnemii and tendon Achilles, and is 
 eventually lost in the cellular tissue inferiorly. The 
 

 deep layer passes in front of the tendo Achilles, and 
 covers the flexor longus pollicis, tibialis posticus, and 
 flexor digitorum pedis. 
 
 GASTROCNEMUIS EXTERNUS. 
 
 (Bi-femoro-calcaneus. Chauss. and Dumas.) 
 
 Arises By two heads ; the first head from the upper 
 and back part of the internal condyle, the 
 second head from the upper and back part 
 of the outer condyle. 
 
 Inserted It terminates in a broad tendon (tendo 
 Achilles) which uniting with that of the 
 solaeus, is inserted into the lower and back 
 part of the os calcis. 
 
 Situation. It is covered posteriorly by fascia, it lies upon 
 
 the femoro-tibial articulation, the popli- 
 
 taeus, plantaris, and solaeus muscles ; upon 
 
 the popliteal vessels and branches upon 
 
 the tibial and fibular nerves. 
 
 Use. Powerfully to extend the foot by raising the 
 
 os calcis. 
 
 PLANTARIS. 
 
 (Femori-calcaneus. Chauss. and Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the outer condyle and oblique ligament 
 of the knee joint. 
 
 Inserted Into the posterior part of the os calcis. 
 
 Situation. Posteriorly it is covered by the gastrocnemius 
 externus, and tendo Achilles ; anteriorly it 
 lies upon the femoro-tibial articulation, 
 upon the poplitaeus and solseus muscle, 
 upon the popliteal vessels and nerves. 
 
 Use. To assist in extending the heel. 
 
167 
 GASTROCNEMIUS INTERNUS, OR SOL^EUS. 
 
 (Tibio-calcaneous. Chauss.) 
 (Tibio-peronei-calcanien. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises By two heads. The first head from the 
 posterior part of the head of the fibula, 
 from the outer angle of that hone. The 
 second head from the oblique line on the 
 posterior surface of the tibia. 
 
 Inserted With the tendon of the gastrocnemius ex- 
 ternus into the posterior part of the os 
 calcis. 
 
 Situation. It is covered by the gastrocnemius externus, 
 and plantaris ; it lies upon the fibula tibia, 
 superiorly, upon the deep fascia and deep 
 layer of muscles ; popliteal, posterior tibial, 
 and fibular vessels, and nerves. 
 
 Use. Powerful to extend the foot by raising the 
 
 heel. 
 
 Deep Layer of Muscles at the posterior part of the Leg. 
 POPLIT^EUS. 
 
 ( Pop Hto-tib la Us. Chau ss. ) 
 (Femora-pop liti-tibia I. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the outer condyle, it is also connected 
 to the external semilunar cartilage. 
 
 Inserted Into the posterior surface of the tibia. 
 
 Situation. It is covered by fascia, by the external late- 
 ral ligament and tendon of the biceps ; by 
 the gastrocnemius externus and plantaris ; 
 by the popliteal vessels and nerves ; it lies 
 upon the external condyle, external semi- 
 lunar cartilage, fibular articulation, poste- 
 rior surface of the tibia, and upon the 
 tibialis posticus muscle. 
 
 Use. To bend the leg, and when bent, to roll it 
 
 inwards. 
 
168 
 
 FLEXOR LONGUS DIGITORUM PEDIS PRO- 
 FUNDUS PERFORANS. 
 
 ( TibiO'Sub-unguialis. Tibio-phalangettien commun. 
 Chauss. & Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the back part of the tibia, below the 
 solseus muscle. 
 
 Inserted Into the extreme phalanges of the four outer 
 toes. 
 
 Situation. Posteriorly it is covered by the solaeus, by 
 fascia, by the posterior tibial vessels and 
 nerves, by the annular ligament ; in the 
 sole of the foot it has, above, the deep 
 muscles; inferior ly, the flexor longus polli- 
 cis pedis, flexor brevis et accessorius, and 
 plantar nerve : the external border is in 
 apposition with tibialis posticus superiorly, 
 and with the flexor longus pollicis. 
 
 Use. To flex the toes and extend the foot. 
 
 
 
 FLEXOR LONGUS POLLICIS. 
 
 (Peroneo-phafangeus. Chauss.) 
 (Peroneo-sus-phalangettien. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the posterior part of the fibula. 
 
 Inserted Into the extreme phalanx of the great toe. 
 
 Situation. It is covered posteriorly by the solseus, and by 
 the deep fascia and annular ligament : it 
 lies upon the fibula, tibialis posticus, inter- 
 osseous ligament, upon the posterior sur- 
 face of the tibia, and tibio-tarsal articula- 
 tion. 
 
 Use. To bend the great toe, and to assist in ex- 
 
 tending the foot. 
 
 TIBIALIS POSTICUS. 
 
 (Tibio-sub-tarseus. Chauss. & Dumas). 
 
 Arises From the anterior part of the tibia, by a few 
 fibres passing through the upper opening 
 
 
in the interosseous ligament, from the back 
 part of the tibia, and from the back part 
 of the fibula. 
 
 Inserted Into the os naviculare, cuneiforme externum, 
 et medium, cuboideum, and second and 
 third metacarpal bones. 
 
 Situation. It is covered posteriorly by fascia, by the 
 flexor digitorum, and flexor longuspollicis: 
 it lies upon the tibia, fibula, and inter- 
 osseous ligament. 
 
 Use. To extend the foot and turn the foot inwards. 
 
 Muscle of the Foot. 
 
 There is but one muscle on the dorsam of the Foot. 
 
 EXTENSOR BREVIS DIGITORUM PEDIS. 
 
 (Calcaneo-super-unguialis. Chauss. et Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the upper and fore-part of the os calcis. 
 Inserted Into the extreme phalanges of the four inner 
 
 toes. 
 Situation. It is covered by the extensor longus digito- 
 
 rum pedis and peroneus brevis ; it lies 
 
 upon the dorsal interrossei. 
 Use. To assist in extending the toes and flexing 
 
 the foot. 
 
 Muscles on the plantar surface of the Foot. 
 
 On removing the integuments and a quantity of 
 granulated fat, you first expose the plantar aponeurosis. 
 It is of triangular shape, and extends from the poste- 
 rior part of the os calcis to the heads of the metatarsal 
 bones. It consists of a central portion, strong, dense, 
 and resisting, and two lateral portions, which are thin 
 and invest the muscles of the great and little toes. 
 The under surface is covered by the integuments, cel- 
 Q 
 
170 
 
 lular and adipose tissue ; the upper surface is in contact 
 with the abductor pollicis, flexor brevis, and abductor 
 minimi digiti ; it is also in contact with the flexor bre- 
 vis minimi digiti pedis, plantar vessels and nerves; 
 anteriorly it divides into five slips to allow the passage 
 of the flexor tendons of the toes. 
 
 ABDUCTOR POLLICIS PEDIS. 
 
 ( Calco-sub-phalangeus pollicis. Chauss. and Dumas.) 
 
 Arises 
 
 Inserted 
 Situation. 
 
 .loo 1 ? o/ti 
 
 
 From the inner side of the under surface of 
 the os calcis. 
 
 Into the os sesamoideum internum. 
 
 The under surface is covered by the plantar 
 aponeurosis, the upper surface is partly 
 covered by the flexor brevis pollicis, iby 
 the flexor accessorius, by the plantar 
 vessels and nerves. 
 
 Use. To abduce the great toe. 
 
 FLEXOR BREVIS DIGITORUM PEDIS SUB- 
 LIMIS PERFORATUS. 
 
 (Calcaneo-sub-unguialis. Chauss. and Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the inner and inferior surface of the 
 os calcis. 
 
 Inserted Into the second phalanges of the four outer 
 toes. 
 
 Situation. Inferiorly it lies upon the plantar aponeu- 
 rosis, above it is in contact with the flexor 
 accessorius, with the tendons of the flexor 
 longus, lumbricales, and plantar vessels 
 and nerves. 
 
 Use. To assist in flexing the toes, and also in ex- 
 
 tending the foot. 
 
171 
 ABDUCTOR MINIMI DIGITL 
 
 ( Calco-sub-phalangeus minimi digiti. 
 Chauss. and Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the os calcis and metatarsal bone of 
 the little toe. 
 
 Inserted Into the first phalanx of the little toe. 
 
 Situation. It is covered by the plantar aponeurosis and 
 integuments ; above it is in contact with 
 the flexor accessorius, the tendon of the 
 peroneus longus and flexor brevis minimi 
 digiti. 
 
 The second layer of muscles consist of the flexor ac- 
 cessorius and lumbricales; the tendons of the flexor 
 longus digitorum pedis profundus, and flexor longus 
 
 licis will be exposed. 
 
 FLEXOR ACCESSORIUS, OR MASSA CAR- 
 NEA JACOBI SYLVII. 
 
 Arises From the under surface of the os calcis. 
 
 Inserted Into the outer margin of the tendon of the 
 flexor longus digit pedis. 
 
 Situation. Below it lies upon the flexor brevis digito- 
 rum pedis, abductor pollicis, abductor mi- 
 nimi digiti, and plantar vessels and nerves; 
 above it is in contact with the os calcis, 
 and the adductor pollicis. 
 
 Use. To assist in flexing the toes. 
 
 LUMBRICALES PEDIS. 
 
 (Planto-sub-phalangei. Chauss.) 
 (Planto-ten dino-pha langiens. Dumas.) 
 
 Arise. 
 
 Inserted 
 
 Are four thin slips of muscles connected to 
 the tendons of the flexor profundus. 
 
 Into the inside of the first joint of the four 
 outer toes. 
 
172 
 
 Situation. Below they lie upon the flexor sublimis; 
 above they are in apposition with the in- 
 terossel, and adductor pollicis pedis. 
 
 Use. These muscles encrease the extent of the 
 
 flexion of the toes. 
 
 The third layer consists of the flexor brevis pollicis 
 pedis,, adductor pollicis, transversus pedis, and flexor mi- 
 nimi digiti pedis. 
 
 FLEXOR BREVIS POLLICIS PEDIS. 
 
 ( Tarso-sub-phalangeus pollicis. Chauss. and Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the os calcis and os cuneiforme exter- 
 
 num. 
 Inserted Into the root of the first phalanx of the great 
 
 toe. 
 Situation. It lies upon the tendon of the flexor longus 
 
 pollicis ; above it is placed the tendon of 
 
 the peronaeus longus, and metatarsal bone 
 
 of the great toe. 
 To flex the great toe. 
 
 ADDUCTOR POLLICIS PEDIS. 
 
 Use, 
 
 ( Metatarso-sub-phalangeus pollicis. Chauss.) 
 (Tarso-metatarsi-phalangien du pouce. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the os calcis, cuboideum and cunei- 
 forme externum, and root of the meta- 
 tarsal bone of the second toe. 
 
 Inserted Into the os sesamb'ideum externum, and root 
 of the metatarsal bone of the great toe. 
 
 Situation. Its inferior surface is in apposition with the 
 flexor profundus and three first lumbrica- 
 les, flexor accessorius, and plantar aponeu- 
 rosis ; above it has the tendon of the pero- 
 naeus longus ; the external border is coasted 
 by the external plantar vessels. 
 
 Use. To adduce the great toe. 
 
173 
 
 TRANSVERSALIS POLLICIS, OR TRANS. 
 VERSALIS PEDIS. 
 
 (Metatarso-sub-phalangeus. Chauss.) 
 (Metatarso-phalangien du pouce. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the os sesamoideum externum. 
 Inserted Into the head of the metatarsal bone of the 
 
 little toe. 
 Situation. Inferiorly it lies upon the flexor tendons lu- 
 
 bricales and digital vessels and nerves; 
 
 above it is in contact with the interossei. 
 Use. To contract the foot, the outer and inner 
 
 toes being drawn towards each other. 
 
 FLEXOR MINIMI DIGITI PEDIS. 
 
 Arises From the os cubbideum and metatarsal bone 
 of the little toe. 
 
 Inserted Into the root of the first phalanx of the lit- 
 tle toe. 
 
 Situation. Inferiorly it is covered by the abductor mini- 
 mi digiti pedis and plantar aponeurosis: 
 above it has the external interosseal. 
 
 Use. To bend the first phalanx of the little toe. 
 
 The fourth layer consists of the interossei, and the 
 tendon of the peronaeus longus will be exposed. There 
 are two strata of interossei muscles, viz. three interossei 
 interni, placed in the sole of the foot, which move the 
 three outer toes toward each other and are described as 
 the adductor medii, adductor quarti, et adductor minimi 
 digiti. There are four interossei externi, which are 
 larger than the internal and bicipites, which separate 
 the toes from each other : these have been termed ab- 
 ductores digiti secundi, abductor digiti medii, abductor 
 digiti quarti. The great toe has none. These muscles, 
 fill up the interstices between the metatarsal bones. , 
 
 Q3 
 
174 
 
 Muscles of the Perinceum. 
 
 On removing the integuments will be exposed a 
 strong, dense fascia (fascia superficialis perinaei) ; it is 
 firmly connected to the ossa ischia and os pubis, and 
 also to the tendinous aponeurosis of the thigh ; above 
 it is loosely connected with the cellular tissue of the 
 scrotum. The muscles attached to the perinaeum are, 
 on either side, the erector penis, accelerator urinae, 
 transversus perinaei, transversalis perinaei alter, levator 
 ani, coccygeus, and a single muscle, the sphincter ani. 
 
 ERECTOR PENIS. 
 
 (Ischio-uretkralis. Chauss. Ischio caverneux. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the inner border of the tuber ischii ; 
 the fibres are spread over the crus penis. 
 
 Inserted Into the commencement of the corpus caver- 
 nosum. 
 
 Situation. Its inner surface corresponds with the trans- 
 versus perinaei, accelerator urinse, from 
 which it is separated by the perineal 
 artery. 
 
 Use. To compress the crus penis, and to erect the 
 
 penis, and also to depress it. 
 
 ACCELERATOR URINAE. 
 
 (Bulbo-urethralis. Chauss.) 
 ( Bulbo-syndesmo-caverneux. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the commencement of the corpus ea., 
 vernosum penis, being connected with the 
 insertion of the erector penis. 
 
 Inserted Into a line in the middle of the bulb where 
 it joins with its fellow, and into the centre 
 of the perinaeum. 
 
 Situation* Inferiorly it is covered by fascia ; superiorly 
 it lies upon the crus penis, corpus spongio- 
 sum, and bulb of the urethra. 
 To expel the urine or semen, by compressing 
 the bulb. 
 
175 
 TRANSVERSUS PERDftEI. 
 
 (Ischw-perinealis. Chauss.) 
 (Ischio-pubi-prostatique. Dumas. ) 
 
 Arises From the inner side of the tuberosity of the- 
 ischium. 
 
 Inserted Into the centre of the perinaeum, where k 
 is connected with its fellow, it is also con- 
 nected to the fibres of the accelerator uri- 
 nae and sphincter ani. 
 
 Situation. Anteriorly it is covered by the erector penis, 
 by some of the fibres of the sphincter ani, 
 and by the superficial perinaeal fascia : 
 posteriorly it lies upon the levator ani, 
 from which it is separated by cellular tis- 
 sue ; and externally by the deep branch of 
 the internal pudic artery. 
 
 Use. To dilate the bulb and draw the perinaeum, 
 
 and extremity of the anus a little out- 
 wards and backwards. 
 
 TRANSVERSUS PERIN^EI ALTER. 
 
 On each side of the perinaeum is a triangular space, 
 the base formed by the transversus perinaei, the inner 
 border by the bulb of the urethra, the outej border by 
 the crus penis, the transversus perinaei occupies this tri- 
 angular space. 
 
 Arises From the ramus of the ischium. 
 Inserted Into the side of the bulb. 
 Use. To dilate the bulb. 
 
 LEVATOR ANI 
 
 ( Sub-pubalis-coccygeus. Chauss.) 
 (Pubio coccygien annularis. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From within the pelvis, from the fascia co*. 
 vering the obturator internus muscle front 
 the spine of the ischiunu 
 
176 
 
 Inserted Into the extremity and os coccygis. It sends 
 off fibres covering the prostate gland, vesi- 
 culae seminales, neck of the bladder, sides 
 of the rectum, also a slip around the 
 membranous portion of the urethra, form- 
 ing with its fellow a loop through which 
 the urethra passes (compressor urethrap of 
 Wilson.) 
 
 Situation. Externally it corresponds to the obturator 
 internus ; internally it lies upon the blad- 
 der, prostate gland, and vesiculae semi- 
 nales and rectum, in the female it is con- 
 nected with the vagina. 
 
 Use. To draw the rectum upwards to assist in the 
 
 expulsion of the secretions of the prostate 
 gland, vesiculae seminales and contents of 
 the bladder. In the female it will lessen 
 the diameter of the vagina. 
 
 COCCYGEUS. 
 
 (Ischio-coccygeus. Chauss.) 
 
 Arises From the spine of the ischium. 
 Inserted Into the whole edge of the os coccygis. 
 Situation. Posteriorly it is covered by the sacro sciatic 
 
 ligaments ; anteriorly it rests against the 
 
 rectum. 
 Use. To retain the os coccygis in its situatiou. 
 
 SPHINCTER ANI. 
 
 ( Anno-coccygeus. Chauss.) 
 f Coccyqio-cutane-sphincter. Dumas.) 
 
 Arises From the extremity of the os coccygis, the 
 fibres pass around the extremity of the 
 rectum and are 
 
 Inserted Into the centre of the perinaeum. 
 
 Situation. Its fibres anteriorly are united with those of 
 the accelerator urinae and transversalis 
 perinaei, 
 
 Use* To close the opening into the rectum, to draw 
 
 down the urethra, thus assisting in the 
 expulsion of the urine and semen. The 
 
177 
 
 antagonists of this muscle are the longitu- 
 dinal fibres of the rectum and the abdomi- 
 nal muscles. 
 
 ERECTOR CLITORIDIS. 
 
 Arises In the female from the ramus of the ischium. 
 Inserted Into the cms and body of the clitoris. 
 Use. To compress the crus clitoridis. 
 
 SPHINCTER VAGINAE. 
 
 Arises From the sphincter ani, from the sides of the 
 vagina; the fibres surround the vagina, 
 and are eventually 
 
 Inserted Into the corpora clitoridis. 
 
 Use. To contract the orifice of the vagina. 
 
 DIAPHRAGM. 
 
 The diaphragm forms the septum between the thorax 
 and abdomen : in the relax state it is concave below, 
 convex above, ascending in the chest as high as the fourth 
 rib : when in action, it is drawn nearly to a straight 
 plane; inferior fy it is covered by the peritoneum; 
 superiorly by the pleura and pericardium. It consists of 
 a middle tendon and a greater and smaller muscle : the 
 central tendon is somewhat of a cordiform shape ; it is 
 formed of three portions, and hence it has been com- 
 pared to a trefoil leaf the central portion is the largest, 
 the other portions are placed laterally of which the right 
 is the largest. The tendon consists of coarse, strong 
 fibres interlacing each other in various directions. In 
 this tendon on the right side is a triangular opening for 
 the vena cava ascendens ; sometimes we have small 
 openings for the diaphragmatic veins and superior hepa- 
 tic veins. The greater muscle of the diaphragm arises 
 on each side from the cartilago ensiformis, from the car- 
 tilages of the six inferior ribs, and from the ligamen- 
 tum arcuatum : the fibres radiate towards the centre 
 those from the lower ribs ascend, those from the ensi- 
 
178 
 
 form cartilage pass backwards, those from the sides pass 
 directly inwards : these fibres are all inserted into the 
 central tendon. The smaller muscle is the portion af- 
 fixed to the lumbar vertebrae. It arises by four distinct 
 slips on each side from the bodies of the second, third, 
 and fourth lumbar vertebrae : these four processes unite 
 and form the crura or pillars of the diaphragm : on 
 tracing the crura upwards, they are found to approach 
 each other, and then to partially decussate in front of 
 the spine; they separate and again unite, and thus 
 form a second opening ; the fibres are then inserted into 
 the central tendon. 
 
 Through the first opening between the cura which is 
 tendinous, pass the aorta, thoracic duct, and branches of 
 veins, to form the vena azygos; through the second 
 opening, which is muscular, the sesophagus and eight 
 pair of nerves. On the sides between the muscular 
 fibres are openings for the passage of the splanchnic 
 nerves which form a commnnication between the tho- 
 racic ganglia of the great sympathetic nerve and those 
 of the abdomen. Uses of the diaphragm. It is the 
 great muscle of respiration, it is active or contracted 
 during inspiration, passive or relaxed during expiration. 
 During inspiration the lateral portions descend, the 
 central tendon remaining fixed because the heart rests 
 upon it ; by this means the chest is rendered deeper. 
 In expiration the diaphragm is forced up into the chest 
 by the action of the abdominal muscles contracting 
 upon the viscera, and thus the chest is diminished in all 
 its dimensions. 
 
PHYSIOLOGICAL ARRANGEMNT OF THE 
 MUSCLES. 
 
 MUSCLES OF THE CRANIUM. 
 
 The integuments of the fore-head and occiput are 
 thrown into transverse rugae by one pair of muscles. 
 Occipito-frontalis. 
 
 MUSCLES OF THE EYE-BROWS. 
 
 The eye-brows are drawn towards each other, and 
 the integuments of the forehead are thrown into longi- 
 tudinal folds by one pair of muscles. 
 
 Corrugator supercilii. 
 
 MUSCLES OF THE EYE-LIDS. 
 
 There belong to each eye-lid two pairs of muscles, 
 one closes the palpebrse, the other raises the upper lid. 
 Orbicularis palpebrarum Levator palpebrae superioris. 
 
 MUSCLES OF THE BALL OF THE EYE. 
 
 Six muscles are destined for the motions of the ball 
 of the eye, and their use is manifest from their names. 
 
180 
 
 Levator oculi Depressor oculi 
 
 Adductor oculi Abductor oculi 
 
 Obliquus superior Obliquus inferior 
 
 MUSCLES OF THE EAR. 
 
 Three muscles are destined to the motion of the auri- 
 cle, and their action will be manifest from their de- 
 scription. 
 
 Attolens aurem Retrahens aurem 
 
 Detrahens aurem. 
 
 Five pairs are connected with the margins of the con- 
 cha, and can, with difficulty, be demonstrated, except 
 in some of the lower animals. Their use is to draw in- 
 wards, outwards, or towards each other, different parts 
 entering into the formation of the concha so as to collect 
 the pulses of sound. 
 
 Tragicus Antitragicus 
 
 Helicus major Helicus minor 
 
 Transversus auriculae 
 
 The muscles of the internal Ear are four in number. 
 
 Laxator tympani, tensor tympani, relax the membrana 
 tympani, malleus externus, stapeduis render the mem- 
 brana tympani tense. 
 
 MUSCLES OF THE NOSE. 
 
 To the nose four pair of muscles are proper. 
 
 Levator labii superioris aleeque nasi, compressor naris 
 dilate the nostrils. 
 
 Depressor alee nasi depresses the alae of the nose and 
 contracts the nostrils. 
 
 Pyramidalis nasi -draws up the integuments of the 
 nose. 
 
 
181 
 MUSCLES OF THE CHEEKS AND LIPS. 
 
 There are ten pair of muscles proper to the Lips and 
 Cheeks: 
 
 Levator labii superioris alaeque nasi, levator anguli 
 oris, zygomaticus major, zygomaticus minor raise the 
 upper lip, or carry it obliquely to one side. 
 
 Depressor labii superioris alaeque nasi depresses the 
 upper lip and alae of the nose. 
 
 Triangularis oris, quadratus genae, platysma mybides 
 draw down the lower lip. 
 
 Levator labii inferioris raises the lower lip. 
 
 Buccinator contracts the cavity of the mouth, or 
 draws the angle of the mouth backwards. 
 
 Orbicularis closes the mouth, assisted by the mus- 
 cles acting upon the lower jaw. 
 
 The mouth is opened by the elevators of the upper 
 lip and depressors of the lower lip, and muscles de- 
 pressing the lower jaw. 
 
 MUSCLES OF THE LOWER JAW. 
 
 The lower Jaw has five pair of muscles. 
 
 The lower jaw is raised by the temporal, masseter, 
 and internal pterygoid ; carried forwards by the ex- 
 ternal pterygoid and anterior fibres of the masseter; 
 moved backwards by the temporal and posterior fibres 
 of the masseter ; moved laterally by the pterygbideus 
 externus, and internus of one side. The lower jaw is 
 depressed by the digastrici, mylo-hybidei, genio-hybidei, 
 genio-hyo-glossi, and platysma mybides. The temporal 
 masseter and two pterygoid muscles are especially em- 
 ployed in the process of mastication. The two former 
 are destined more especially to act upon animal sub- 
 stances hence large in carnivorous animals ; the latter 
 to break down vegetable matter hence strongly deve- 
 loped in graminivorous : these muscles are equally de- 
 veloped in man. 
 
182 
 MUSCLES OF THE OS HYOIDES. 
 
 The muscles of the os hybides are five pairs. 
 
 Mylo hybideus, genio-hybideus raise the os hybides, 
 consequently the larynx and pharynx, and depress the 
 lower jaw. 
 
 Sterno-hyoideus carries the os hybides downwards. 
 
 Sylo-hybideus pulls the os hybides upwards. 
 
 Omo-hybideus carries the os hybides obliquely down- 
 wards. 
 
 MUSCLES OP THE TONGUE. 
 
 To the Tongue are destined four pairs of muscles. 
 
 Hyo-glossus depresses the edge of the tongue. 
 
 Genio-hyo-glossus raises the tongue and draws it 
 forwards. 
 
 Stylo-glossus draws the tongue backwards. 
 
 Lingualis contracts the tongue. 
 
 The dorsum of the tongue is rendered concave by the 
 genio-hyo-glossi drawing down its middle, and stylo- 
 glossi raising its edges ; the dorsum is rendered convex 
 by the lingualis and hyo-glossi ; the tongue is protruded 
 from the mouth by the posterior fibres of the genio- 
 hyo-glossi ; retracted within the mouth by the lingualis, 
 stylo T glossi, and anterior fibres of the genio-hyo-glossi. 
 
 MUSCLES OF THE PHARYNX. 
 
 To the Pharynx four pairs of muscles are destined. 
 
 Constrictor pharyngis superior, constrictor pharyngis 
 medius, constrictor pharyngis inferior contract the bag 
 of the pharynx. 
 
 Stylo-pharyngeus elevates and dilates the pharynx. 
 The soft Palate and Uvula have the following muscles. 
 
 Palato-pharyngeus draws the velum downwards and 
 backwards. 
 
 Constrictor isthmi faucium draws the velum to- 
 wards the tongue. 
 
183 
 
 Levator palati mollis carrzoy the velum upwards and 
 backwards. 
 
 Tensor palati spreads out the velum. 
 
 Azygos uvulae raises the uvula. 
 
 The opening between the mouth and pharynx is 
 closed by the constrictores isthmi faucium ; the velum 
 is expanded by the tensores palati ; drawn backwards by 
 the levatores palati and palato-pharyngei. The pha- 
 rynx is raised by the digastrici, mylo-hybidei, genio- 
 hybidei, genio-hyo-glossi, stylo-glossi : depressed by the 
 sterno hyoidei, omo-hybidei, thyro-hybidei ; expanded 
 by the stylo pharyngei, and lastly, contracted by the 
 three constrictors. 
 
 MUSCLES OF THE LARYNX. 
 
 Three pairs of muscles belong to the Larynx. 
 Sterno-thyrbideus draws down the thyroid cartilage. 
 Thyro-hybideus raises the thyroid cartilage. 
 Crico-thryrbideus raises the cricoid cartilage. 
 
 MUSCLES OF THE RIMA GLOTTIDIS. 
 
 These are the following. 
 
 Crico-arytenbideus posticus tightens the vocal liga- 
 ments. 
 
 Thyro-arytenbideus relaxes the vocal ligaments. 
 
 Crico-arytenbideus lateralis opens the rima of the 
 glottis. 
 
 Arytenb'ideus transversus, arytenoideus obliquus 
 contract the opening of the glottis. 
 
 Aryteno-epiglottideus, thyro epiglottideus draw 
 down the epilglottis. 
 
184 
 MUSCLES OP THE HEAD. 
 
 To the motions of the Head eleven pairs of muscles 
 are destined. 
 
 Sterno cleido-mastoideus, rectus capitis anticus major,, 
 rectus anticus minor,, rectus lateralis bend the head 
 forwards. 
 
 Splenuis capitis^ complexus, trachelo mastoideus^ rec- 
 tus posticus major, rectus posticus minor bend the 
 head backwards. 
 
 Obliquus capitis superior,, obliquus capitis inferior 
 perform the semicircular motion of the head. 
 
 The trapezii will assist in extending the head. 
 Lateral motion will be performed by the flexor and 
 extensor of the same side acting together. The head 
 will be rotated by the alternate contraction of the flexor 
 and extensors. 
 
 MUSCLES OF THE NECK. 
 
 The motion of the Neck is produced by nine pairs of 
 muscles. 
 
 Splenius colli, semi-spinalis colli, inter-transversalis 
 colli., cervicalis descendens, transveralis colli carry the 
 neck backwards. 
 
 Longus colli, scaleni antici medii, et postici carry 
 the neck forwards. 
 
 The neck is carried to one side by the flexors and 
 extensors contracting to the same side. 
 
 MUSCLES OF THE BACK AND LOINS. 
 
 To the common motion of the Spine the following 
 muscles are dedicated: 
 
 Sacro-lumbalis, longissimus dorsi, multifidus spinae, 
 spinales dorsi, semi-spinalis dorsi, interspinalis dorsi, 
 interspinalis lumborum extend the spine. 
 
 Quadratus lumborum, psoas parvus -flex the spine. 
 
 The assistant flexor muscles are the abdominal muscles, 
 
185 
 
 rectus capitis, anticus major, longus colli, scalenii pec- 
 toralis major serratus magnus. The lateral motions of 
 the spine are performed by the flexors and extensors 
 when they act on one side only. 
 
 MUSCLES OF THE THORAX. 
 
 The muscles of the Thorax are, 
 
 Intercostales interni, intercostales externi, serratus 
 posticus superior raise the ribs and to encrease the ca- 
 pacity of the chest. 
 
 Diaphragma to excrease, by its contraction, the ca- 
 pacity of the chest. 
 
 Triangularis sterni, serratus posticus inferior to 
 diminish the capacity of the chest. 
 
 In laborious inspiration, besides the intercostals and 
 diaphragm, the following muscles are called into action : 
 sterno cleido mastoideus, scaleni serratus posticus supe- 
 rior, serratus magnus, sub-clavius, pectorales, latissimus 
 dori. In laborious expiration, the abdominal muscles, 
 triangularis sterni, serratus posticus inferior, sacro-lum- 
 balis, longissimus dorsi and quadratus lumborum, are 
 called into action. 
 
 MUSCLES OF THE ABDOMEN. 
 
 The muscles of the Abdomen are five pairs : 
 Obliquus abdominis externus, obliquus abdominis in- 
 ternus, transversalis abdominis, rectus abdominis, pyra- 
 midalis abdominis To draw down the ribs, to bend the 
 body forwards, to compress the abdominal viscera, to 
 raise the pelvis. 
 
 If the external oblique only acts, it inclines the body 
 to the opposite side, if the internal oblique, it carries 
 the body to the same side. 
 
186 
 MUSCLES OF THE THIGH. 
 
 For the motion of the Thigh there are fourteen pairs 
 of muscles. 
 
 Psoas magnus, iliacus internus, pectineus bend the 
 thigh upon the pelvis. 
 
 Glutaeus maximus extends the thigh. 
 
 Glutaeus medius, glutaeus minimus abduce the thigh. 
 
 Triceps adducts the thigh. 
 
 Pyriformis, gemelli, obturator internus, obturator ex- 
 ter,nus, quadratus femoris rotate the thigh outwards. 
 
 Tensor vaginae femoris rotates the thigh inwards. 
 
 Flexion of the thigh is assisted by the tensor vaginse 
 femoris, and muscles arising from the anterior part of 
 the pelvis, inserted into the femur and head of the tibia. 
 Extension is assisted by those muscles arising from the 
 back part of the pelvis connected with the femur,, head 
 of the tibia, and fibula. Abduction is assisted by the 
 psoas magnus and iliacus internus, pectinalis and flexor 
 muscles of the knee joint. Rotation outwards is pro- 
 duced by the small rotators assisted by the glutsei and 
 triceps. Rotation inwards is performed by the tensor 
 vaginae femoris, assisted by the sartorius, gracilis, and 
 semitendinpsus. 
 
 MUSCLES OF THE LEG. 
 
 For tjie motion of the Knee-joint there are ten pairs 
 of muscles. 
 
 Rectus, cruraeus, vastus internus, vastus externus- 
 extend the leg. 
 
 Biceps, semi-membranosus, gracilis, sartorius, semi- 
 tendin'osus, poplitaeus bend the leg upon the thigh. 
 
 The gastrocnemius externus and plantaris will assist 
 in flexion of the leg. 
 
187 
 MUSCLES OF THE FOOT. 
 
 Eight pairs of muscles are destined for the motion of 
 the Foot. 
 
 Gastrocnemius externus, gastrocnemius internus > 
 plantaris extend the foot. 
 
 Tibialis anticus, peroneus tertius bend the foot. 
 
 Tibialis posticus turns the foot inwards. 
 
 Peroneus longus, peroneus brevis turn the foot out- 
 wards. 
 
 The extensors are assisted by the tibialis posticus, pe- 
 roneus longus and brevis, flexor longus digitorum, and 
 flexor longus pollicis. The Jlexors are assisted by th 
 extensor longus digitorum, and extensor proprius pol- 
 licis. 
 
 MUSCLES OF THE TOES. 
 
 Extensor longus digitorum pedis, extensor brevis di- 
 gitorum pedis extend the toes. 
 
 Flexor longus digitorum pedis perforans, flexor brevis 
 digitorum pedis perforatus, flexor accessorius, lumbricales 
 -flex the toes. 
 
 Extensor proprius pollicis extends the great toe. 
 
 Flexor longus et brevis pollicis -flex the great toe. 
 
 Abductor et adductor pollicis abduce and adduce the 
 great toe. 
 
 Flexor brevis minimi digiti bends the little toe. 
 
 Adductor minimi digiti, abductor minimi digiti ad- 
 duce and abduce the little toe. 
 
 Interossei abduce and adduce the three middle toes. 
 
 Transversalis contracts the sole of the foot. 
 
 MUSCLES OF THE SUPERIOR EXTREMITY. 
 
 Eight muscles are referred to the motions of the Sea. 
 pula and Clavicle. 
 
 Pectoralis minor, subclavius depress the scapula. 
 
 Levator anguli scapulae, trapezius, omo-hyoideus - 
 raise the scapula. 
 
188 
 
 Rhomboideus major, rhomboideus minor carry the 
 scapula backwards. 
 
 Serratus magnus carries the scapula inwards. 
 
 MUSCLES OF THE ARM. 
 
 To the motions of the Arm are dedicated nine muscles. 
 
 Deltoides, supra spinatus raise the arm. 
 
 Teres major, latissimus dorsi depress the arm. 
 
 Subscapularis, coraco-brachialis carry the arm in- 
 wards. 
 
 Teres minor, infra spinatus carry the arm outwards, 
 
 Pectoralis major carries the arm across the chest. 
 
 The coraco-brachialis, and clavicular portion of the 
 pectoralis major, will raise the humerus ; the infra spi- 
 natus, subscapularis, and biceps, will retain it in its 
 position when raised. Circumduction is produced by the 
 combined operation of all the muscles of the shoulder 
 joint in succession. 
 
 MUSCLES OF THE FORE-ARM. 
 
 To the motion of the Fore-arm eight muscles are des- 
 tined : 
 
 Biceps flexor cubiti, brachialis, anticus -flex the 
 fore-arm. 
 
 Triceps extensor cubiti, anconaeus extend the fore- 
 arm. 
 
 Supinator radii longus, supinator radii brevis roll 
 the radius outwards. 
 
 Pronator radii teres, pronatus quadratus roll the 
 radius inwards. 
 
 Pronation is assisted by flexor carpi ulnaris, palmaris 
 longus ; supination, by the extensor longus pollicis, and 
 continued action of the biceps. 
 
]89 
 MUSCLES OF THE WRIST-JOINT. 
 
 Six muscles perform the motions of the Wrist-joint. 
 
 Flexor carpi radialis, flexor carpi ulnaris, palrnaris 
 longus -flex the wrist-joint. 
 
 Extensor carpi radialis longior, extensor carpi radi- 
 alis brevior, extensor carpi ulnaris extend the wrist- 
 joint. 
 
 The flexor muscles are assisted by the flexor sublimis 
 et profundus digitorum and flexor longus pollicis. The 
 extensors are assisted by the extensors of the thumb and 
 fingers. The hand is carried inwards by the flexor carpi 
 ulnaris, extensor carpi ulnaris, and extensor digitorum 
 communis ; outwards by the action of the extensors of 
 the thumb and wrist, and flexor carpi radialis. 
 
 MUSCLES THAT MOVE THE FOUR FINGERS. 
 
 Flexor digitorum sublimis, flexor digitorum profun- 
 dus, lumbricales bend the fingers. 
 
 Extensor digitorum communis extend the fingers. 
 Interossei abduce and adduce the fingers. 
 
 MUSCLES THAT MOVE THE FORE-FINGER. 
 
 Indicator extends the fore-finger. 
 Abductor indicis abduces the fore-finger. 
 
 MUSCLES THAT MOVE THE LITTLE FIN- 
 GER. 
 
 Extensor parvus minimi digiti extends the Httle 
 finger. 
 
 Flexor parvus digiti minimi bends the little finger. 
 Adductor minimi digiti adduces the little finger. 
 
190 
 MUSCLES THAT MOVE THE THUMB. 
 
 Plexor longus pollicis, flexor brevis pollicis,, flexor 
 ossis metacarpi pollicis bend the thumb. 
 
 Extensor ossis metacarpi pollicis, extensor primi 
 internodii, extensor secundi internodii extend the 
 thumb. 
 
 Abductor pollicisj adductor pollicis abduce and ad- 
 duce the thumb. 
 
ANGIOLOGY. 
 
 OF THE ARTERIAL SYSTEM. 
 
 Arteries are membranous, elastic, cylindrical canals, 
 formed of three tunics, and destined to carry the blood 
 from the heart to every part of the body. The external 
 coat termed the tunica cellulosa is formed of condensed 
 cellular tissue, and is resisting and highly elastic. The 
 middle coat tunica media (tunica propria, musculosa et 
 fibrosa of some anatomists) is a dense strong tissue of a 
 peculiar yellowish dun colour, elastic, composed of fibres 
 nearly circular; these fibres are fragile, and possess but 
 little extensibility. The internal coat, tunica intima, is 
 a fine delicate structure, destitute of fibres, white, 
 smooth, and transparent, it resembles in character the 
 serous membranes. Arteries receive a coat from the 
 lining membrane of the cavities through which they 
 pass. The dura mater within the cranium, the pleura 
 in the chest, and peritoneum in the abdomen afford an 
 external covering. Arteries are minutely supplied with 
 blood by the vasa vasorum, given off from the adjoining 
 vessels ; small veins vence venarum accompany the vasa 
 vasorum in their course, and return the blood. Though 
 absorbents have not been demonstrated, the diseases of 
 the vascular system afford us evident proofs of their ex- 
 istence. The nerves of arteries are derived from three 
 sources; from the cerebral, spinal, and more especially 
 from the ganglionic system. The origin of all the arte- 
 ries is either from the pulmonary artery which arises 
 from the right ventricle of the heart, or from the aorta 
 which arises from the left ventricle of the heart. 
 
192 
 AORTA. 
 
 ( 'Arteria magna. Murray.) 
 
 The Aorta arises from the upper and back part of the 
 left ventricle, opposite the fourth or fifth dorsal vertebrae, 
 it passes upwards towards the right side as high as the 
 cartilage of the second rib, it is then directed backwards 
 almost horizontally to the left side, descending as far as 
 the left side of the body of the third dorsal vertebrae, it 
 now continues its course directly downwards, within the 
 posterior mediastinum, enters the abdomen between 
 the tendinous crura of the diaphragm, passes on the 
 fore part of the bodies of the lumbar vertebrae, as far as 
 the fourth or fifth, where it bifurcates into the two 
 common iliac arteries. The first portion termed the an- 
 terior or ascending thoracic aorta, at its commencement 
 is covered by the pulmonary artery ; it is afterwards 
 placed between that artery and the descending vena 
 cava ; it lies upon the right pulmonary artery, lastly it 
 is separated from the sternum by the anterior mediasti- 
 num. It gives off immediately behind and above the 
 level of the semilunar valves the two coronary arteries. 
 
 Arteria coronaria dextra which runs between the 
 right auricle and ventricle, and divides into three 
 branches. 
 
 Arteria coronaria sinistra which passes between the 
 left auricle and ventricle, and is sub-divided into ante- 
 rior and posterior branches, anastomosing with the in- 
 ternal mammary and phrenic arteries. 
 
 The second portion termed the arch of the aorta 
 (Courbure sous sternale. Chauss.), lies upon the tra- 
 chea and upon the bodies of the second and third dorsal 
 vertebrae. It is situated beneath the first portion of the 
 sternum, and is connected with the pulmonary artery 
 by the remains of the ductus arteriosus. It gives off 
 from the convexity of its arch. 
 
 Arteria carotis sinistra Arteria subclavia sinistra 
 
 Arteria innominata. 
 
193 
 ARTERIA INNOMINATA. 
 
 (Tronc brachio-cephalique. Chauss.) 
 
 It arises from the arch of the aorta, ascends obliquely 
 towards the right side; and opposite the sterno-clavicu- 
 lar articulation it divides into right common carotid and 
 right subclavian arteries. It lies upon the trachea, and 
 is covered at its origin by the vena innominata, sterno 
 hyoid and sterno-thyroid muscles, and by the superior 
 portion of the sternum. 
 
 ARTERI^E CAROTIDES COMMUNES. 
 
 (Tronc cephaliques. Chauss.) 
 
 The left common carotid arises from the arch of the 
 aorta, nearly at a right angle ; the right common carotid 
 obliquely from the arteria innominata, They pass up- 
 wards and outwards on the side of the trachea, as far as 
 the superior margin of the thyroid cartilage j here each 
 vessel divides into two principal branches, namely, into 
 external carotid, which is the anterior, and into internal 
 carotid, which is the posterior. The carotid arteries are 
 covered anteriorly by the sterno-hyoid, sterno-thyroid, 
 and sterno-mastoid muscles, and crossed about the mid- 
 dle of their course by the omo-hyoid muscles, above 
 this point only covered by the integuments, fascia, and 
 platysma-myoides : posteriorly they lie upon the longi 
 colli, recti capitis postici majores muscles ; upon the in- 
 ferior thyroideal arteries, upon the recurrent laryngeal, 
 and great sympathetic nerves : internally they are in 
 apposition with the trachea and thymus gland : exter- 
 nally with the internal jugular vein. Each common 
 carotid artery is enclosed in a dense sheath of cellular 
 tissue. The artery is situated on the inner side ; the in- 
 ternal jugular vein on the outer side; between and be- 
 hind both, is placed the eight pair of nerves, and in front 
 of the sheath, the descendens noni. The left common 
 carotid differs in its course at its origin from the right 
 
 s 
 
194 
 
 in the following respects it has the vena innominata 
 in front, and it lies upon the trachea, sesophagus, and 
 thoracic duct. 
 
 ARTERIA CAROTIS EXTERNA. 
 
 (Carotis superficialis. Murray. Artere faciale. Chauss.) 
 
 The external carotid passes upwards and backwards 
 to the space between the ascending plate of the lower 
 maxilla, and mastoid process of the temporal bone, 
 where it enters the substance of the parotid gland, and 
 divides into temporal and maxillary arteries. It is 
 covered by the integuments, platysma myb'ides, and 
 fascia ; crossed by the posterior belly of the digastricus 
 and stylo-hyoid muscles, and by the lingual and facial 
 nerves: it lies upon the stylo-pharyngeus and stylo- 
 glossus muscles, upon the glosso-pharyngeal nerve, and 
 part of the parotid gland. It gives off the following 
 branches : 
 
 Anteriorly 1. Arteria thyroidea superior 
 
 2. Arteria lingualis 
 
 3. Arteria facialis 
 Posteriorly 4. Arteria occipitalis 
 
 5. Arteria auricularis posterior 
 Internally 6. Arteria pharyngea ascendens 
 Superiorly 7- Arteria temporalis 
 
 divides 8. Arteria maxillaris interna 
 
 into 9. Arteria transversalis faciei. 
 
 1. The superior thyraideal artery (art. thyroidienne su- 
 perieure. Chauss.) passes forwards and inwards, beneath 
 the sterno-thyroid and omo-hyoid muscles, and gives off 
 the following branches : 1st. superficial branch, distri- 
 buted to the integuments; 2nd. hyoid branch, to the 
 muscles which fix the larynx andoshyoides; 3rd. laryn- 
 geal branch, entering the larynx between the thyroid 
 cartilage and os hyoides, supplying the mucous mem- 
 brane of the larynx and arytenoid muscles ; and lastly, 
 thyroideal branch, which descends and divides into three 
 
195 
 
 branches, distributed to the thyroid gland, and freely 
 anastomoses with the opposite artery and with the infe- 
 rior thyroideal. 
 
 1. Raraus superficialis 3. Ramus laryngeui. 
 
 2. Ramus hyoideus 4. Ramus thyroideus 
 
 2. The lingual artery (art. linguak. Chauss.) passes 
 forwards and inwards, running parallel to, but above 
 the cornu of the os hyb'ides, then under the hyo-glossus 
 and genio-glossus muscles to the tongue. The lingual 
 nerve takes nearly the same course, but is separated from 
 the artery by the hyo-glossus muscle. It gives off, 1st, 
 hyoid branches to the muscles, between the lower jaw 
 and os hyb'ides ; 2nd. dorsal branches to the back part 
 of the tongue, fauces, and pharynx. The artery then 
 divides into two branches, 3rd. sublingual, distributed 
 to the mucous membrane of the mouth, hyo-glossus, 
 and lingualis muscles ; and 4th. into the ranine, which 
 passes forwards under the lingualis muscle by the side 
 of the frsenum linguae to the tip of the tongue, and 
 freely communicates with the opposite artery. 
 
 1. Ramus hyoideus 3. Arteria sublingualis 
 
 2. Rami dorsales linguae 4. Arteria ranina. 
 
 3. The facial artery (art. palato-labiale. Chauss.) 
 passes upwards and forwards to the back part of the 
 submaxillary gland, it then ascends upwards and in- 
 wards over the base of the lower jaw, on the fore-part 
 of the masseter muscle, and describes a tortuous course 
 to the side of the mouth, nose, and to the inner canthus 
 of the eye. At the commencement of its course it is 
 placed behind the digastricus, and stylo-hyoid muscles, 
 lingual nerve, and submaxillary gland ; then, between 
 the submaxillary gland and base of the lower jaw. It 
 gives off, 1st. the ascending palatine artery, placed be- 
 tween the stylo-glossus and stylo-pharyngeus muscles, 
 distributed to the tonsils, tongue, and palate, and anas- 
 tomosing with the superior palatine artery ; 2nd. tonsil 
 branch, which runs along the stylo-glossus to the amyg- 
 dalae; 3rd. branches to the submaxillary gland; 4th. 
 submental branch, placed in front of the mylo-hyoideus 
 
196 
 
 and digastric muscles, beneath the platysma myoides, 
 and inosculating with the inferior maxillary and lingual 
 arteries ; 5th. inferior labial branch to the muscles act- 
 ing upon the lower lip ; 6th. orbicular branches sur- 
 rounding the lips ; and, lastly, four branches supplying 
 the sides of the nose, face, and inner canthus of the eye. 
 
 1. Arteria palatina 6. Arteriae coronariae 
 
 2. Ramus tonsillaris 7- Rami ad septum narium 
 
 3. Arteria glandulares 8. Arteria dorsalis nasi 
 
 4. Arteria submentalis 9. Arteriae nasales laterales 
 
 5. Arteria muscularis 10. Arteria angularis 
 
 The facial branches freely anastomose with the infra 
 orbital, opthalmic, and transverse arteries of the face. 
 
 4. The occipital artery (art. occipitale. Chauss.) 
 passes backwards between the mastoid process of the 
 temporal bone and transverse process of the atlas ; it is 
 covered by the digastricus, sterno-cleido-mastoideus, 
 trapezius, splenius, complexus, trachelo-mastoideus ; it 
 crosses the internal jugular vein and eighth pair of 
 nerves, and ultimately becomes superficial. It gives off 
 branches to the lymphatic glands surrounding the jugu- 
 lar vein; 1st. posterior meningeal artery, entering the 
 cranium by the foramen lacerum, basis cranii, supply- 
 ing the dura mater, and anastomosing with middle me- 
 ningeal artery ; 2nd. stylo mastoid, distributed to the 
 apparatuses of hearing, anastomosing with the menin- 
 geal and basilar arteries ; and lastly it divides into su- 
 perfaial and deep branches , distributed to the muscles at 
 the back part 01 the neck, head, and integuments of 
 the occiput, communicating with branches from the 
 vertebral, frontal, posterior, aural, and cervical arteries. 
 
 1. Arteria meningea poste- 3. & 4. Rami superficiales 
 
 rior et profundi. 
 
 2. Arteria stylo-mastb'idea 
 
 5. The posterior aural artery (art. auriculaire poste- 
 rieure. Chauss.) ascends backwards, first behind the 
 parotid gland, afterwards between the mastoid process 
 of the temporal bone, and meatus anditorius externus. 
 It gives off branches to the digastric muscles, and to the 
 fibro-cartilage of the auricle. 
 
 
197 
 
 6. The ascending pharyngeal artery (art. pharyngi- 
 enne inferieure. Chauss.) arises from the trunk of the 
 carotid at its bifurcation, it passes upwards to the base 
 of the cranium, by the side of the pharynx. It gives 
 off branches to the pharynx and fauces ; a branch like- 
 wise passes through the foramen lacerum basis cranii 
 anterius, is distributed to the dura mater, and anasto- 
 moses with the superior thyroideal, and lingual arteries. 
 
 7- The transverse artery of the face comes off from 
 the anterior border of the carotid, within the substance 
 of the parotid gland ; it accompanies Steno's duct over 
 the masseter muscle, it is distributed to the orbicularis 
 palpebrarum, zygomatic and buccinator muscles, and 
 anastomoses with the infra orbital, buccal, and facial 
 arteries. 
 
 The anterior aural artery is a small branch, distri- 
 buted to the anterior portion of the auricle, it gives off 
 a branch which enters the fissura glasseri, is distributed 
 to the tympanum and anastomoses, with the arteria 
 tympani and ramus ductus pterygoideL 
 
 8. The temporal artery (art. temporale) passes up- 
 wards and outwards over the zygomatic process of the 
 temporal bone, and ascends some way on the temporal 
 fascia, it then divides into two branches, 1st, temporo- 
 frontalf distributed to the integuments and muscles of 
 
 the fore-head, anastomosing with the frontal and nasal 
 arteries; 2nd. temporo occipital to the occiput, anas- 
 tomosing with occipital and posterior aural arteries. It 
 gives off before its division branches to the parotid 
 gland ; superior auricular branch to the superior and 
 anterior part of the auricle ; and, 3rd. the deep tern- 
 poral branch passing behind the condyle of the jaw, and 
 under the aponeurosis of the temporal muscle anasto- 
 mosing with the internal maxillary artery. 
 
 1. Art. temporo-frontalis 3. Art. profunda temporalis 
 
 2. Art. temporo-occipitalis 
 
 9. Internal maxillary artery (art. gutturo-maxillaire. 
 Chauss.) passes inwards nearly at a right angle beneath 
 the neck of the lower jaw, between the pterygoid mus- 
 cles to the ptery go-maxillary fossa. It gives off, 1st. 
 the deep auricular branch distributed to the meatus ex- 
 
 s3 
 
198 
 
 ternus ; 2nd. artery of the tympanum, entering the 
 fissura Glasseri, and distributed to the muscles of the 
 tympanum; 3rd. small meningeal branch passing up- 
 wards through the foramen ovale to the dura mater; 
 4th. middle meningeal artery, ascending through the 
 foramen spinosum, and continuing its course over the 
 posterior inferior angle of the parietal bone to the dura 
 mater, and also giving off a small branch which enters 
 the hiatus Fallopii to the cavity of the tympanum and 
 anastomoses with the meningeal posterior and stylo 
 mastoid arteries ; 5th. inferior maxillary artery, which 
 descends with the inferior maxillary nerve on the 
 external border of the pterygoideus externus muscle, to 
 the foramen mental posterius ; it then takes the course 
 of the canal and emerges from the foramen mentale an- 
 terius, and previous to its entrance into the canal it 
 gives off a remarkable branch which is lodged in the 
 groove on the inner surface of the maxilla, and distri- 
 buted to the mucous membrane of the mouth and mylo- 
 hyoid muscle ; the trunk of the artery within the canal 
 gives branches to the teeth, lastly branches to the mus- 
 cles of the lower lip, anastomosing with submental, in- 
 ferior labial, and inferior coronary arteries. The next 
 four branches from the internal maxillary artery, are 
 given off to temporal, pterygoid, masseter, and buccinator 
 muscles, respectively anastomose with branches from the 
 facial, infra, orbital, and transverse arteries. In the 
 spheno maxillary fossa it gives off important branches, 
 namely : 
 
 10. The infra orbital which runs forwards and enters 
 the infra orbital canal, and is eventually distributed to 
 the muscles of the face, and communicates with the facial 
 and transverse arteries. 
 
 11. The vidian which passes backwards into the pte- 
 rygoid canal, in company with the vidian nerve, and 
 inosculates with the artery of the tympanum and an- 
 terior auricular arteries. 
 
 12. The descending palatine which passes downwards 
 into the posterior palatine canal, to the back part of the 
 palate, supplies the bony and soft palate, and sends a 
 branch through the foramen incisivum into the nose, in- 
 osculating with the ascending palatine and nasal arte- 
 ries ; lastly, the spheno palatine which passes through 
 
199 
 
 the foramen spheno-palatinum, and is distributed to the 
 mucous membrane, lining the nares, and also to the 
 posterior cells of the aethmoid bone. By some anatomist 
 a distinct branch is described under the name of the su- 
 perior maxillary artery, as coming off from the deep 
 temporal,, or infra orbital artery, it descends over the 
 tuberosity of the superior maxillary bone and is distri- 
 buted to the teeth of the upper maxilla, and to the mu- 
 cous membrane lining the antrum, Highmorianum. 
 
 1. Arteria auricularis pro- 8. Kami masseteres 
 
 funda 9. Kami buccales. 
 
 2. Arteria tympani 10. Arteria infra orbitalis 
 
 3. Ramus meningeus par- 11. Ramus ductus ptery- 
 
 vus goidei 
 
 4. Arteria meningea media 12. Arteria palatina de- 
 
 5. Arteria maxillaris infe- scendens 
 
 rior 13. Arteria spheno-pala- 
 
 6. Rami temporales tina. 
 7- Rami pterygoidei 
 
 ARTERIA CAROTIS INTERNA. 
 
 (Art. cerebrate anterieure. Chauss.) 
 
 The internal carotid passes upwards and inwards by 
 the side of the pharynx to the foramen caroticum, it is 
 covered by the digastricus and stylo-hyoid muscles ; it 
 lies upon the rectus capitis anticus major, and upon the 
 lingual nerve, (this nerve afterwards gets to the outer 
 side) the internal jugular vein is placed externally, the 
 eight pair of nerves and superior cervical gunglion of 
 the great sympathetic on its inner margin. It conti- 
 nues its course along the carotid canal forwards, up- 
 wards, and inwards, enters the cavernous sinus, where 
 it describes a most remarkable course, forming two 
 curves resembling an italic S internal to the sixth pair 
 of nerves ; at the side of the sella turcica it perforates 
 the dura mater, and divides into three branches. In 
 the carotid canal it is surrounded by small communi- 
 cating branches of the great sympathetic nerve, and in 
 
200 
 
 the cavernous sinus, it is separated from the blood by 
 the lining membrane of that cavity. In the sinus it 
 gives off branches to the internal ear, and also branches 
 which accompany the third, fourth, and fifth pair of 
 nerves. The branches which the internal carotid gives 
 off are 
 
 1. Arteria opthalmica 3. Arteria choroidea 
 
 2. Arteria communicans 4. Arteria cerebri anterior 
 
 posterior 5. Arteria cerebri media 
 
 1. The opthalmic artery (art. orbitaire. Chauss.) runs 
 forwards on the outer side of the optic nerve, through 
 the foramen opticum, it then crosses in front of the op- 
 tic nerve, beneath the levator oculi, and continues its 
 course along the inner margin of the nerve, towards the 
 inner canthus of the eye. On the outer side of the 
 optic nerve, it gives off, 1st. the lacrymal artery to 
 the abductor oculi and lacrymal gland ; 2nd. the cen- 
 tral artery of the retina, which penetrates the optic 
 nerve, and runs in its centre, and is distributed to the 
 retina, hyaloid membrane, and capsule of the chrystal- 
 line lens. The transverse portion of the artery gives off, 
 3rd. the supra orbital artery placed above the levator 
 oculi, distributed to the levator, superior oblique mus- 
 cles and integuments of the forehead, anastomosing 
 with the temporal artery ; 4th, short ciliary arteries 
 amounting to twenty or thirty which form an arterial 
 circle around the optic nerve, pierce the selerotic, and 
 supply the choroid coat, and ciliary striae and pro- 
 cesses; 5th. long ciliary, arteries two in number, an 
 external, and an internal, they pass in front of the scle- 
 rotic, pierce that coat, and form a zone around the iris ; 
 6th. the anterior ciliary arteries, vary from four to 
 twelve, pierce the sclerotic before it unites with the 
 cornea, and form a circle around the iris ; 7th. a small 
 branch supplying the inferior oblique, depressor and 
 abductor muscles. On the inner side of the optic nerve 
 it gives off, 8th. the posterior ethmoidal artery, enter- 
 ing the cranium by the foramen orbitale internum pos- 
 terius, to the dura mater and aethmoidal cells; 9th. the 
 anterior cethmoidal which enters the cranium by the 
 foramen anterius supplying the dura mater, and lining 
 
201 
 
 membrane of the sethmoidal cells ; 10th. the palpebral 
 arteries to the lacrymal sac, caruncula lacrymalis, pal- 
 pebrae, conjunctiva, and adjacent muscles; llth. nasal 
 artery which leaves the orbit above the tendon of the 
 orbicularis palpebrarum, and is distributed to the lacry- 
 mal sac, caruncula lacrymalis, palpebrae, conjunctiva, 
 and adjacent muscles ; llth. nasal artery, which leaves 
 the orbit above the tendon of the orbicularis palpebra- 
 rum, and is distributed to the lacrymal sac and adjacent 
 muscles ; lastly, 12th. frontal branch which passes from 
 the orbit with the nasal, and divides into three branches, 
 one distributed to the orbicularis palpebrarum and cor- 
 rugator supercilii, a second to the integuments, and a 
 third to the frontal sinuses. 
 
 1. Arteria lacrymalis 7- Arteria oculi inferior 
 
 2. Arteria centralis retinae 8. and 9. Arteria eth- 
 
 3. Arteria supra orbitalis moidalis, anterior et 
 
 4. Arterise ciliares breves posterior 
 
 5. Arteriae ciliares longs? 10. Arteriae palpebrales 
 
 6. Arteriae ciliares anteri- 11. Arteria nasalis. 
 
 ores 12. Arteria front alis 
 
 2. The posterior communicating artery (passes back- 
 wards, and unites with the posterior cerebral artery, 
 given off from the basilar, and assists in forming the 
 circle of Willis (curculus Willissii) and freely inoscu- 
 lates with the vertebral artery. 
 
 3. The choroid artery arises above it, passes back- 
 wards over the crus cerebri, penetrates the inferior 
 cornu of the lateral ventricle, is distributed to that ca- 
 vity, to the optic thalami, and assists in forming the 
 choroid flexus. 
 
 4. The anterior cerebral artery (art. lobaire ante- 
 rieure. Chauss.) runs forwards and inwards above the 
 union of the optic nerves, along the under part of the 
 anterior lobe of the brain, communicates with the oppo- 
 site artery by means of a transverse branch. Each 
 branch is afterwards subdivided into two branches, the 
 smaller distributed to the anterior lobes of the brain, 
 the larger is reflected backwards along the corpus cal- 
 losum, and hemispheres of the brain, ard freely anasto- 
 moses with the middle and posterior cerebral arteries. 
 
202 
 
 1. Arteria communicans an- 2. Arteria callosa. 
 terior 
 
 5. The middle cerebral artery (art. lobaire moyenne. 
 Chauss.) passes obliquely outwards., and is lodged in the 
 fossa Sylvii ; it supplies the middle and anterior lobes 
 of the brain, and freely inosculates with the anterior 
 and posterior cerebral arteries. 
 
 ARTERIA SUBCLAVIA. 
 
 (Portion sous-claviere du tronc brachial. Chauss.) 
 
 The subclavian artery on the right side, arises from 
 the arteria innominata, on the left from the arch of the 
 aorta. Each artery passes upwards and outwards, to the 
 anterior scalenus muscle, then between the scalenus an- 
 ticus and meduis, and lastly downwards and outwards, 
 beneath the subclavius muscle and clavicle into the ax. 
 ilia. The right subclavian artery has thicker coats, is 
 larger, and more superficial ; it runs obliquely upwards, 
 then transversely, lastly downwards, forming thus an 
 arch, the concavity downwards towards the right lung, 
 with which it is in contact. Anteriorly it is covered by 
 the sterno-hyoid, sterno- thyroid, and anterior scalenus 
 muscles, by the subclavius and clavicle, by the sub- 
 clavian vein, by the eight pair, branches of the great 
 sympathetic, and phrenic nerves ; posteriorly it is se- 
 parated from the longus colli, and vertebral column 
 by cellular tissue, also from the recurrent laryngeal 
 nerve ; it lies upon the pleura middle scalenus 
 muscle and first rib. The left subclavian artery is 
 more deeply situated ; it passes nearly perpendicularly 
 upwards, as far as the margin of the first rib, then out- 
 wards between the scaleni, lastly downwards. It is 
 covered at its origin by the left subclavian vein, by the 
 left lung, and nervus vagus, which, instead of crossing 
 its direction, runs parallel with it : it lies upon the ver- 
 tebral column, the longus colli, and lower cervical gang- 
 lion of the great sympathetic nerve. It lies parallel 
 and close to the sesophagus, and left common carotid 
 
203 
 
 artery. The branches given off may be divided into 
 superior, inferior and external. 
 
 Superior 1. Arteria vertebralis 
 
 2. Arteria thyroidea inferior 
 
 Inferior 3. Arteria mammaria interna 
 
 4. Arteria intercostalis prima 
 
 External 5. Arteria cervicalis transversa 
 
 6. Arteria scapularis 
 
 7- Arteria cervicalis profunda. 
 
 1. The vertebral artery (art. cerebrate posterieur. 
 Chauss.) passes directly upwards through the foramina 
 in the transverse processes of the six superior cervical 
 vertebrae, winds backwards behind the superior articu- 
 lating process of the atlas, enters the cranium by the 
 foramen magnum, and, uniting with its fellow on the 
 basilar process of the os occipitis, constitutes the basilar 
 artery. It gives off, 1st. the spinal cervical branches, 
 which enter the intervertebral foramina for the trans- 
 mission of the cervical nerves, and form arterial circles 
 around their roots ; 2nd. muscular branches, distributed 
 to the muscles of the neck, freely anastomosing with 
 the occipital and deep cervical arteries ; 3rd. posterior 
 meningeal artery, supplying the dura mater; 4th and 
 5th. posterior and anterior spinal arteries, passing to the 
 medulla spinalis, and freely anastomosing with each 
 other and with similar branches entering the interver- 
 tebral foramina of the different regions; 6th. inferior 
 artery of the cerebellum, which runs between the ori- 
 gins of the nervus vagus and spinal accessory nerves, 
 and is distributed to the cerebellum, inosculating with 
 the superior artery. 
 
 1. Arterias spinales cervica- 4. Arteria spinalis anterior 
 
 les 5. Arteria spinalis poste- 
 
 2. Kami musculares rior 
 
 3. Arterise meningea poste- 6. Arteria cerebelli infe- 
 
 rior rior 
 
 The basilar artery (art. meso-cephalique. Chauss.) 
 is formed by the re-union of the two vertebral arteries ; 
 it ascends over the surface of the tuber annulare, rest- 
 
204 
 
 ing upon the basilar process of the os occipitis, as far as 
 the posterior clinoid processes of the sphenoid bone ; it 
 here divides into two branches. It gives off small 
 branches to the tuber annulare; it then gives off, 1st. a 
 branch which accompanies the portio mollis of the 
 seventh pair of nerves, and is distributed to the cochlea, 
 semicircular canals and vestibule ; 2nd. the superior ce~ 
 rebellar artery, which passes outwards and backwards 
 to the superior surface of the cerebellum ; lastly, the 
 third division forms the posterior arteries of the cere- 
 brum they run forwards and outwards, over the crura 
 cerebri, to the under surface of the posterior lobes of 
 the cerebrum, and divide into numerous branches. The 
 continued trunk joins the communicating branch of the 
 internal carotid, and completes the circle of Willis. 
 The circle of Willis is formed in front by the anterior 
 arteries of the cerebrum, connected by a transverse 
 branch, and the posterior communicating branches, join- 
 ing the posterior cerebral arteries. It contains the 
 union of the tractus opticus, infundibulum, corpora al- 
 bicantia, pons Tarini, crura cerberi. 
 
 1. Arteria auditiva interna 3. Arteria cerebri posterior 
 
 2. Arteria cerebelli superior Circulus Willisii 
 
 2. The inferior thyroideal artery (art. thyroidienne 
 inferieme. Chauss.) passes upwards, and inwards, behind 
 the common carotid artery, to the lower part of the 
 thyroid gland ; it divides into branches distributed to 
 the thyroid gland, and freely anastomosing with the 
 superior, and gives off a branch, the ascending cervical, 
 which passes upwards on the scalenus anticus, and lon- 
 gus colli, to the deep muscles of the neck, which anas- 
 tomoses with the vertebral posterior cervical, and occi- 
 pital arteries. 
 
 1. Kami thyroidei enferi- 2. Arteria cerviclealis ascen- 
 ores dens 
 
 3. The internal mammary (art. sous- sterna le. 
 Chauss.) passes downwards and forwards, along the 
 posterior surface of the sterno-costal cartilages, between 
 the sterno-costalis, and intercostal muscles; it leaves 
 
205 
 
 the chest under the cartilage of the sixth rib, and on 
 the under surface of the rectus muscle, divides into two 
 branches, an external and internal. It gives branches 
 to the thymus gland, to the mediastinum pericardium, 
 and to the intercostal muscles, these branches inosculate 
 with the aortic intercostals, and thoracic arteries ; 4th. 
 a branch which accompanies the phrenic nerve, and is 
 distributed to the diaphragm ; 5th. the internal branch, 
 the muscu/o phrenic passes downwards and outwards, 
 close to the attachment of the diaphragm, and is distri- 
 buted to that muscle, anastomosing with the intercos- 
 tals, lumbar, circumflex and diaphragmatic arteries; 
 6th. the external branch, superior epigastric, is distri- 
 buted to the recti, and freely inosculates with the infe- 
 rior epigastric, musculo-phrenic, and lumbar arteries. 
 Thus these two branches, by remarkable anastomoses 
 connect the arteries of the superior and inferior extre- 
 mities. 
 
 1. Arteria mediastini 5. Arteria musculo phre- 
 
 2. Arteria thymi nica 
 
 3. Arteriae intercostales 6. Arteria epigastrica su- 
 
 anteriores perior. 
 
 4. Arteria comes nervi 
 
 phrenici 
 
 4. Thejirst intercostal artery (art. intercostale supe- 
 rieure. Chauss.) is placed over the head of the first and 
 second ribs, externally to the inferior cervical ganglion 
 of the great sympathetic nerve, and gives off one or two 
 trunks to the intercostal spaces. It sends branches to 
 aesophagus, bronchia, pleura, and medulla spinalis, and 
 inosculates with the aortic intercostal arteries. 
 
 5. The transverse cervical artery (art. cervico-scapu- 
 laire. Chauss.) is sometimes given off from the inferior 
 thyroideal, it passes transversely outwards, over the 
 scaleni muscles, above the nerves which constitute the 
 axillary flexus, to the triangular space above the clavi- 
 cle ; it divides into two branches, 1st. a descending, or 
 posterior branch which passes downwards, under the 
 rhomboidei, along the base of the scapula, and is distri- 
 buted to the rhomboidei, latissimus dorsi, and spinati 
 muscles, and freely anastomoses with the sub-scapular 
 
 T 
 
206 
 
 artery ; 2nd. a superficial, or ascending branch which 
 runs between the sterno, mastoid, and trapezius mus- 
 cles, is distributed to the muscles, integuments, fascia, 
 and lymphatic glands of the neck, freely inosculating 
 with the occipital and supra scapular arteries. 
 
 Arteria scapularis posterior. 
 Arteria cervicalis superficialis. 
 
 6. The supra scapular artery (art. transversale de 
 Vepaule. Sabatier) is often given off from the inferior 
 thyroideal; it runs outwards and backwards, under- 
 neath the clavicle, to the notch of the scapula, and 
 passes above the coracoid ligament, into the fossa supra 
 spinata. It first gives off branches to the trapezius and 
 deltoid muscles, which anastomose with the transverse 
 cervical, thoracico-acromial, and occipital arteries ; 2nd. 
 branches to the supra spinatus muscle, and capsule of 
 the scapulo-humeral articulation, anastomosing with 
 the circumflex arteries, lastly branches to the infra spi- 
 natus and teres minor, inosculating with the posterior 
 and subscapular arteries. 
 
 1. Arteria accromialis su- 2. Arteria supra spinalis 
 perior 3. Arteria infra spinalis. 
 
 7 The deep cervical artery (art. trachelo-cervicale. 
 Chauss.) is sometimes given on by the first intercostal ; 
 it ascends upwards on the bodies of the cervical verte- 
 brae ; in its course it gives off branches to the longus 
 colli, rectus capitis anticus major, and minor muscles ; 
 sometimes it sends a branch in company with the ver- 
 tebral artery. The deep cervical freely inosculates 
 with the vertebral and occipital arteries. 
 
 Arteria accessoria vertebralis. 
 
207 
 ARTERIA AXILLARIS. 
 
 (La portion axillaire du tronc brachiaL Chauss.) 
 
 When the trunk of the subclavian artery has passed 
 over the flat surface of the first rib, it takes the name 
 of axillary. The axillary artery runs obliquely down- 
 wards and outwards, first between the subscapularis, 
 and serratus magnus muscles, it is then situated on the 
 inner edge of the coraco-brachialis, lastly it crosses the 
 insertion of the teres major, and latissimus dorsi, when 
 it takes the name of brachial. It is covered by the pec- 
 toralis major and minor muscles, in most of its course. 
 At the upper part of its course the axillary vein is placed 
 superficial to the artery, and at its sternal side, the 
 nerves constituting the axillary plexus are on the outer 
 side, and a little behind the artery, lower down the 
 vein lies upon the artery, and the axillary plexus of 
 nerves completely surround the vessel. It gives off the 
 following branches. 
 
 1. Arteria thoracica supe- 5. Arteriacircuniflexahu^ 
 
 rior meri anterior 
 
 2. Arteria thoracia aero- 6. Arteria circumflexahu- 
 
 mialis meri posterior 
 
 3. Arteria thoracica longa 7- Arteria subscapularis. 
 
 4. Arteria thoracica axil- 
 
 laris 
 
 1. The superior thoracic artery (la premiere des tko- 
 raciques. Chauss.) descends obliquely forwards between 
 the pectoralis major and minor, is distributed to these 
 muscles and to the serratus magnus muscle, and anasto- 
 moses with the mammary and intercostal arteries. 
 
 2. The long thoracic artery (la deuxieme des thora- 
 ciques. Chauss.) runs down almost vertically, beneath 
 the external border of the pectoralis major, divides into 
 branches distributed to the mamma, and anastomoses 
 with the superior thoracic, mammary, and intercostal 
 arteries. 
 
 3. The acromial thoracic artery (la troisieme des 
 thoraciques. Chauss.) passes upwards between the pec- 
 toralis major and deltoid muscles, and ramifies about 
 the shoulder, it gives off a descending branch, acconu 
 
208 
 
 panying the cephalic vein, and a branch distributed to 
 the scapulo clavicular articulation. It anastomoses 
 with the supra scapular, and transverse cervical 
 arteries. 
 
 4. The axillary thoracic artery (la quatrieme des 
 thoraciques. Chauss.) passes downwards into the axilla, 
 supplying the mamma, axillary glands, pectoralis minor, 
 and serratus magnus muscles. 
 
 5. The sub-scapular, or inferior scapular artery (art. 
 sous scapulaire) is a short and rather large trunk, it 
 runs downwards along the lower edge of the sub-sca- 
 pularis muscle, and divides, 1st. into a superior 3 or 
 dorsal, and 2nd. into an inferior, or circumjlex branch. 
 The superior winds around the inferior costa of the sca- 
 pula, between the latissimus dorsi, and sub-scapularis 
 muscles, and enters the fossa infra spinata ; it divides 
 into numerous branches, distributed to the infra spinar 
 tus and teres minor muscles, it also sends some branches 
 under the acromion, to the supra spinatus muscle, and 
 anastomoses with the supra scapulary artery. The in- 
 ferior branch descends along the sub-scapularis muscle, 
 along the anterior costa of the scapula; it gives off 
 branches to the latissimus dorsi, teres minor, and major, 
 and subscapularis muscles. It anastomoses with the 
 thoracica axillaris artery. 
 
 1. Arteria dorsalis scapulae. 
 
 2. Arteria circumflexa scapulae. 
 
 6. The anterior circumjlex artery (art. scapulo- 
 humerale. Chauss.) is a small branch winding obliquely 
 outwards below the head of the humerus, beneath the 
 coraco-brachialis, biceps and deltoid muscles ; it is dis- 
 tributed to these muscles. As it passes under the ten- 
 don of the biceps, across the bicipital groove, it sends 
 off a branch to the capsule of the shoulder joint. 
 
 7 The posterior circumjlex artery {art. scapulo- 
 humerale. Chauss.) is a much longer branch ; it winds 
 inwards below the head of the humerus, between the 
 bone and long tendon of the triceps, to the fore and 
 outer part of the humerus. It gives off branches to 
 the capsule of the scapulo humeral articulation, and 
 
209 
 
 adjoining muscles, and anastomoses with anterior, 
 acromial and superior profunda arteries. 
 
 ARTERIA BRACHIALIS. 
 
 (Artere humerale. Chauss.) 
 
 The Brachial Artery proceeding from the termination 
 of the axillary artery, passes obliquely downwards and 
 a little outwards to the middle of the bend of the el- 
 bow. It is covered by the integuments, fascia, aponeu- 
 rosis of the biceps; at the upper part of its course 
 slightly by the biceps, and coraco brachialis muscles ; 
 at the bend of the elbow by the pronator radiiteres. 
 It lies upon a portion of the triceps, the tendon of the 
 coraco-brachiafis and on the brachialis anticus muscle. 
 It has to its inner side the coraco-brachialis and biceps 
 muscles, and basilic vein: the median nerve, at the 
 upper part of its course is situated on the outer side of 
 the artery, and about the middle third of the arm it 
 crosses the artery, when it is placed to the inner side. 
 This artery is accompanied by two venae comites. It 
 gives off the following branches : 
 
 1. Arteria profunda supe- 3. Ramus anastomoticus 
 
 rior magnus 
 
 2. Arteria profunda infe- 4. Arteria nutritia humeri 
 
 rior 
 
 1. The superior deep artery (art. grande musculaire 
 du bras. Chauss.) arises from the upper and back part 
 of the brachial artery, beneath the tendon of the latis- 
 simus dorsi, it winds obliquely downwards and out- 
 wards between the os humeri and triceps ; about the 
 middle of the arm it divides into two branches ; one, 
 the deep ulnar, which descends between the humerus 
 and triceps muscle to the olecranon, and inosculates 
 with the recurrent ulnar artery : the other, deep radi- 
 cal which accompanies the spiral nerve round the back 
 part of the humerus to the outer condyle, and commu- 
 nicates with the recurrent radial. 
 
210 
 
 1. Arteria profunda ulna- 2. Arteria profimda radia- 
 ris lis 
 
 2. The inferior deep artery (art. petite musculaire 
 du bras. Chauss.) is very irregular in its origin ; it 
 usually arises in the middle third of the arm, it passes 
 obliquely downwards on the triceps, is distributed to 
 the triceps, brachialis internus muscles, and ramifies 
 principally on the inside of the elbow joint: it is 
 accompanied by the ulnar nerve, which is situated on 
 its inner side. 
 
 3. The great anastomosing branch (art collaterale du 
 coude. Chauss.) generally arises two inches above the 
 inner condyle, crosses the brachialis anticus muscle, 
 supplies the adjacent muscles, the humero-cubital arti- 
 culation, and anastomoses with the preceding arteries. 
 
 4. Nutritious artery of the humerus. Numerous 
 small branches, which are not constant as to their ori- 
 gin, size, or course, are given off from the brachial 
 artery, distributed to the muscles ; there is one in par- 
 ticular, destined to supply the bone ; it usually comes 
 off from the outer border of the artery, and perforates 
 the tendon of the coraeo-brachialis. 
 
 ARTERIA RADIALIS. 
 
 It arises from the brachial artery at the bend of the 
 elbow, and is superficial in its course ; it runs obliquely 
 downwards and a little outwards as far as the wrist- 
 joint ; it then winds backwards over the external late- 
 ral ligament, to the space between the metacarpal bone 
 of the thumb and fore finger. It is covered superiorly 
 by the pronator radii teres, by the integuments, and 
 fascia, and at the back part of the hand by the exten- 
 sor tendons of the thumb ; it first lies upon the supina- 
 tor radii brevis, crosses the insertion of the pronator 
 radii teres, continues its course on the flexor longus pol- 
 lices, still lower down on the pronator quadratus mus- 
 cle, and inferior extremity of the radius. It is situated 
 at the upper part of its course, between the supinator 
 radii longus and pronator radii teres muscle; then be- 
 
211 
 
 tween the supinator radii longus and flexor carpi radia- 
 lis, between which it is continued to the wrist. It is 
 accompanied by two vense comites, and by the superfi- 
 cial branch of the spiral nerve on its outer side. It 
 gives off the following branches : 
 
 1. Arteria recurrens radialis 6. Arteria radialis indicis 
 
 2. Kami musculares 7 Arteria palmaris profun- 
 
 3. Superficial volae da 
 
 4. Arteriae dorsales 8. Arteriae interossiae vola- 
 
 5. Arteria magna pollicis res 
 
 1. The recurrent radial artery {art. recur rente de F 
 cpicondyle. Chauss.) runs upwards on the inner side of 
 the supinator, radii longus, in front of the external 
 eondyle of the humerus, and is distributed to the ex- 
 tensor muscles, and anastomoses with the deep radial. 
 
 2. Muscular branches (art. radio-musculaires. Chass.) 
 come off on either side and supply the adjacent muscles ; 
 one in particular directs itself transversely inwards 
 along the lower margin of the pronator quadratus 
 muscle, and anastomoses with a similar branch from 
 the ulnar artery ; it also sends off branches to the radio 
 carpal articulation (art. radio-palmaire capienne trans- 
 versale. Chauss.) 
 
 3. The superficial volar artery (art. radio-palmaire. 
 Chauss.) usually comes off about half-an-inch above the 
 radio-carpal articulation ; it passes over the annular 
 ligament, and freely anastomoses with the superficial 
 palmar arch. 
 
 4. The dorsal artery (art. sus-carpienne. Chauss.) 
 arises opposite the external border of the tendon of the 
 extensor carpi radialis longior; it runs inwards over 
 the posterior surface of the second row of the carpal 
 bones, divides into branches distributed to the carpal 
 ligaments, the interossei muscles, and anastomoses 
 with the perforating arteries of the deep palmar arch. 
 Small branches are sometimes described as dorsal arte- 
 ries of the metacarpus, distributed to the interossei 
 muscles. 
 
 5. The dorsal arteries of the thumb (art sus metacar. 
 pienne du pouce. Chauss.) are frequently described as 
 one artery. The radial artery gives off two branches 
 
212 
 
 to the thumb. One runs along the back part of the 
 first metacarpal bone, and over the first phalanx of the 
 thumb ; the second along the tendon of the extensor 
 tertii internodii, upon the inner edge of the first meta- 
 carpal bone of the thumb, and on its ulnar side. 
 
 ^ 6. The artery of the index Jinger runs along the ra- 
 dial side of the index finger to its last phalanx, when it 
 anastomoses with the digital artery of the ulnar side. 
 
 7- The deep palmar branch enters the palm of the 
 hand, between the metacarpal bone of the thumb, and 
 index finger, and crosses the metacarpal bones ; in its 
 course it forms an arch, the convexity towards the head 
 of the metacarpal bones ; it gives off anterior branches 
 to the lumbricales, posterior, or perforating branches 
 rnnning backwards through the interossei muscles, and 
 anastomosing with the dorsal arteries, superior branches 
 arising from the convexity of the arch, and distributed 
 to the interossei, inferior branches distributed to the 
 carpal ligaments. The deep palmar inosculates with 
 the deep branch of the ulnar artery. 
 
 ARTERIA ULNARIS. 
 
 (Artere cubitale. Chauss.) 
 
 The Ulnar Artery is larger than the radial, is deeply 
 situated at the upper part of its course, becoming su- 
 perficial as it descends. It passes obliquely downwards 
 and inwards, on the ulnar side of the fore-arm,, as far 
 as the wrist, it then bends outwards over the annular 
 ligament, to the radial side of the os orbiculare, to- 
 wards the metacarpal bone of the index finger, forming 
 the superficial palmar arch. It is first covered by the 
 pronator radii teres, flexor carpi radialis, palmaris lon- 
 gus, and flexor digitorum sublimis muscles, and by the 
 median nerve ; afterwards by the flexor carpi ulnaris 
 muscle; in the palm of the hand, by the palmaris 
 brevis, and palmar aponeurosis. It lies upon the bra- 
 chialis anticus, the flexor profundus, pronator quadratus 
 muscles, upon the annular ligament of the wrist, and 
 upon the flexor tendons. In its course it is situated be- 
 
213 
 
 tween the flexor carpi ulnaris, and flexor sublimis mus- 
 cles. It is accompanied by venae comites, and by the 
 ulnar nerve on its inner side. It gives off the following 
 branches. 
 
 1. Arteria recurrens ulna- 4. Arteria dorsalis ulnaris 
 
 ris 5. Arteria prof unda ulnaris 
 
 2. Arteria interossea 6. Arcus palmaris superfi- 
 
 3. Arteria nutritia ulnaris cialis. 
 
 1. The recurrent ulnar artery (art. recurrente de 
 Vepicondyle. Chauss.) passes upwards and backwards, 
 beneath the ulnar nerve, between the two origins of 
 the flexor carpi ulnaris muscle ; it divides into branches 
 distributed to the triceps, anconeus muscles, and to the 
 inner and back part of the humero cubital articulation ; 
 it gives off one branch in particular, which passes in 
 front of the brachialis anticus, beneath the pronator 
 radii teres, to the fore part of the articulation. It 
 anastomoses with the profunda ulnar, profunda inferior, 
 and ramus anastomoticus magnus. It then gives off, 
 2nd. the interosseal, which is a short but large trunk, 
 and passes downwards and backwards, to the upper 
 opening of the interosseous ligament, there dividing 
 into two branches, an anterior and posterior. It first 
 gives off a few recurrent branches to the fore part of the 
 joint. The anterior interosseal artery passes directly 
 down in front of the interosseous ligament, in company 
 with a branch of the median nerve, covered by the 
 flexor muscles, having arrived at the superior border of 
 the pronator quadratus, it divides into two branches ; 
 the anterior branch supplies this muscle, continues its 
 course in front of the radio-carpal articulation, and in- 
 osculates with the deep palmar arch. The posterior 
 branch passes backwards through the lower opening in 
 the interosseous ligament, and is distributed to the back 
 part of the carpus, and anastomoses with the posterior 
 carpal branches, from the radial and ulnar arteries. The 
 anterior interosseal gives off in its course, the nutriti- 
 ous artery of the radius, and numerous branches perfo- 
 rating the interosseous ligament, and supplying the 
 extensor muscles. The posterior interosseal is smaller, 
 and passes through the upper opening of the interos- 
 
214 
 
 seous ligament, to the posterior and superior part of the 
 fore-arm, under the anconeus muscle, where it divides 
 into two branches, the ascending or posterior recurrent, 
 and the descending branch. The recurrent takes its 
 course upwards and backwards, between the head of the 
 radius and olecranon to the triceps, and inosculates with 
 the profunda radial artery. The descending branch 
 passes downwards, between the extensor communis, and 
 extensor muscles of the thumb ; in its course it gives 
 off muscular branches, distributed to the adjacent mus- 
 cles, and lastly divides into numerous dorsal branches 
 to the carpus, freely inosculating with the radial, ulnar, 
 and anterior interosseal arteries. The ulnar artery 
 next gives off, 3d. the nutritious artery of the ulna, 
 about the upper part of the middle third j 4th. dorsal 
 branches which pass behind the tendon of the flexor 
 carpi ulnaris, to the back of the carpus, and inosculate 
 with the interosseal and radial arteries ; superficial 
 branches supplying the fore part of the wrist. At the 
 root of the metacarpal bone of the little finger, it sends 
 off, 5th. the deep artery which joins the deep palmar 
 arch, passing between the flexor brevis, and abductor 
 minimi digiti muscles, in company with the deep branch 
 of the ulnar nerve ; lastly from the convexity of the 
 superficial palmar arch, are given off the digital 
 branches; from the concavity, small branches to the 
 lumbricales. The digital branches are four in number. 
 Thejr.tf supplies the little finger, the second and third, 
 the ring finger, the fourth, the radial side of the middle 
 finger, and the ulnar side of the index finger, these 
 give off in their course small branches to the thecae, 
 binding down the flexor tendons, and form by anasto- 
 moses, at the back part of the extreme phalanges, be- 
 neath the nails an arterial plexus. From the superficial 
 palmar arch, an artery is frequently sent off to the 
 thumb and index finger. 
 
 AORTA THORACICA. 
 
 The Thoracic Aorta descends within the posterior 
 mediastinum in front of the bodies of the dorsal verte- 
 
215 
 
 brae inclined to the left side, and enters the abdomen 
 between the tendinous crura of the diaphragm. It is 
 covered by the origin of the bronchia, by the pericar- 
 dium, the left pleura, and root of the left lungs, by 
 the left pulmonary artery: the aesophagus with the 
 eight pair of nerves, at the upper part of its course, is 
 on the right side, afterwards in front of the artery, 
 lastly, it is situated to the left of the thoracic duct and 
 vena azygos : The branches given off are 
 
 1. Arteriae bronchiales 4. Arterise intercostales aor- 
 
 2. Arteriae aesophageae ticae 
 
 3. Arteriae mediastinales 
 
 1. The bronchial arteries (art. bronchiques. Chauss.) 
 in number and size, are various in different subjects, 
 and have been divided into two classes, the right and 
 left. The right bronchial are distributed to the right 
 lung, turning themselves around the bronchial tubes ; 
 the left, which are unequal in size, to the left lung. 
 They anastomose with the pulmonary arteries, and some 
 anatomists maintain they inosculate with the pulmonary 
 veins. In some cases a common trunk (arteria bron- 
 chia Us communis} supplies both lungs. 
 
 2. The cesophageal arteries (art. cesophagiennes. 
 Chauss.) are five or six in number, they take their rise 
 from the aorta separately, and are distributed to the 
 aesophagus, anastomosing with the coronary artery of the 
 stomach, with the inferior thyroideal, and branches from 
 the subclavian arteries. 
 
 3. The mediastinal arteries (art. mediastines. Chauss.) 
 are numerous small branches distributed to the posterior 
 mediastinum, to the pleura, and pericardium. 
 
 4. The aortic intercostal arteries (art. inter-costales 
 infer ieures. Chauss.) are eight or ten pairs ; they take 
 their rise from the posterior, and lateral parts of the 
 aorta, they pass outwards and backwards, to the inter- 
 costal spaces, and divide into anterior and posterior 
 branches; the latter pass backwards between the trans- 
 verse processes of the corresponding vertebrae, and are 
 distributed to the muscles of the back, and give off 
 branches to the medulla spinalis. The anterior branches 
 pass forwards, and are lodged in the grooves on the in~ 
 
216 
 
 ferior and inner edges of the ribs, between the inter* 
 costal muscles, and are accompanied by two veins, and 
 intercostal nerves. Each trunk, at the middle of the 
 intercostal space, divides into two branches, a superior 
 and inferior : the inferior, which is the smallest, runs 
 along the superior border of the rib beneath ; the supe- 
 rior, the continued trunk, passes along the inferior 
 margin of the rib above, and may be traced as far as 
 the anterior part of the thorax. They anastomose with 
 the thoracic, epigastric, internal mammary, and lumbar 
 arteries. The right intercostal arteries pass behind the 
 vena azygos, and thoracic duct. 
 
 5. The superior Phrenic arteries (art. sus-diapkrag- 
 matiques. Chauss.) are the last branches which arise 
 from the thoracic aorta. They pass outwards and are 
 distributed to the diaphragm, and anastomose with the 
 intercostal and inferior phrenic arteries. The first 
 branches given off from the aorta have been described 
 by Murray as the anterior and posterior pericardic 
 arteries. 
 
 AORTA ABDOMINALIS. 
 
 The Aorta having passed between the tendinous crura 
 of the diaphragm, takes the name of abdominal. It de- 
 scends on the left side of the bodies of the lumbar ver- 
 tebrae, and approaches gradually towards their middle, 
 on the upper part of the body of the fifth, it divides into 
 right and left common iliiac arteries. The ascending 
 vena cava is placed on its right side. It gives off the 
 following branches. 
 
 Anteriorly. 1. Arteriae phrenicae inferiores 
 
 2. Arteria cseliaca 
 
 3. Arteria mesenterica superior 
 
 4. Arteriae sperm aticse 
 
 5. Arteriae mesenterica inferior. 
 Laterally. 6. Arteriae capsulares surrenales 
 
 7- Arteriae renales. 
 Posteriorly. 8. Arterae lumbales 
 
 9. Arteriae sacro media. 
 
217 
 
 1. The inferior phrenic arteries (art. sous diaphrag- 
 matiques. Chauss.) arise from the fore-part ; they pass 
 upwards and outwards, over the crura of the diaphragm, 
 and are distributed to that muscle, inosculating with the 
 superior phrenic, musculo-phrenic, intercostal, and lum- 
 bar arteries. The right phrenic gives off branches to 
 the liver, pancreas, and supra renal capsule ; the left 
 branches to the oesophagus, spleen, and supra renal cap- 
 sule of the left side. 
 
 2. The cceliac artery (art. opisto-gastrique. Chauss.) 
 is a large but short trunk j it arises from the fore part 
 of the aorta, where it is placed between the crura of the 
 diaphragm, nearly opposite the eleventh or twelfth 
 dorsal vertebrae, it passes downwards to the upper margin 
 of the pancreas, where it divides into three branches. 
 
 Arteria coronaria Artery hepatica. 
 
 Arteria splenica. 
 
 3. The coronary artery (art. stomo-gastrique. Chauss.) 
 ascends towards the left side, as far as the aesophagus ; 
 it first gives off the inferior cesophageal ; 2nd. cardiac 
 branches to the aesophagus and cardiac extremity of the 
 stomach ; 3d. it then descends towards the right side, 
 along the smaller curvature of the stomach, and gives 
 off branches to the little omentum, to the anterior and 
 posterior surface of the stomach, and freely anastomoses 
 with the pyloric ; 4th. it also sends frequently a large 
 branch to the liver. 
 
 1. Arterise aesophagae infe- 3. Ramus gasticus 
 
 riores 4. Arteria hepatica sinis- 
 
 2. Arteriae cardiacae poster tra. 
 
 riores 
 
 4. The hepatic artery (art. hepatique. Chauss.) passes 
 upwards and forwards, to the transverse fissure of the 
 liver, between the layers of the little omentum j it then 
 divides into two branches, right gastro epiploic, and the 
 proper hepatic artery. The hepatic artery gives off 1st. 
 the pyloric, which runs towards the left side, along the 
 smaller curvature of the stomach, and freely inosculates 
 with the coronary artery ; the hepatic tlien sub-divides 
 
 u 
 
218 
 
 into two branches, supplying the right and left lobes of 
 the liver j the right sends off a branch or branches, ratnus 
 cysticus to the gall bladder. The right gastro-epiploic 
 descends beneath the pylorus, and bends towards the left 
 side, along the greater curvature of the stomach, be- 
 tween the layers of the great omentum ; it is distributed 
 to the anterior and posterior surfaces of the stomach, 
 and to the great omentum. It sends off three branches 
 to the duodenum, pylorus and pancreas. 
 
 1. Gastro-epiploica dextra 2. Arteria hepatica 
 
 . Arteria pylorica inferior Arteria pylorica seu co- 
 
 2. Kami duodenales ronaria dextra 
 
 3. Kami panereatico-duo- Arteria cystica 
 
 denales Kami cystici gemelli 
 
 The sphenic artery Cart, splenique. Chauss.) is the 
 largest branch, and passes from right to left in a remark- 
 able tortuous course to the spleen, first behind then 
 along the superior border of the pancreas. It gives off, 
 1st, branches distributed to the anterior and posterior 
 surfaces of the pancreas : 2nd. the left epiploic which 
 passes towards the right side, between the layers of the 
 great omentum, along the greater curvature of the 
 stomach, inosculating with the right epiploic artery : 
 3rd. it sends off small arteries to the cardiac extremity 
 of the stomach, freely anastomosing with the coronary., 
 aesophageal, and left inferior gastric arteries : lastly in 
 the tissue of the spleen it divides into five or six 
 branches, which subdivide into smaller ones, and form 
 a complete net- work of vessels. 
 
 1. Arteriae pancreaticse si- 2. Arteria epiploica sinis- 
 nistrsp tra 
 
 3. Vasa brevia. 
 
 3. The superior mesenteric artery (art. mesenterique 
 supcrieure} arises from the aorta, immediately below 
 the caeliac ; it passes downwards, behind the pancreas 
 and vena portse, in front of the third portion of the du- 
 odenum and left renal vein, between the layers of the 
 mesentery to the left side ; it then turns to the right 
 side, forming in its course an arch. From the left or 
 
219 
 
 convex side of the arch; 1st. twenty or thirty large 
 branches are sent off to the small intestines ; each branch 
 divides into two branches which communicate with each 
 other, and form arches ; from the convex part of these 
 arches still smaller arteries are derived, which inosculate 
 in a similar manner. From the concavity of its arch, 
 it gives off three branches, the ileo-colic, colica dextra, 
 et colica media. The ileo colic artery runs between the 
 laminae of the mesentery, and divides into three 
 branches, an inferior distributed to the appendix caeci 
 vermiformis, a middle to the ileum anastomosing with 
 branches derived from the convex side of the artery, 
 and lastly an ascending branch distributed to the com- 
 mencement of the colon, and freely anastomosing with 
 the colica dextra. The right colic artery is the smallest, 
 it runs between the laminae of the meso-colon, and is 
 distributed to the ascending colon, and anastomoses with 
 thejileo colic and colica media. The middle colic artery 
 supplies the transverse arch of the colon, runs between 
 the layers of the meso-colon, and divides into a right 
 and left branch ; the former inosculates with the colica 
 dextra, the latter descends and joins the ascending 
 branches of the arteria colica senistra. By Mekel a 
 small artery (arteria omphalo-mesardica) is described 
 as passing in the foetus, within the umbilical sheath, 
 and distributed to the umbilical vesicle. It exists only 
 during the first two months of foetal life, at the expira- 
 tion of that period it becomes obliterated. 
 
 1. Arteriae intestinales . Ramus anastomoticus 
 
 2. Arteria ileo-colica ascendens 
 
 3. Arteria ccecalis 4. Arteria colica media 
 
 3. Arteria colica dextra . Ramus anastomoticus 
 
 magnus 
 
 6. The surrenal capsule arteries (art. surrenales. 
 Chauss.) come off immediately below the superior me- 
 senteric artery on either side, and are distributed to the 
 supra renal capsules. They give off branches to the 
 spleen and liver. 
 
 7- The renal arteries (art. renales. Chauss.) vary in 
 number ; they pass outwards and backwards, nearly at 
 a right angle to the fissure of the kidney and then di* 
 
220 
 
 vide into three or four large brandies. These branches 
 form arches, from which innumerably small ramifica- 
 tions are sent off to the outer or cortical part of the 
 kidney. The left is shorter than the right, and lies 
 upon the accompanying vein. The right passes behind 
 the ascending cava, and is covered by the right renal 
 vein. They give off branches to the supra renal cap- 
 sules. 
 
 Arteriae supra renales inferiores. 
 
 4. The spermatic arteries {art. testtculaires. Chauss.) 
 Each artery arises a little below the renal ; it passes 
 downwards, across the psose muscles, over the ureter, to 
 the internal abdominal ring, and continues its course 
 along the inguinal canal, consituting a portion of the 
 spermatic cord, to the testicle. It is accompanied by a 
 vein, and by the spermatic plexus of nerves. The right 
 spermatic crosses the vena cava. It gives off in its 
 course branches to the cord, branches to the epidydimis, 
 and lastly divides into numerous ramifications which 
 perforate the tunica albriginea, and terminate partly in 
 the tubuli seminiferi and partly in the spermatic veins. 
 The spermatic arteries in the female are distributed to 
 the ovaries, uterus, and fallopian tubes; they follow a 
 tortuous course, and freely inosculate with the uterine 
 arteries. 
 
 5. The inferior mesenteric artery (art. mesenterique 
 inferieure. Chauss.) arises from the aorta, about an inch 
 and a half above its termination ; it passes downwards 
 towards the left side, behind the peritoneum, as far as 
 the brim of the pelvis. It gives off, 1st. an ascending 
 branch, which is distributed to the descending colon and 
 inosculates with the colica media artery, forming the 
 arch of Winslow, (arcus anastomoticus magnus} ; 2nd. 
 middle branches to the sigmoid flexure of the colon, and 
 an inferior branch, supplying the commencement of the 
 rectum ; 3rd. the continued trunk passes into the pelvis 
 to the back part of the rectum, under the name of su- 
 perior hsemorrhoidal artery. In its course it passes in 
 front of the brim of the pelvis, crosses the internal iliac 
 vein and artery, also the ureter, and takes its course 
 
 the m&so~rectum* It gives off branches to the 
 
rectum, and freely anastomoses with the middle and in- 
 ferior haemorrhoidal arteries. 
 
 1. Ramus anastomoticus si- 3. Arteria haemorrhbidalis 
 
 nister superior 
 
 2. Arteriae colicae sinistrae 
 
 8. The lumbar arteries (art. lombaires. Chauss.) are 
 four or five pairs ; they arise from the sides and back 
 part of the aorta,, pass outwards between the vertebrae 
 and psoae and quadrat! lumborum muscles, and divide 
 into two sets of branches : the posterior, which are the 
 smallest, are distributed to the muscles occupying the 
 vertebral grooves, and to the medulla spinalis ; the an- 
 terior branches supply the muscles of the loins, the 
 transverse and oblique muscles of the abdomen, and 
 freely inosculate with the internal mammary, lower in- 
 tercostals, diaphragmatic, epigastric, and circumflex 
 arteries. 
 
 9. The middle sacral artery (art. mediane du sacrum. 
 Chauss.) arises from the angle of bifurcation of the 
 aorta; it passes directly downwards on the anterior 
 surface of the sacrum, behind the rectum, superior 
 haemorrhoidal vessels, and hypogastric plexus of nerves. 
 It is distributed to the rectum, bladder, and sacral nerves, 
 and freely inosculates with the ilio-lumbar and sacro- 
 laterales arteries. 
 
 ARTERIA ILIAC^E COMMUNES. 
 
 (Les arteres pelvi-crurales. Chauss.) 
 
 The Common Iliac Arteries result from the bifurcation 
 of the aorta, they pass downwards and outwards, and 
 opposite the sacro-iUac symphysis divide into two large 
 branches, the hypogastric, and external iliac arteries. 
 The common iliac artery of the right side is longer than 
 the left, crosses the left common iliac vein, and lies 
 upon the commencement of the vena cava ; the common 
 iliac artery of the left side, lies external and anterior te 
 its concomitant vein. 
 
 u3 
 
222 
 ARTERIA ILIACA INTERNA. 
 
 (Art. hypogastrica. Murray.) 
 (Artere pelvienne. Chauss.) 
 
 The Internal Iliac Artery passes obliquely downwards 
 into the pelvis, running directly in front of the sacro 
 iliac symphysis. It is accompanied by the internal 
 iliac vein, which is situated posteriorly, and is crossed in 
 front by the ureter, and vas deferens. It usually di- 
 vides into two principal branches, a posterior and an 
 anterior. From the posterior branch are derived 
 
 1. Arteria ilio-lumbaris 3. Arteria obturatoria 
 
 2. Arteria sacra lateralis 4. Arteria glutaea. 
 
 From the anterior division arise 
 
 5. Arteria umbilicalis 8. Arteria uterina 
 
 6. Arteriae vesicales imae 9. Arteria vaginalis 
 7 Arteria hsemorrhoidalis 10. Arteria ischiatica 
 
 media 11. Arteria pudica interna 
 
 1. The ilio lumbar artery (art. iliaco-musculairc. 
 Chauss.) passes obliquely outwards, under the pso* 
 muscles, and iliacus internus, and divides into a superior 
 and an inferior branch ; the former is distributed to the 
 psoae and quadratus lumborum muscles, and inosculates 
 with the lumbar arteries, the latter is distributed to the 
 iliacus internus muscle, os ile'i, and anastomoses with 
 the circumflexa ossis ilii. 
 
 2. The sacro-lateral artery (art. mediane du sacrum. 
 Chauss.) sometimes two or three trunks are met with, 
 descends on the anterior surface of the sacrum, over the 
 pyrifonnis muscle, and sacral nerves ; it gives off 
 branches to the rectum, sacrum, pyramidalis muscle, 
 and to the canda equina, and anastomoses with arteria 
 sacra media. 
 
 2. The obturator artery* (art. sous-pubia-femaralc. 
 
 * The obturator artery sometimes arises in common with the epigastric, it 
 runs along Gimbernat's ligament, and in crural hernia, may be placed in front 
 of the neck of the sac. In other instances it may arise from the femoral artery, 
 and ascend along the pectinalis, entering the pelvis at the crural aperture. 
 The artery iu this case is placed behind the crural hernia, It has been given 
 off from the ischiatic. 
 
223 
 
 Chauss.) passes directly forwards on the inner edge of 
 the brim of the pelvis, and runs through the opening 
 in the upper part of the obturator ligament, perforating 
 the pelvic fascia, the superior margin of the levator ani, 
 and obturator muscles. It divides into external and in- 
 ternal branches. The external branch passes between 
 the two obturator muscles, as far as the tuber ischii, is 
 distributed to the adjacent muscles; the internal branch 
 descends between the adductor brevis, and longus, to the 
 muscles on the inner part of the thigh, and anastomoses 
 with the internal circumflex, and ischiatic arteries. 
 
 4. The gluteal artery (art. fessiere. Chauss.) passes 
 downwards, outwards, and backwards, and leaves the 
 pelvis at the upper opening of the ischiatic notch, above 
 the pyriformis muscle, and rests in contact with with 
 the dorsum of the ilium ; it frequently passes between 
 the nerves, constituting the axillary plexus. It divides 
 into two branches, superficial and deep. The superficial 
 passes between the gluteus maximus, medius and pyri- 
 forin muscles, to which it gives branches. The deep 
 branch passes between the glutaeus, medius, and mini- 
 mus muscles, and divides into superior and inferior 
 branches. The superior is distributed to the glutaeus 
 medius, and minimus and dorsum of the ilium ; the in- 
 ferior to the gemini, and ilio-femoral articulation, and 
 anastomoses with the sacral, external circumflex, and 
 ascending perforating branches of the profunda femoris 
 arteries. 
 
 5. The umbilical artery (art. umbilicale. Chauss.) 
 passes forwards and inwards to the side of the bladder, 
 with which it is connected by cellular tissue ; it then 
 ascends towards the umbilicus external to the perito- 
 neum. In the adult it is generally quite impervious., 
 but for the space of one or two inches in that part of 
 the artery which remains open, three or four small 
 arteries are sent to the bladder. 
 
 6. The vesical arteries fart, vesico-prostatiquc. 
 Chauss.) are small branches, irregular in their origin, 
 sent to the vesiculae seminales, prostate gland, fundus, 
 and neck of the bladder. 
 
 7- The middle hcemorrhoidal artery (art. hcemorrhoi- 
 dale moyenne. Chauss.) passes along the anterior surface 
 of the rectum as far as the sphincter ani, and is distri- 
 
224 
 
 buted to the rectum, anastomosing with the superior 
 and inferior haemorrhoidal arteries. 
 
 &, The uterine artery (art. uterine. Chauss.) passes 
 between the laminae of the broad ligaments to the pos- 
 terior surface of the uterus, anastomosing with the 
 spermatic arteries. During gestation this vessel be- 
 comes greatly enlarged, and its branches on the inner 
 surface of the uterus have a very peculiar tortuous 
 course. 
 
 9. The vaginal artery (art. vaginale. Chauss.) passes 
 forwards along the anterior and lateral parts of the 
 vagina, towards the paerineum ; it is distributed to the 
 bladder, vagina and external parts of generation. 
 
 10. The ischiatic artery (art.fernoro-poplitee. Chauss.) 
 leaves the pelvis at the lower margin of the pyriformis 
 muscle, through the lower part of the sciatic notch, 
 above the lesser sciatic ligament, in front of the great 
 sciatic ligament, in front of the great sciatic nerve ; 
 before leaving the pelvis, it sends branches to the rec- 
 tum, bladder, and obturator internus muscle ; it then 
 gives off branches to the tuberosity of the ischium, one 
 in particular accompanies the great sciatic nerve, be- 
 tween the great trochanter of the os femoris, and tube- 
 rosity of the ischium, anastomosing with the femoral 
 and circumflex arteries ; 2nd. the coccygeal branch 
 which runs along the posterior sacro-sciatic ligament, 
 to the coccygeus, and levator ani muscles, anastomosing 
 with the pudic and hsemorrhoidal arteries ; lastly, mus- 
 cular branches to the glutosi, small rotators, and flexor 
 muscles of the leg. 
 
 1. Arteria comes ischiadici 2. Arteria coccygea. 
 3. Rami musculaires. 
 
 11. The internal pudic artery (ait. sous-pelviennc. 
 Chauss.) leaves the pelvis at the upper opening of the 
 great sciatic notch, between the pyramidalis, and poste- 
 rior border of the levator ani muscles ; it re-enters the 
 pelvis, by passing between the sacro-sciatic ligaments, 
 and continues its course on the inner border of the tu- 
 berosity of the ischium, between the levator ani, and 
 obturator internus muscles, bound down by the obtu- 
 rator fascia. At the superior part of the tuberosity of 
 
225 
 
 the ischium, on the edge of the origin of the transver- 
 salis muscle, it divides into two branches, the inferior 
 or perinatal, and into the superior or superficial. It is 
 accompanied by the pudic veins and nerves. It 1st. 
 gives off small branches to the bladder, vesiculaB 
 se'minales, and glutaei muscles : 2nd. the inferior hce- 
 morrhoidal, distributed to the rectum, anastomosing 
 with the superior, and middle haemorrhoidal vessels : 
 3rd. the pcerineal artery which first passes downwards, 
 and perforates the obturator fascia, it then turns up- 
 wards and forwards, between the integuments and 
 transversalis perinaei muscles to the triangular space 
 between the crus penis and the urethra, accompa- 
 nied by twigs of the pudic nerve. It gives off small 
 branches to the integuments, muscles of the perinae- 
 um and scrotum. It usually sends off a transverse 
 branch, which runs along the transversalis paerinei 
 muscle, anterior to the anus, posterior to the bulb of 
 the urethra ; and is distributed to the muscles and inte- 
 guments of the perinseum. 4th. The superior branch 
 ascends along the ramus of the ischium and pubis, be- 
 neath the erector penis, to the triangular space formed 
 by the union of the crura of the penis in front of the 
 symphysis pubis. It then divides into two branches, 
 deep and superficial. In its course it gives off, 1st. the 
 artery of the bulb, which runs forwards and inwards, 
 above the transversus perinaei muscles as far as the bulb 
 of the urethra, where it divides into branches distri- 
 buted to the bulb, corpus spongiosum, and glans penis ; 
 2nd. the superficial artery which passes through the sus- 
 pensory ligament of the penis, and continues its course 
 along the dorsum of the penis to the corona glandis ; it 
 is accompanied by the dorsal veins, and small branches 
 of nerves, and is distributed to the integuments of the 
 penis ; 3rd. the deep branch, which penetrates the cura 
 of the penis, and divides into numerous branches, dis, 
 tributed to the corpora cavernosa, urethra, and glans 
 penis. It anastomoses freely with the artery of the 
 opposite side, through the septum pectiniforme penis,. 
 
226 
 
 1. Kami musculares 4. Ramus superior et vel 
 
 2. Arteria hremorrhoidalis profundus 
 
 inferior 1. Arteria corporis bulbosi 
 
 3. Arteria paerinea 2. Arteria dorsalis penis, 
 Ramus transversus peri- vel superficialis 
 
 naei 3. Arteria profunda penis 
 
 ARTERIA ILIACA EXTERNA. 
 
 (Portion iliaque de la crurale. Chauss.) 
 
 The External Iliac Artery extends from the bifurcation 
 of the common iliac artery to the crural arch, passes 
 downwards, and a little outwards on the inner border 
 of the psoas magnus muscle, in front of the brim of 
 the pelvis j it is covered by an expansion of the iliac 
 fascia. The external iliac vein is on the inner side and 
 behind the artery ; the anterior cural nerve is to the 
 outer side, and separated from the artery by the psoas 
 magnus muscle, covered by the iliac fascia. It gives off 
 two branches: 
 
 1. Arteria epigastrica 2. Arteria circumflexa ili 
 
 1. The epigastric artery {art. sus-pubienne. Chauss.) 
 usually arises from the external iliac, about half-an-inch 
 above Poupart's ligament ; in some subjects it has been 
 found to arise immediately behind Poupart's ligament ; 
 and in other cases, about an inch above the crural arch, 
 it passes upwards and inwards behind the spermatic 
 cord, on the inner side of the internal ring, between 
 the fascia transversalis and peritoneum, to the external 
 margin of the rectus muscle, and continues its course 
 first along the outer margin of this muscle ; midway 
 between the umbilicus and pubis it passes behind the 
 rectus muscle and perforates its sheath, passes between 
 its fibres towards the umbilicus, and divides into nume- 
 rous branches, freely anastomosing with the internal 
 mammary and lower intercostals. It is usually accom- 
 panied by two veins. It gives off in its course small 
 branches to the cremaster muscle, and to the spermatic 
 
227 
 
 cord, anastomosing with the spermatic arteries, and 
 with the superficial epigastric from the femoral artery. 
 
 2. The circumflex iliac artery (art. Filium circom- 
 flexe) it arises from the anterior and external margin of 
 the external iliac artery, runs outwards along the in- 
 ternal edge of the crural arch, to the anterior superior 
 spinous process of the ilium, and then continues its 
 course on the inner side of the crest of the ilium, be- 
 tween the internal, oblique, and transverse muscles of 
 the abdomen. It divides into branches supplying the 
 abdominal muscles, psoas magnus, iliacus internus, and 
 inguinal lymphatic glands. It inosculates freely with 
 the lumbar, ilio-lumbar, internal mammary, and inferior 
 intercostal arteries. 
 
 ARTERIA FEMORALIS. 
 
 (Portio femorale de la crurale. Chauss.) 
 
 External Iliac Artery having passed beneath Poupart's 
 ligament, receives the name of femoral. It first passes 
 downwards in front of the thigh, then downwards and 
 inwards, lastly at the junction of the middle and lower 
 third of the thigh, it winds obliquely backwards, 
 through a tendinous opening between the adductor 
 magnus, and vastus internus muscles, when it takes the 
 name of popliteal artery. At the superior third of the 
 thigh we find it situated in the centre of a triangular 
 space, bounded above by the crural arch, on the outer 
 side by the Sartorius, on the inner side by the adductor 
 longus, and gracilis muscles. Anteriorly it is covered by 
 the integuments, superficial fascia, lymphatic glands, 
 and fascia lata, enclosed in a sheath formed in front by 
 the fascia transversalis ; posteriorly by the fascia iliaca ; 
 it lies upon the psoas magnus, crosses the insertion of 
 the pectinalis, and adductor brevis muscles, separated 
 from them by adipose cellular tissue ; the femoral vein 
 is placed on the inner side, within the same sheath, but 
 separated by a distinct septum ; on the outer side the 
 anterior crural nerve is situated, lying between the 
 psoas magnus, and iliacus internus muscles. The femo- 
 
228 
 
 ral artery (the superficial femoral) in the middle third 
 of its course, is covered anteriorly and superiorly, by the 
 sartorius, arid by a strong tendinous fascia, connecting 
 the vastus internus to the tendons of the adductor lori- 
 gus and magnus ; posteriorly it lies between the adduc- 
 tor longus, and vastus internus muscles, on the inner 
 side of the os femoris, separated from the bone by the 
 last muscle; the femoral vein is placed behind the artery, 
 the nervus saphenus lies on the anterior and external 
 part of the femoral sheath, sometimes within its layers. 
 When the femoral artery passes backwards, this nerve 
 leaves the vessel and continues its course down the in- 
 xSide of the thigh, behind the inner condyle, covered by 
 the sartorius muscle. It gives off 
 
 1. Arterire pudendae ex- 4. Arteria profunda femo- 
 
 ternae ris 
 
 2. Arteria circumflexa su- 5. Rami musculaires 
 
 percialis 6. Rami perforantes 
 
 3. Arteria epigastrica su- . Ramus anastomoticus 
 
 perficialis magnus. 
 
 3 . The external pudics {art. scrotales. Chauss.) pass 
 inwards over the heads of the pectineus, and gracilis 
 muscles, and give off branches to the inguinal glands, and 
 scrotum in the male, to the labia pudendi in the female, 
 and they anastomose with the obturator, and spermatic 
 arteries. In cases of old scrotal hernia, these branches 
 sometimes attain a large size. 
 
 2. The superficial epigastric artery {art. inguinale. 
 Chauss.) arises from the front of the femoral artery, 
 about half an inch below Poupart's ligament ; it perfo- 
 rates the fascia lata, and ascends over the crural arch, 
 between the layers of the superficial fascia, towards the 
 umbilicus. It is distributed to the integuments, and 
 inguinal glands, and anastomoses with the inferior epi- 
 gastric and mammary arteries. 
 
 2. The superficial circumflex artery (art. inguinale. 
 Chauss.) runs outwards beneath the integument, over 
 the lower margin of the crural arch, to the spine of the 
 ilium ; it divides into small branches distributed to the 
 skin, anastomosing with the deep circumflex, external 
 circumflex, and gluteal arteries; 
 
229 
 
 4. The deep femoral artery (art. grand musculaire 
 de la cuisse. Chauss.) arises from the back part of the 
 femoral, between the pubes and trochanter minor; it 
 runs down behind the femoral artery, in front of the 
 triceps. It gives off, 
 
 1. Arteria circumflexa ex- 2. Arteria circumflexa in- 
 terna terna 
 
 3. Kami magni profundae perforantes. 
 
 1. The external circumflex artery (art. sous-trochan- 
 terienne. Chauss.) winds outwards under the sartorius 
 and rectus muscles, towards the root of the great tro- 
 chanter ; it divides into three sets of branches, ascend- 
 ing branches, which pass upwards under the sartorius, 
 tensor vaginae femoris, and glutaei muscles, anastomosing 
 with the gluteal, and internal iliac circumflex arteries ; 
 transverse branches, continued outwards and backwards, 
 beneath the trochanter major, anastomosing with the 
 gluteal, ischiatic, and obturator arteries ; lastly, descend- 
 ing branches, passing downwards, beneath the rectus, 
 on.', in particular, usually passes downwards, on the 
 inside of the vastus internus, and communicates with 
 the superior articular artery of the knee. 
 
 2. 7 he internal circumflex artery (art. sous-trochan- 
 tinienne Chauss ) passes backwards, between the pecti- 
 nalis, psoas magnus, and iliacus internus muscles, into 
 the space between the greater and lesser trochanters. 
 It divides into two branches, a superior and an inferior, 
 or transverse The superior sub-divides into two 
 branches, an external (arieria acetabuli) to the aceta- 
 bulum and obturator externus muscle, and inosculates 
 with the obturator artery ; the inferior, or transverse, 
 winds backwards, around the neck of the os femoris, it 
 gives branches to the adductors, small rotators, (rami 
 trochanterici superiores ct inferiores) and to the origins 
 of the flexors of the leg, and anastomoses with the 
 external circumflex, gluteal, ischiatic, and inferior 
 ha?morrhoidal arteries. Independent of the anastomosis 
 which takes place between the two circumflex arteries, 
 at the posterior part of the os femoris, they communi- 
 cate with each other anteriorly, by a transverse branch, 
 thus forming a complete arterial circle. 
 x 
 
230 
 
 3. The perforating branches (art. femoro poplitees, 
 Chauss.) are four in number. The first perforating 
 artery arises below the trochanter minor, and after 
 having passed through the adductor muscle, divides 
 into a superior and an inferior branch ; the former 
 branch passes upwards, towards the great trochanter, 
 and may be traced into the glutaeus maximus ; the latter 
 branch winds outwards, and is distributed to the vastus 
 externus ; it gives off a small branch to the os fenioris. 
 The second perforating artery passes through the apo~ 
 neurosis of the second and third adductors to the back 
 part of the thigh, it then divides into ascending and 
 descending branches. This artery gives off a large 
 branch, joined by one from the superficial femoral, the 
 nutritious artery of the bone, it penetrates the nutritious 
 canal between the first and third adductors. The third 
 perforating artery passes over the short head of the 
 biceps, to the flexor muscles. The fourth perforating 
 branch may be considered the continued trunk, it per- 
 forates the adductor inagnus, and descends along the 
 posterior part of the thigh, supplying the popliteal 
 space. These arteries anastomose*wit}i the circumflex, 
 glutasal, ischiatic, femoral, and popliteal vessels, and also 
 with each other. 
 
 5. Small muscular branches of the superficial femoral 
 artery are given off from the femoral artery on either 
 side to the adjacent muscle, one in particular assists in 
 forming the nutritious artery 
 
 6. The perforating branches of the superficial femoral 
 artery, are two in number, distributed to the biceps, 
 and vastus externus muscles, and freely anastomose 
 with the branches from the deep femoral. 
 
 The large anastomosing branch comes off from the 
 femoral artery, where it is about to perforate the tendon 
 of the triceps, runs down between the fibres of the vas- 
 tus internus muscle, and is distributed to the inner side 
 of the femoro-tibial articulation, inosculating with the 
 superior and inferior articular branches, and with the 
 recurrent tibial artery. 
 

 231 
 ARTERIA POPLITEA. 
 
 (Portion poplitee de la crurale.) 
 
 The Femoral Artery having passed through the ten- 
 don of the triceps., takes the name of popliteal ; it runs 
 directly down behind the femoro-tibial articulation ; on 
 the back part of the poplitaeus muscle it divides into 
 two branches. It lies on the flat part of the os femoris, 
 and is covered by the corresponding vein, and the sci- 
 atic nerve, protected by a quantity of fat and cellular 
 tissue. It is placed between the biceps,, outer condyle, 
 external head of the gastrocnemius, origin of the plant- 
 aris, and poplitapus muscles on its outer side; semi- 
 membranus, semi-tendinosus, inner condyle inner head 
 of the gastrocnemius muscle, on the inner side, It gives 
 off the following branches. 
 
 1. Arteria articularis su- 4. and 5. Rami ad gas- 
 
 perior interna trocnemius 
 
 2. Arteria articularis su- 6. Arteria articularis in- 
 
 perior externa ferior externa 
 
 3. Arteria articularis me- 7 Arteria articularis in- 
 
 dia ferior interna 
 
 1. The internal superior articular winds inwards, 
 under the tendon of the adductor magnus, above the 
 inner condyle, and anastomoses with the external arti- 
 cular, internal articular inferior, and ramus anastomo- 
 tuus magnus. These arteries form, with those of the 
 opposite side, a net-work of blood-vessels which cover 
 the patella ; a small branch passes on the edge of the 
 internal semilunar cartilage, and enters the cavity of 
 the knee-joint. 
 
 2. The external superior articular passes outwards 
 above the outer condyle, beneath the biceps, is distri- 
 buted to the outer part of the joint, and communicates 
 with the superior internal artery. 
 
 3. The middle articular is situated between the con- 
 dyles, sub-divides into numerous small branches, which 
 are distributed to the capsular and crucial ligaments. 
 
 4 and 5. The arteries of the gastrocnemii arise from 
 the posterior and lateral parts of the popliteal artery, 
 
232 
 
 and descend obliquely into the substance of the gastroc- 
 nemii muscles, and may be traced to the common tendon 
 of these muscles. 
 
 6. The inferior external articular winds outwards 
 between the poplitseus and gastrocnemius muscles ; 
 beneath the tendon of the biceps and external lateral 
 ligament ; above the head of the fibula ; along the 
 external margin of the semilunar cartilage. 
 
 7 The inferior internal articular winds inwards 
 around the head of the tibia ; beneath the gastrocne- 
 mius muscle, internal lateral ligament, and tendinous 
 aponeurosis from the flexor tendons. These arteries 
 are distributed to the femoro-tibial articulation, and 
 freely anastomose with the surales and superior arteries. 
 The popliteal artery, on the inferior margin of the po- 
 plitaeus muscle, divides into anterior and posterior tibia! 
 arteries. 
 
 ARTERIA TIBIALIS ANTICA 
 
 (Art. tibiale anterieure. Chauss.) 
 
 The Anterior Tibial Artery arising from the termi- 
 nation of the popliteal, passes forwards through the 
 upper opening of the interosseous ligament, and reaches 
 the fore part of the leg ; it then descends obliquely 
 downwards, first in front of the interosseous ligament, 
 then on the lower and fore part of the tibia, passes over 
 the tibio-tarsal articulation, over the superior surface of 
 the astragalus, navicular and internal cuneiform bones, 
 to the space between the first and second metatarsal 
 bones, where it divides into two branches. It runs 
 down first between the tibialis anticus and extensor long- 
 us digitorum pedis ; is then situated between the tibialis 
 anticus and extensor proprius pollicis ; at the lower part 
 of its course, it is continued behind the tendon of the 
 latter muscle ; on the dorsum of the foot it is placed on 
 the outer margin of the same tendon. At the upper part 
 of its course it is deeply situated ; at the inferior third, 
 covered only by the integuments, fasia and annular 
 ligament. It is accompanied by two venae comites, and 
 
233 
 
 by the deep branch of the fibular nerve which lies upon 
 the artery. The following branches are given off: 
 
 1. Arteria recurrens 4. Arteria metatarsea 
 
 2. Kami malleolares 5. Ramus anastomoticus 
 
 3. Arteria tarsea 6. Arteria pollicis pedis 
 
 1. The recurrent tibial artery (art. recurrente du 
 genouil. Chauss.) passes upwards between the fibres of 
 the tibialis anticus, and pierces the fascia of the leg ; it 
 is distributed to the anterior part of the femoro-tibial 
 articulation, and freely anastomoses with the branches 
 from the popliteal artery. 
 
 2. Malleolar branches are divided into external and 
 internal j they ramify on the outer and inner side of 
 the ancle joint, and communicate with branches from 
 the posterior tibial. 
 
 3 and 4. The tarsal and metatarsal arteries bend 
 beneath the extensor brevis, towards the outer border of 
 the foot, forming an arch (arcus dorsalis tarseus), and 
 anastomose with the external mallelar, external plantar, 
 and peroneal arteries. The dorsal arch gives ofi^ from 
 its convexity, three interosseal arteries ; they pass for- 
 wards in the second, third, and fourth interosseous 
 spaces ; each artery then divides into two branches. 
 These arteries supply the outer side of the second toe, 
 both sides of the third and fourth toes, and the inner 
 side of the little toe ; they also send off perforating 
 branches, which dip down between the interosseal 
 spaces, and communicate with the plantar arch. 
 
 5 and 6. The two arteries, formed by the division of 
 the anterior tibial in the space between the first and 
 second metatarsal bones, are, 1st, the anastomosing 
 branch, which passes into the sole of the foot, through 
 the interosseous space, and joins the external plantar 
 arch : 2nd, the artery of the great toe ; it passes for- 
 wards as far as the head of the metatarsal bone of the 
 great toe, and then divides into two branches owe 
 supplies the external border of the great toe, the other 
 the inner border of the second toe. 
 
 The anterior tibial artery, in its course on either side, 
 gives off small branches to the adjacent muscles. 
 
 x3 
 
234 
 ARTERIA TIBIALLS POSTICA. 
 
 (Art. tibiale posterieure. Chauss.) 
 
 The posterior Tibial Artery descends in an oblique 
 direction from the edge of the popliteus muscle to the 
 fossa between the os calcis, and internal maleolus, on 
 the outer side of the flexor longus digitorum pedis. It 
 is covered by a dense fascia, by the gastrocnemii muscles. 
 In the lower half of the leg it is more superficial, lying 
 between the tendo Achilles and tibia; lastly, where 
 passing behind the inner maleolus, the tendons of the 
 flexor longus digitorum pedis and tibialis posticus are in 
 front, the tendon of the flexor longus pollicis behind. 
 It is accompanied by two venae comites, and by the pos- 
 terior tibial nerve, which is placed on its outer side. 
 When the posterior tibial has arrived at the arch of the 
 calcaneum, it divides into external and internal plantar 
 arteries. The following are the branches given off: 
 
 1. Arteria nutritia tibia 4. Rami musculairies 
 
 2. Arteria peronea 5. and 6. Arteriae plantares 
 
 1. The nutritious artery of the tibia passes into the 
 opening at the back part of the tibia, and is distributed 
 to the bone. 
 
 2. The peroneal artery runs down the leg, along the 
 internal margin of the fibula, between that bone and 
 the flexor longus pollicis muscle ; it passes at the upper 
 part of its course between the fibres of the tibialis 
 posticus. It is accompanied by two vena? comites, and 
 by the fibular nerve. In its course it gives off mus- 
 cular branches, anastomosing with branches from the 
 antersor tibial ; the nutritious artery of the fibula, which 
 is distributed to that bone ; lastly, about the inferior 
 third of the leg, it divides into anterior and posterior 
 fibular arteries. The anterior fibular passes forwards 
 through the lower opening of the interosseous ligament, 
 and descending between the tibia and fibula, is distri- 
 buted to the tibio-tarsal articulation, freely anastomos- 
 ing with the tarsal and metatarsal branches of the ante- 
 rior tibial. 
 
 The posterior fibular continues its course downwards, 
 behind the external malleolus, to the outer and back 
 
235 
 
 part of the fbot, and anastomoses with the external 
 niolleolar, and external plantar arteries. Three mus- 
 cular branches are given off on either side to the great 
 flexors. 
 
 5. The internal plantar artery is the smallest ; it ad- 
 vances on the inner margin of the foot, between the 
 abductor and flexor brevis pollicis muscles ; it passes 
 under the tendon of the flexor longus pollicis, and 
 anastomoses with the plantar arch, and gives off a 
 branch which supplies the outer side of the great toe, 
 and inner side of the second toe. 
 
 6. The external plantar artery pursues a tortuous 
 course across the sole of the foot, over the metatarsal 
 bones, between the flexor brevis and flexor accessories, 
 and forms an arch (the plantar arch), the convexity of 
 which is directed forwards. It gives off four sets of 
 branches, viz. superior or perforating branches, passing 
 upwards through the interosseous spaces, and anastomo- 
 sing with the descending branches of the metatarsal 
 artery ; inferior and posterior branches, distributed to 
 the interossei, and lumbricales muscles ; lastly, from the 
 convexity of the arch, the anterior branches come off; 
 these vary in number ; they pass forwards between the 
 interosseus spaces, above the transversalis pedis muscle, 
 and divide into branches supplying the three outer toes,, 
 and the outer side of the fourth toe. 
 
 OF THE PULMONARY ARTERY. 
 
 The pulmonary artery arises from the upper and left 
 part of the right ventricle; it passes obliquely upwards, 
 crossing the origin of the aorta as far as its arch, and 
 opposite the second dorsal vertebra it divides into two 
 trunks, one for each lung The right pulmonary branch 
 bends towards the right side, behind the ascending tho- 
 racic aorta, behind the vena cava descendens to the 
 right lung, anteriorly to the right bronchium ; it di- 
 vides into three branches, one for each lobe of the lung. 
 The left pulmonary artery passes to the left side, in 
 front of the descending thoracic aorta, anteriorly to the 
 left bronchium, and dividej into two branches. In the- 
 
236 
 
 substance of the lungs, these vessels divide into innu- 
 merable ramifications, and form a complete net work 
 over the surface of the air cells, and at length termi- 
 nate in the pulmonary veins. The pulmonary artery 
 offers the following peculiarities: it possesses valves 
 at its commencement,, its coats are weaker than arteries 
 in general, and are observed to be collapsed in a state 
 of vacuity, and it circulates venous blood. 
 
 PULMONARY VEINS. 
 
 The pulmonary veins commence from the minute 
 terminations of the pulmonary arteries, and at length 
 centre in four trunks two from each lung. The right 
 pulmonary veins pass towards the left side, behind the 
 right auricle and descending vena cava, and terminate 
 in the under part of the left auricle. The left pulmo- 
 nary veins pass towards the right side, and also termi- 
 nate in the under part of the left auricle. These ves- 
 sels are placed beneath the bronchia, and offer the 
 following peculiarities . their coats are stronger than 
 veins in general, they possess no valves, lastly they 
 convey to the left side of the heart arterialized blood. 
 
 OF THE VENOUS SYSTEM. 
 
 By the term veins, we understand those vessels 
 whose function it is to carry back to the heart the blood 
 which the arteries have sent to all the organs, after 
 giving off the varied secretions. The commencement 
 of the veins is from the extreme ramifications of arte- 
 ries, they are continuous, and perpetuate the motion of 
 the blood in that course termed the circulation. The 
 termination of arteries and commencement of the veins 
 are so minute, that the vessels are called the capillary 
 
237 
 
 tubes; and some physiologists consider them as an 
 intermediate system between the arteries and veins, in 
 which the blood, entirely out of the influence of the 
 action of the hear!:, flows slowly with an oceillatory and 
 sometimes retrograde motion. The venous system is 
 not so simple as that of the arteries ; there are several 
 large trunks, the two vena cava, the trunks of the veins 
 of the body, the pulmonary veins which convey the 
 blood from the heart to the lungs, and the vena portae 
 which collects the blood from the intestines and conveys 
 it to the liver. The veins are much more numerous 
 than the arteries themselves, more capacious, and dilate 
 more readily, and are divided into two systems, the deep 
 and subcutaneous. The subcutaneous division is very 
 remarkable in the extremities, where it displays con- 
 siderable branches : the deep always accompanies the 
 arteries. The organization of the veins is nearly the 
 same throughout the whole system. First, the cellular 
 coat resembles that of the arteries, but is much less 
 dense and firm ; underneath this may be detected longi- 
 tudinal fibres, parallel and forming a very thin layer ; 
 whether these are muscular or not is a matter of doubt ; 
 lastly, the common lining membrane, essentially differ- 
 ing from that lining the arteries ; in the first place it 
 admits of great extension and is not easily lacerated ; 
 if a vein be tied it will not break ; it is much thinner, 
 and never found ossified in the aged subject. This 
 membrane is remarkable for the numerous folds which 
 it forms within the vessels, the valves of veins ; these, 
 in falling in, completely close the canal of the vessels. 
 There are, however, no valves in the veins of the brain, 
 medulla spinalis, vena portie, veme cavae, in the veins 
 of the uterus, and abdominal viscera ; they are indis- 
 tinct in the vena azygos and veins of the head and 
 neck ; numerous and strong in the veins of the extre- 
 mities. Veins in general are loose and soft, and do not 
 possess much elasticity ; their coats are collapsed in the 
 state of vacuity ; they cannot be elongated, but may be 
 extended in the transverse direction, which takes place 
 to a great size in varicose dilations. The coats of veins 
 are minutely supplied with arteries and veins, and also 
 with nervous filaments, principally derived from the 
 ganglionic system. 
 
238 
 OF THE VEINS IN PARTICULAR. 
 
 The blood is returned from the interior of the crani- 
 um, by the two internal jugular veins ; they commence 
 from the termination of the lateral sinuses, at the 
 fossae jugulares, by a dilitation called the sinuses of the 
 jugular veins, and pass down the neck on the outer side 
 of the internal carotid artery, on the outside of the 
 common carotid, and terminate in the subclavian veins, 
 just behind the clavicles. They receive the blood from 
 the sinuses of the brain ; by this term is understood the 
 venous canals, formed externally of the laminae of the 
 dura mater, and lined internally by a smooth and po- 
 lished membrane, continous with the lining membrane 
 of the veins. These sinuses are of triangular shape, 
 and present numerous transverse bands, which appear 
 to be rudimentary valves. 
 
 Sinuses of the Brain. 
 
 Superior longitudinal sinus Cavernous sinuses 
 
 Two lateral sinuses Superior petrous sinuses 
 
 Straight sinus Inferior petrous sinuses 
 
 Inferior longitudinal sinus Transverse sinus of os 
 Circular sinus of Ridley sphenoideum 
 
 Posterior occipital sinus Transverse sinus of the os 
 Anterior occipital sinus occipitis. 
 
 VEINS OF THE BRAIN. 
 
 Superior cerebral veins, which terminate in the supe- 
 rior longitudinal sinus. 
 
 Lateral and inferior cerebral veins, which terminate 
 in the lateral sinuses. 
 
 Anterior cerebral veins, which terminate in the supe- 
 rior petrous sinuses. 
 
 Fence galeni, which terminate in the straight sinus. 
 
 Superior ccrebellar veins, which terminate in the 
 straight sinus. 
 
 Inferior cerebellar veins, which terminate in the la- 
 teral sinuses. 
 

 239 
 
 Opthalmic veins, which terminate in the cavernous 
 sinuses. 
 
 The opthalmic veins receive the central vein of the 
 retina, the anterior and posterior cethmoidal, lacryrtal> 
 ciliary, muscular and frontal veins. 
 
 In the neck the internal jugular vein receives 
 
 Facial veins Pharyngeal veins 
 
 Deep occipital veins Superior thyroideal veins 
 
 Lingual veins Laryngeal veins. 
 
 OF THE VEINS WHICH CONCUR TO FOR.M 
 THE FACIAL VEINS. 
 
 The anterior facial vein extends from the inner can- 
 thus of the eye, to the inferior margin of the inferior 
 maxilla, it is placed in front of the masseter, behind the 
 facial artery ; it unites below the angle of the jaw with 
 the posterior facial vein, and forms a short trunk which 
 terminates in the internal jugnlar. The branches it 
 receives correspond with the distribution of the facial 
 artery. The posterior facial vein is placed in front of 
 the ear, within the substance of the parotid gland, su- 
 perficial to the external carotid artery, its branches cor- 
 respond partly with those given off from that vessel. 
 
 VEINS WHICH CONCUR IN FORMING THE 
 EXTERNAL JUGULAR VEIN. 
 
 The external Jugular Vein is formed by the internal 
 maxillary, and by branches from the temporal and su- 
 perficial occipital veins, below the angle of the jaw ; it 
 runs obliquely downwards and outwards, situated at its 
 commencement on the inner side of the sterno-mastoid 
 muscle ; it then crosses that muscle, and passes down 
 on its outer margin, under the omo-hyoideus muscle, 
 and terminates in the sub-clavian vein, behind the cla- 
 vicle. It receives the cutaneous cervical veins. 
 
240 
 VEINS OF THE UPPER EXTREMITIES. 
 
 The veins of the superior extremities are divided into 
 two classes, superficial and deep ; the distribution of 
 the latter, corresponds with that of the arteries ; veins 
 accompany the radial ulnar, brachial, and axillary arte- 
 ries and their branches. The superficial are the cepha- 
 lic, median, and basilic veins. 
 
 The cephalic vein commences at the root of the 
 thumb, from the junction of several dorsal veins of the 
 hand, runs upwards on the radial side of the fore-arm, 
 then on the outer margin of the biceps, and lastly it 
 bends forward between the pectoralis major, and deltoid 
 muscles, and joins the axillary vein. In its course it 
 receives numerous subcutaneous branches, at the bend 
 of the arm it is joined by the median cephalic vein. 
 
 The basilic vein commences at the little finger, from 
 a small vein called the vena salvatella ; it runs superfi- 
 cially along the ulnar side of the fore-arm, then on the 
 inner side of the fore-arm, in company with the bra- 
 chial vessels, and enters the axilla, where it forms the 
 axillary vein, it receives numerous branches in its course, 
 and at at the bend of the arm it is joined by the median 
 basilic vein. 
 
 The long median vein is situated in the middle of the 
 fore-arm, and runs between the cephalic and the basilic 
 veins, at the bend of the elbow it divides into two 
 branches, one forms the cephalic, the mediun cephalic, 
 the other joins the basilic, the median basilic vein. 
 
 The axillary vein having passed beneath the clavicle, 
 takes the name of subclavian, this passes inwards, over 
 the scalenus anticus, and enters the chest. The sub- 
 clavian vein on the left side crosses the arteries arising 
 from the arch of the aorta, and opposite the cartilage of 
 the first rib, uniting with its fellow, forms the vena 
 cava superior. 
 
 Into the subclavian veins are emptied 
 
 External jugular vein Thymic vein 
 
 Vertebral vein Internal mammary vein 
 
 Internal jugular vein Inferior thyroideal vein 
 
 Mediastinal vein Superior intercc s al vein 
 
 I'ericardiac vein Thoracic duct. 
 
241 
 
 The superior Vena Cava passes down on the right 
 side of the ascending thoracic aorta, and terminates in 
 the upper and back part of the right auricle, before it 
 enters that cavity of the heart, it receives the vena 
 azygos. 
 
 THE VENA AZYGOS. 
 
 The Vena Azygos usually commences by two or three 
 branches of communication, with the upper left lumbar 
 veins, these branches enter the chest, either between the 
 crura of the diaphragm, or passing between the fibres 
 of that muscle, it returns the blood from the 
 
 Right bronchial veins Right intercostal veins 
 Dorsal vertebral veins Lower left intercostal veins 
 Right aesophageal veins Superior diaphragmic veins 
 
 The Vena Azygos passes upwards, within the poste- 
 rior mediastinum, on the right side of the descending 
 thoracic aorta, having ascended as high as the third 
 dorsal vertebrae, it passes forwards from the spine, and 
 terminates in the descending cava, where that vessel 
 passes behind the pericardium. The upper left inter- 
 costal veins which do not terminate in the vena azygos, 
 unite with the left brochial, left aesophageal, and form 
 one common trunk, which terminates in the left subcla- 
 vian vein. The common trunk has been called the left 
 vena azygos, but is more frequently described as the 
 left bronchial vein. 
 
 VEINS OF THE LOWER EXTREMITY. 
 
 The anterior Tibial, posterior Tibial, andjibular Ar- 
 teries are each accompanied by veins, which terminate 
 in the popliteal vein, this accompanies the popliteal ar- 
 tery, perforates with it the tendon of the triceps, where 
 it takes the name of femoral vein. The femoral vein 
 runs first behind, then on the inner margin of the ferno- 
 
 Y 
 
242 
 
 ral artery, having passed under Poupart's ligament, it 
 constitutes the external iliac vein. The popliteal and 
 femoral veins receive branches corresponding to the dis- 
 tribution of the popliteal and femoral arteries. 
 
 The superficial Veins are the vena saphena major 
 and minor. 
 
 The saphena major Vein commences by small branches 
 on the inner side of the foot, these unite and form a 
 trunk behind the inner malleolus ; it ascends obliquely 
 backwards, along the inner part of the leg, and passes 
 behind the internal condyle of the femur. It continues 
 its course along the inner part of the thigh, and termi- 
 nates in the femoral vein, below Poupart's ligament. 
 It receives in its course cutaneous branches, at the upper 
 part of the thigh it is joined by the external pudic, ex- 
 ternal epigastric, and external circumflex veins. 
 
 The saphena minor Vein commences by several 
 branches upon the back of the foot ; behind the external 
 malleolus, they unite and form a single trunk ; it as- 
 cends obliquely upwards, on the outer side of the leg, 
 and terminates in the popliteal vein. 
 
 EXTERNAL ILIAC VEIN, 
 
 The femoral Vein having passed under Poupart's li- 
 gament, takes the name of external iliac vein, it as- 
 cends as high as the sacro-iliac symphysis, where, uniting 
 with the internal iliac vein, it forms the common iliac 
 trunk. It receives the epigastric and circumflex iliac 
 veins, and also a considerable branch from the spermatic 
 cord. The external iliac veins are placed beneath, and 
 internally to the artery of the same name. The right 
 external iliac passes behind the bifurcation of the right 
 common iliac artery, at this point it unites with the in- 
 ternal iliac vein. The left external iliac goes behind 
 the left internal iliac artery, and here uniting with the 
 left internal iliac vein, forms the left common iliac. 
 
243 
 
 COMMON ILIAC VEINS. 
 
 The common Iliac Veins result from the union of the 
 external and internal iliac veins,, the right common iliac 
 vein is behind,, and to the outer side of its artery, the 
 left common iliac vein is on the inner side of its artery, 
 it passes before the last lumbar vertebra, behind the 
 right common iliac artery, to form the ascending cava. 
 The internal iliac veins receive the 
 
 External haemorrhoidal Dorsal veins of the penis 
 
 veins Dorsal veins of the clitoris 
 
 Hypogastric veins in the female 
 
 VENA CAVA INFERIOR. 
 
 The inferior or ascending Vena Cava is formed on the 
 last lumbar vertebrae by the union of the two common 
 iliac veins ; it ascends on the right side of the bodies of 
 the lumbar vertebrae, on the right side of the abdominal 
 aorta, to beneath the liver ; it is covered by the perito- 
 neum and duodenum. Opposite the liver it frequently 
 contracts : it is then lodged in the fissura venae cavae, 
 between the lobulus spigelii and right lobe of the liver ; 
 it passes through the triangular opening in the central 
 tendon of the diaphragm, and terminates immediately 
 in the under and back part of the right auricle of the 
 heart. It receives the 
 
 Sacral veins Renal veins 
 
 Lumbar veins Hepatic veins 
 
 Right spermatic vein Inferior phrenic veins 
 
 VENA PORT.E, AND ITS BRANCHES. 
 
 The Vena Portce is that large vein which returns the 
 blood from the intestines, spleen, and stomach to the 
 liver. It is distributed in numerous branches through 
 
244 
 
 the liver, like an artery. The blood which it carries is 
 destined for the formation of bile ; the remaining blood 
 is returned by the venae hepaticae to the inferior vena 
 cava. The trunk of the vena portae is divided into two 
 branches ; the superior, which is dispersed through the 
 liver, is called the vena portae hepatica ; the inferior is 
 termed the vena portae ventralis. 
 
 The Vena Portce Ventralis is formed behind the pan. 
 creas, by the union of the three following principal 
 branches : 
 
 1st. The Splenic Vein, which receives the coronary, 
 pancreatic, and left gastro-epiploic veins. 
 
 2nd. The superior Messenteric Vein, which receives 
 the right and left colic veins, the right gastro-epiploic, 
 and pyloric veins. 
 
 3rd. The inferior Messenteric Vein, which arises 
 from branches which return the blood from the rectum, 
 sigmoid flexure of the colon and meso-colon. 
 
 The trunk formed by the union of these branches, 
 passes between the layers of the little omentum, to the 
 sulcus transversus, or porta of the liver. 
 
 OF THE CIRCULATION OF THE BLOOD. 
 
 The Blood is brought by the venze cavae from every 
 part of the body, and from the heart itself, to the right 
 auricle ; the right auricle contracting, drives the blood 
 into the right ventricle ; the right ventricle contracting, 
 the blood is propelled into the pulmonary artery; regur- 
 gitation from the ventricle back into the auricle is pre- 
 vented by the tricuspid valve; the semilunar valves, 
 placed at the commencement of the pulmonary artery, 
 prevent the blood returning from that vessel back into 
 the heart. The blood propelled into the extreme 
 ramifications of the pulmonary artery, is then re- 
 ceived by the pulmonary veins, and carried to the left 
 auricle of the heart. The left auricle, upon receiving 
 
245 
 
 this mass of blood, immediately contracts, and its 
 contents are impelled into the left ventricle ; the left 
 ventricle contracts, and forces the blood into the aorta. 
 The blood cannot return from the ventricle into the 
 auricle, on account of the mitral valve, nor from the 
 aorta itself on account of its three semilunar valves. 
 The blood, after giving off nourishment and supplying 
 the varied secretions to every part of the body, is re- 
 turned impoverished by very small veins, passing from 
 them into larger, and lastly into the ascending and 
 descending venae cavae, which re-convey it to the right 
 auricle, after having received a reinforcement of nutri- 
 tive matter from the digestive organs by the thoracic 
 duct. 
 
 In the foetus, the course of the blood is far different, 
 for the foetus receives its blood from the mother, by 
 means of the umbilical vein, and returns it to the mo- 
 ther by the umbilical arteries contained in the umbilical 
 cord. The umbilical cord is composed of the umbilical 
 vein and two umbilical arteries. The umbilical vein 
 arises from the conflux of the veins of the placenta 
 uterina, which receive their blood from the ends of the 
 arteries of the uterus ; it then passes through the um- 
 bilicus in front of the peritoneum to the liver. The 
 greatest proportion of the blood is circulated through 
 the liver, and afterwards carried to the ascending cava 
 by the venae cavae hepaticse: a small portion of the 
 blood at once passes without circulating through the 
 liver to the cava, by a peculiar vessel termed the ductus 
 venosus. The blood, by the venae cavae, is brought to 
 the right auricle ; this contracting, forces the greatest 
 proportion of the blood through the foramen ovale into 
 the left auricle. The remaining blood it carried into 
 the right ventricle, from which it passes into the pul- 
 monary artery : a small portion only circulates through 
 the lungs, for the greater part passes into the aorta 
 through the canalis arteriosus Botalli, which arises from 
 the pulmonary artery, and terminates obliquely in the 
 arch of the aorta. The portion of the blood which has 
 been distributed to the lungs is returned to the left 
 auricle, where it becomes mixed with that which has 
 passed at once from the right side of the heart through 
 the foramen ovale. The left auricle contracting, the 
 
 Y3 
 
246 
 
 blood is propelled into the left ventricle, and from this 
 cavity into the aorta, where it becomes mixed with that 
 portion which has passed at once from the pulmonary 
 artery by the canalis arteriosus. From the aorta the 
 blood passes as in the adult into every part of the body,, 
 and thus it is propelled into the umbilical arteries. The 
 umbilical arteries arise from the internal iliac arteries, 
 ascend on the side of the bladder to the umbilicus, 
 pass through it with the umbilical cord to the placenta, 
 in which their terminations are joined with the very 
 small veins of the uterus, and thus their blood is re- 
 turned to the mother. 
 

 NEUROLOGY. 
 
 THE nerves were, for a long period, considered as 
 forming one uniform system, they are now divided into 
 two general divisions, distinct from each other, the 
 nerves of animal life and those of organic life. The 
 nerves of animal life emanate from three principal por- 
 tions of the cerebral mass, from the brain, the tuber 
 annulare and its extensions, and from the medulla spi- 
 nalis. The division of the nerves, according to Willis, 
 has been invariably followed by the anatomists of this 
 country, excepting by Charles Bell. 
 
 Willis, Vieussens, Winslow, and Bichat, enumerate 
 ten pair of cerebral nerves. 
 
 1st pair, Nervi Olfactorii 
 
 2d pair, Nervi Optici 
 
 3d pair, Nervi Motores Oculorum 
 
 4th pair, Nervi Pathetici 
 
 5th pair, Nervi Trigemini 
 
 6th pair, Nervi Motores Externi 
 
 7th pair, Nervi Auditorii, one called Portio Mol- 
 
 lis, the other Portio Dura 
 8th pair, Nervi Vagi, which include the Nervi 
 
 Accessorii, and Glosso-pharyngei 
 9th pair, Nervi Linguales 
 10th pair, Nervi Sub-occipitales 
 
248 
 
 The Nerves of the Medulla Spinalis, are thus divided : 
 
 Seven pairs of Nervi Cervicis 
 Twelve pairs of Nervi Dorsales 
 Five pairs of Nervi Lumborum 
 Six pairs of Nervi Sacrales 
 
 Scemmerring, Mekel, Chaussier, and Gall, admit 
 twelve pair of Cerebral Nerves. 
 
 1st pair, Nervi Olfactorii 
 
 2d pair, Nervi Optici 
 
 3d pair, Nervi Motores Oculorum 
 
 4th pair, Nervi Pathetici 
 
 5th pair, Nervi Trigemini 
 
 6th pair, Nervi Oculorum Abducentes 
 
 7th pair, Nervi faciei 
 
 8th pair, Nervi Auditorii 
 
 9th pair, Nervi Glosso-pharyngei 
 10th pair, Nervi Vagi 
 llth pair, Nervi Accessorii 
 12th pair, Nervi Linguales. 
 
 The Nerves of the Medulla Spinalis, are thus divided : 
 
 Eight pairs of Nervi Cervicales 
 Twelve pairs of Nervi Dorsales 
 Five pairs of Nervi Lumborum 
 Six pairs of Nervi Sacrales. 
 
 The Cerebral Nerves present, at their commencement, 
 very soft filaments, a continuation of the medullary 
 substance of the brain. The nerves of the medulla 
 spinalis arise by double roots, and like the preceding 
 ones, are continuous with the medullary substance. At 
 their egress through the foramina of the cranium, and 
 spinal canal, we find the nerves enclosed in a sheath of 
 dura mater ; this, at length, gradually disappears, and 
 is either lost in the cellular tissue, or reflected on the 
 margins of the openings through which they may have 
 emerged, and becomes continuous with the periosteum. 
 If we now examine the nervous trunk, it presents the 
 following characters : First, we find it formed of dis- 
 
249 
 
 tinct filaments, enveloped each by a membrane of tubular 
 form, soft where the nerve is protected, resisting where 
 the nerve is opposed or subject to pressure ; according 
 to the general received opinion, it is a production of the 
 pia mater, and described under the term of Neurilemma 
 (teu^ov nervus tep/Act cortex). Within this envelope 
 is placed a track of nervous pulpy matter, continuous 
 with the medullary substance of the brain, and medulla 
 spinalis. These filaments, by their union form a 
 nervous cord, wrapped in a common covering of cel- 
 lular tissue. The olfactory nerve has no neurilemma, 
 the optic nerve presents it only after its commissure. 
 Nerves possess minute arteries, accompanied by cor- 
 responding veins j they are given off by the adjacent 
 vessels, penetrate the cellular coat, and ramify on the 
 neurilemma ; they are indistinct in the healthy state, 
 well defined under inflammation. The optic nerve is 
 the only exception, and it offers this peculiarity the 
 central artery of the retina runs within its substance. 
 Absorbent vessels have not been decidedly demonstrated, 
 but, according to Bichat, nutrition bespeaks their exis- 
 tence. Anatomical inspection has failed to detect prot. 
 per nervous filaments distributed to the nerves them- 
 selves. The nerves passing from their origins, exhibit 
 different dispositions ; the olfactory and optic nerves 
 proceed without communication to their respective 
 organs; whilst those arising from the pons varolii, me- 
 dulla oblongata, and medulla spinalis freely communicate 
 and form the different plexuses ; viz. the cervical, lum- 
 bar, and sciatic plexuses ; whence the nerves separate 
 from each other and proceed to their respective destina- 
 tions. The nervous trunks of the extremities are gene- 
 rally lodged in cellular or adipose tissue, and hold their 
 course between the interstices of muscles. The nerves 
 sent to the organs of sense terminate in a pulpy sub- 
 stance ; the optic nerves are expanded into a soft medul- 
 lary layer, forming the retina ; the same mode of termi- 
 nation is observed with respect to the auditory nerve. 
 The papillae of the skin, nose, and tongue, which are 
 formed principally by the minute terminations of the 
 nerves, are extremely soft, almost of a mucous consis- 
 tence. The nerves of muscles, when they arrive at 
 their ultimate destination, ramify into small branches. 
 
250 
 
 which become more and more minute,, until they seem 
 at length to be softened down into a kind of pulp, and 
 are no longer visible to the eye, and cannot be prosecuted 
 by dissection. 
 
 In tracing the course of the nerves, numerous 
 parts are found to be supplied by two distinct sets, 
 whose functions had been unexplained and had baf- 
 fled the ingenuity of the anatomist, till by the inte- 
 resting researches of Charles Bell, this mystery was 
 unravelled. There are, besides the nerves of smell, 
 hearing, and vision, four systems combined ; viz. nerves 
 of sensation, nerves of voluntary motion, nerves of 
 respiratory motion, and lastly, the nerves of organic life 
 distributed to the organs of digestion, circulation, 
 respiration, and the secretions on which depend the 
 nutrition, growth, and whatever is directly necessary 
 to animal existence. On examining the spinal mar- 
 row, it is found to consist of different columns of 
 nervous matter; each lateral column consists of three 
 tracks ; one for voluntary 'motion, one for sensation., and 
 the middle track for respiration. Thirty pair of nerves 
 take their origin from the lateral portions of the column, 
 and are regular in their origin and distribution. These 
 constitute the "simple and uniform system" of Bell. 
 Each nerve has two distinct series of roots, one from 
 the posterior track, one from the anterior track. The 
 posterior filament comes out remarkably abrupt from 
 the track, and their roots form a regular row or series, 
 these converging towards the foramina of the sheath of 
 the spinal marrow, and being collected together, form a 
 knot or ganglion. The anterior roots come out more 
 irregular, and form a wider surface, and join the poste- 
 rior roots, beyond the ganglia. The thirty nerves thus 
 formed of two distinct fasciculi, are suited to perform by 
 the combination of properties, which they acquire 
 through their double roots, all the offices of the trunk 
 and limbs. The important discovery of their office is 
 undoubtedly due to Charles Bell, though numerous at- 
 tempts have been made in France, to deprive him of 
 the honour. He has proved that in the posterior track 
 of the medulla spiiialis, and in the posterior fasciculi of 
 nerves reside sensation, in the anterior track, and ante- 
 rior fasciculi, voluntary motion. Under this division is 
 
251 
 
 placed the fifth pair, and sub-occipital nerves. They 
 are found to arise by double roots, to possess ganglia, 
 and the double function of sensation and motion. The 
 remaining nerves are called the " irregular or super- 
 added ;" they are distinguished by a single root, are 
 simple in their origin, and irregular in their distribu- 
 tion, they go to parts already plentifully supplied with 
 nerves ; they are not capable of exciting perception, and 
 are only furnished with the faculty of transmitting 
 nervous influence. Of these are ' ' The third fourth 
 and sixth to the eye ; the seventh to the face ; the ninth 
 to the tongue ; the glosso-pharyngeal to the tongue and 
 pharynx; the nervus vagus to the heart, lungs, and 
 stomach; the spinal accessory to the muscles of , the 
 shoulder ; the phrenic to the diaphragm ; the external 
 respiratory to the outside of the chest." This is the 
 system which has been so ably brought forward by 
 Charles Bell, and illustrated and confirmed by the most 
 beautiful and satisfactory experiments. I shall adopt 
 the arrangement of Soemmerring, with certain modifi- 
 cations, and combine with it the functions, as assigned 
 by Charles Bell. Having repeated many of the experi- 
 ments, and having witnessed others conducted by Se- 
 galas and Majendie, I am convinced of the accuracy en 
 masse of Charles Bell's deductions. 
 
 THE NERVES OF THE HUMAN BODY 
 
 May be thus arranged : 
 
 1st pair, Nervi olfactorii, destined to excite perception 
 of smell. 
 
 2nd pair, Nervi optici, destined to excite the impres- 
 sions of light. 
 
 3rd pair, Nervi motores oculorum, motory nerves of the 
 eye. 
 
 4th pair Nervi respiratorii oculorum, respiratory nerves 
 of the eye. 
 
 5th pair, Nervi trifaciales, universal nerves of sensation 
 of the head, face, cavities of the nose, mouth 
 and tongue. 
 
252 
 
 6th pair, Nervi oculorum dbducentes, motory nerves of 
 the eve. 
 
 7th pair, Nervi respiratorii jaciei, respiratory nerves of 
 the face. 
 
 8th pair, Nervi auditorii, destined to excite the impres- 
 sions of sound. 
 
 9th pair, Nervi respiratorii glosso-pharyngei, respiratory 
 nerves to the tongue and pharynx. 
 
 10th pair, Nervi respiratorii pneumo-gastrici, respiratory 
 nerves to the larynx, heart, lungs, and sto- 
 mach. 
 
 llth pair, Nervi respiratorii tr ache /o-dor sales, respira- 
 tory nerves to the neck and shoulders. 
 
 12th pair, Nervi motor es linguce, the motory nerves of 
 the tongue. 
 
 Nervi respiratorii, into-thoracica to the dia- 
 phragm. 
 
 Nervi respiratorii exto-thoracici, to the exter- 
 nal respiratory muscles. 
 
 Eight pairs of Nervi cervicales, giving off the nerves of 
 sensation and voluntary motion to the upper 
 extremities. 
 
 Twelve pairs of Nervi dorsales, giving off the nerves of 
 sensation, and voluntary motion to the 
 trunk. 
 
 Five pairs of Nervi lumborum, giving off the nerves of 
 sensation, and voluntary motion to the upper 
 extremities. 
 
 Five pairs of Nervi sacrales, giving off the nerves of 
 sensation, and voluntary motion to the pelvic 
 viscera, and organs of generation. 
 
 Nervi sympathetici, sive Nervi vitce organicce, nerves of 
 organic life. 
 
 Of the Cerebral Nerves. 
 NERVI OLFACTORII. 
 
 The first pair of nerves that emanates from the brain 
 is the olfactory, anciently called processus mammillares. 
 Each nerve arises by three filaments ; the external and 
 
253 
 
 the longest, is directed outwards and backward, to the 
 bottom of the fissura sylvii ; the inner, which is the 
 shorter and broader, is prolonged as far as the corpus 
 callosum, both these origins are formed by the medul- 
 lary substance; the middle is cieritious, and may be 
 traced into the posterior part of the anterior convolu- 
 tions of the brain. Some anatomists have described 
 these nerves as arising from the corpora striata. Gall 
 and Spurzheim have shewn, that in many of the lower 
 animals, where the corpora striata do exist, no olfactory 
 nerves can be traced. The three filaments unite and 
 form a soft flattened trunk, which converges and passes 
 forwards in a remarkable groove, on the under part of 
 the anterior lobes of the brain ; it terminates in an oval 
 shaped cineritious body, called by some anatomists, the 
 bulbus olfactoriusj situated over the cribriform plate of 
 the sethmoid bone ; from it are given off numerous ner- 
 vous filaments, divided into three fasciculi external, 
 middle, and internal, each filament being, at its exit, 
 enclosed in a fibrous canal, derived from the dura mater. 
 The external fasciculi are distributed to the mucous 
 membrane, investing the superior spongy bones, the 
 middle to the roof of the nasal fossae, the internal form 
 an intricate plexus on the septum narium. These 
 nerves offer the following peculiarites : their trunk has 
 three roots, they possess no neurilemma, are lodged in a 
 particular groove of the brain, and, lastly, Gall has 
 shewn that the bulb is made up of white and cierifious 
 substance, is hollow in the lower animals, and commu- 
 nicates with the lateral ventricles. They give the 
 sense of smell. 
 
 NERVI OPTICI. 
 
 The second pair, the optic nerves, is the largest of 
 the cerebral nerves ; they have been usually described 
 as emanating from the thalami nervorum opticorum ; it 
 has been shewn by Gall and Spurzheim, that they may 
 be traced issuing by a broad, white fibrous band, from 
 the anterior quadrigeminal bodies, which turn round 
 upon the outer edge of the thalami nervorum optico- 
 z 
 
254 
 
 rum, under the cerebral crura. They receive fibres at 
 right lines,, without decussating from the corpora geni- 
 culata, and from the tuber cinereum. The nerves thus 
 formed, run forwards,, approach each other, and unite 
 on the anterior part of the pituitary fossa; whether 
 they cross each other so that the left nerve passes to the 
 right,, or the right to the left, is a point still under dis- 
 pute. Several cases have been given by Gall and 
 Spurzheim, of atrophy of one nerve being continued 
 on the opposite side, after the junction of the two. 
 These distinguished anatomists recognize a partial de- 
 cussation of the fibres ; they believe the outermost fila- 
 ments continue their course without decussating. This 
 arrangement may reconcile us to the great discrepancy 
 of opinion which exists on the question. In many fish, 
 the doctrine of decussation is favoured, their optic 
 nerves plainly cross each other without any union. The 
 portion of the nerve before they come in contact, pre- 
 sents the appearance of a broad, flat band, soft, and en- 
 tirely pulpy, and is termed the tractus opticus. From 
 their commissure they become round and dense, separate 
 from each other, pass outwards and forwards, through 
 the foramina optica to the posterior surface of the orbit> 
 perforate the sclerotic and choroid coats of the globe of 
 the eye, to the nasal side of its axis, and are expanded 
 into a very delicate pulpy substance, termed the retina. 
 They afford the sense of vision. 
 
 MOTORES OCULORUM. 
 
 The third pair, or motores oculorum, arises from the 
 inner margin of the crura cerebri, between the posterior 
 artery of the cerebrum, and superior artery of the cere- 
 bellum, behind the tuber cinereum ; close to the pons 
 varolii (the cura cerebri may be said to be the continued 
 track of the anterior column of the medulla spinalis, 
 destined to motory motion) ; the nerves pass forwards 
 and outwards, along the external wall of the cavernous 
 sinuses, lodged in a sheath of dura mater, first above 
 the fourth pair, and first division of the fifth pair of 
 nerves, afterwards behind these nerves, to the sphenoi- 
 dal fissure ; here each nerve divides into two branches, 
 
255 
 
 a superior placed above the optic nerve, and an inferior 
 below, and to the outer side. The superior is distri- 
 buted to the levator oculi, and levator palpebrae ; the 
 inferior divides into three branches, an internal branch 
 distributed to the adductor oculi, a middle to the de- 
 pressor oculi, and an external branch to the obliquus 
 oculi inferior ; it also sends off a branch to the lenticu- 
 lar ganglion. These nerves give motion to all the 
 muscles of the eye, with the exception of the abductor 
 and superior oblique muscles. 
 
 NERVI RESPIRATORII OCULORUM. 
 
 (Nervi Pathetici.) 
 
 The fourth pair, respiratory, or pathetic nerves, is the 
 smallest of the cerebral nerves ; they arise by three 
 filaments from the inferior corpora quadrigemina, from 
 the valve of Vieussen, and from the processus a cerebello 
 ad testes. (" The column of medullary matter which 
 constitutes that part of the medulla oblongata from 
 which the respiratory nerves arise, terminates upwards 
 or at its anterior extremity, just under the corpora qua- 
 drigemina, and there the fourth pair arises." C. Bell.) 
 They pass upwards and forwards, between the cerebrum 
 and cerebellum, on the side of the pons varolii, to the 
 external margin of the posterior clinoid processes of the 
 sphenoid bone ; continue their course along the external 
 wall of the cavernous sinuses within the sheath of the 
 dura mater, first behind, afterwards above the third 
 pair to the sphenoidal fissure, enter the orbits; each 
 nerve is then directed upwards and inwards, above the 
 levator oculi and levator palpebrae, and is finally exclu- 
 sively distributed to the obliquus oculi superior. Grail 
 and Spurzheim maintain that this nerve has " no pre- 
 rogative over the other nerves of motion, in expressing 
 the affections and passions ; the name patheticus, or 
 ogling nerve, is misapplied." Charles Bell's researches 
 have shewn that it is a nerve of expression, a respiratory 
 nerve, and establishes a relation between the eye and 
 the extended respiratory system. 
 
256 
 NERVI TRIFACIALES. 
 
 The fifth pair, or Trigeminal Nerves, is included in 
 the simple and uniform system of Bell ; they have dis- 
 tinct origins, and are endowed with two distinct powers, 
 namely, that of sensation and that of voluntary motion. 
 Each nerve consists of one hundred fine filaments, arising 
 by two fasciculi. The anterior, which are the smallest, 
 emanate from the crura cerebelli, and may be traced into 
 the corpus pyramidale (motory track) ; the posterior fas- 
 ciculi, the largest, are derived from the corpus restiforme 
 (track of sensation), are collected into a trunk, pass 
 forwards and over the petrous portion of the temporal 
 bone, expand and form the semilunar ganglion ( the es- 
 sential character of all the nerves of sensation). This 
 ganglion, sometimes called Gasserian, is situated beneath 
 the laminae of the dura mater to the outerside of the 
 cavernous sinus, and gives off three nervous trunks, viz. 
 the opthalmic, superior maxillary, and inferior max- 
 illary nerves. Bell has shewn that the two former, 
 endowed only with sensation, pass to parts already plen- 
 tifully supplied with motory nerves ; whilst the latter 
 namely, the inferior maxillary, is joined beyond the 
 ganglion in the foramen ovale, by the anterior fasciculi 
 (fibres of motion), and thus a compound nerve is 
 formed, suited to the two offices which it is destined to 
 perform, namely, sensation and voluntary motion.- 
 Magendie has strangely endeavoured to prove that the 
 olfactory, optic, and auditory, are not the nerves of 
 smelling, seeing, and hearing ; and that the fifth pair, 
 if they do not exercise these functions, are the regula- 
 tors of the senses above named. 
 
 NERVUS OPTHALMICUS. 
 
 The Opthalmic Nerve passes forwards, between the 
 laminae of the dura mater, along the external wall of 
 the cavernous sinus, where it is joined by a small 
 branch from the great sympathetic nerve, and enters 
 the orbit through the sphenoidal fissure, in company 
 
257 
 
 with the fourth and sixth pair of nerves. It divides 
 into three branches, frontal, nasal, and lacrymal. 
 
 The Frontal Nerve, the largest is the continued 
 trunk of the opthalmic nerve ; it passes forwards and 
 upwards, to the upper part of the levator palpebrse, and 
 divides into two branches, external and internal. (1) 
 The external branch passess directly forwards through 
 the foramen supra orbitarium, and is distributed to the 
 occipito frontalis, corrugator supercilii, and integuments 
 of the forehead, communicating with temporal branches 
 from the facial. (2) The internal branch runs inwards, 
 above the pulley of the superior oblique muscle, is dis 
 tributed to the orbicularis palpebrarum, and communi 
 cates with the infra trochlearis nerve. 
 
 Nervtis frontalis. (1) Nervus frontalis externus. 
 (2) Nervus supra trochlearis. 
 
 The Nasal Nerve passes to the inner side of the orbit, 
 over the optic nerve, under the levator palpebrae, levator 
 oculi, and superior oblique muscles; it is joined by a 
 branch from the superior cervical ganglion of the great 
 sympathetic nerves. It first gives off a slender filament 
 to the lenticular ganglion, (1) next two or three ciliary 
 Jilamejits, to the choroid coat of the eye ; it then divides 
 into two branches, an internal and an external* (2) 
 The external branch takes a most remarkable course, it 
 enters the cranium through the foramen orbitale ante- 
 rus, in company with the aethmoidal artery, perforates 
 the dura mater, leaves the cranium by one of the ante- 
 rior foramina of the aethmoid bone, and divides into two 
 filaments, one distributed to the petuitary membrane, 
 the other descends along the under surface of the inter-., 
 nal spines of the ossa nasi, perforates the cartilage of' 
 the nose, and is distributed to the integuments. (3) 
 The external branch continues its course forwards, to 
 the outer part of the orbit, under the infra oblique 
 muscle, is distributed to that muscle, to the lacrymal 
 sac and adjacent parts, communicating with the infra, 
 orbitar, and facial nerves. 
 
 (X) Kami ciliares. (2) Nervus nasalis 
 
 (3) Nervus infra trochiearis> 
 
258 
 
 The Lacrymal Nerve passes outwards, to the outer 
 part of the orbit ; above the muscles of the globe, it 
 divides into two branches, one distributed to the lacrymal 
 gland, the other branch pierces the malar bone, and 
 communicates with the facial and superior maxillary 
 nerves. 
 
 LENTICULAR GANGLION. 
 
 The Lenticular Ganglion, by Willis, Soemmerring, 
 Mekel, Finn, and other distinguished continental ana- 
 tomists, and by anatomists of this country, has been de- 
 rived from the third pair of nerves receiving a branch 
 from the nasal division of ihejifth. Chaussier has shewn 
 that there exists between this ganglion, and the first 
 cervical ganglion of the great sympathetic, a remark- 
 able branch of communication within the carotid canal. 
 I therefore adopt the opinion of that distinguished pro- 
 fessor and consider it as belonging to this system. 
 
 NERVUS MAXILLARIS SUPERIOR. 
 
 fhe Superior Maxillary Nerve passes downwards, 
 through the foramen rotundum, to the space between 
 the tuberosity of the superior maxillary bone, and root 
 of the pterygoid process of the sphenoid bone, it then 
 passes forwards into the spheno-maxillary fissure, en- 
 ters the canalis suborbitarius, and emerges at the fora- 
 men infra orbitarium. It is first joined by two branches 
 from the spheno-palatine ganglion.* It gives off (1) 
 malar branches to the orbicularis palpebrarum and la- 
 crymal gland, which unite with the lacrymal nerve; (2) 
 temporal branches to the temporal muscles; (3) posterior 
 dental to the molar teeth ; (4) anterior dental to the in-. 
 
 *, The spheno-palatine ganglion was first pointed by Mekel, and has been 
 described after his name ; it is usually enumerated as a gangliop of the fifth 
 pair, but it belongs to the ganglionic system. It gives off the following 
 branches, Nervi nasales anteriores et superiores, nervus pterygoideus, seu 
 yidianus, uervus palatinus (vide nerves of organic life ) Observapu anat 
 mi^uesu'p u noemj; on gangrton du second rarneau de la cinquieme paire dss. 
 iprfe du cerveau apuyeUenient decouvert, par JV^ekel, Anuee, 1749, Berlin, 
 
259 
 
 cisor and canine teeth, and to the lining membrane of 
 the antrum highmorianum. At its exit from the canal, 
 it takes the name of infra orbital nerve, and divides 
 into branches distinguished as (5) palpebral (6) labial, 
 (7) and nasal filaments, and which communicate with 
 the facial, infra trochlearis, and nasal nerves, and are 
 distributed to the muscles and integuments of the 
 adjacent parts. 
 
 (1) Nervus subcutaneus (5) Nervi palpebrales in- 
 malae feriores 
 
 (2) Nervus temporalis (6) Nervi labiales superi- 
 
 (3) Nervi dentales posteri- ores 
 
 ores (7) Nervi nasales superfi- 
 
 (4) Nervi dentales anteri- dales. 
 
 ores. 
 
 NERVUS MAXILLARIS. 
 
 The Inferior Maxillary Nerve is the third, and larg- 
 est branch of the fifth, it consists of two portions which 
 become intimately united ; it passes from the cranium 
 by the foramen ovale, downwards, between the ptery- 
 goid muscles, to the posterior opening of the inferior 
 maxillary canal, where it divides into three branches ; 
 viz. lingual, or true gustatory, auricular, and inferior 
 dental. It first gives off muscular branches to the 
 (1) temporal, (2) masseter, (3) pterygoid, and (4) buc- 
 cinator muscles. (5) Next,, the lingual or true gustatory 
 nerve ; it passes first between jhe pterygoideus ex- 
 ternus and circumflexus palati, then between the pte-. 
 rygoideus internus and ascending ramus of the lower 
 maxilla, lastly, it passes to the tongue, between the 
 mylo-hyoideus and hyo-glossus muscles, in company 
 with the duct of the sub-maxillary gland. At the com- 
 mencement of its course it is joined by the corda tym- 
 pani ; opposite the sub-maxillary gland, this nerve leaves 
 the lingual to enter a remarkable ganglion, the lingual, 
 or maxillary ganglion, situated on the sub-maxillary 
 gland. The lingual nerve, in its course, gives off small 
 filaments to- the pterygijideus internus muscle, and tonsil 
 
260 
 
 gland, ultimately it is distributed to the tongue, and 
 assists in forming the papillae. It is the only nerve 
 giving the sense of taste. (6) The auricular, or super. 
 Jicial temporal passes outwards between the condyle of 
 the lower maxilla, and meatus auditivus externus, it 
 divides into branches distributed to the parotid gland, 
 uniting with the facial nerves, and into branches, to 
 the auricle and to the temporal muscle ; these branches 
 communicate with the occipital nerve. (7) The infe- 
 rior dental is the largest branch, it descends between 
 the pterygoid muscles, separated from the internal pte- 
 rygoid muscle, and lingual nerve, by the internal late- 
 ral ligament, to the posterior opening of the inferior 
 maxillary canal, continues its course along the canal, 
 and emerges at the foramen mentale, when it takes 
 the name of mental nerve. Previous to its entrance 
 into the canal, it gives off a remarkable branch, (8) the 
 mylo-hyoid, which passes in a groove, on the inner side 
 the angle, and base of the jaw, supplying with filaments 
 the mylo-hyoideus muscle, and sub-maxillary gland. 
 Within the canal it gives off (9) branches to all the 
 roots of the teeth. (10) The mental nerve divides into 
 numerous- filaments, distributed to the muscles and in- 
 teguments of the lower lip, and freely communicating 
 with the facial nerve. 
 
 (1) Nervi temporales pro- (6) Nervus temporalis su- 
 
 fundi interni et exter- perficialis 
 
 ni (7) Nervus dentalis 
 
 (2) Nervi masseteres (8) Nervus mylo-hyoideus 
 
 (3) Nervi pterygoidei (9) Nervus dentalis 
 
 (4) Nervi buccales (10) Nervus mentalis 
 
 (5) Nervus gustatorius (11) Nervi labiales inferio- 
 
 res. 
 
 NERVI OCULORUM ABDUCENTES. 
 
 sixth pair of nerves, or abductor nerves, arises 
 from the tractus motorius, namely, from the corpora 
 pyramidalia, where they enter into the pons varolii. 
 nerve passes forwards along the basilar groove . 
 
261 
 
 and enters the cavernous sinus, on the outer side of the 
 internal carotid artery, separated from the blood by the 
 lining membrane of that cavity ; it is here joined by 
 one or two filaments from the great sympathetic nerve ; 
 it enters the orbit by the sphenoidal fissure, and is ex- 
 clusively distributed to the abductor muscle of the eye 
 by numerous filaments. 
 
 NERVI RESPIRATORII FACIEI. 
 
 The seventh pair of Nerves, or Fasial or Portio Dura, 
 arises from between the corpora restiformia, and corpora 
 olivaria (tractus rcspiratorius) ; each nerve passes for- 
 wards into the meatus auditorius internus, enters the 
 aquaduct of Fallopius, emerges at the foramen stylo- 
 mastoideum, and is buried in the substance of the pa- 
 rotid gland. Within the canal it is joined by the vidian 
 nerve, this nerve afterwards detaches itself from the 
 facial, and leaves the tympanum by the Fissura Glasseri, 
 under the name of corda tympani. The facial nerve 
 first gives small filaments to the muscles of the mem- 
 brana tympani, in the parotid gland, (1) Jtlaments to 
 the meatus auditivus externus and auricle, communi- 
 cating with the occipital nerve ; (2) muscular branches 
 to the styloid muscles and digastricus, uniting with the 
 glosso-pharyngeal and nervus vagus; it then divides 
 into two branches, temporo-facial, and cervico-facial. 
 (3) The temporo-facial nerve passes forwards, through 
 the substance of the parotid gland, and divides into nu- 
 merous branches, and as the distribution of these 
 branches bear some resemblance to a goose's foot, the 
 plexus has been called pes anserinus. (4) The superior 
 branches are distributed to the temporal, occipito fronta- 
 lis muscles and integuments, uniting with the fron'tal, 
 malar, and inferior maxillary nerves; (5) the middle 
 branches run inwards, towards the inner canthus of the 
 eye, are distributed to the orbicularis palpebrarum, and 
 adjacent muscles, and freely communicate with the 
 frontal, infra trochlearis, and infra orbital nerves; 
 (6) the inferior branches cross the masseter and bucci- 
 nator muscles, in company with the parotid duct, and 
 
262 
 
 supply the muscles, nose, and upper lip, anastomosing 
 with the preceding branches. (7) The cermco-facial 
 branch descends behind the ramus of the lower jaw, 
 towards the angle ; it divides into (8) branches distri- 
 buted to the buccinator, and muscles of the lower lip ; 
 uniting with the mental nerve, it gives off also (9) fila- 
 ments which descend downwards and forwards, beneath 
 the platysma myb'ides, and unite with the ascending 
 cervical nerves. All the motions of the face which ac- 
 cord with respiration depend on this nerve, and from its 
 numerous anastomoses it has been called the small sym- 
 pathetic nerve. 
 
 (1) Nervus auricularis (5) Nervi malares 
 
 (2) Nervus digastricus et (6) Nervi buccales 
 
 stylo-hybideus (7) Nervus cervico-facialis 
 
 (3) Nervus temporo-facia- (8) Nervus marginalis 
 
 lis (9) Nervus subcutaneus 
 
 (4) Nervi temporales colli. 
 
 NERVI AUDITORII. 
 
 The Auditory Nerve, or Portio Mollis, on each side 
 arises from the bottom of the fourth ventricle, passes in 
 company with the portio dura, to the bottom of the 
 meatus auditivus internus, perforates the cribriform 
 plate in a state of fibrillae, and terminates in a semi- 
 pellucid pulpy substance, expanded over the lining mem- 
 brane of the vestibule, semi-circular canals, and cochlea 
 of the internal apparatus of hearing. It is destined to 
 the function of hearing. 
 
 NERVI RESPIRATORII GLOSSO-PHA- 
 RYNGEI. 
 
 The Glosso-pharyngeal Nerves arise from between 
 the corpora restiformia and corpora oblivaria, below the 
 portio dura, above the nervus vagus (tiactus respirato~ 
 rius.) Each nerve leaves the cranium through the 
 
263 
 
 foramen lacerum basis cranii, in a separate opening 
 formed by the dura mater, and forms a small ganglion 
 (neuronodus petrosus}, from which is derived a branch 
 which enters the tympanum (ramus anastomoticus Ja- 
 cobson) and unites with the vidian, and a descending 
 branch to the first ganglion of the great sympathetic. 
 The nerve now continues its course downwards and in- 
 wards, over the internal carotid artery, first on the edge, 
 then in front of the stylo-pharyngeus muscle, to the 
 tongue. It sends branches upon the internal carotid, 
 pharynx, tonsils, and to the tongue; is placed above 
 the lingual nerve, under the true gustatory nerve. It 
 communicates with the nervus vagus, stylo-hyoid 
 branch of the facial, accessory, and great sympathetic 
 nerves. The different actions of the throat, fauces and 
 tongue, associated with respiration, are under the influ- 
 ence of this nerve. 
 
 NERVI RESPIRATORII PNEUMO-GASTRICI. 
 
 The Pneumo-gastric Nerves arise from the respiratory 
 tract, between the corpora restiformia and corpora 
 olivaria, by one or two rows of filaments, immediately 
 beneath the preceding nerve. Each nerve leaves the 
 cranium by the foramen lacerum basis, cranii sepa- 
 rated, from the internal jugular vein, by a process 
 of bone, from the accessory and glosso-pharyngeal 
 nerves by a band of the dura mater ; passes down 
 the neck, within the carotid sheath, between the 
 carotid artery and internal jugular vein ; enters the 
 chest between the subclavian artery and vein, and con- 
 tinues its course through the posterior mediastinum with 
 the aesophagus, through the diaphragm to the cardiac 
 extremity of the stomach. The right nerve is placed 
 rather behind the aesophagus ; the left nerve rather in 
 front. The right nerve crosses the subclavian artery at 
 right angles; the left is anterior, but nearly parallel with 
 the subclavian artery, and crosses obliquely the posterior 
 surface of the arch of the aorta. Immediately after 
 issuing from the cranium, the nerve expands, and forms 
 the appearance of a small ganglion, which is formed by 
 
264 
 
 filaments from the great sympathetic, glosso-pharyngeal, 
 accessory,, and lingual nerves. It first gives off the (1) 
 pkaryngealnerve; it descends obliquely inwards, behind 
 the internal carotid artery, and is distributed exclusively 
 to the pharynx ; it gives off branches which assist in 
 forming with the glosso-pharyngeal, sympathetic, and 
 accessory nerves, a remarkable plexus behind the pha- 
 rynx the pharyngeal pfexus ; (2) the superior laryn- 
 geal nerve, which runs downwards and forwards behind 
 the internal carotid towards the side of the larynx, 
 where it divides into external and internal branches ; the 
 former are distributed to the muscle of the larynx the 
 latter perforate the thyro-hyoid ligament, and are dis- 
 tributed to the musclce of the vocal ligaments, anasto- 
 mosing with the recurrent laryngeal nerve. At the 
 lower part of the neck, small branches (3) superficial 
 cardiac, are sent off to join the cardiac plexus of the 
 great sympathetic, behind the arch of the aorta. (4) 
 Next, the recurrent laryngeal nerve : this nerve offers 
 some differences with respect to its course on either side 
 of the neck. The right nerve bends upwards, winding 
 around the subclavian artery, behind the carotid ; the 
 left nerve winds around the arch of the aorta. The two 
 nerves continue their course upwards and inwards, be- 
 hind the common carotids and inferior thyroideal arte- 
 ries, by the side of the trachea to the larynx. In their 
 course, they first give off deep cardiac branches to the 
 cardiac plexus, filaments to the esophagus, thymus 
 gland, and pharynx; lastly, numerous branches to the 
 crico-arytenbidei laterales et postici, arytenoidei, et 
 thyro-arytenoidei muscles, and to the mucous membrane 
 of the larynx. In the posterior mediastinum, the 
 nerves give off filaments, constituting four plexusses ; 
 (5) the anterior pulmonary, distributed to the fore part 
 of the bronchial tubes, and accompanying their ramifi- 
 cations in the substance of the lungs ; (6) the posterior 
 pulmonary winding along the posterior surface of these 
 tubes; (7) the smaller cesophageal, distributed to the 
 superior part of the aesophagus ; lastly, the greater ceso- 
 phageal which completely surrounds the oesophagus, and 
 frequently forming small ganglia. In the abdomen the 
 right nerve passes behind the cardiac orifice of the sto- 
 mach, and is distributed to the posterior surface of this 
 
265 
 
 viscus, giving branches to the greater and smaller cur- 
 vature of the stomach, to the duodenum, and pancreas, 
 communicating with the coronary and solar plexuses of 
 the great sympathetic nerve. This distribution of the 
 nerve, by some anatomists, has been described as the 
 
 (9) posterior cesophageal plexus. The left nerve passes 
 in front of the cardia, and bends along the smaller cur- 
 vature towards the pylorus, is distributed to the ante- 
 rior surface of the stomach, under the name of the 
 
 (10) anterior cesophageal plexus, and freely communi- 
 cates with the posterior and hepatic plexuses. 
 
 From the numerous communications of the pneumo- 
 gastric nerves, they have sometimes been called the 
 middle sympathetics. 
 
 (1) Nervus pharyngeus (6) Plexus pulmonalis pos- 
 
 (2) Nervus laryngeus siu terior 
 
 perior (7) Plexus aesophageus mi- 
 
 (3) Nervi cardiaci superfi- nor 
 
 ciales (8) Plexus aesophageus 
 
 (4) Nervus laryngeus in- major 
 
 ferior vel recurrens (9) Plexus a3sophageus 
 5) Plexus pulmonalis aiv- posterior 
 
 terior (10) Plexus aesophageus 
 
 anterior. 
 
 This nerve influences all the motions ancj functions 
 of the parts to which it is distributed, connected with 
 respiration. The voice depends importantly upon its 
 influence ; division of the laryngeal nerves is attended 
 with loss of voice. Aneurism of the aorta, of the com- 
 mon carotid, enlarged thyroid, and lymphatic glands of 
 the neck, from pressure on the recurrent laryngeal 
 nerves more or less affeqt the tone of the voice. 
 
 3A 
 
266 
 
 NERVI RESPIRATORII TRACHELO- 
 DORSALES. 
 
 (Nervi Accessorii* Willis.) 
 
 The Respiratory Nerves of the Neck, or Accessory 
 Nerves, arise from the respiratory tracks, opposite the 
 fourth cervical vertebrae; each nerve enters the cranium, 
 by the foramen magnum, and almost immediately passes 
 out of that cavity, by the foramen lacerum basis cranii, 
 in company with the pneumo-gastric, and glosso-pha- 
 ryngeal nerves ; it continues its course behind the in- 
 ternal jugular vein, and perforates the upper third of 
 the sterno-cleido-mastoideus muscle ; is distributed to 
 these muscles, platysma myoides, and integuments. It 
 gives branches of communication at its exit from the 
 cranium, to the great sympathetic, lingual, and pneumo- 
 gastric nerves. The division of the spinal accessory 
 nerve stops the respiratory motion of the mastoid and 
 trapezius muscles in forced inspiration. 
 
 NRRVI MOTORES LINGUA. 
 
 The Motory Nerves of the Tongue, the ninth pair of 
 some anatomists, arise from the corpus pyramidale (the 
 continuation of the tractus motorius}. Each nerve passes 
 through the foramen condyloideum anterius, and conti- 
 nues its course forwards and inwards, behind the inter- 
 nal jugular vein, in front of the two carotids, beneath 
 the digastricus muscle, above the os hybides, in front of 
 the hyo-glossus muscle, which separates it from the 
 lingual artery, to the tongue, taking a direction inwards, 
 forwards, and upwards, between the lingualis and ge- 
 nio-glossus muscles. In its course it describes an arch. 
 It gives off numerous filaments to the muscles of the 
 tongue, branches uniting with the great sympathetic, 
 
 * It is described by Gall and Spurzheim, as arising from the dorsal surface 
 of the medulla spinalis, but admitting as we must do, the minute researches of 
 these distinguished physiologists to be almost undoubted authority, 1 am con- 
 vinced, from careful and repeated examination, of the accuracy of Bell's state- 
 meat, that this nerve owes its origin to the respiratory track. 
 
267 
 
 glosso-pharyngeal, paeumo-gastric, and fifth pair of 
 nerves. From the convexity of the arch it gives off the 
 descendens noni, which passes downwards, and inwards, 
 in front of the carotid sheath, and is distributed to the 
 sterno-hyoid, thyroid, and omo-hyoid muscles, uniting 
 with branches from the phrenic nerve. 
 
 This nerve influences the motions of the tongue, and 
 does not afford the sense of taste. 
 
 NERVI INTO-THORACICI RESPIRATORII. 
 (Nervi Phrenici. Willis.) 
 
 The Phrenic Nerves are usually described as being 
 derived from the fourth cervical nerves, receiving a 
 branch from the third and the fifth; by Charles Bell 
 their orgin is derived from the tractus respiratorius. 
 Each nerve first lies between the scalenus anticus, and 
 rectus capitis anticus major, continues its course down 
 the neck on the inner margin of that muscle, enters 
 the chest between the subclavian artery and vein, de- 
 scends through that cavity over the pulmonary vessels in 
 front of the root of the lungs, between the pleura and la- 
 teral parts of the pericardium to the diaphragm. The right 
 nerve passes nearly vertically; independently of supplying 
 the diaphragm, it gives branches to the liver. The left 
 nerve is the longer, and winds over the apex of the 
 heart. The phrenic nerves are distributed to the dia. 
 phragm, and communicate with the great sympathetic 
 and pneumo-gastric nerves. The respiratory action of 
 the diaphragm depends upon the phrenic nerves. Inju- 
 ry of the spinal marrow, fracture and displacement of 
 the cervical vertebrae above the fourth, generally proves 
 a cause of instant death, from paralysis of the dia- 
 phragm. The immediate conjunction of the cervical 
 nerves with the phrenic, may account for the remark- 
 able contortions of the muscles of the neck in the disease 
 termed risus sardonicus. 
 
268 
 NERVI EXTO-THORACICI RESPIRATORIL 
 
 The external Respiratory Nerves of the Chest are 
 described as the descending branches of the cervical 
 plexus. I am inclined to believe with Bell that they 
 owe their origin to the tractus respiratorius, and that 
 the filaments of communication from the cervical nerves 
 ought not to be considered as forming the commencement 
 of these nerves. The external respiratory nerve, on 
 either side, passes beneath the clavicle, in front of the 
 axillary plexus to the external and lateral region of the 
 thorax, and is distributed to the intercostals and serratus 
 magnus muscles already minutely supplied by the inter- 
 costal branches from the dorsal nerves. The action of 
 these muscles in difficult inspiration, results from the 
 nervous influence derived from this important trunk. 
 
 OF THE SPINAL NERVES. 
 
 The Medulla Spinalis, in anatomical language, com 
 mences at the foramen magnum, passes down within 
 the spinal canal, and in the young subject terminates, 
 on the last dorsal vertebrae, but in the adult generally 
 on the second lumbar vertebra. The termination of the 
 spinal marrow is surrounded by numerous nerves, pro- 
 ceeding from the extremity, and from its forming a 
 resemblance to a horse's tail, it is termed the cauda 
 equina. 
 
 The coverings of the medulla spinalis are three in 
 number. The first is a firm, dense, tendinous structure, 
 belonging to the class of fibrous membranes, and is 
 termed the theca vertebralis ; it does not adhere to the 
 internal surface of the vertebral canal, a quantity of 
 cellular tissue intervening between it and the bone. It 
 possesses a slight degree of elasticity enabling it to 
 adapt itself to the curvatures of the spine. The second 
 is a thin, delicate, transparent membrane, polished and 
 constantly moistened by a serous fluid ; it belongs to 
 the class serous membranes, and is termed the tunica 
 arachnoides. The third is a loose, cellular, transparent 
 web, composed of minute ramifications of blood vessels 
 
connected together by cellular membrane, and is termed 
 the pia mater. 
 
 The medulla spinalis is composed of two similar 
 halves, divided by an anterior and posterior longitudinal 
 sulcus, and united by a commissure, or apparatus of 
 union. Each portion consists of three tracts, namely, 
 tractus motorius, respiratorius, et sensitivus. 
 
 A transverse section of the medulla spinalis shews 
 it to consist of a thin lamella of white matter enclosing 
 the grey or cineritious substance. The cineritious sub- 
 stance presents two lateral portions, each of crescentic 
 form ; their concavities looking outwards, their con- 
 vexities looking towards the middle line. The intimate 
 structure of the grey substance is unknown; Rysch, 
 Vieussens, and Haller regard it as a tissue of very fine 
 blood vessels. Albinus and Soemmering have proved 
 by their injections, that, besides very minute blood ves- 
 sels, there also Exists a peculiar substance in the cineri- 
 tious nervous mass. The second, or white, substance, 
 is essentially fibrous. Some anatomists have maintained 
 it to be solid ; others have said that it was tubular ; Sir 
 E. Home, that it was composed of globules. The ves- 
 sels of the medulla spinalis are on either side an anteri- 
 or and posterior artery, derived from the vertebral; all 
 the arteries in the neighbourhood of the spine send in 
 branches through the intervertebral foramina. The 
 veins are very remarkable ; they do not present a con- 
 tinuous canal, but rather resemble a chain of short veins 
 linked together: they terminate principally in two 
 sinuses, sinus venosi, by the side of the foramen mag- 
 num. 
 
 The medulla spinalis is not of the same size through- 
 out its course ; it is expanded in the lower part of the 
 cervical vertebrae, contracted in the dorsal, expanded in 
 the lumbar vertebrae. The reason of these two expan- 
 sions may be thus explained, the nerves distributed to 
 the upper extremity, come off from the lower part of 
 the neck ; those to the lower extremity, from the top 
 of the loins. 
 
 2A 3 
 
270 
 
 Of the Cervical Nerves. 
 
 NERVUS CERVICALIS PRIMUS. 
 
 CPremiere pair trachelienne. Chauss.) 
 f (Nervus sub-occipitalis. Winslow.) 
 (Nervus decimi paris. Willis). 
 
 The first pair of Cervical Nerves, or sub-occipital, 
 arises by two roots from the anterior and posterior co- 
 lumn of the medulla spinalis ; the posterior filaments 
 having formed the ganglion, are joined by the anterior. 
 The nervous trunk, on either side, passes from the ver- 
 tebral canal, between the os occipitis and atlas, and then 
 divides into anterior and posterior branches. The an- 
 terior branch passes on the outer side of the vertebral 
 artery, above the transverse process of the atlas, between 
 the capitis lateralis and anticus minor : it gives off a 
 descending branch, which is joined by an ascending fila- 
 ment from the second cervical, forming as it were, a 
 loop embracing the atlas ; branches to the rectus capitis 
 lateralis, anticus major and minor muscles, and com- 
 municates with the great sympathetic, pneumo-gastric, 
 and lingual nerves. The posterior branch, the largest, 
 passes backwards into the triangular space between the 
 obliqui and recti capitis postici muscles, and divides into 
 three principal branches, a superior, distributed to the 
 recti and complexus ; a second, to the obliquus capitis ; 
 and a third, which descends and joins the posterior 
 branch of the cervical nerve. 
 
 NERVUS CERVICALIS SECUNDUS. 
 
 (Par primus cervicalis. Willis.) 
 
 The second pair of Cervical Nerves comes out between 
 the atlas and the vertebra dentata. Each nerve imme-. 
 diately divides into two branches, an anterior and pos- 
 terior : ; the posterior branch is the largest, and passes 
 backwards behind the inferior oblique and ccmplexus 
 muscles, towards its internal margin, when it becomes 
 
271 
 
 sub-cutaneous : it gives off branches to the muscles of 
 the back of the neck, also to the integuments, and com. 
 municates with the sub-occipital, posterior aural, and 
 cervical plexus. The anterior branch passes forwards, 
 between the transverse processes of the first and second 
 cervical vertebrae, and gives off the five following 
 branches, owe joining the sub-occipital nerve; a second 
 to the first cervical ganglion of the great sympathetic ; 
 a third which gives filaments to the rectus capitis anti- 
 cus major, and joins the cervical plexus; a fourth to the 
 pneumo-gastric nerve; ajifth descending and concurring 
 to form the cervical plexus. 
 
 NERVUS CERVICALIS TERTIUS. 
 
 ( Par secundus cervicalis. Willis.) 
 
 The third pair of Cervical Nerves, having emerged 
 from the intervertebral foramina, divides into anterior 
 and posterior branches. The anterior branch communi- 
 cates with the second and fourth cervical nerves, with 
 the superior and middle ganglia of the great sympathe-, 
 tic, and also gives off numerous filaments to the rectus 
 capitis, anticus major and minor, and longus colli mus- 
 cles. The posterior branch perforates the complexus 
 and trapezius muscles, and becomes sub-cutaneous, and 
 is distributed to the adjacent parts. 
 
 NERVUS CERVICALIS QUARTUS.. 
 
 (Par tertius cervicalis. Willis.) 
 
 The fourth pair of Cervical Nerves emerges from the 
 vertebral canal, between the third and fourth cervical 
 vertebrae; its anterior branch communicates with the 
 third and fifth cervical nerves, and with the great sympa- 
 thetic; it also gives off a branch joining the into- thoracic 
 or phrenic, and assists in forming the cervical plexus. 
 The posterior branch is distributed to the trapezius, conu.. 
 plexus, and splenius muscles. 
 
272 
 
 NERVUS QUINTUS CERVICALIS. 
 (Par Quartus Cervicalis. WilHs.) 
 
 pair of Cervical Nerves comes out between 
 the fourth and fifth cervical vertebrae, its anterior branch 
 communicates with the fourth and the sixth cervical 
 nerves, with the phrenic and great sympathetic nerves ; 
 it gives off branches to the adjacent muscles, and contri- 
 butes to form the axillary plexus ; its posterior branch 
 is distributed to the complexus, splenius, and trapezius 
 muscles, and to the integuments and platysma myoides. 
 
 NERVUS SEXTUS CERVICALIS. 
 (Par Quintus Cervicalis. Willis.) 
 
 The sixth pair of Cervical Nerves comes out between 
 the fifth and sixth cervical vertebrae, its anterior branch 
 communicates with the neighbouring ganglia of the great 
 sympathetic, and assists in forming the brachial plexus ; 
 its posterior branch is distributed to the muscles and in- 
 teguments of the posterior cervical region. 
 
 NERVUS CERVICALIS SEPTIMUS. 
 
 ( Par Sextus Cervicalis. Willis.) 
 
 The seventh pair of Cervical Nerves comes out be- 
 tween the sixth and seventh cervical vertebrae ; its an. 
 terior branch joins the great sympathetic nerve, and 
 sends off filaments to the adjacent parts ; its posterior 
 branch is distributed to the muscles, at the inferior part 
 of the neck, and superior part of the back. 
 
273 
 NERVUS CERVICALIS OCTAVUS. 
 
 ( Par Cervicalis Septimus. Willis.) 
 
 The eighth pair of Cervical Nerves comes out be- 
 tween the seventh cervical and first dorsal vertebrae, the 
 anterior branch communicates with the great sympa- 
 thetic nerve, and assists in forming the axillary plexus ; 
 the posterior branch is distributed to the adjacent 
 muscles. 
 
 CERVICAL PLEXUS. 
 
 The anterior branches of the four superior cervical 
 nerves form the cervical plexus, with filaments from 
 the great sympathetic nerve. It lies upon the scalenus 
 posticus, underneath the posterior margin of the sterno- 
 cleido mastoideus muscle. It communicates with the 
 superior and middle cervical ganglia of the great sym- 
 pathetic nerve, and gives off numerous branches which 
 may be arranged into (1) external, (2) internal (3) as- 
 cending, and (4) superficial. 
 
 (1) Nervi externi colli (3) Nervi ascendentes colli 
 
 (2) Nervi intend colli (4) Nervi superficiales colli 
 
 The External Descending Branches are four or five 
 in number and have been divided into (1) supra clavi- 
 cular branch^ which passes under the platysma myoides, 
 on the lateral part of the neck, in front of the clavicle, 
 and is distributed to the pectoralis major ; (2) sub-clavi- 
 cular branch, which descends between the trapezius, 
 and sterno-cleido-rnastb'ideus, underneath the clavicle, 
 into the axilla, and is distributed to the omo-hyoideus 
 subscapularis, and serratus magnus j (3) super acromiai 
 branch which passes along the inner margin of the tra- 
 pezius, and is eventually distributed to the deltoid mus- 
 cle; (4) deep branches to the trapezius, rhomboidei, 
 levator anguli scapulas muscles. 
 
274 
 
 (1) Nervus super-clavicula- (3) Nervus supra acromi- 
 
 ris alls 
 
 (2) Nervus sub-clavicula- (4) Nervi superficiales colli 
 
 ris 
 
 The internal descending branches pass inwards, under- 
 neath the sterno-cleido-mastoid muscle, and are distri- 
 buted to the adjacent parts, and communicate with the 
 lingual nerve. 
 
 The ascending branches have been divided into (1) 
 mastoid, and (2) auricular branches; the former ascends 
 on the posterior edge of the sterno-cleido-mastoideus, 
 trapezius, and occipito frontalis ; the latter, the auricu- 
 lar branch is reflected over the posterior branch of the 
 sterno mastoid muscle towards the angle of the jaw ; 
 it divides into numerous filaments distributed to the 
 parotid gland, to both surfaces of the auricle, to the 
 meatus externus, and to the integuments ; it communi- 
 cates with the facial and inferior maxillary nerves. 
 
 (2.) Nervus zygomatico- (1.) Nervus occipito-auri- 
 auricularis cularis 
 
 The superficial branch crosses the sterno-cleido mas- 
 toid muscle under the platysma myoide^, and subdivides 
 into ascending and descending branches distributed to 
 the integuments and platysma myoides. 
 
 AXILLARY PLEXUS. 
 
 The Axillary Plexus is formed by the anterior 
 branches of the cervical and first dorsal nerves; they 
 pass downwards and outwards between the anterior and 
 middle scaleni muscles, then beneath the clavicle and 
 subclavius muscle into the axilla. In the neck the axil- 
 lary plexus is placed above, and to the outer side of the 
 subclavian artery, except the dorsal nerve, which is 
 behind; lower down, the plexus completely surrounds 
 the continued trunk of the artery. In the formation of 
 the plexus, the filaments of the fifth and sixth cervical 
 nerves unite and form a single cord : the eighth and first 
 
275 
 
 dorsal, also, unite and form a trunk : the seventh cervi- 
 cal proceeds between the two, and divides into two cords, 
 one of which is connected with both nerves. From the 
 axillary plexus are derived the nerves of the superior 
 extremity, namely 
 
 1. Xervi thoracici 6. Nervus minus internus 
 
 2. Nervus scapularis cutaneus 
 
 3. Nervus subscapularis 9. Nervus externus mus- 
 
 4. Nervus axillaris culo cutaneus 
 
 5. Nervus internus cuta- 8. Nervus medianus 
 
 neus 7- Nervus radialis 
 
 10. Nervus ulnaris 
 
 Before the above nerves are given off, small filaments 
 are sent off to the great sympathetic and phrenic 
 nerves. 
 
 1. The thoracic nerves (nerfs sterno-thoraciques. 
 Chauss.) are two or three in number, and may be dis- 
 tinguished into anterior and posterior branches. The 
 anterior branch arises from the seventh pair, receiving 
 a filament from the eight and first dorsal ; it divides 
 into branches which pass in front and behind the clavicle, 
 and are distributed to the subclavius and pectorales 
 muscles, communicating with the intercostals and axil- 
 ary nerves : the posterior branch comes off from the 
 fifth and sixth pair, receiving a filament from the 
 seventh, it passes behind the axillary vessels, and is 
 distributed to the serratus magnus. 
 
 2. The Supra-scapulary Nerve comes off from the 
 fifth cervical nerve, it passes outwards, in company with 
 the supra-scapular artery, to the coracoid notch of the 
 scapula, enters the fossa supra spinata, beneath the co- 
 raco costdideum ligament, and is distributed to the spi- 
 nate and teres minor muscles. 
 
 3. The Sub-scapulary Nerve or Nerves, vary in num- 
 ber, are irregular in their origin, and are distributed 
 to the subscapularis, teres major, and latissimus dorsi 
 muscles. 
 
 4. The Axillary, or Circumflex Nerve (nerf. scapulo- 
 humeraL Chauss.) arises from the two last cervical 
 nerves, and first dorsal; it winds outwards over the 
 subscapularis, in company with the posterior circumflex 
 
276 
 
 artery, beneath the triceps, above the insertion of the 
 teres major, and latissimus dorsi, and divides into fila- 
 ments distributed to the deltoid and infra spinatus mus- 
 cles. In dislocation of the head of the humerus, into 
 the axilla, this nerve is sometimes compressed, producing 
 paralysis of the deltoid, and consequently want of power 
 to raise the arm. 
 
 5. The Internal Cutaneous Nerve (nerf.cubito-cutane. 
 Chauss.) arises from the eighth cervical, and first dorsal 
 nerve, and passes down under the brachial aponeurosis, 
 on the inner side of the fore-arm, parallel to the basilic 
 vein as it descends it becomes more superficial, and 
 about the middle of the arm divides into two branches 
 external and internal. (1) The external branch, the 
 smallest, pierces the brachial aponeurosis, continues its 
 course on the inner edge of the biceps, over the middle 
 of the bend of the arm, and may be traced between the 
 integuments, and anti-brachial fascia, as far as the wrist. 
 It communicates with the musculo-cutaneus and spiral 
 nerves, and usually passes at the bend of the elbow, be 
 hind the medium basilic vein, sometimes in front 
 (2) The internal branch, the largest, accompanies the 
 basilic vein, and above the inner condyle divides into 
 two branches ; one passes obliquely over the anterior 
 muscles of the fore-arm, and is distributed to the inte- 
 guments, on the inner and anterior part, as far as the 
 wrist, the other passes behind the inner condyle, and 
 continues its course beneath the integuments posteriorly, 
 and may be traced to the dorsum of the hand, and to 
 the little finger. These branches communicate with 
 the ulnar nerve. 
 
 (1) Ramus externus . (2) Ramus internus 
 
 6. The internal cutaneous nerve of Wrisberg is a small 
 filament, passing on the inner side of the preceding 
 nerve, and is distributed to the integuments covering 
 the triceps. 
 
 7 The external cutaneous nerve (nervus 'musculo- 
 cutaneus. Saemen. Nerf radio cutane. Chauss) arises 
 from the fifth and sixth cervical, and joins by a fila- 
 ment the median nerve: it passes outwards and down- 
 wards between the coraco-brachialis, and continues its 
 
277 
 
 course between the biceps and bracbialis internus : at 
 the lower part of the arm it becomes subcutaneous, and 
 crosses the middle of the bend of the arm under the 
 median cephalic vein, and descends as far as the wrist, 
 along the outer border of the fore-arm, between the in- 
 teguments and anti-brachial fascia. It gives off in its 
 course filaments to the triceps, brachialis internus, and 
 integument at the wrist, numerous twigs distributed to 
 the dorsum and palm of the hand, communicating with 
 the superficial branches of the ulnar, radial, and cuta- 
 neous internus nerves. 
 
 8. The Median Nerve (nerf median digital. Chauss.) 
 arises by a double root from the two last cervical, ana 
 first dorsal nerves, receiving a branch from the fifth and 
 sixth; it descends obliquely outwards, on the inner 
 edge of the biceps, as far as the bend of the elbow, 
 placed first on the outer side of the brachial artery, af- 
 terwards in front, lastly on its inner side. At the bend 
 of the elbow it passes over the insertion of the brachialis 
 anticus muscle, between the two origins of the pronator 
 radii teres, and continues its course along the fore-arm, 
 between the flexor digitorum sublimis, and flexor pro- 
 fundus muscles, to the wrist, and lastly, expanding and 
 becoming thicker, it accompanies their tendons under 
 the anterior carpal ligament, towards the upper part of 
 the metacarpal bones, where it divides into its digital 
 branches. At the upper part of its course it gives off 
 no branches, at the bend of the elbow numerous fila- 
 ments to the pronators, and flexor muscles; it then 
 gives off (1) the internal interosseous nerve, which de- 
 scends along the anterior surface of the interosseous li- 
 gament, between the flexor longus pollicis, and flexor 
 profundus, to the superior margin of the pronator qua- 
 dratus, and having sent off filaments to this muscle, 
 winds backwards through the lower opening of the 
 interosseous ligament, and is distributed to the dorsum 
 of the hand, communicating with the filaments of the 
 radial muscle. At the lower part of the fore-arm it 
 sends off the (2) cutaneous palmar branch, which passes 
 between the flexor tendons, in front of the annular li- 
 gament, and is distributed to the integuments of the 
 palm of the hand. (3) The digital branches are five in 
 number. The Jlrst digital branch is distributed to the 
 
 2B 
 
278 
 
 flexor ossis metacarpi pollicis, abductor pollicis, and 
 flexor brevis muscles, and continues its course along the 
 outer margin of the thumb. The second digital branch 
 supplies the abductor pollicis, and inner margin of the 
 thumb. The third digital branch runs along the outer 
 margin of the index finger, and furnishes filaments to 
 the interossei and lumbricales muscles. The fourth digi- 
 tal branch divides into two filaments, one to the inner 
 margin of the index finger, the other to the outer mar- 
 gin of the middle finger. The fifth digital branch 
 gives off first, a filament which joins the ulnar nerve, 
 and then sub-divides into two branches, one to the in- 
 ner margin of the middle finger, the other to the outer 
 margin of the ring finger. All the digital branches 
 furnish filaments to the integuments and muscles of the 
 palm of the hand, and accompany the collateral arteries 
 of the fingers. 
 
 (1) Nervus interosseus in- (2) Nervus palmaris cuta- 
 ternus neus 
 
 (3) Quinti nervi digitales. 
 
 9. The Radial Nerve (radio-digital. Chauss.) arises 
 from the four last branches of the brachial plexus ; it 
 winds backwards between the long and second head of 
 the triceps, below the insertion of the deltoid, and 
 continues its course, first along the external border of 
 the humerus, then between the brachialis anticus and 
 supinator radii longus muscles, and proceeds over the 
 radio-humeral articulation, where it divides into an 
 . anterior or superficial branch, into a posterior or deep 
 branch. It first sends off filaments to the triceps, 
 and anconeus muscles; next (1) the middle external cuta- 
 neous branch to the integuments of the external and 
 posterior parts of the fore arm, and may be traced as 
 far as the thumb, where it communicates with the 
 external cutaneous nerve. (2) The anterior or super- 
 ficial branch accompanies the radial artery about two 
 hirds on the fore arm on its outer side; first between 
 the two supinator muscles, when it becomes superficial, 
 and passes behind the tendon of the supinator longus, to 
 the back of the carpus; here it divides into two branches, 
 an external, the smaller; an internal, the larger; and 
 
279 
 
 at this point it is situated between the integuments and 
 tendons of the extensor ossis metacarpi pollicis, and 
 primi internodii : the external branch is distributed to 
 the inner margin of the thumb, and outer margin of 
 the fore finger; the internal branch supplies the inner 
 margin of the fore finger, and external margin of the 
 middle finger, and communicates with the ulnar nerve. 
 The superficial and digital branches in their course give 
 off filaments to the adjacent muscles. (3) The posterior 
 or deep branch directs itself obliquely outwards beneath 
 the supinator longus and radial extensors, and divides 
 into branches distributed to the muscles ; one branch 
 in particular (external interosseal nerve) accompanies 
 the posterior interosseal artery, and may be traced 
 beneath the annular ligament to the back part of the 
 carpus. 
 
 (1) Nervus cutaneus me- (2) Nervus superficialis 
 dius (3) Nervus profundus 
 
 10. The Ulnar Nerve (nerf cubito-digital. Chauss.) 
 arises from the two last branches of the brachial plexus; 
 it descends along the anterior and inner part of the 
 triceps muscle, behind the inner condyle, between the 
 two origins of the flexor carpi ulnaris, and continues 
 its course on the inner side of the ulnar artery, along 
 the anterior and inner part of the fore arm, between 
 the flexor carpi ulnaris and flexor profundus. In its 
 course it gives off branches to the triceps, integuments 
 of the fore arm, to the deep and superficial flexor mus- 
 cles, and communicates by a slender filament with the 
 meolian nerve. The ulnar nerve, about an inch and a 
 half above the wrist joint, divides into two branches 
 the palmar and dorsal nerves. (1) The palmar nerve 
 may be considered the continued trunk ; it passes into 
 the palm of the hand on the outer margin of the os 
 pisiforme, between the integuments and annular liga- 
 ment, and divides into deep and superficial branch. The 
 deep branch passes beneath the adductor minimi digiti, 
 and bends towards the root of the metacarpal bone of 
 the fore finger, beneath the flexor tendons, forming an 
 arch, from which numerous filaments pass to the lum, 
 bricales, interossei, and adductor muscles of the thumb: 
 
280 
 
 the superficial branch gives off twigs to the muscles of 
 the little finger, and inner margin of the ring finger. 
 (2) The dorsal nerve winds around the ulna to the 
 back of the carpus, beneath the tendon of the flexor 
 carpi ulnaris, and is distributed to the integuments of 
 the carpus, and gives off branches to both sides of the 
 little finger, ring finger, and ulnar side of the middle 
 finger, communicating with the radial nerve. 
 
 (1) Nervus palmaris (2) Nervus dorsalis 
 
 Of the Dorsal Nerves. 
 
 The Dorsal Nerves are twelve in number, and are 
 designated by their numerical names, counting from 
 above downwards ; they arise by double roots, possess 
 ganglia, and are endowed with the double function of 
 sensation and voluntary motion. Emerging from the 
 intervertebral foramina, each nerve divides into two 
 branches a posterior, or dorsal, and an anterior, or 
 intercostal. The posterior branches, the smallest, pass 
 backwards between the transverse processes of the dor- 
 sal vertebrae, under the semi-spinalis, and are distributed 
 to the muscles and integuments of the back and loins. 
 The anterior branches communicate with the great sym- 
 pathetic nerve, with each other, and are distributed to 
 the muscles of the fore arm, mammae, fore and lateral 
 parts of the chest, diaphragm, and to the abdominal and 
 lumbar muscles. 
 
 NERVUS DORSALIS PRIMUS. 
 
 The anterior branch is the largest, and communicates 
 with the great sympathetic nerve, and divides into two 
 filaments a superior, which unites with the eighth 
 cervical nerve and assists in forming the axillary plexus, 
 and an inferior, which runs along the under edge of the 
 first rib : the posterior branch is small, and communi- 
 cates with the cervical nerves. 
 
di. tii. ti. ti. ti. mi. vi. ni. mi. mi. mi. 
 
 NERVI 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 DORSALES 
 
 anterior branches communicate with the great 
 sympathetic nerve, are lodged in the grooves in the 
 lower margins of the corresponding ribs, beneath the 
 pleura, between the two layers of intercostal muscles, and 
 are reflected upon the intercostal and mammary arteries; 
 they vary in their distribution. The posterior branches 
 run backwards between the transverse processes, and 
 divide into internal and external filaments ; the former 
 are distributed to the muscles occupying^the vertebral 
 grooves ; the latter to the latissimi dorsi, trapezii, serrati 
 postici, rhomboidei muscles, and to the integuments. 
 
 The anterior branches of the second and third dorsal 
 nerves give off the intercosto-humeral branch, which per- 
 forates the external intercostal muscle, crosses the axilla, 
 and descends along the inner surface of the arm beneath 
 the integuments as far as the elbow. 
 
 The anterior branches of the fourth, fifth, sixth and 
 seventh dorsal nerves, about the middle of the ribs, divide 
 into external and internal filaments : the former are 
 distributed to the external oblique muscles and integu- 
 ments of the abdomen ; the latter to the pectoral mus- 
 cles, mammae, and to the integuments of the thorax. 
 
 The anterior branches of the eighth, ninth, tenth, and 
 eleventh dorsal nerves, at the anterior third of the ribs, 
 separate into two sets of filaments external, which are 
 distributed to the serrati magni, external oblique mus-, 
 cles, and to the integuments of the lateral parts of the 
 chest and abdomen ; and internal, which supply the 
 intercostal spaces and abdominal muscles. 
 
 The anterior branch of the twelfth dorsal nerve first 
 gives off filaments of communication with the great 
 sympathetic and first lumbar nerves, small twigs to the 
 diaphragm and quadrati lumborum muscles, and then, 
 divides into an external branch, which is distributed ta 
 the oblique muscles and integuments of the abdomen ;. 
 and an internal branch, supplying the internal oblique^ 
 transversales, recti, and pyramidales muscles. 
 
 2B3 
 
282 
 Of the Lumbar Nerves. 
 
 The Lumbar Nerves are five in number ; they arise 
 from the lower part of the medulla spinalis, by double 
 roots, and constitute, with the sacral nerves, the corda 
 equina. The posterior roots having expanded into gan- 
 glia, in the intervertebral foramina, are then joined by 
 the anterior filaments, the trunk thus formed, immedi- 
 ately divides in anterior branches (rami abdominales) 
 and posterior branches (rami lumbales.) 
 
 The posterior branches pass backwards, between the 
 transverse processes of the lumbar vertebrae and are dis- 
 tributed to the muscles and integuments of the loins, 
 and to the integuments of the upper and back part of 
 the thigh. The anterior branches communicate with 
 each other, with the twelfth dorsal, first sacral, and 
 great sympathetic nerves, and their union constitutes 
 the lumbo abdominal plexus. 
 
 NERVUS LUMBALIS PRIMUS. 
 
 The anterior branch of the Jirst Lumbar Nlerve re- 
 ceives a branch from the last dorsal, and sends a filament 
 to the great sympathetic and second lumbar nerves; it 
 gives off the inguinal nerves (nerfs inguino-cutanes. 
 Chauss.) generally three in number. (1) The superior 
 inguinal (nerf ilio-scrotal. Chauss.) runs obliquely 
 outwards in front of the psoas magnus, and quadratus 
 lumborum muscles to the posterior part of the crista of 
 the ileum, where it divides into two branches, external 
 and internal, the former is distributed to the muscles of 
 the abdomen, the latter continues its course, first along 
 the inner border of the crista of the ileum, then along 
 the under margin of Poupart's ligament, through the 
 external ring, and is distributed to the scrotum in the 
 male, and labia pudendi, in the female. (2) The mid- 
 dle branch, (nerf inguino-cutane ) crosses the psoas 
 magnus, passes obliquely along its external border, be- 
 neath the peritoneum to the anterior superior spinous 
 process of the ileum ; in its course it gives off filaments 
 to the psoffi, quadratus, lumborum, iliacus internus mus- 
 
283 
 
 cles, to the integuments of the groin and scrotum, and 
 to the superior and external region of the thigh. (3) The 
 internal branch ( sperm aticus externus. Soemmer. Nerf 
 genito-crural. Chauss.) perforates the psoas magnus, 
 and descends vertically beneath the peritoneum to the 
 crural arch, and above the internal ring divides into two 
 branches, one of which accompanies the spermatic cord, 
 and is distributed to the pubes, scrotum, and testes in 
 the male, to the round ligament of the uterus, and labia 
 pudendi in the female, the other branch accompanies the 
 femoral vessels, and passes through the fascia lata to the 
 integuments of the internal part of the thigh. 
 
 (1) Nervus inguinalis su- (2) Nervus inguinalis me- 
 perior dius 
 
 (3) Nervus inguinalis internus. 
 
 NERVUS LUMBALIS SECUNDUS. 
 
 The anterior branch of the second Lumbar Nerve, 
 communicates with the preceding, with the third lumbar, 
 and with the great sympathetic nerve; it gives off the 
 external cutaneous branch (nerf cutane externe de la 
 cuisse. Chauss.) which transverses the psoas magnus, 
 and runs obliquely outwards, over the iliacus internus, 
 to the anterior superior spinous process of the ileum, 
 where it divides into external and internal branches ; 
 the former continues its course between the anterior 
 spinous processes of the ileum, perforates the fascia lata, 
 and is distributed to the integuments of the outer and 
 back part of the thigh ; the internal passes beneath 
 Poupart's ligament, perforates the femoral aponeurosis, 
 and is distributed to the integuments on the inner and 
 fore-part of the thigh communicating with filaments 
 from the crural nerves. 
 
 The posterior branch of the second Lumbar Nerve is 
 distributed to the sacro-lumbalis, longissimus dorsi, and 
 to the integuments of the superior and posterior part of 
 the thigh. 
 
284 
 NERVUS LUMBALIS TERTIUS. 
 
 The anterior branch of the third Lumbar Nerve, com- 
 municates with the preceding nerves, with the great 
 sympathetic, and assists in forming the lumbar plexus. 
 The posterior branch is distributed to the integuments 
 and muscles of the loins. 
 
 NERVUS LUMBALIS QUARTUS. 
 
 The anterior branch of the fourth Lumbar Nerve com. 
 municates with the preceding, and with the lumbar 
 ganglia of the sympathetic, and joins the lumbar plexus. 
 The posterior branch supplies the muscles and integu- 
 ment of the loins. 
 
 NERVUS LUMBALIS QUINTUS. 
 
 The anterior branch of the fifth Lumbar Nerve com- 
 municates with the preceding nerves, with the neigh- 
 bouring ganglia of the great sympathetic, and assists in 
 forming the lumbar plexus ; it gives off the sacro-lum- 
 bar, which descends into the pelvis, in front of the sa- 
 crum, and unites with the great sciatic plexus, previously 
 sending off the superior gluteal nerve, which leaves the 
 pelvis above the pyriformis muscle, and is distributed 
 to the gluteus medius, and minimus, and to the fascia 
 lata. 
 
 The posterior branch of the fifth Lumbar Nerve is 
 distributed to the sacro spinalis, and nmltifidus spinae 
 muscle. 
 
285 
 PLEXUS LUMBO-ABDOMINALIS. 
 
 (Portio lombaire du plexus crural Chauss.) 
 
 The Lumbar Plexus is formed by the union of the 
 anterior branches of the five lumbar nerves, receiving 
 filaments from the last dorsal, first sacral and great 
 sympathetic nerves on the sides of the bodies of the 
 second, third, and fourth lumbar vertebrae, in front of 
 the transverse processes behind the psoas magnus mus- 
 cle. It gives off, having furnished filaments to the 
 psoae and iliacus internus muscles, the following nerves:* 
 
 1. Nervi crurales 2. Nervi obturatores 
 
 The anterior Crural Nerve (nerf femoro-proetibial. 
 Chauss.) is formed by the anterior branches of the four 
 nerves, beneath the psoas magnus ; it descends on the 
 outer border of that muscle, beneath Poupart's ligament, 
 on the iliac side of the femoral vessels, and divides into 
 superficial or cutaneous branches, and deep or muscular 
 branches ; in its course it gives off filaments to the 
 iliacus internus muscle. (1) The superficial branches 
 perforate the fascia, and are distributed to the integu- 
 ment, and accompany the saphena vein: (2) the deep 
 branches are divided into two sets, external and internal; 
 the former supply the extensor muscles and tensor 
 vaginae femoris ; the latter are distributed to the adduc- 
 tors, gracilis, pectineus, and sartorius muscles ; one 
 branch in particular, (3) nervus saphenus, (nerf tibio 
 cutane. Chauss.) accompanies the femoral artery on the 
 outer margin of its sheath till that vessel passes between 
 the adductor muscles into the popliteal space : the nerve 
 then continues its course beneath the sartorius, behind 
 the inner condyle, and, becoming subcutaneous, accom- 
 panies the saphena vein and its branches on the inner 
 and fore part of the leg, and is eventually distributed to 
 the dorsum of the foot. 
 
 * By some anatomists the plexus is described as giving off the following 
 nerves, already described. 
 
 1. Nervi inguinales 3. Nervi curales 
 
 2. Nervi cutanei externi 4. Nervi obturatores 
 
 5. Nervi lumbo-sacrales. 
 
286 
 
 (1) Nervi cutanei (2) Nervi musculares 
 
 (3) Nervus saphenus 
 
 The Obturator Nerve (nerf sous pubio-femoral. 
 Chauss.) is derived from the second, third, and fourth 
 lumbar nerves, and is situated between the psoas mag- 
 hus and last lumbar vertebra ; it descends along the 
 inner margin of that muscle, and continues its course in 
 front of the brim of the pelvis in company with the 
 obturator artery, to the opening in the thyroideal liga- 
 ment. It divides into internal branches, supplying the 
 obturator internus, levator ani muscles, and external 
 branches to the obturator externus, gracilis, pectinalis, 
 and adductor muscles, which communicate with the 
 muscular branches of the anterior crural nerve. 
 
 Of the Sacral Nerves. 
 
 The Sacral Nerves are five or six in number ; they 
 arise from the termination of the medulla spinalis, pos- 
 sess double roots, ganglia, and assist in forming the 
 corda equina: they follow an oblique course to the 
 foramina of the os sacrum, and divide into anterior and 
 posterior fasciculi. The posterior branches, the smallest, 
 communicate with the lumbar nerves, and are distri- 
 buted upon the back part of the sacrum to the gluter 
 muscles and to the integuments j the anterior branches 
 are united with each other, and with the ganglia of the 
 great sympathetic nerve. 
 
 The anterior branches of the first, second, and third 
 sacral nerves, with the two last lumbar, form the sciatic 
 plexus. From the anterior branches of the third and 
 fourth, filaments are sent to the hypo-gastric plexus : 
 lastly, the anterior branches of the fifth and sixth are 
 distributed to the coccygeus, sphincter, and levator ani 
 muscles. 
 
287 
 PLEXUS SACRALIS. 
 
 (Portia sacree du plexus crural. Chauss.) 
 
 The Sacral, or Sciatic Plexus, formed by the anterior 
 branches of the two last lumbar, and three or four 
 first sacral nerves, is situated on the anterior and lateral 
 part of the sacrum, in front of the pyramidalis muscle, 
 behind the hypogastric vessels, bladder and rectum, and 
 communicates above with the lumbar, below with the 
 hvpogastric plexuses.* 
 
 NERVUS SACRALIS PRIMUS. 
 
 The anterior branches of the first Sacral Nerve 
 unite with filaments from the two last lumbar and 
 form the sacro lumbar nerve, from which is derived the 
 superior gluteal branch already described ; the posterior 
 branch communicates with the lumbar filaments, and is 
 distributed to the back of the sacrum: the posterior 
 branch is distributed to the glutaei muscles and integu- 
 ments. 
 
 NERVI SACRALES SECUNDI ET TERTII. 
 
 The anterior branches of the second and third Sacral 
 Nerves send off from the back part (1) the inferior 
 gluteal, (nerf petit femoro-poplite. Chauss.) and (2) 
 pudic nerve (nerf ischio-penien. Chauss.) 
 
 (1) Nervus glujreus inferior (2) Nervus pudendo hse- 
 
 morrhoidalis 
 
 The inferior gluteal nerve leaves the pelvis by the 
 
 * By some anatomists the sacral plexus is considered to give off 
 
 1 Nervus glutaeus inferior 5 Nervi vesicales 
 
 2 Nervus pudendo haemorrhoidalis 6 Nervi uterini 
 
 3 Nervus femoro-cutaneus 7 Nervi vaginales 
 
 4 Nervi hoemorrhoidales medii 8 Nervus Ischiadicus 
 
288 
 
 sciatic notch below the pyriformis muscle ; it sends off 
 (1) muscular branches to the glutaei, (2) sciatic branch, 
 (nerf cutane sous pelvienne Chauss.) which passes be- 
 neath the tuberosity of the ischium, and is distributed 
 to the perineum, urethra, integuments of the penis and 
 scrotum in the male, to the labia pudendi in the female, 
 (3) crural branch (nerffemoro cutane posterior,} which 
 descends beneath the fascia lata along the posterior part 
 of the thigh, as far as the popliteal space, where, per- 
 forating the fascia, it divides into subcutaneous branches 
 and may be traced beneath the integuments as far as 
 the heel. 
 
 (1) Nervus glutseus medius et inferior 
 
 (2) Nervus pudendalis longus inferior 
 
 (3) Nervus femoro-cutaneus posterior. 
 
 The Pudic Nerve passes out of the pelvis, below the 
 pyriformis muscle, re-enters that cavity between the 
 two sacro-sciatic ligaments, in company with the inter- 
 nal pudic artery, and divides into two branches, superior 
 and inferior. (1) The superior branch ascends along 
 the ramus of the ischium and pubis, to the symphysis, 
 continues its course along the dorsum of the penis, 
 (nervus dorsalis penis) and is distributed in the male 
 to the integuments of the penis, to the bulb, urethra, 
 and glans ; to the labia pudendi, clitoris, and mons ve- 
 neris in the female. (2) The inferior branch (nerf 
 hcemorrhbidal inferieur. Chauss.) runs upwards between 
 the accelerator urinae, and erector penis, along the peri- 
 neum, and supplies the muscles of the perineum, infe- 
 rior extremity of the rectum and scrotum in the male, 
 the labia pudendi in the female. 
 
 (1) Nervus pudendus su- (2) Nervus haemorrhbidalis 
 perior inferior. 
 
 The posterior branches of the second and third Lumbar 
 Nerves are distributed to the glutaa muscles, and to the 
 integuments of the hip and margin of the anus. 
 
NERVI SACRALES TERTII ET QUARTI. 
 
 The anterior branches of the third and fourth Sacral 
 Nerves give off the (1) middle hcemorrhoidal nerves 
 (nerf hemorrhoidaux moyens. Chauss.) to the sigmoid 
 flexure of the colon,, rectum, sphincter, and levator ani 
 muscles. (2) Vesical nerves to the bladder, prostate 
 gland, and vesiculae seminales ; in the female (3) ute- 
 rine and vaginal branches to the fundus, body, and neck 
 of the uterus, and to the lateral parts of the vagina. 
 
 (1) Nervi hsemorrhoidales (3) Nervi uterini et vagi- 
 
 medii nales 
 
 (2) Nervi vesicales 
 
 The posterior branches of the third and fourth Sacral 
 Nerves, are precisely similar in their distribution to 
 those of the preceding nerves. 
 
 NERVI SACRALES QUINTI ET SEXTI. 
 
 The anterior branches of the Jifih aad sixth Sacral 
 Nerves pass between the sacrum and os coccygis, and 
 do not enter into the formation of the sciatic plexus, 
 and are distributed as already described ; the posterior 
 branches lose themselves around the anus. 
 
 NERVUS ISCHIADIACUS. 
 
 CNerf grand femoro-poplite. Chauss.) 
 
 The great Sciatic Nerve, considered by some anato- 
 mists as the continuation of the great sciatic plexus, 
 descends in front of the pyramidalis muscle, leaves the 
 pelvis between it and the superior gemellus, through 
 the great sciatic notch; sometimes it perforates the 
 pyramidalis. On emerging from the pelvis, it passes 
 obliquely outwards, along the posterior part of the 
 thigh, first below the tuber ischii and trochanter major, 
 sc 
 
290 
 
 behind the small rotators ; it is then situated superiorly 
 in front of the glutaeus maximus, afterwards in front of 
 the long head of the biceps and semitendinosus ; at the 
 lower part of its course the former muscle is placed on 
 its outer side, the latter with the semitendinosus on its 
 inner. About the inferior third of the thigh it divides 
 into two branches, (1) an external (2) and internal. 
 In its course it gives off small branches to the scrotum 
 of the male, and to the labia of the female, to the 
 flexor and adductor muscles; (3) a few cutaneous branches 
 to the integuments of the posterior part of the thigh. 
 
 (1) Nervus peroneus (2) Nervus tibialis 
 
 (3) Nervi cutanei inferiores. 
 
 (2) The external branch, fibular, peroneal nerve, 
 (branche peroniere du grand femoro-poplite. Chauss.) 
 the smaller, passes obliquely outwards, with the tendon 
 of the biceps behind the outer condyle, to the posterior 
 surface of the head of the fibula, where it divides into 
 two branches, the musculo-cutaneous and the anterior 
 tibial. Before its division, it gives off (1) articular 
 branches, distributed to the knee joint ; (2) cutaneous 
 branches which descend beneath the integument along 
 the outer part of the leg, and join the external saphenus 
 nerve. 
 
 (3) The musculo cutaneous branche (nerf pretibio 
 digital. Chauss.) runs obliquely inwards and for- 
 wards, between the peroneus longus and extensor longus 
 digitorum; at the inferior third of the leg it pierces the 
 aponeurosis, and divides into two branches, external and 
 internal; the former is distributed to the three outer 
 toes, the latter to the great toe and inner side of the 
 second toe. 
 
 (4) The anterior tibial nerve (nerf prcetibio sous 
 plantaire. Chauss.) passes between the peroneus longus 
 and common extensors of the toes, and descends in com- 
 pany with the anterior tibial artery before the interos- 
 seous ligament, passes under the anterior annular liga- 
 ment, and divides into two branches distributed to the 
 interossei muscles, extensor brevis and integuments. In 
 its course it gives off muscular branches to the tibialis 
 anticus, peronei, and extensor muscles, and tibio tarsal 
 articulation* 
 
291 
 
 (1) Kami articulares (3) Kami musculo cutanei 
 
 (2) Kami peroneo-cutanei (4) Nervus tibialis anticus 
 
 The internal branch. Posterior Tibial (branche tibiale 
 du nerf femoro-poplitc. Chauss.) descends nearly verti- 
 cally from the superior part of the popliteal space, to 
 the arch of the os calcis ; it first passes between the 
 heads of the gastrocnemii, behind the knee joint and 
 popliteus muscle, and continues its course on the outer 
 side of the posterior tibial artery, between the solaeus 
 and tibialis posticus, and flexor longus digitorum, co- 
 vered by the deep fascia ; at the lower part of the leg 
 it becomes more superficial, and passes into the hollow 
 of the os calcis, where it divides into two branches, ex, 
 ternal and internal plantar nerves. In its course it 
 gives off the (1) external saphenous nerve (nervus com- 
 municans tibice. Soemmer.) which descends beneath the 
 integuments, in company with the saphena minor vein, 
 and about the middle of the leg is joined by a branch 
 (nervus communicans fibulce) from the fibular nerve ; 
 these two nerves unite and form a single trunk (nervus 
 dorsalis pedis externus) which descends along the ex- 
 ternal margin of the tendo Achilles, behind the outer 
 malleolus, along the external margin of the foot, and 
 divides into two branches communicating with the ex- 
 ternal filaments of the musculo-cutaneous nerve and 
 distributed to the two outer toes. (2) Muscular branches 
 to the gastrocnemii, deep-seated muscles of the posterior 
 region of the leg. Malleolar branches to the tibio-tar- 
 sal articulation and to the integuments. (3) The ex- 
 ternal plantar nerve is the smallest, it passes forwards 
 and outwards, between the flexor brevis, and flexor ac- 
 cessorius, and divides into two branches, superficial and 
 deep ; the former is distributed to the flexor brevis mi- 
 nimi digiti, fourth lumbricalis, and to both sides of the 
 little toe, and outer side of the fourth toe ; the latter 
 supplies the adductor pollicis, and interossei muscles. 
 (4) The internal plantar nerve runs directly forwards, 
 on the side^of the tendon of the flexor longus pollicis, 
 above the- abductor pollicis, having given off numerous 
 small filaments to the flexors of the toes, divides into four 
 branches ; the first supplies the inner margin of the 
 great toe ; the second its external margin, and inner 
 
292 
 
 margin of the second toe ; the third the outer margin 
 of the second toe, and inner margin of the third toe ; 
 the fourth the external margin of the fourth toe. 
 
 (1) Nervus saphenus exter- (3) Nervus plantaris ex- 
 
 nus ternus 
 
 (2) Kami musculares (4) Nervus plantaris in- 
 
 ternus 
 
 Of the Nerves of Organic Life. 
 
 NERVI VIT^E ORGANIC^, NERVI VITALES, 
 NERVI VIT^E GANGLIONICL 
 
 (Nervi intercostalis. Vicuss.) 
 
 (Nerf tri-splanchmque. Chauss.) 
 
 (Nerfs des ganglions ou de la vie organique. Bichat.) 
 
 The action of the heart, the stomach,, and intestinal 
 canal is wholly independent of the will, and influenced 
 by the nerves of organic life. 
 
 The honour of pointing out this important distinction 
 has been assumed by Bichat,* but he has no claim to 
 it. Johnstone,t by a series of accurate experiments 
 and ingenious deductions, inferred and brought forwards 
 the uses of this system in the Philosophical Transactions 
 for the year 1764, which were translated into French 
 by Tissot, J in his Traite des Maladies Nerveuses, a long 
 time previous to the appearance of Bichat's work on 
 General Anatomy. A translation of the same disquisi- 
 tions was published in German by Kolpin, at Stettin, 
 in 1787 ; and the same opinions were adopted by Casi- 
 
 * " Aucun anatomiste n'a encore cosidere le system nerveux des ganglions 
 sous le point de vue sous lequel je vais le presenter." Anatomie generate 
 par Xan Bichat , 1801. 
 
 + "May we not reasonably conclude that ganglions are instruments by 
 which the motions of the heart and intestines are, from the earliest periods of 
 animal life, rendered uniformly involuntary, and that this is their use ? and is it 
 not probable that ganglions have some important use in secretion." Disqui- 
 sitions on the Nervous System, by James Johnstone, M.D. 1764. 
 
 t Traite des nerfs et de leur maladies par Tissot. 
 
 } Versuch uber den Nusen der JNervenknolten, Vo James Johnstone, 
 Stettin, 1787. 
 
mir,* at Manheim, in 1774. I have been led to these 
 remarks by a statement made by Dr. Cooke,t in his 
 work on this subject, " that new views of the relative 
 powers of the different parts of the nervous system, and 
 supported by ingenious and accurate experiments, had 
 been taken by Bichat." Charles Bell,J in his valuable 
 work on the nervous system, remarks, " that according 
 to Bichat, the ganglionic system of nerves is for those 
 thousand secret operations of the living body, which 
 may be called constitutional," the precise reasoning and 
 conclusions of Johnstone. 
 
 In the head, on the anterior part of the neck, in the 
 thoracic and abdominal cavities are a series of nervous 
 communications, termed ganglia, and these constitute a 
 secondary centre of nervous influence. The ganglia are 
 generally of a reddish hue, very distinct from that of 
 the nerves, sometimes rather grey. In texture they are 
 found to have no resemblance to the cerebral substance, 
 nor to that enclosed within the tubes of the nerves. 
 By modern anatomists they are described to be composed 
 of an infinite number of thin, white, medullary fila- 
 ments, which interweave with each other, and of a 
 reddish-grey, pulpy substance, differing from the grey 
 matter of the encephalo spinal mass, and deposited in a 
 kind of areolar tissue. The nervous filaments which 
 arise from the ganglia, do not appear to be a continua- 
 tion of their substance ; according to Cloquet, some of 
 these filaments are white, composed of fibrils, like the 
 encephalic nerves, and are surrounded with a neuri- 
 lemma ; others are reddish, or grey, and are destitute of 
 this coat. The gangb'a are minutely supplied with 
 blood vessels from the neighbouring arteries. Lym- 
 phatic vessels are distributed around the gang^, but do 
 not enter into their substance. The ganglia freely an- 
 astomose with the neighbouring nerves, arid lose them- 
 selves in the tissues of organs. Various opinions have 
 been advanced with respect to their ftractioris. Mekel, 
 Scarpa, Haase, and Zinn, have considered them as or- 
 gans merely destined to collect and distribute the nerves 
 
 * Haller de Hist Anat. 2 vols. p. 666. 
 
 4- Treatise on Nerrous Diseases, by John Cooke, M.D., p. 25, 1820. 
 
 : The Nervous Sjsteu of the Human Body, by Charles Bell, p. 11, 1630. 
 
 2C3 
 
294 
 
 of the ganglionic system. Johnstone conceives that the 
 different parts of the sympathetic nerves are the sources 
 of nervous influence, upon which circulation, secretion, 
 absorption, and the varied functions of the viscera de- 
 pend, and that the ganglia are laboratories of the ner- 
 vous energy. This opinion has been adopted by Wins- 
 low, Monro, Vieussens Barthez, Lobstein, and advo- 
 cated warmly, without acknowledgement by Bichat, 
 and may also be conceived to be the received opinion of 
 the present day. The nervous energy is supposed to be 
 diffused by the cellular tissue, in which the very minute 
 branches of the sympathetic nerves are lost. 
 
 By anatomists of this country, the ganglionic system 
 has been usualy described as commencing in the carotid 
 canal, by the vidian nerve, uniting with two or three 
 branches from the sixth pair ; it is, however, a system 
 distinct, and independent of the nerves proceeding from 
 the brain and medulla spinalis. It may be divided into 
 cranial, cervical, thoracic, and abdominal portions, pre- 
 senting a continuous trunk, formed by filaments of com- 
 munication with the different ganglia. 
 
 The ganglia have been divided by Bichat, into those 
 of the head, neck, chest, abdomen, and pelvis. 
 
 The ganglia of the head are the opthalmic, the 
 spheno-palatine, cavernous, naso-palatine, and sub-max- 
 
 OPTHALMIC GANGLION. 
 
 The Opthalmic, or Lenticular Ganglion^ is extremely 
 small, of a reddish colour, of a quadrangular shape, si- 
 tuated at the posterior part of the orbit, on the outer 
 side of the optic nerve ; superiorly and posteriorly, it 
 communicates by filaments with the nasal nerve (branch 
 of the opthalmic division of the fifth pair), inferiorly 
 with the third pair ; anteriorly it gives off the ciliary 
 nerves. 
 
 The ciliary nerves are of a reddish colour, are accom- 
 panied by filaments from the nasal nerve, and divide 
 into two sets, superior, and inferior ; the former pierce 
 the sclerotic, above the optic nerve, the latter beneath ; 
 both sets divide into numerous filaments, and form a. 
 
295 
 
 plexus around the ciliary body. Johnstone is enclined 
 to attribute the involuntary motion of the iris, to the 
 influence of this ganglion. 
 
 THE SPHENO-PALATINE GANGLION. 
 
 The Spheno-palatine, or MekeTs Ganglion, is situated 
 in the pterygo-maxillary fossa, of a reddish colour, of a 
 triangular shape, it gives off the superior (A), inferior 
 (B), internal (C), and posterior branches (D). 
 
 (A) Nervus anastomoticus (D) Nervus vidianus, (nervi 
 
 (B) Nervus palatinus quinti parts recurrens, 
 
 (C) Nervi spheno-palatini vel nervus pterygoideus) 
 
 (A) The Superior Branches are two in number, and 
 join the superior maxillary nerve, the second division of 
 the fifth pair. 
 
 (B) The Inferior Branches, the Palatine Nerves, de- 
 scend to reach the posterior palatine canal, and are dis- 
 tributed by numerous branches to the mucous mem. 
 brane of the mouth, and nares, and anastomose with the 
 naso-palatine ganglion. 
 
 (C) The Internal Branches, sphe?io-palatine nerves, 
 pass inwards by the spheno-palatine foramen, into the 
 nasal fossae, are distributed to the investing membrane 
 of the spongy bones, and septum narium, one branch in 
 particular, called by Scarpa, the naso-palatine nerve, 
 descends along the septum narium, to the upper opening 
 of the anterior palatine canal, where, uniting with its 
 fellow, it forms the naso-palatine ganglion, communi- 
 cating with the palatine nerves. 
 
 (D) The Posterior Branch, the Vidian, Pterygoid, or 
 Recurrent Branch of the fftli pair of Mekel, passes 
 backwards along the pterygoid canal, to the foramen 
 lacerum anterius, and divides into two branches, a su- 
 perior and an inferior. In its course it gives filaments 
 to the sphenoidal sinuses (1), to the superior and poste- 
 rior part of the pharynx (2), and small twigs to the pos- 
 terior nares (3). The superior branch (nervus petrostts 
 sugerficialisj (4) enters the hiatus Fallopii, and divides- 
 
296 
 
 into two filaments, a superior and an inferior; the 
 former joins the portio dura of the seventh pair of 
 nerves, in the aquaduct of Fallopius, and form a little 
 ganglion, from which is sent off a small twig, which 
 accompanies the portio dura along that canal, and even- 
 tually leaves the cavity of the tympanum, by the 
 fissura Glasseri, under the name of corda tympani, the 
 inferior filament descends along the promontory of the 
 tympanum, and unites with the carotid plexus, with 
 the glosso-pharyngeal plexus, by means of the nerve of 
 Jacobson, and with the superior cervical ganglion of 
 the great sympathetic nerve. The inferior branch of 
 the vidian nerve (nervus petrosus inferior) (5) passes 
 into the carotid canal, joins the cavernous, superior 
 ganglion of the great sympathetic, and sixth pair of 
 nerves. 
 
 GANGLION MEKELIL 
 
 First Branch, (A) 
 
 Nervus anastomoticus superior -joins the superior 
 maxillary nerve. 
 
 Second Branch, (B) 
 
 Nervus palatinus gives Nervus palatinus major 
 off Nervi palatini minores 
 
 Nervi nasales posteriores, 
 medii, et inferiores 
 
 Third Branch, (C) 
 Nervus spheno-palatinus Nervi nasales medii 
 
 gives off Nervi nasales posteriores 
 
 Nervi nasales anteriores 
 
 Fourth Branch, (D) 
 
 Nervus vidianus gives off (1) Nervi sphenoidales 
 
 (2) Nervus pharyngeus of 
 
 Bock 
 
 (3) Nervi nasales posteriores 
 
 et superiores 
 
 (4) Nervus petrosus super- 
 ficialis 
 
 Corda tympani 
 
 (5) Nervus. petrosus inferior 
 
297 
 THE CAVERNOUS GANGLION 
 
 The Cavernous Ganglion is placed within the caver- 
 nous sinus, situated on the outer side of the internal 
 carotid artery ; it communicates with the opthalmic 
 ganglion, with the superior cervical, with the opthalmic 
 and sixth pair of nerves. 
 
 THE NASO-PALATINE GANGLION. 
 
 The Naso-palatine Ganglion was discovered byClo- 
 quet, is placed in the anterior palatine foramen, of 
 remarkable firm texture, of an ovoid shape, and is joined 
 by the two naso-palatine branches, and by the palate 
 nerves. 
 
 THE SUB-MAXILLARY GANGLION. 
 
 The Slib-maxillary Ganglion is formed beneatli the 
 base of the jaw, on the sub-maxillary gland, by the 
 corda tympani, and lingual nerve ; its filaments accom- 
 panies the glandular branches of the facial artery. A 
 small ganglion has been described by Ribes, as situated 
 on the branch of communication of the anterior cerebral 
 arteries, and another on the superficial temporal artery. 
 
 OF THE CERVICAL PORTION AND CER- 
 VICAL GANGLIA. 
 
 The continued trunk* of the great sympathetic, ex- 
 tends from the base of the cranium, to the upper part of 
 the thorax, in front of the rectus capitis anticus major, 
 behind the carotid sheath, and presents three ganglions, 
 superior, middle, and inferior. 
 
 * I adopt the word trunk, in order to facilitate our description of the course 
 and situation oi the ganglia. 
 
The Superior Ganglion (ganglion cervicale magnum, 
 ganglion olivare) is of remarkable size, of an ovoid 
 shape, of an olive tint, extending from the posterior 
 opening of the carotid canal, to the transverse process 
 of the third cervical vertebrae ; it lies upon the rectus 
 capitis anticus major, behind the internal carotid artery, 
 internal jugular vein, par vagum, and ninth pair of 
 nerves, and gives off superior, inferior, external, internal, 
 and anterior branches. 
 
 The superior branches ascend, enter the carotid 
 canal, and form a plexus upon the artery, from thence 
 filaments proceed, which anastomose with the sixth pair, 
 with the inferior branch of the vidian, with the nasal 
 branch of the opthalmic, and with a filament from the 
 glosso-pharyngeal nerve ; numerous filaments also ac- 
 company the carotid artery and its divisions ; by these 
 branches communication is established between the op- 
 thalmic, spheno-palatine, cavernous, Ribes's ganglia, the 
 retina, and the iris. 
 
 The inferior branch descends behind the carotid 
 artery, in front of the rectus capitis anticus, and joins 
 the middle ganglion ; in its course it gives off filaments 
 to the superficial cardiac nerve, to the pharynx, larynx, 
 thyroid gland, and communicates with the laryngeal 
 nerve. 
 
 The external branches are three or four in number ; 
 they cross the rectus capitis anticus major, communicate 
 with the three superior cervical nerves, and are distri- 
 buted to the adjacent muscles. 
 
 The internal branches vary in number, are remark- 
 ably small; they are distributed to the larynx, pharynx, 
 and freely unite with the pneumo-gastric, glosso-pha- 
 ryngeal nerves, and assist in forming the pharyngeal 
 plexus. 
 
 The anterior branches are numerous, of a red colour, 
 and soft consistence, and have been termed nervi 
 molles. They anastomose with the nervus vagus, facial, 
 ninth pair of nerves, and glosso-pharyngeal nerves, 
 and form a plexus around the common carotid, from 
 whence filaments proceed, which accompany in a radiated 
 direction all the branches from the internal carotid 
 arterv; one branch descends, the superficial cardiac 
 
nerve,, on the outer side of the common carotid, and 
 communicates with the descendens noni, and recurrent 
 laryngeal nerves. 
 
 The middle ganglion, (ganglion cervicale medium, 
 ganglion thyroideum) is frequently wanting; when 
 present it is placed on the longus colti, over the fifth or 
 sixth cervical vertebrae; the superior filaments from this 
 ganglion ascend and join the superior cervical ganglion; 
 the inferior descend, and are united to the infer ganglion; 
 the external filaments cross the scaleni muscles, and 
 anastomose with the phrenic, fourth, fifth, and sixth 
 cervical nerves; the internal filaments form, on the thy- 
 roideal artery, the thyroideal plexus, and are connected 
 with the recurrent lacryngeal nerve; the anterior fila- 
 ments give off the middle cardiac nerve, and also unite 
 with the superficial cardiac. 
 
 The inferior (ganglion cervicale inferius) is placed 
 on the transverse process of the seventh cervical vertebra, 
 on the neck of the first rib, behind and below the ver- 
 tebral artery ; the superior Jilaments join the middle 
 cervical ganglion, and form arond the vertebral artery 
 the vertebral plexus, which gives off twigs correspond- 
 ing to the distribution of that vessel; the inferior Jila- 
 ments are united to the first thoracic ganglion ; the 
 external filaments are distributed to the scaleni, and 
 communicate with the three last cervical and first dorsal 
 nerves; the internal filaments are numerous, supply the 
 longus colli, anastomose with the recurrent laryngeal, 
 and assist in forming the pulmonary plexus ; the ante- 
 rior filaments constitute the inferior cardiac nerves. 
 
 OF THE CARDIAC NERVES. 
 
 The Cardiac Nerves are three in number, but are 
 not similar in arrangement on both sides; they are 
 united to the cardiac ganglion. The superior cardiac 
 nerve is formed by four or five branches from the supe- 
 rior cervical ganglion; it descends along the outer 
 margin of the common carotid on the right side, enters 
 the chest behind the subclavian vein, and joins the mid- 
 dle cardiac nerve ; on the left side at the lower part it 
 
300 
 
 descends between the common carotid and subclavian 
 artery, and unites with the inferior cardiac nerve and 
 cardiac ganglion. Both these nerves anastomose with 
 the carotid, and inferior thyroideal plexus, with the 
 pneumo-gastric, ninth pair, and recurrent laryngeal 
 nerves. The middle cardiac nerve, on the right side, 
 commences by numerous filaments from the middle 
 cervical ganglion; they unite and form one trunk, 
 which descends on the outer side of the common carotid 
 in front of the subclavian artery, and terminates behind 
 the aorta in the cardiac ganglion. On the left side the 
 middle cardiac is wanting. The inferior cardiac nerve 
 arises on the right side, from the inferior cervical gang- 
 lion it descends behind the subclavian, in front of the 
 aorta, and joins the anterior conorary plexus-, on the 
 left side it is formed by a filament from the middle 
 and inferior cervical ganglion, and joins the cardiac 
 ganglion. 
 
 THE CARDIAC GANGLION, OR PLEXUS. 
 
 The Cardiac Ganglion is situated between the arch 
 of the aorta and division of the trachea ; it presents the 
 appearance of a soft pellucid ganglion, of irregular 
 shape of a grey colour, and is principally formed by the 
 right middle and left inferior cardiac nerves. Filaments 
 of the left superior and right inferior cardiac also join 
 the plexus. It gives off anterior branches, distributed 
 to the anterior parietiesof the aorta; posterior Jilaments 
 to the pulmonary and sesophageal plexuses; inferior 
 filaments, which are numerous, of pulpy gelatinous 
 structure, and are distributed to the aorta and pulmo- 
 nary vessels, freely anastomosing with the nervus vagus. 
 
 From these filaments are derived the anterior and 
 posterior coronary plexus ; the anterior filaments pass 
 in front of the aorta, pulmonary artery, and descending 
 vena cava, to the base of the heart, and uniting with 
 the right inferior cardiac nerve, accompany the ante- 
 rior coronary artery through all its divisions, constitut- 
 ing the anterior coronary plexus, and follow the division 
 of that artery through the substance of the heart. 
 
301 
 Right side. 
 
 Ramus cardiacus superior, joins the middle cardiac 
 branch. 
 
 Ramus cardiacus medius, joins the cardiac ganglion. 
 
 Ramus cardiacus inferior, joins the anterior coronary 
 plexus. 
 
 Left side, 
 
 Ramus cardiacus superior, joins the inferior cardiac 
 and cardiac ganglion. 
 
 Ramus cardiacus medius, wanting. 
 
 Ramus cardiacus inferior, unites with a filament from 
 the middle ganglion, and joins the cardiac ganglion. 
 
 OF THE THORACIC PORTION AND 
 GANGLIA. 
 
 The thoracic portion of the Trunk extends from the 
 first rib to the diaphragm, presents twelve small ganglia 
 of triangular, shape, united to each other by branches 
 so as to form a continued nervous trunk; they are 
 placed behind the pleura, in front of the heads of the 
 ribs ; the first thoracic ganglion is the largest. They 
 give off external and internal branches the former are 
 united with the anterior filaments of the dorsal nerves, 
 the latter pass inwards over the vertebral column within 
 the posterior mediastinum, and join the pulmonary and 
 sesophageal plexus. Bichat and Chaussier have pointed 
 out one branch in particular, coming off from the tenth 
 ganglion, and, descending with the aorta, enters the 
 abdomen to terminate in the cseliac plexus. From the 
 inner side of the inferior ganglia are given off the 
 splanchnic nerves. 
 
 THE GREATER SPLANCHNIC NERVE. 
 
 The greater Splanchnic Nerve arises by distinct 
 branches from the sixth, seventh, eighth, ninth, and 
 
 2D 
 
302 
 
 tenth ganglia, they unite on the body of the tenth dorsal 
 vertebra, and form a single trunk which descends, and 
 enters the abdomen between the pillars of the diaphragm 
 and joins the caeliac ganglion. 
 
 THE SMALLER SPLANCHNIC NERVE. 
 
 The smaller Splanchnic Nerve is composed of two 
 branches, coming off from the tenth and eleventh tho- 
 racic ganglia, which unite on the body of the twelfth 
 dorsal vertebra, enter the abdomen between the pillars 
 of the diaphragm, external to the greater nerve, the 
 trunk thus formed divides into two filaments, commu- 
 nicating with the preceding nerve, with the solar plexus, 
 and terminates in the renal plexus. 
 
 SEMILUNAR GANGLION. 
 
 The Semilunar Ganglions have been considered the 
 centre of the ganglionic system, as the largest in the 
 whole body; in shape irregular, flat, concave above, 
 convex below ; they lie upon the crura of the diaphragm, 
 aorta, above and behind the supra renal capsule, and on 
 either side the caeliac axis. They communicate freely 
 with each other, by numerous filaments, and form with 
 branches from the nervus vagus an intricate plexus, the 
 solar plexus, interspersed with numerous small ganglia. 
 
 SOLAR PLEXUS. 
 
 The Solar Plexus is situated behind the stomach, 
 above the pancreas, in front of the aorta, and pillars of 
 the diaphragm ; it surrounds the caeliac axis, and gives 
 off the following secondary plexuses, viz. (1) The phre- 
 nic plexus which accompanies the diaphragmatic arteries, 
 and is distributed to the diaphragm, and anastomoses 
 with the phrenic nerves. (2) The cceliac plexus which 
 
303 
 
 embraces the trunk of the caeliac artery, and sends off 
 filaments corresponding in their distribution to the di- 
 visions of that artery, viz. coronary plexus, which ac- 
 companies the coronary artery along the smaller curva- 
 ture of the stomach, and unites with the pneumo-gastric 
 nerves, and is distributed to the stomach, and also to the 
 liver. The anterior hepatic plexus which is much 
 larger, and passes to the sulcus transversus of the liver, 
 is distributed to the liver, pancreas, and duodenum, and 
 unites with filaments from the right pneumo-gastric 
 nerve. Lastly, the splenic plexus which proceeds to the 
 spleen supplies that viscus, and the pancreas and sto- 
 mach, and anastomoses with the left pneumo-gastric 
 nerve. The posterior hepatic plexus is derived from 
 the right semilunar ganglion, and follows the course of 
 the ascending vena cava. Next, (3) superior mesenteric 
 plexus, which descends between the pancreas and trans- 
 verse portion of the duodenum, between the layers of 
 the mesentery, and accompanies the branches of the 
 superior mesenteric artery, to the small intestines,, 
 caecum, ascending and transverse colon. (4) Inferior 
 mesenteric plexus, which might be considered as conti- 
 nuous with the superior; it passes in front of the aorta, 
 and is joined by filaments from the renal, spermatic 
 plexus, and lumbar ganglia; it divides into branches 
 to the descending and sigmoid flexure of the colon, to 
 the rectum, communicating with the hypogastric plexus, 
 and into filaments distributed to the hypogastric vessels, 
 some of which may be traced in company with the ex- 
 ternal iliac artery, as far as the thigh: (5) renal plexus, 
 which receives branches from the semilunar ganglions, 
 from the small splanchnic nerves, from the inferior 
 mesenteric plexus, from the lumbar ganglia, and is 
 distributed to the kidney: (6) the spermatic plexus, 
 which follows the course of the spermatic artery, and 
 in the male is distributed to the testis, in the female to 
 the ovary all these plexuses are interspersed with 
 numerous small ganglia. 
 
304 
 
 Semilunar ganglion gives off the solar plexus. 
 Solar plexus gives off the following plexuses : - 
 (1) Phrenic plexus 
 
 (3) Superior mesenteric 
 
 plexus 
 
 (4) Inferior mesenteric 
 
 plexus 
 
 (5) Renal plexus 
 
 (6) Spermatic plexus 
 
 LUMBAR PORTION & LUMBAR GANGLION. 
 
 The Lumbar Portion of the Trunk extends from the 
 Kgamentum arcuatum to the base of the sacrum; it is 
 situated on the lateral and anterior part of the bodies of 
 the lumbar vertebrae ; on the right side behind the vena 
 cava ; on the left behind the aorta, and offers four or 
 five ganglia. They communicate with each other by 
 numerous filaments, with the anterior branches of the 
 lumbar nerves, and form a plexus around the aorta, the 
 aortic plexus, from which filaments precede to the infe- 
 rior mesenteric and hypogastric plexuses. 
 
 THE SACRAL PORTION AND SACRAL 
 GANGLIA. 
 
 The Sacral Portion of the Trunk lies upon the ante- 
 rior surface of the sacrum, and presents four ganglia ; 
 at the inferior part of the sacrum the two nerves termi- 
 nate, unite, and form an arch the convexity towards 
 the os coccygis. The ganglia are joined to each other, 
 and with the anterior branches of the sacral nerves by 
 numerous filaments, and also assist in forming the hypo- 
 gastric plexuses 
 
305 
 THE HYPOGASTRIC PLEXUS. 
 
 The Hypogastric Plexus is placed between the sacrum 
 and rectum; it receives filaments from the aortic, infe^ 
 rior mesenteric, and sciatic plexuses, and is distributed 
 to the rectum and its muscles, to the bladder, vesiculae 
 seminales in the male, to the uterus and the vagina in 
 the female. 
 
 From the distribution of this important system we 
 can readily explain the great sympathy which exists 
 between every part of the wonderful machine th$ 
 human frame. 
 
PLATE I, 
 
 SPINAL NERVE. 
 
 ( From Bell.) 
 
 FIGURE I. 
 
 1. Medulla spinalis 
 
 2. Posterior root and ganglion for sensibility 
 
 3. Anterior root for motion 
 
 4. Compound nervous trunk, endowed with the function 
 
 of motion and sensation 
 
 RESPIRATORY NERVES. 
 FIGURE II. 
 
 5. Tractus respiratorius 
 
 1 & 2. Glosso-pharyngeal nerve (nervus glosso-pharyn- 
 geus respiratorius) 
 
 3. Nervus vagus (nervvs pneumo-gastricus respirato- 
 
 rius) 
 
 4. Spinal accessory nerve (nervus trachelo dorsalis respi* 
 
 ratorius). 
 
 6. Sub-occipital nerve, or first cervical, arising by dou- 
 
 ble roots, possessing ganglia, and endowed with 
 the double function of sensation and motion 
 
 7- Second cervical nerve. 
 
 A. Spinal ganglion 
 
 A. Spinal ganglion 
 
308 
 PLATE II. 
 
 RESPIRATORY NERVES. 
 
 (From Bell} 
 
 A. Sterno-cleido-mastoideus 
 JB. Trapezius 
 c. Scapula 
 . Clavicle 
 
 E. E. Serratus magnus 
 
 F. Lower surface of the diaphragm 
 
 G. Upper surface of the diaphragm 
 
 1. Portio dura of the seventh pair, (respiratory nerve of 
 
 the face) (nervus respiratoriusfaciei) 
 
 2. Glosso-pharyngeal nerve, (respiratory nerve of the 
 
 tongue and pharynx,) (nervus respiratorius glos- 
 so-pharyngeus} 
 
 3. Superior respiratory nerve 
 
 4. Phrenic nerve (nervus respiratorius into-thoracicus) 
 
 5. External respiratory nerve, (nervus respiratorius 
 
 exto-thoracicus ) 
 
 6 & 7 Nervus vagus (nervus respiratorius pneumo- 
 gastricus} 
 
 8. Superior laryngeal nerve, from the nervus vagus 
 
 9. Recurrent laryngeal nerve, from the nervus vagus. 
 
 PLATE III. 
 
 FIFTH PAIR. 
 
 (From Lauth.) 
 
 1. Trunk of the fifth pair 
 
 2. Ganglion, formed by posterior filaments 
 
 3. Anterior filaments uniting with the posterior, to 
 
 form the inferior maxillary nerve. 
 
 4. The sixth pair of nerves with its carotid branch 
 
309 
 
 5. Opthalmic nerve (first division of the fifth) 
 
 6. Mekel's ganglion, or spheno-palatine 
 
 7. Spheno-palatine nerves 
 
 8. Vidian nerve giving off superior petrosal branch 
 
 and inferior petrosal, joining the carotid ganglion 
 
 9. Posterior dental nerves 
 
 10. Posterior palatine nerves 
 
 11. Malar filament 
 
 12. Superior maxillary nerve, continued to form the 
 
 infra orbital nerve, (2nd. division of the fifth) 
 
 13. Orbital branch 
 
 14. Superior cervical ganglion of the great sympathetic 
 
 15. Portio dura, or facial nerve 
 
 16. Glosso-pharyngeal nerve 
 
 17. Glosso-pharyngeal ganglion 
 
 18. Carotid artery 
 
 19. Ramus anastomoticus of Jacobson, from the glosso- 
 
 pharyngeal ganglion. 
 
 PLATE IV. 
 
 FIFTH PAIR OF NERVES. 
 
 (From Cloquet.) 
 
 1. Trunk of fifth pair of nerves 
 
 2. Opthalmic nerve (first division of the fifth pair of 
 
 nerves) 
 
 3. Superior maxillary nerve (second division of the 
 
 fifth) 
 
 4. Inferior maxillary nerve (third division of the fifth) 
 
 5. Frontal branch 
 
 6. Ethmoidal and nasal branch 
 7- Lacrymal branch 
 
 8. Trunk of the superior maxillary nerve, above the 
 
 pterygo-maxillary fossa 
 
 9. Trunk of the same nerve, in the infra orbital canal 
 
 10. Temporal filament 
 
 11. Malar filaments (from second division) 
 
 12. Superior dental branches 
 
 13. Posterior dental branches 
 
310 
 
 14. Mekel's ganglion, with vidian nerve passing back- 
 
 wards, and palatine nerves descending in the 
 pterygo-maxillary fossa 
 
 15. Filaments from Mekel's ganglion, to the superior 
 
 maxillary nerve 
 
 16. Superior branch from the inferior maxillary nerve 
 
 (third division of the fifth) 
 
 17. Branch to the buccinator muscle 
 
 18. Inferior maxillary nerve 
 
 19. Corda tympani 
 
 20. Auricular branch 
 
 21. and 22. Lingual nerve 
 
 23. Inferior dental nerve 
 
 24. Submental branch 
 
 25. Submaxillary plexus 
 
 26. Mylo-hyoid branch 
 
 PLATE V. 
 
 (From Lauth.) 
 
 1. The liver. 
 
 2. The stomach 
 
 3. Duodenum 
 
 4. Pancreas 
 
 5. Transverse arch of the colon 
 
 6. Small intestines 
 
 7. Bladder 
 
 8. Uterus 
 
 9. Rectum 
 
 10. Great omentum (epiploon gastro-colique) 
 
 11. Little omentum (epiploon gastro-hepatique) 
 
 12. Messentery 
 
ERRATA. 
 
 PAGB 
 2 pro os frontis, lege ossa frontis. 
 
 4 pro depression, lege and eminence (tuber superciliare). 
 
 5 ad connexions of os frontis, adde os ethmbideum. 
 
 7 ad foramina lacera basis cranii, adde accessory nerves. 
 
 9 and 24 pro eustachii, et glasseri, lege Eustachii et GlasserL 
 
 14 pro quartuor, lege quatuor. 
 
 15 pro orbitalia, lege orbitalis. 
 
 21 pro iiiL iv. lege iv. v. et adde infra surround the lacrymal bones 
 
 22 pro orbitral, lege orbital pro principle, lege principal 
 
 23 pro Follopii, lege Fallopii pro cranl, lege cranii. 
 150 pro vertebrae, lege vertebra. 
 
 158 pro tri-femoro-retularis, lege tri-femoro-rotularis. 
 160 pro gracialis, lege gracilis. 
 
 166 pro tendo Achilles, lege tendo Achillis. 
 
 167 pro tibio calcaneous, lege tibio calcaneus. 
 
 177 pro relax, ^relaxed. 
 
 178 pro cura, lege crura. 
 
 180 pro attolens, lege attollens. 
 
 185 pro to increase, lege increase pro dori, lege dorsi 
 
 193 and 199 pro eight pair, lege eighth pair. 
 
 194 pro thyraideal, lege thyroideal. 
 
 196 pro arteria glandulares, lege arteria glandularis. 
 202 pro meduis, legi medius. 
 204 pro inferieme, lege inferieure. 
 
 216 pro pericardic, lege pericardiac. 
 
 217 pro artery, lege arteria. 
 
 218 pro sphenic, lege splenic. 
 
 219 pro ileo-colic, lege ilio-colica. 
 
 220 pro albriginea, lege albuginea. 
 226 pro cural, lege crural nerve. 
 229 pro perforates, lege perforantes. 
 
 252 pro thoracica, lege thoracici pro cieritious, lege cineritious. 
 
 275 pro spinate, lege spinati. 
 
 292 pro nervi intercostalis, lege nervi intercostales. 
 
 296 pro aqua, lege aquse .pro form, lege forms pro accompanies, 
 
 lege accompany. 
 infer, 
 
 299 pro infer, lege inferior. 
 
 J. C. Barlow, Printer, Bennetfs Hill, Birmingham. 
 

r-v 
 


i